Home

High Performance Model QCPU(Q Mode)User`s Manual(Function

1. DeviceLabel D0 z Display 16 bit integer x pee z Point Start End Comment F3 x Sea Device name o 2 3 4 5 6 7 Character string x 2 DO 0 o o o oO oO oO oj oo fA 3 D8 o o 0 o oO 0 0 oO 4 D16 o o o o o 0 0 0 5 D24 0 oO o o 0 0 oO 0 6 D32 0 o o o oO 0 0 0 D40 0 oO o o o 0 oO oO D48 0 oO 0 oO oO 0 oO 0 8 D56 0 oO 0 oO 0 0 0 0 2 D64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 D72 a a a a a a a a ll Deo a a a a o o o o 12 pes of of of of of of of o 13 D96 0 oO 0 o o 0 0 o 14 D104 o o oO 0 0 0 0 0 LS D112 o 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 16 D120 a a a a o o o o Setting method Device memory registration diversion D128 o o o 0 o 0 0 0 Stat End Device memory diversion ok A S i 2 z z z z No of points Start Register to device memory Cancel pes S a O E E D160 0 oO 0 oO 0 0 0 0 D168 oO 0 oO 0 0 0 0 0 c Inthe PLC file settings in the PLC parameter setting designate the name of the file where the device initial value data is to be stored PLC file screen Qn H Parameter ame PLC system PLCfie PLCRAS Device Program Boot fie SFC 170 assignment File register Device initial value Not used E Not usec C Use the same file name as the program pehare Use the same file name as
2. Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device ZNWR instruction LWTP instruction write instruction has been received SM1202 for ACPU OFF Notaccepted e Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNWR ON Accepted 2 reception for instruction master station Use the RST instruction to reset ZNWR instruction Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device LWTP instruction OFF Not leted write instruction execution is complete SM1203 ON ect eig e Used as a condition contact to reset M9202 and M9203 completion for et after the ZNWR instruction is complete master station Use the RST instruction to reset ZNRD instruction SM1204 NA OFF Not completed On indicates that the ZNRD instruction is complete at the or ON End local station reception for local station ZNWR instruction LRDP instruction OFF N Not completed SM1205 for ACPU ON End recep tion for ocal station Host station link OFF Normal Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of SM1206 i parameter error ON Abnormal the host is valid On indicates that the ZNWR instruction is complete at the local station Link parameter oe check results Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of SM1207 station in tier three in a thre
3. Hotirani Intelligent functional module detailed setting P P m P 1 0 assignment l l Enor tme HAV enor T iB Slot Type Model name output time PLC acai 140 Assignment mode Spat ie mode J so Tvog Model name Points Statsy la cach se ofPLc PLC x x x lo ric ric y z mji Sanana 1 0 0 Input z m F 1 oo finput v T6points_ v 2 fien 7 v Jims _2_1 1 v v Detailed setting 3 20 2 g Ems 3 r2 x x 4 3 3 Poms La faea g z 5 fata z 70ms 5 fata z x 6 565 7 x S e 55 X G _ 7 6 6 Lz ers x 8 7 7 X If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically ae It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way 11 110 10 my Standard setting 12 411 11 h z B del Pi del Increase cable Point 4 Base mode 13 12 12 he x ase model name Power model name G ints Pe 14 1313 gt er C Detail 15 14 14 Lr X End setu Cancel Z _Bfation ml ea he 12 fixation Increase5 hai men Read PLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End setup Cancel 3 Reactions a Higher input response time may result in response to inputs being influenced by noise Set the desired input response time by taking into consideration the operating environment of an input module in use b No change can be made to the input response time of an AnS Series compatib
4. Program A 7 7 E 3 E Common pointer Subroutine program P1000 call a A SM400 MO 0 gt P1000 MOV K4x0 RO Always z ON Mo MOV K4X20 RO Program B 7 RET M10 i P1000 call 0 CALLP P1000 b The use of sub routine call instructions with arguments simplifies the creation of sub routine programs which are called several times Argument designation Sub touting progrant Destination data MO a ee PO call SM400 Mo source data o H car Po wo k4xo Ro Pot H MOV FDO FD2 ee Argument from FD2 ae gt Argument to FD1 MO gt Argument to FDO Mov FD1 FD2 Subroutine program designation Argument designation RET H M10 100 CALLP PO W10 K4X10 R10 H SE Argument from FD2 Argument to FD1 gt Argument to FDO For details regarding the argument input output condition refer to Section 10 3 1 1 11 1 11 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM This section describes the system configuration of the High Performance model QCPU cautions on use of the system and configured equipment 2 1 System Configuration The outline of the equipment configuration configuration with peripheral devices and 2 system configuration in the High Performance model QCPU system is described below 1 Equipment configuration in High Performance model QCPU system l Memory card
5. D1242 Station number Stores station D1243 information for host Allows a local station to confirm its own station number station number 0 to 64 Number of link Stores number of D9244 D1244 i A Indicates the number of slave stations in one loop device stations slave stations Nuimber of times Stores Stores the number of times the following transmission en A errors have been detected CRC OVER AB IF D9245 SD1245 communications cumulative total i i Count is made to a maximum of FFFFH RESET to return errors detected of receive errors the count to 0 App 54 App 54 D9235 D9236 D9237 D9238 D9239 D9240 D9241 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification Corresponding CPU Stores conditions Stores the local station number which is in STOP or PAUSE D1248 for up to numbers 1 mode Device Bit number 15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bo SD1248 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 SD1249 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 SD1250 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33 SD1251 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 D9249 The bit corresponding to the station number which is i
6. Because the factor number 2 is not set the ERR LED remains off even if the fuse shutoff is detected In this case even if another error with the factor number 2 I O module verify error or intelligent function module verify error is detected the ERR LED remains off Even if the LED is set to be turned off error code storage is performed for SMO diagnosis error flag on SM1 self diagnosis flag on and SDO CPU diagnosis error register 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE 1 Description of intelligent function modules special function modules High Performance model QCPU allows the use of the Q series compatible intelligent function modules and the AnS series compatible special function modules The intelligent function module special function module is a module that allows High Performance model QCPU to process analog values or high speed pulses which cannot be processed with I O modules For example an analog value is converted into a digital value with the analog digital conversion module one of the intelligent function modules before being used 2 Communication with intelligent function modules special function modules The intelligent function module special function module is equipped with memory buffer memory to store the data received from or output to ext
7. Increase cable jz Base mode Base model name Power model name Points name Auto Z C Detail z 8 fixation Increase3 Increased 2 12 fixation Increase5 l l BA PS Read PLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End setup Cancel I O number assignment after the I O assignment with GX Developer Power supply module Input module Input module N Input module co Input module Output module gt Output module Output module o Output module N oe N oe N oe N oe N oe N points points points points points points points points Q68B joo i oo oo oo oo oo oo 5 8 Checking the I O Numbers X00 X20 X40 X200 Y70 Y90 YBO YDO 5 X1F X3F X5F X21F Y8F YAF YCF YEF wo A ol Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Output module Output module oe N ao N oo O w D w D ke o 5 amp Output module n ke O w 5 N 2 n points points 110 130 points points points FO 150 170 Y180 Y1A0 Y1C0 10F 12F 14F 16F 17F Y19F Y1BF Y1DF System monitor of GX Developer allows the check of the installed modules of High Performance model QCPU and their I O numbers For system monitor refer to Section 7 18 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL
8. Program A Device memory Mo Internal relay 4 y12 MO ON OFF l Mo ON OFF data Program B Mo ______ lt Y11 i l MO ON OFF data b When executing multiple programs the shared range for all programs and the independent range for each program must be designated in advance Example Internal relay Mo Shared by all programs Used in program A The range of use must be designated for each program Used in program B Used in program C NSO 10 63 10 63 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Local devices a Local devices are devices which are used independently by the programs The use of local devices permits programming of multiple independent execution programs without regard to other programs However local devices data can be stored in the standard RAM and the memory card High Performance model QCPU If local devices are designated as M7000 or later they can be used pendently in programs independently executing M7000 or later l Program A Memory card M7000 For program A ___ ___ lt Y12 Internal relay L i M7000 ON OFF l M7000 ON OFF data E i arire SOSE Bt od l l Program B For program B Bee ee eS Pe a M7000 Internal relay m v j Mzooo ON OFF i i l M7000 ON OFF data ae oe iw raO east St Gat Nib St oh er in coco J
9. e The sort instruction is used to designate whether data OFF Ascending order r i SM703 Sort order a should be sorted in ascending order or in descending ON Descending order order Non match found All match S Instruction execution Goes ON when all data conditions have been met for the Block comparison BKCMP instruction Selection of real number When SM707 is OFF real number instructions are processed at high speed instruction When it is ON real number instructions are processed processing type with high accuracy SHIK nstruction Conditions priority Remains as originally set when OFF R priority ranking Instruction flag Pattern priority CHK priorities updated when ON execution Speed oriented Accuracy oriented Other than during divided processing During divided processing Divided transmission status In processing of AD57 S1 goes ON when screen is split for transfer and goes OFF when split processing is completed Instruction execution Transmission processing selection Batch transmission Divided transmission In processing of AD57 S1 goes ON when canvas screen is divided for transfer instruction execution Communication request to remote terminal module enabled Communication request to remote terminal module disabled Communication request registration area BUSY signal Used to determine whether communication
10. Jsettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check End Cancel a When Load input condition outside of group has been set 1 Loads ON OFF data from input modules and intelligent function modules being controlled by other machines with the END process s input refresh function 2 Input X loading is performed for the modules mounted onto the following additional base unit slots I O allocation type Mounted module Input module None i Intelligent function module a a inoue linputmodule module eo ees npu 17 A Output module Loads OFF data Intelli Intelligent function module eoo e 3 Itis possible to load ON OFF data from input modules and intelligent function modules with direct access input 4 Remote station input such as vacant slots MELSECNET H and CC Link cannot be loaded Use automatic refresh of device data to use the ON OFF input data for MELSECNET H CC Link and other remote stations in other machines b When Do not load input condition outside of group has been set It is not possible to loads ON OFF data from input modules and intelligent function modules being controlled by other machines remains at OFF 17 2 17 2 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES MELSEC Q 2 Loading output Y The Out of group input output settings setting in the PLC paramet
11. Five device types can be used as local devices internal relays M relays V timers T ST counters C and data registers D Programs used as local devices exchange the local device file data stored in the memory card with the data in the device memory of High Performance model QCPU The scan time is therefore extended by this data exchange time Program A Program B Program C Sequence program x Reset Saved Reset Saved Reset Local device Local device Local device For For For program A program A program A For For For program B program B program B For For For program C program C program C The local device may not be designated with some instructions Refer to the allowable device in the programming manual of each instruction for details 1 See Section 10 1 2 item 2 for details regarding the number of words for local devices 10 64 10 64 10 DEVICES Sequence program 10 65 MELSEC Q d Local device designation MO 1 In order to use the above devices as local devices a local device range of use setting must be designated in the device settings in the PLC parameter setting Note that the range designated for local devices applies in all programs and cannot be changed for individual programs For example if the local device range is designated as MO to M100 this ra
12. Product Inf List g r Status im Module system error E Module error O Module warning Start monitor Stop monitor Close a b c d Installed status Enables the controlling CPU the model an07 d the number of modules mounted onto the selected base unit to be confirmed Not installed will be displayed for slots in which modules have not been mounted When slots have been set as Empty with the PLC parameter s I O allocation setting the module s model will not be displayed when if a module has been mounted Operation status Enables the I O number the module type and the number of modules mounted for each of the slots on the selected base unit to be confirmed If the operation status shows 0 empty points and an allocation error is displayed it means that the PLC parameter s I O allocation and the actual status are different In this event align the PLC parameter s I O allocation with the actual status by allocating an I O Base Enables the status of the modules mounted onto the base unit in use to be confirmed The status will be displayed in the unit column when an error has occurred for even one of the modules PC diagnostics This function is used to confirm the status of the High Performance model QCPU and errors 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q e Module s detailed information This function is used to confirm the detailed information for selected modules Refer to the instruction
13. xX PLC No 1 c Not possible to write in the buffer memory with the TO command and UD GO x Not possible to write in the buffer memory with the TO command and UL GO 17 4 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES MELSEC Q 5 Accessing MELSECNET H modules Only control PLCs can access MELSECNET H modules Link direct devices cannot be used in MELSECNET H modules being controlled by other machines An OPERATION ERROR error code 4102 will be triggered if a program that uses link direct devices is used in MELSECNET H modules being controlled by other machines 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPUs MELSEC Q 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPUs 18 1 Concept behind CPU Scanning Time 18 1 The concept behind multiple PLC system scanning time is the same as the single CPU system Refer to Section 11 1 for details of the scan time concept This chapter provides explanations on the factors to be added to the scan time calculated as explained in Section 11 1 and the method of calculating processing time when configuring multiple PLC systems 1 W O refresh time Input refresh time is calculated in accordance with the equation explained in Section 11 1 The I O refresh time for the following values only are prolonged when bus access overlaps with other machines input points
14. 1 Scan Initial execution type program n i 4 END processing 5 l Scan execution I type program l A L Executed by program setting order 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 Initial scan time a This is the execution time period for initial execution type programs If multiple initial execution type programs are used this is the execution time period in which all those programs are executed When an interrupt program fixed cycle execution type program is executed while an initial execution type program is running the execution time of the interrupt program fixed cycle execution type program will be added to the initial execution type program b The High Performance model QCPU measures the initial scan time and stores the result in special registers SD522 SD523 1 The initial scan time can therefore be checked by monitoring the SD522 and SD523 special registers sp522 s0523 fee 2 es less than 1 ms initial scan time unit ws gt Stores the initial scan time in 1 ms units If the SD522 value is 3 and the SD523 value is 400 the initial scan time is 3 4 ms 1 The accuracy of the initial scan time stored at the special registers is 0 1 ms The initial scan time count will continue even if a watchdog time reset instruction WDT is executed at the sequence program 5 Initial execution monitor time a
15. 4 Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4321 0 Bit number Error Error common 0 0 to Of O gt K gt common n R information SFC block designation present information Not used 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 Switch cause Number Meaning Switch cause 0 automatic switch 1 manual switch Switch direction 0 standby system to control system 1 control system to standby system Tracking flag 5 Vacant 5 Tracking flag contents Shows whether or not the tracking data is valid 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number 0 0 to O O0 ________ Invalid work data Not used invalid 0 valid 1 System data SFC active step information invalid 0 valid 1 Switching cause invalid 0 valid 1 App 25 App 25 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU CPU DoC IT Individual information corresponding to error codes SD0 is stored here File name Drive name Example Number Meaning ABCDERGH IJK SD16 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD17 cele 41H A SD18 File name 44H D 43H C SD19 ASCI
16. Name of ladder registered as a macro Actual sequence program executed at QCPU H gt Do bwi mov po roH lt DO D1 Mov D1 RO 1 With the macro instruction argument device VDO to VD9 can be used in one ladder registered as a macro instruction 2 The GX Developer read mode provides an option to view a program in macro instruction format Choose View Macro Instruction format display to view macro instructions MGLE Online Diagnostics Tools Window He Comment Ctrl F5 Statement Ctrl F Note Ctl F8 Device Label Alt Ctrl F6 Macro instruction format display lt Change of macro instruction display Comment format gt Toolbar v Status bar Zoom gt v Project data list Alt 0 Instruction list Akt F1 Elapsed time 10 60 10 60 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 12 Constants 10 12 1 Decimal constants K 1 Definition Decimal constants are devices which designate decimal data in sequence programs They are designated as Ki settings e g K1234 and are stored in the High Performance model QCPU in binary BIN code See Section 4 8 1 for details regarding binary code 2 Designation range The setting ranges for decimal constants are as follows e For word data 16 bits K 32768 to K32767 e For 2 word data 82 bits K 2147483648 to K2147483647 10 12 2 Hexadecimal constants H 1 Definition Hexadecimal constants are devices wh
17. 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Precautions The precautions for file write during RUN are as follows a The file write during RUN can be executed when any of the following conditions is met A SFC program does not allow writing a batch of files during the RUN status 1 Program memory e When continuous space is available e When space is available 2 Memory card e When space is available b Please note that scan time could be extended as shown below in the table if the file write during RUN is executed Controls are stopped for some time as specified by a value in the table ancPU_ _QnHCPU When continuous space is available in a ee ae ms When space is available in a program memory When space is available in a memory card oe a card ms Please note that scan tame is extended for 1 25 seconds at 30 k step when an ATA card is in use c Please note that no access can be made from an instruction in a sequence program while a batch of files is written with the High Performance model QCPU in the RUN status While the file write during RUN is being executed an instruction to make access to a file is not executed d Ifa program file being executed is written when the High Performance model QCPU is in the RUN status the following will not work properly After the write is complete a rise instruction is executed only when its execution condition is OFF e LDF e ANDF e ORF e MEF e PLF 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7
18. Base model name Power model name Extention cable Bisse mide Auto Detail 12 fixation Jsettings should be set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC settings Default Check End Cancel Intelligent functional module detailed setting x HAW error time PLC 1 0 response Control PLC operation time x mode Error time Model name output mode PLC No 2 PLC No 3 PLC E mpty 19 8 MELSEC Q The multiple PLC settings and I O Assignment Setting data are read and written into the specified project when OK is selected Confirming the multiple PLC settings When the CPU devices are to be amended enter the number of the device after it has been changed Items not marked with the x symbol cannot be amended Confirm the I O Assignment and standard settings on the I O Allocation Window Select Detailed Settings to display the detailed setting window Confirm the control PLC settings 19 8 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 Setup of parameters other than the multiple PLC system settings Set parameters written onto the hard disk or floppy disk En APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDICES AE APPENDIX 1 Special Relay List
19. File name Drive name Time value set Program error location Switch cause for Q4AR only information information x For a multiple PLC system the module number or PLC New categories category code number is stored depending on the error that occurred Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been stored PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 The individual information category codes store the following codes 0 No error 1 Open 2 File name Drive name 3 Time value actually measured 4 Program error location 5 Parameter number 6 Annunciator number 7 Check instruction malfunction number App 23 App 23 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set by Corresponding Corresponding Explanation CPU Common information corresponding to the error codes SD0 is stored here The following four types of information are stored here Slot No Number Meaning SD5 Slot No PLC No Base No 1 2 SD6 VO No Not used for base No SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 Vacant SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 1 For a multiple PLC system the slot number or PLC number is stored depending on the error that occurred Slot 0 in the multiple PLC system is the one on the slot on the right of the rightmost CPU module Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has Error been stored Error common
20. Project Edit Find Replace Convert View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help Disuj S 8a QAL l ele Bla Pom IT fhe fal a 4E Y HJA ulli FS sF5 F sF6 F F8 gt X x te a ath we t l lal FO sF9 cF9 F10 sF 7 sFS aF 7 aFS aF5 caF5 cafi0 F10 ER al Ale SE zle 4 BIG L Alcor e li 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 9 GX Developer File Operation and File Handling Precautions 6 9 1 File operation Using the online function of the GX Developer the file operations shown in Table 6 5 below are possible with regard to files stored in the program memory standard ROM and memory cards However the available file operations will vary according to the presence or absence of a password registered by GX Developer the High Performance model QCPU write protect switch setting status and the High Performance model QOPU RUN STOP status Table 6 5 File Operations from GX Developer File Operation Enabled Disabled Operation Description A B C D Read from PLC lolalolo Files are read from concerned memory Files are written to the program memory or Write to PLC x oe y SRAM card Verify the target memory and the GX Developer s Verify with PLC alate lo fil j l i ile mower S e e memory to ROM to the standard ROM or Flash card mer o a o a ROM the standard ROM or Flash card Delete PLC data LaAtaAlx x x JA lA file stored in mem
21. What is Sampling Trace Function a This is a function to sample the device continuously on the High Performance model QCPU at specified timings b The changes in the details of the device that program uses during debugging can be checked in the specified timing The sampling trace function allows the read of device details if trigger conditions are satisfied c The sampling trace samples the details of the specified device in a set interval sampling cycle and stores the trace results to the sampling trace file in the memory card d The sampling trace file stores the trace condition data and trace execution data necessary to perform the sampling trace When trace is started with the GX Developer the trace is performed for the number of times set The sampling trace area is 60 k bytes The number of traces can be obtained by dividing 60 k bytes by the number of bytes specified as a device The formula is Number of Bit Devices 8 2 X Number of Word Devices High Performance model QCPU Memory card Specified Sampling trace area device data When stored for n th time the next data overwrites the 1st time data Data for 1st time Data for 2nd time Data for 3rd time Data for 4th time Read to the peripheral device 1 Da Data for 5th time Data for 6th time a for n 1 th time Data for n th time GX Developer Sampling trace area Displays the data
22. No of PLC f4 v m Operating mode T Output condition of group outside is taken r Refresh settings Change screens Setting v Error operation mode at the stop of PLC F All station stop by stop error of PLC1 Send range for each PLC PLC side device IT Allstation stop by stop error of PLC2 PLC PLC share memory G Dev starting All station stop by stop error of PLC3 Point Start End T7 All station stop by stop error of PLC4 _ No 1 The applicable device of head device is B M Y DWA ZR settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check Cancel lt x Multiple PLC settings No of PLC No of PLC j4 Operating mode p Out of group input output settings I Input condition of group outside is taken T Output condition of group outside is taken r Refresh settings Change screens Setting 1 x Error operation mode at the stop of PLC F All station stop by stop error of PLC1 MELSEC Q Setting the operating mode optional e Selects whether to halt operations for all machines or continue with operations when a stop error is triggered Default Stop all machines upon a stopping error at PLC No 2 No 3 or No 4 No check e For example if the tick beside the All station stop by stop error of PLC2 is removed the operations for all other machine
23. a When switching from a scan execution type program to a low speed execution type program occurs the scan execution type program s index register data is saved and the low speed execution type program s index register data is reset b When switching from a low speed execution program to a scan execution type program occurs the low speed execution type program s index register data is saved and the scan execution type program s index register data is reset Switch Switch Switch i Low speed i Low speed ling ing ling Executed program i Scan execution execution Scan execution execution itype program type programs type program type program Z0 3 Index register value For scan execution j l Z0 0 Z0 1 Z0 1 Z0 1 Z0 1 Z0 6 Z0 6 Index register type programs i storage area For low speed l j Q J i execution type Z0 0 Z0 07 Zo 0 7023 ee ae Sia program 1 For low speed execution type program Z0 is changed to 3 2 For scan execution type program Z0 is changed to 6 2 Exchanges of index register data Word devices should be used for exchanges of index register data between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs 10 40 10 40 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 6 2 Switching between scan low speed execution type programs and interrupt fixed scan execution type pro
24. b Storing 0 75 0 75 10 gt 0 11 2 1 100 x2 2 Mantissa code Positive to 0 Characteristic 1 to 7Ex to 01111110 z2 Mantissa 100 00000 00000 00000 00000 z The data expression will therefore be 3F400000n as shown below Code Characteristic Mantissa 0 1111110 O01000000000000000000000 x 2 y y y aX y y J y 0 l l y 4 3 F 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 The monitor function for GX Developer permits monitoring the real number data of the High Performance model QCPU For a 0 value 0 will be indicated at all the bO to b31 bits It is possible to select either Perform internal arithmetic operation in double precision or Do not perform internal arithmetic operation in double precision with the floating point arithmetic processing on the PLC parameter s PLC system settings The result of the operation will be short precision regardless of the floating point arithmetic processing setting It is recommended that Do not perform internal arithmetic operation in double precision is selected if increased speed for the real arithmetic operations is required and Perform internal arithmetic operation in double precision is selected if precision is required when applying compatibility with conventional equipment e Only internal arithmetic operations will be performed at double precision 64 bits when Perform internal arithmetic operation in double precision is selected default setting Precision will be increase
25. MELSEC Q 4 1 3 Interrupt programs 1 Definition of interrupt program a An interrupt program is a program which begins at the interrupt pointer IE and ends at the IRET instruction 1 b Interrupt programs are executed only when an interrupt factor occurs 1 2 Interrupt program management Interrupt programs are created after the main routine program after the FEND instruction and the combination of main and sub routine programs can be managed as one program a When created after the main routine program e An interrupt program is created between the main routine program s FEND and END instructions e Because there are no restrictions regarding the order in which interrupt programs are created there is no need to set the interrupt pointers in ascending order when creating multiple interrupt programs Program A High Performance model QCPU Program memory Standard Main routine ROM Memory card Write Re a Program A FEND 10 vo c IRET Interrupt lt program 132 H Cr IRET 28 Y12 A IRET END Interrupt pointer b Using the interrupt program as a separate program Interrupt programs can also be managed as separate discrete programs stand by type programs See Section 4 2 4 for details regarding stand by type programs However the same interrupt program pointer number cannot be used more than once in the program being executed by the QCPU 1 See Secti
26. No setting 150 to 1255 leading I O No leading SI No Section 10 10 PO to P4095 Section 10 9 2 16 points 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 points Section 5 6 1 INoseting to C22722 Counter setting points can be set up to 256 Section 10 2 11 128 100 0 ms 129 40 0 ms 0 5 to 1000 ms 0 5 ms units Section 10 10 130 20 0 ms 131 10 0 ms Section 4 1 3 The high speed execution is disabled Enable Disable the high speed execution A Section 4 2 5 The start of an intelligent function Yes No to synchronize the start of an intelligent function module is synchronized module Special relays special registers after Yes NO to use the special relays special registers after Section 10 3 2 SM1000 SD1000 are used SM1000 SD1000 Section 10 3 3 e Not used Not used e Use the same file as program Section 10 7 e Use the designated file e Not used Not used e Use the same file as program e Use the designated file Not used Not used e Use the same file as program e Use the designated file e Use the designated file Section 10 13 2 oO 1 o 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Table 9 1 Parameter List continued PLC RAS settings These settings are used for the RAS function WDT setting Set the watchdog timer of the CPU module WDT Set the watchdog timer for the use of an initial execution type program settings Low speed execution P Set the watchdog timer for the use of a low speed execution type program monitor tim
27. Standard ROM D 4 Memory card RAM SRAM card Flash card Memory card ROM ATA card E 4 Memory Capacity and Formatting The table below shows the size of a memory of the High Performance model QCPU and whether to format a memory o Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU ae to Format Standard RAM 64 kbyte 256 kbyte 1 28 k steps 28 k steps 60 k steps 124 k steps 252 k steps Program memory 112 kbyte 112 kbyte 240 kbyte 496 kbyte 1008 kbyte Standard ROM 112 kbyte 112 kbyte 240 kbyte 496 kbyte 1008 kbyte card Q2MEM 1MBS 1Mbyte Use the GX Developer or a personal computer Q2MEM 8MBA 8 Mbyte Required Q2MEM 16MBA 16 Mbyte Use the GX Developer Q2MEM 32MBA 32 Mbyte or a personal computer 1 The memory capacity of the Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU with the first five digits of the serial number being 02091 or earlier is 64 kbyte 2 If the memory is in the initial state or it is unstable due to low voltage of the battery Q6BAT formatting automatically starts upon power on or resetting of the PLC However format with GX Developer before starting operation 3 The standard ROM is used in ROM formation of the program memory and therefore formatting is unnecessary for it 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 2 Program Memory 1 What is the Program Memory a The High Performance model QCPU s program memory is an internal RAM that stores programs executed by the High P
28. The specified circuit of the pointer is displayed to write the circuit after conversion during RUN The following is an example of GX Developer A writing during RUN from PO and GX Developer B writing during RUN from P1 The program area surrounded with is the area to be written during RUN Area after PO in the processing 3 program is written during RUN P1 3 X4 X H SET M10 H X5 H END H a Area after P1 in the processing b program is written during RUN XO X2 PO 30 Serial communication module X3 X4 P1 1H CSET M10 END P Personal computer A Personal computer B 3 GX Developer GX DEveloper A Precautions Precautions on write during RUN is the same as precautions on write during RUN in the circuit mode in Section 7 10 1 For further information see Section 7 10 1 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 14 Watchdog Timer WDT 1 What is Watchdog Timer WDT a b c The watchdog timer is an internal sequence timer to detect High Performance model QCPU hardware and or sequence program error When the watchdog timer expires a watchdog timer error occurs The High Performance model QCPU responds to the watchdog timer error in the following way 1 The High Performance model QCPU turns off all outputs 2 The front mounted RUN LED goes off and the ERR LED starts flashing 3 SM1 turns ON and the error code is s
29. cesesesessssssreeessserrenseersnanseacseanananaeanananaeataeanaeanaeataeaesesesesesesesesesesesesesess 7 40 7 11 1 Program Monitor list ee eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeesaeesaeeseeesaeesaeeseeseeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeaaes 7 40 7 11 2 Interrupt program monitor list oo eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeesaeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeeseeseeseeeseeeteneteaes 7 42 7 11 3 Scan time MEASULEMEN 0 eeceeeeececceceeseeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeesaeeaecaesaeseaeeaesaeseaseaesaeseeeeaseaesaesaeeeaseeseeteaseaees 7 43 7 12 Sampling Trace FUNCION 20 0 c h ea thao na acca ah ada aha A ae 7 45 7 13 Debug Function with Multiple USCIS ceeeeseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 54 7 13 1 Multiple user MONiItOring nehon eerror ona E E E 7 55 7 13 2 Multiple user RUN write function ssassessessessesnesnesnesnesnennenuennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunennnnnannnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 7 56 FA4Watehaog Timer WOT sreedotedataniiiii inanir RA REAREA ERRE EEEE 7 58 7 15 Self Diagnosis Function ccecceecesessesesesessesesesessesesecesssseseseeseseseseeseseseseseaeseseseeaeaeseatesaeseseetseasseeteesasseseeaeaeees 7 60 7 15 1 Interrupt due to error OCCUFencCe s assessessesresnssrssuesnernsnnsrnsnnnnsnnnnantnntnnnnnnannnntnntannantnnnnennnnnnnennnnnenae 7 63 7 15 2 LED display When rror OCCUIS cceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeneaeeeaeeeaeeeneeeeeeseneanee
30. e 10 10 slots e 12 12 slots e 8 fixation 12 fixation Used with High Performance model QCPU Select either option to designate the number of slots for all base units to the same number 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 4 What are I O Numbers I O numbers are used in sequence programs for reception of ON OFF data at High Performance model QCPU and output of ON OFF data from High Performance model QCPU to outsides Input X is used for the reception of ON OFF data at High Performance model QCPU Output Y is used for the output of ON OFF data from High Performance model QCPU I O numbers are expressed as hexadecimals When using 16 point I O modules I O numbers are consecutive numbers that 1 slot has 16 points 0 to F as follows The module that is mounted in the base unit assigns the following e For the input module X is assigned at the beginning of the I O number e For the output module Y is assigned at the beginning of the I O number a the case of input ia a the case of output module Power supply module X 0 2 F Y 0 3 F 16 input 16 input 16 input 16 output points points points 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 5 Concept of I O Number Assignment 5 5 1 I O numbers of main base unit and extension base unit High Performance model QCPU assigns I O numbers at power on or r
31. 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 1 rA SAAR RUN STOP switch setting of all machines PLC No 1 E Cancellation of resetting of QCPU of k d Status confirmation of all QCPU machines Confirmation and E recovery of errors e gt All QCPUs debugged Start of actual operations 19 2 MELSEC Q sccvcccscccssecsseee Select RUN at the RUN STOP switch of the QCPU of PLC No 1 to No 4 eeecsececeeeeseee0000 Set the RESET L CLR switch of the QCPU of the PLC No 1 in the OFF position to cancel resetting Check to see if a RUN status error has occurred with all machines on the mulitple PLC system when the reset status for the PLC No 1 is canceled scvcccccccccccsseseelf Errors exist confirm the details and recover the situation with the GX Developer s system monitor ccccccccccccecscoeee PLC No 1 to PLC No 4 on the multiple PLC system debugged individually 19 2 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 19 2 Setting Up the Multiple PLC System Parameters Multiple PLC Settings Control PLC Settings This section explains the procedures for setting up the multiple PLC system parameters with the GX Developer Refer to the GX Developer s operation manual for details on setting up all other parameters 19 2 1 System configuration The procedures for setting up the multiple PLC system parameters in the case of a system like the one shown in the illus
32. 4 Relevant station ZNRD execution disabled 0 Normal end 2 ZNWR instruction setting fault 3 Error at relevant station 4 Relevant station ZNWR execution disabled Details Corresponding CPU Stores the execution result of the ZNRD word device read instruction e ZNRD instruction setting fault e Corresponding station error ZNRD cannot be executed in the corresponding station Faulty setting of the instruction constant source and or destination One of the stations is not communicating The specified station is a remote I O station Stores the execution result of the ZNWR word device write instruction e ZNWA instruction setting fault e Corresponding station error ZNNWR cannot be executed in the corresponding station Faulty setting of the instruction constant source and or destination One of the stations is not communicating The specified station is a remote I O station App 51 Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 7 Local station link type Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 7 D SD1204 Link state Forward loop during data link Reverse loop during data link Loopback implemented in forward reverse directions Loopback implemented only in forward direction Loopback implemented only inreverse direction Data link disabled 5 Stores whether the slave station corres
33. A B Link refresh execution Link refresh operation is suspended and the interrupt program is executed Fig 4 5 Execution of Fixed Scan Execution Type Programs during Network Refreshing x1 See the following manual regarding the block assurace of cyclic datafor each station e Q capable MELSECNET H network system reference manual 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q d Execution during END processing When the execution condition of fixed scan execution type programs are established during the wait time of END instruction while the constant scan is executed the fixed scan execution type programs are executed e See Section 10 6 2 regarding the processing of the index resister that must be performed when the program is switched over from the scan execution type program low speed execution type program to the fixed scan execution type program 3 Setting of fixed scan execution type program for high speed execution and overhead time When fixed scan execution type programs are executed the processing below is performed e Save and return of index resister e Save and return of file name of file resister in use If High Speed Execution is selected from the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program in setting the PLC system of PLC parameters the processeing above will not be performed As a result the overhead time for the fixed scan execution type programs can b
34. EJN m a Y AnS series power supply Input Output Special function module Q series power supply Input Output Intelligent function module POINT 1 The number of memory cards mounted is one The memory card to be selected from SRAM flash or ATA in accordance with use and capacity 2 The additional QA1S65B and QA1S68B base units are used as the AnS series power supply mocule the I O module and the special function module 14 1 14 1 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 2 Configuration of peripheral device for QCPU usage D High performance model QCPU USB cable x 2 Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU To be procured yourself Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Used only for QQ2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU Ld Memory card 2 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA RS 232 cable QC30R2 Personal computer GX Developer products after SW6D5C GPPW E PC card adapter Q2MEM ADP x1 For writing into memory card on GX Developer and USB cable refer to the operating manual of the GX Developer POINT e See the Motion Controller Users Manual for connection between the Motion CPU and peripheral modules e You cannot use GX Developer installed in a PC connected to the Motion CPU to communicate with the High Performance model QCPU e You cannot ins
35. Piet ey itt pp yy pt pp S S A A D iad i ede A iS a a d l 4ms 4 5ms 4ms 4ms 5ms Scan execution type program l Ge ms Low speed execution type program A i GE 0 5ms os 0 5ms Low speed execution type program Bi H H Constant scan wait time bate i Low speed scan time Low speed scan time Ges ie H 1 gt lt 13ms 15 5ms Low speed END processing execution Low speed execution program execution time setting The low speed execution type program operation which occurs under the following conditions is illustrated below e Low speed program execution time e Total scan execution type program time e END processing END processing 3ms Low speed END 4ms to 5ms e Execution time of low speed type execution program A ims e Execution time of low speed execution type program B 3ms Oms 0 ms is used to simplify the illustration END END processing processing END END processing processing processing execution MELSEC Q Oms 0 ms is used to simplify the illustration 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 Precautions for creating Low speed execution type programs a See Section 10 6 1 for details regarding index register processing when switching from a scan execution type program to a low speed execution type program occurs b See Section 10 6 2 for details regarding index register processi
36. SW600 For the 4th network module SW7FF For details regarding special link registers used in the QCPU refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 10 30 512 points 512 points 512 points 512 points gt 2048 points 10 30 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 3 Internal System Devices Internal system devices are devices used for system operations The allocations and sizes of internal system devices are fixed and cannot be changed by the user 10 3 1 Function devices FX FY FD 1 Definition a Function devices are devices used in sub routine programs with arguments to permit data transfers between the sub routine program with argument and the CALL source for that sub routine Pare gt EXAMPIG er ete ay eg 5 gre Re oe ore EE POTEET PT Oe ER EP ee PT pa If FXO and FD1 are used at the sub routine program and if MO and DO are designated by the sub routine CALL instruction the MO ON OFF data is transferred to FXO and the DO data is transferred to FD1 Sub routine program CALL source Sub routine program XO FXO _ CALL Po Mo Do Po H _J mov FD1 RO b Because the function devices used for each sub routine program CALL source can be set the same sub routine program can be used without regard to other sub routine CALL sources 2 Types of function devices There are 3 function device types function input devices FX function output
37. This condition represents the maximum time lag 1 scan between the DX5 input ON and the DY5E output ON Fig 4 10 Output Y Change in Response to Input X Change 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 8 Numeric Values which Can Be Used in Sequence Programs Numeric and alphabetic data are expressed by 0 OFF and 1 ON numerals in the High Performance model QCPU This method of expression is called binary code BIN The hexadecimal HEX expression method in which BIN data are expressed in 4 bit units and the BCD binary coded decimal expression method are also possible for the High Performance model QCPU Real numbers may also be used See Section 4 8 4 The numeric expressions for the BIN HEX BCD and Decimal DEC notations are shown in Table 4 1 below Table 4 1 BIN HEX BCD and Decimal Numeric Expressions BCD DEC Decimal HEX Hexadecimal BIN Bi Binary Coded Decimal if ok es IZ nmo owk oO 01111 4444 1111 0111 1444 11113 e 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 Hide 1111 1111 4444 4444 1111 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 1 External numeric inputs to High Performance model QCPU When designating numeric settings for the High Performance model QCPU from an external source digital switch etc a BCD binary coded decimal setting can be designated which is the same as a decimal sett
38. je Special link relay SB link relay SB 2048 points SBO to 7FF Special link register SW 2048 points SWO to 7FF 8192 points S0 to 8191 Index register Z 16 points Z0 to 15 4096 points PO to 4095 set parameter values to select usable range of in file pointer shared pointers 256 points IO to 255 set parameter values to select periodic interval of system interrupt pointers 128 to 131 0 5 to 1000 ms 0 5 ms unit default 128 100ms 129 40ms_ 130 20ms_ 131 10ms 16 points FXO to F 16 points re to F Device for direct access of link Ee Fini directdevice For MELSECNET H use only Specified form JOO XOO JOO YOO JOO Woo JOO BOO JOO SWoOo JOO SBOO Intelligent functi dule devi Device for direct access of intelligent function module buffer memory ntelligent function module device Specified form UO D GO D Latch power failure compensation range ee deraut Set parameter p P g Latch range may be specified for B F V T ST C D W P values to specify Year month date hour minute second day of week auto detects leap years Clock function Accuracy 3 18 to 5 25s TYP 2 12s d at 0 C Accuracy 3 93 to 5 25s TYP 1 90s d at 25 C Accuracy 14 69 to 3 53s TYP 3 67s d at 55 C Allowable momentary power failure period By power supply module Po 5 V DC internal current consumption 0 60A 0 644 0 644 0 644 osaa O o 2okg 0 20kg 0 20kg 0 20kg o2og Externa
39. program gt Processing content Coil ON OFF l Present value update Contact ON OFF b When the OUT T instruction is executed the present value is added to the scan time measured at the END instruction If the timer coil is OFF when the OUT T instruction is executed the present value is not updated Ladder example Xo H K8 ct me Present value update timing OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO OUT TO Program XO external input OFF at END instruction QCPU s X0 ON a Vo TO coil EOP p aN TO contact oo meas fe eS measurement T Vi j j t Measured value i i TO present value Input reading timing Timer accuracy 1 scan 1 scan time timer time limit setting to 1 scan time 10 22 10 22 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c The timer response accuracy from the point when input X reading occurs until the point when the output occurs is 2 scan time timer time limit setting Precautions when using timers The following are a few precautions regarding timer use a A given timer cannot be designated by OUT T more than once ina single scan If it is the timer s present value will be updated at each OUT Ti instruction resulting in a meaningless measurement OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT END Ti Te Ti END Ti Ti Sequence I program gt Present value is updated 1 Scan b When a timer for
40. the last specified execute type becomes effective after executed with a switch instruction END processing END processing Execution program gt GHI ABC name END processing GHI GH DEF GHI PSTOP ABC Se ETN DEF to the scan PSCAN DEF execution execution type and ABC to the stand by type program respectively 1 The order of GHI and DEF program execution is determined by the program of the PLC parameters 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 3 Precautions for creating stand by type programs Because present value updating and contact ON OFF switching occurs at the OUT T instruction timers cannot be used in stand by type programs a b Common pointer Program B Stand by type program 4 Gathering sub routine programs into a single program 1 Create the sub routine programs in order beginning from step 0 of the stand by type program An END instruction is required at the end of the sub routine program Because there are no restrictions regarding the creation sequence of sub routine programs the pointer numbers need not be assigned in ascending order when creating multiple sub routine programs Use common pointers Sub routine programs with common pointers can be called from all programs executed by the High Performance model QCPU If local pointers are used execution of the stand by type program s sub routine programs wil
41. 1 1 1 1 Low speed Low speed Low speed 1 1 l l l l l I l l l l l l I l l l I Li l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Li l l l l l l l l processing execution processing execution processing execution 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS 2 Svnchronous method 1 Constant scan time setting The low speed execution type program operation which occurs under the following conditions is 0 4 11 5 16 5 23 5 29 5 ms cee ue ecm Ke Peed Cer ced eee cat ae SESER Cal ea ES SE en E ENEA S Deed Peele eet ce Eee Pe EE EET The alm sle r ol Ueda pe ls lis A Tis ila inde Mies al alee eds ial al 4ms 4 5ms_ 4ms 4ms 5ms Scan execution type program l ims irs ims Low speed execution type program A Ga ims 2ms ims On Low speed execution type program B H Low speed scan time Low speed scan time 12 5ms 12ms re gt a gt i i Low speed END Low speed END processing execution processing execution 4 22 illustrated below e Constant scan time e Total scan execution type program time e END processing low speed END processing 8ms 4ms to 5ms e Execution time of low speed type execution program A ims e Execution time of low speed execution type program B 3ms END END END END processing processing processing processing Y Y 0 8 i 16 24 i 32 ms 11
42. 2 respectively OFF at 0 ON at 1 App 29 App 29 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set b Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation When A ACPU i 9 bo TT The following bit patterns are used to store the statuses of the LEDs on the CPU B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 T T T T T T T nl gt 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt 4 gt 4 z gt BOOT S Status Vacant change f Vacant E MODE Bit patterns for MODE 0 OFF 1 Green 2 SD201 LED status PAP CPU Orange LED Information concerning which of the following states the LEDs on the CPU are in is stored in the following bit patterns O is off 1 is on and 2 is flicker B15 l B12B11 l B8 B7 B4 e a E E gt gt E oe S Status change BOOT CARD A Memory card CARD B Memory card k Vacant Bit pattern of Stores bit patterns of LEDs turned off SD202 LED off LED that is Only USER and BOOT enabled turned off e Turned off at 1 not turned off at 0 The operating status of the remote I O module is stored in the following format B15 B4 B3 EE S New Remote 4 Remote I O module operating status Always 2 STOP e The CPU operating state is stored as indicated in the following figure B15 B12B11 l B8B7 B4 B3 STEP RUN STOP ite D9015 format PAUSE k change STOP PAUSE cause Switch proc
43. 3 i MITSUBISHI 1E e 0 0x10 axT0 98mm 3 86 inch te POWER lt IPULL MITSUBISHI PULL Y Q25HCPU 0X10 0X1 z5 MODE QJ71BR11 e uh me nk T Pass TaN T me fT pass OR eee Ez D Pra BR11 we or o as F l FS fs w w ba Oe v USB Se 0 0 v PULL RS Sae e SJo sfs oN Je Freeke Freja fla iG Gesco Go Gs GES Cosas 5 Slot Basic Base Unit 245mm 9 65inch gt depth 98mm 3 86inch 8 Slot Basic Base Unit 328mm 12 92inch 8 Slot Basic Base Unit 439mm 17 30inch 7 Connection of up to seven extension base units a The High Performance model QCPU can connect to seven extension base units eight base units including the main and accept up to 64 modules b The overall distance of the extension cables is up to 13 2m to ensure high degree of extension base unit arrangement Memory extension by memory card The High Performance model QCPU is provided with a memory card installation connector to which a memory card of 32 Mbyte max can be connected 32 Mbite is available when a ATA card is used When a memory card of large capacity is installed a large capacity of file can be controlled comments to all data devices can be set up and th
44. Definition a High speed timers are timers which are only operative while the coil is ON A high speed timer is marked with a symbol H b The time measurement begins when the timer s coil switches ON and the contact switches ON when the time elapses When the timer s coil switches OFF the present value becomes 0 and the contact switches OFF addsr example High speed timer display XO H K200 When X0 switches ON the T200 coil switches ON and lt T200 the contact switches ON 2 second later The high speed timer measures time in 10 ms units Time chart X0 T200 coil T200 contact OFF y 2 Measurement units a The default time measurement units setting for high speed timers is 10 ms b The time measurement units setting can be designated in 0 1ms units within a 0 1 ms to 100 ms range This setting is designated in the PLC system settings in the PLC parameter setting 10 20 10 20 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q Retentive timers 1 Definition a Retentive timers measure the coil ON time b The measurement begins when the timer coil switches ON and the contact switches ON when a time out coil OFF occurs Even when the timer coil is OFF the present value and the contact ON OFF status are saved When the coil is switched ON again the time measurement resumes from the present value which was saved c There are 2 retentive timer types low speed retentive timer and high s
45. Error sequence D9054 D1054 q number where error and operation output in which error 84 occurred in the step i occurred SFC program in BIN code Stores the step number when status latch is executed Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch is executed in a main sequence program Stores the block number and the step number if status D9055 D1055 D812 Status latch Status latch step latch is executed in a SFC program Block No Step No BIN BIN Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits PLC In the self loopback test of the serial communication EP Computer link data tat ti D9072 D1072 communications cheek module the serial communication module writes reads Number of Number of empt PY Stores the number of empty blocks in the olnphy DOCKS iN S Proce In communication request registration area to the remote D908 SD1081 communications communications q g App 48 App 48 terminal module connected to the MELSECNET MINI S3 master unit A2C or A52G e Stores the step number in which error 84 occurred in Sieb nimbe whera the SFC program in BIN code D9052 SD1052 p Stores 0 when errors 80 81 and 82 occurred error occurred A Stored the block starting step number when error 83 occurred Sequence step Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition e Stores the software version of the internal system in ASCII code The data in the lower byte A position is indefinite Software version of Higher by
46. L gt Five slots are not occupied b For 5 slot base unit 5 slots are occupied Q35B type main base unit 0 1 2 3 4 Power supply Es Three slots are not occupied Q65B type expansion base unit Power supply Ee Three slots are not occupied Q65B type expansion base unit 10 11 12 13 14 gt Q Q z a fa z Oo a Py Three slots are not occupied 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS c For 8 slot base unit 8 slots are occupied Q38B type main base unit 0123 45 6 7 Power supply QCPU Q68B type expansion base unit 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Power supply d For 12 slot base unit 12 slots are occupied Q312B type main base unit y 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Power supply 2B type expansion base unit 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Power supply MELSEC Q 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 2 Detail mode a b In Detail mode the number of slots is assigned to the individual base units main and extension base units by setting the I O assignment of PLC Parameter Use this mode to match the number of slots to the one for the AnS series base units 8 fixation Cautions on setting the number of slots The number of slots can be set regardless of the number of slots of the module being used However the number of slots must be set for all the base units in use If the number of slot is not set for all
47. Maintenance SM202 eee When turned from OFF to ON the LED corresponding to each bit in the SD202 is turned off SD202 iias This specifies the LED to turn off Only USER LED and BOOT LED can be turned off 15 bit 8 4 0 bit 1 BOOT LED USER LED 1 means turn off and 0 means leave on in the setting The setting to turn off each LED is as follows All in hexadecimal e When turning off both LEDs SD202 110H e When turning off only the BOOT LED SD202 100H e When turning off only the USER LED SD202 10x 3 Method to not display the ERROR LED USER LED and BAT ALARM LED The ERROR LED USER LED and BAT ALARM LED have the same priorities explained in Section 7 19 2 When an error number for an LED is deleted from this priority the LED will not turn on even if an error with that error number occurs Refer to POINT in Section 7 19 2 for the setting method 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 19 2 Priority setting When multiple factors that can be displayed occur the display is performed with the following conditions 1 A stop error is displayed without condition 2 An operation continue error is displayed according to the priority factor number set as the default The priority can be changed Set with special registers SD207 to SD209 3 When errors with the same priority level occur the error detected first is displayed The priority is set with the special registers SD207 to SD 209 in the fo
48. OFF Batch operation mode ON Carryover mode Data tracking transmission link specification OFF No trigger ON Trigger App 18 New New S Status lew change N e Turns on when the CPU operation system status is the standby system Turns on when the CPU is started up by the operation system switch e Reset using the user program S Status change U e When turned off when the tracking memory is in use during END standby is executed until execution is possible e When turned on when the tracking memory is being used during END this is repeatedly executed until the next END SM1521 SM1522 SM1523 SM1524 SM1525 SM1526 SM1527 SM1529 SM1530 SM1531 Specified the blocks to trigger SM1532 when the data is transmitted by SM1533 the data tracking instruction SM1534 S TRUCK SM1535 Block 16 SM1537 SM1538 SM1539 SM1540 SM1541 SM1542 SM1543 lock 25 SM1545 Block 26 U New MELSEC Q 3 New Each END App 18 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued r Set by ACPU Applicable Exp SM1546 Block 27 SM1548 SM1549 SM1550 SM1551 SM1552 SM1553 Block 34 SM1554 Block 35 SM1556 SM1557 SM1558 SM1559 SM1560 SM1561 SM1562 lock 44 e Specified the blocks to trigger Data tracking OFF No trigger SM1564 when the data is transmitted by smise5 r ink ON Trigger SM1565 the data tracking instruction 4 ismis66
49. Program 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q Programs stored in the standard ROM memory card are executed after they are booted to read to the QCPU program memory Programs to be booted to the QCPU are designated by parameter settings and the parameter drive is designated by a DIP switch setting at the QCPU Execution of program booted from the standard ROM or memory card to the program memory 2 Program construction Programs are stored in a file format in the program memory standard ROM or memory card Multiple programs can therefore be stored in the program memory standard ROM or memory card by using different file names J5 possible by using J sp file names File name ABC File name ABC File name DEF Multiple program writing Writing from GX Developer to QCPU pane Poen eens EA comments GX Developer This format permits the program creation operation to be split among several designers and allows program management and maintenance to be carried out according to the process or function in question Moreover revision and debugging is required only at the relevant programs when the specifications are changed a Example of program creation split among several designers QCPU Program memory iZ Standard ROM Memory card Designer A gt Program A Programs A to C Designer B gt Program B are executed in oy a sequence 1 Designer C gt Prog
50. QCPUs are used on a multiple PLC system If any of the errors shown in table 14 1 are displayed with the GX Developer Version 6 or later PLC diagnosis function replace the function version A High Performance model QCPU with a function version B High Performance model QCPU Table 14 1 List of operations with differing function versions PLC No 1 PLC Nos 2 to 4 Status of PLC No 1 Status of PLC Nos 2 to 4 UNIT VERIFY ERROR SP UNIT LAY ERROR Function version A Function version A Error code 2000 Error code 2125 i UNIT VERIFY ERROR MULTI EXE ERROR Function version A Function version B Error code 2000 Error code 7010 i j MULTI EXE ERROR SP UNIT LAY ERROR Function version B Function version A Error code 7010 Error code 2125 x The following errors may occur besides MULTI EXE ERROR when the PLC is turned on or the High Performance model QCPU for PLC No 1 is reset e CONTROL BUS ERR error code 1413 1414 e MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error code 7000 7002 14 4 14 4 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 2 High Performance model QCPU motion CPU and PC CPU module mounting positions a Upto four modules of High Performance model QCPU can be installed in the CPU slots starting from the slot on the right side of power supply module closely and the neighboring slots up to slot 2 There must be no empty slot between CPU modules Install the Motion CPU or PC CPU model
51. SD212 Clock data minute See DA 35 min 48 sec D9027 second EE erie after the hour Minute Second H3548 Stores the year two digits and the day of the week in SD213 in the BCD code format as shown below BIS to pice to B8 Br 1 Ba BS Y BO Example TE AEREE Friday ota 1h Pete 1 L H0005 A S U D9028 QCPU we Sunday Request Remote Higher digits Monday of year 0 to 99 Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Clock data Siy Soala Glock data day of week The day of the week is stored as BCD code at SD213 as shown below BID i piep fe Be B7 is Example Eee lee 04 Friday o 1 H0005 a S U j sunday Request D9028 QnA Always set 0 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday App 31 App 31 SD208 Priority 8 Priority 7 Priority6 1 Priority 5 T SD209 Priority 10 Priority 9 LED display priority Default Value SD207 H4321 ranking Priorities 9 to SD208 18765 10 SD207 H00A9 No display is made if 0 is set However even if 0 has been set information concerning CPU operation stop including parameter settings errors will be indicated by the LEDs without conditions SD207 SD208 SD209 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Set b Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation
52. SD64 When F goes ON due to OUT F or SET FJ the F numbers which go progressively ON from SD64 through SD79 are registered SD65 F numbers turned OFF by RST F are deleted from SD64 to SD79 and are shifted to the data register following the data register where SD66 the deleted F numbers had been stored Execution of the instruction shifts the contents of SD64 to SD79 up by one This can also be done by using the INDICATOR RESET switch on the front of the CPU of the Q3A Q4ACPU After 16 annunciators have been detected detection of the 17th will not be stored from SD64 through SD79 SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110F151F210LEDR TA A A A A A A ee Oe ee ee i Numb Annunciator 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 number i 3 4 5 6 71 8 9 8 Number of i detection Number of Instruction detected i number z0 ol solso sr to execution 99 99 99 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 70 65 65 65 65 38 38 38 38 a te o o a 0 Number detected o o o oj o o o o o o o ojo e Error he CHK instruction ar re BCD CHK number CHK number or codes detected by the CHK instruction are stored as BC Instruction code execution Corresponds to SM90 F numbers which go ON at step transition watchdog timer set val
53. Specify the desired K steps in the System Area text box b The figure below illustrates an example in which 1k step is specified in the System Area text box Format PLC memory Connection target information Connection interface COM1 lt gt CPU unit Target PLC co Station no Host PLC type 025H Target memory Programmemoy Format Type C Do not create a user setting system area the necessary system area only Create a user setting system area an area which speeds up monitoring from other stations System area K steps 1 A maximum of 15k steps can be set in 1 k step modules as a system area Only 1 k step can correspond to one station monitor file Therefore a maximum of 15 station monitor files can be set 3 Precautions a The detailed condition setting of the monitor can only be set from one area b Monitoring can be performed even if a station monitor file is not set but high speed monitoring cannot be performed The system area is in the same area as the program memory so the area of the stored program reduced when the system area is set c Once the user defined system area is allocated a single PLC will be accessible from 16 stations 7 FUNCTION 7 13 2 Multiple user RUN write function MELSEC Q 1 What is Multiple User RUN Write Function a Multiple users can write to one file or different files during RUN b To enable multiple users to write in a single file at the same time duri
54. The High Performance model QCPU of a multiple PLC system can use an S TO command FROM command and intelligent function module device U_ G__ to access the common CPU memory of the High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module The data written in the common CPU memory of the host machine with an S TO command can be read by another machine using an FROM command or intelligent function module device U_ G_ Contrary to the automatic refresh function for the common CPU memory it is possible to read data directly when this command is executed An outline of a process where data written in the common CPU memory of PLC No 1 with an S TO command is read by the PLC No 2 using an FROM command or intelligent function module device ULAG is shown in the figure below PLC No 1 PLC No 2 Common CPU memory Host machine s operation information area Common CPU memory Host machine s operation information area System area System area Automatic refresh area for the use of No 1 machine writing 2 Read with FROM instruction or UL G Data written with the S TO command ad 1 Writing performed with the S TO command Sequence program Sequence program FROM command execution S TO command execution PLC No 1 processing 1 Data is written into the user s free area on the PLC No 1 with the S TO
55. Write during RUN e Reading a file with the PLOAD instruction Files stored in the memory card will not be lost unless the memory card is removed from the High Performance model QCPU while the power is OFF 1 If the above operations are done the data up to the power OFF will be stored in the High Performance model QCPU internal memory and will be restored when power is switched ON again A battery backup is required in order to save internal memory data for this reason 2 Simultaneous access of a single file from multiple GX Developers The High Performance model QCPU permits access to a single file from a single GX Developer When access to the same file is made from multiple GX Developers the file is accessible only when the current processing is completed by the GX Developer prior to the next processing For details on the PLOAD instruction see the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 9 3 File size The file size differs with the types of files used When a program memory standard RAM standard ROM and memory card are used calculate the size of a file with reference to the table 6 7 shown below Space for file storage is available as shown below e Program memory standard ROM 4096 bytes 1 k steps e Memory card 512 bytes If a file is transferred from a memory card to a program memory during a boot run the size of available memory is cha
56. command PLC No 2 processing 2 An FROM command or the intelligent function module device U_ G_ is used to read data from the free user area of the PLC No 1 to the designated device Refer to the following manual for further details on the S TO and FROM commands QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common commands The Motion CPU cannot use the S TO command FROM command or intelligent function module device Use automatic refresh of the common CPU memory or special commands for the communication in the multiple PLC system to communicate between the High Performance model QCPU and Motion CPU For the accessing method from the PC CPU to the common CPU memory refer to the manual of the PC CPU command between multiple PLCs 16 9 16 9 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 Precautions a The following values are set in the CPU module s first O number with the FROM command the S TO command and commands that use UD GO PLC No PLC No 1 PLC No 2 PLCNo 3_ PLCNo4 Value set in the first VO number b Do not perform writing as reading in the system area or automatic refresh area for the common CPU memory see Section 16 4 c An error will not be triggered when CPUs accessed with the FROM command the S TO command and commands that use UL GU are reset However access execution flag SM390 will remain OFF when command execution has been completed d Establish a
57. devices FY and function register devices FD a Function input devices FX e These devices are used to designate inputs of ON OFF data to a sub routine program In the sub routine program these devices are used for reading and processing bit data designated by sub routine with argument CALL instruction All the QCPU bit data designation devices can be used b Function output devices FY e These devices are used to designate outputs of sub routine program operation results ON OFF data to the sub routine program CALL source e At sub routine programs with arguments the operation results are stored at the designated device All bit data designation devices except High Performance model QCPU inputs X DX can be used 10 31 10 31 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c Function registers e Function registers are used to designate data transfers between the sub routine CALL source and the sub routine program e The function register input output condition is automatically determined by the High Performance model QCPU If the sub routine program data is the source data the data is designated as sub routine input data If the sub routine program data is the destination data the data is designated as sub routine output data e 1 point occupies 4 words The number of words used depends on an instruction in a sub routine program A one word instruction requires 1 word J CALLP PO oo Po 1 MOV RO ro ee eee ee i T
58. e Securely load the memory card into the memory card loading connector After loading check for lifting Lifting can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault e Completely turn off the external power supply before loading or unloading the module Not doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product e Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module Wiring Precautions lt gt DANGER e Completely turn off the external power supply when installing or placing wiring Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product e When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installation or wiring work be sure that the module s terminal covers are correctly attached Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock Wiring Precautions A CAUTION e Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor Not doing so could result in electric shock or erroneous operation e When wiring in the PLC be sure that it is done correctly by checking the product s rated voltage and the terminal layout Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly wiring the product could result in fire or damage e External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the specif
59. increase the size of a user memory a Programs used for arithmetic operations of the High Performance model QCPU are stored in the program memory Programs stored in the standard ROM or on a memory card are booted read into the program memory for arithmetic operation A batch of parameters and programs stored in the program memory can be copied to the standard ROM memory card Flash card Parameters and programs are stored in the standard ROM These data are used for ROM operation of the High Performance model QCPU File register and local device data is stored in the standard RAM The use of file registers in the standard RAM will enable high speed access as is the case with data registers Memory card A memory card can be connected to a memory card interface of the High Performance model QCPU This allows the read write of data The High Performance model QCPU supports three types of memory cards SRAM card Flash card and ATA card 1 The SRAM card allows the write read of programs through a sequence program in the following cases where e File registers are used in excess of 32 k points e Sampling trace data is stored e SFC trace data is stored e Failure history data is stored The use of file registers allows the write read of data at 505 k points in a sequence program 2 The Flash card allows only the read through a sequence program The Flash card is useful when data written by the High Performance model QCPU is read
60. nc z H Increment Index Register Z1 1 c NExT H Return to FOR instruction Timing chart ON XO OFF ON When Z1 0 VO OFF es ON MO OFF 1 Scan ON X1 OFF he ON When Z1 1 V1 OFF l ON M1 OFF l 1 Scan 3 Simpler data processing a Real numbers floating decimal point data and character string constants can be used in the programming as they are XO Real number data Real number data Real number data E P E1 23 DO RO E123 4 DO E3 45 RO E4 68 Real number ADD instruction D R1 P D5 CPU D10 Character Character Character Character string data LINK instruction string data string data string data Ds o a D10 o a 5 CPU gt D6 NUL on D1 1 Ct on D1 2 y p D13 NUL x NUL indicates 00H character string END 1 10 1 10 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q b Data processing instructions such as table processing instructions etc enable high speed processing of large amounts of data X0 FINSP DO RO K2 FIFO table FIFO table Insertion Insertion Insertion position RO 4 lenses designation R1 10 Instruction for data insertion at table DO Cs e 15 R3 20 R4 30 4 Easy shared use of sub routine programs a A common pointer can be used to call the same sub routine program from all sequence programs being executed
61. non conforming remote I O station I O allocation error D1224 D1225 SD1226 SD1227 SD1228 SD1229 SD1230 SD1231 Local station and remote I O station initial communications underway Local station station error App 53 Meaning Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers Stores conditions for up to numbers Corresponding Details CPU Stores the local station numbers which are in error Device number b15 L16 L32 L48 L64 b14 L15 L31 L47 L63 b13 b12 L14 L13 L30 L29 L46 L45 L62 L61 b11 L12 L28 L44 L60 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO L11 L10 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L27 L26 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L43 L42 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L59 L58 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 SD1216 SD
62. of D9113 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalen of D9114 Active step sampling trace completion flag Active step Trace not being executed sampling trace Trace execution under execution flag way OFF Watchdog timer reset ON Watchdog timer reset start Turned on when the step transfer monitoring timer is started Turned off when the monitoring timer is reset Trace started Set when sampling trace of all specified blocks is Trace completed completed Reset when sampling trace is started Set when sampling trace is being executed Reset when sampling trace is completed or suspended e Selects sampling trace execution enable disable Active step T ON Sampling trace execution is enabled Trace disable suspend i Saar sampling trace OFF Sampling trace execution is disabled ae Trace enable i i 3 permission If turned off during sampling trace execution trace is suspended Selects the operation output when block stop is executed ON Retains the ON OFF status of the coil being used Operation output OFF Coil output OFF by using operation output of the step being at block stop Coil output ON executed at block stop OFF All coil outputs are turned off Operation output by the SET instruction is retained regardless of the ON OFF status of M9196 1 0 numbers SM9197 SM1198 to be displayed X Y Switch between OFF OFF 0 to 7FO Switches I O numbers in the fuse blow module storag
63. 0 0 0j 0 0 0 0 0 0 supply is not disconnected Indicates a blown fuse APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue 12 I O module verification Qorresp nding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU Si 9 beLT LI D1400 e When the power is turned on the module numbers of the I O D1401 modules whose information differs from the registered I O module D1402 information are set in this register in units of 16 points D1403 Bit pattern in If the O numbers are set by parameter the parameter set D1404 units of 16 points numbers are stored indicating the Also detects I O module information peter D1405 modules with 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 D9121 1 O module tes Sigs D9122 D1406 4 verification errors D9116 o o putes D1407 verification 0 No VO i 5 S Error D9123 O Rem i D9117 0 verification WANN N wM NID jn S NIN gg n errors D9123 ex ojo 1 I O verification 4 error present Indicates an I O module verification error Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation New to New 13 For redundant systems Host system CPU information 1 for Q4AR only D1510 to SD1599 are only valid for redundant systems They are all set to 0 for standalone systems Corresponding Number Name Mean
64. 1 High Performance model QCPU Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Paley Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA AEE Q6BAT Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA HOM aaao Fl F 3 mijm LJ Power supply module 1 O module Intelligent function module of the Q Series Oooooo MITSUBISHI Main base unit Q35B Q38B Q312B Extension of the AnS Series module 42 Extension of the Q Series module il Jy qi C le Extension cable QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B QA1S60 extension base unit QA1S65B QA1S68B f JEN Power supply module 1 O module Intelligent function module of the AnS Series POINTS 1 The number of memory cards to be installed is one sheet The memory card must be selected from SRAM Flash and ATA according to the application and capacity Q6LB extension base unit Q65B Q68B Q612B Power supply module 3 I O module Intelligent function module of the Q Series With commercial memory cards the Operation is not assured 2 QA1S65B and QA1S68B extension base units are used for the power module I O module and special function module of the AnS series 3 The Q series power supp
65. 1 minute SM1031 0 2 second clock SM1032 SM1033 Alternates between ON and OFF according to the seconds specified at SD414 Default n 30 Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even during scan if corresponding time has elapsed e Starts with off when power is turned on or reset is performed x 1 minute clock indicates the name of the special relay M9034 of the ACPU M9034 SM1034 clock a ra w w o N o gt xe ne f i N App 12 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Relay ane a ali i Relay Conversion Modification ON ETENI rr M9036 SM1036 Always ON Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application ON e SM1038 and SM1037 are turned on and off without M9037 SM1037 Always OFF OFF regard to position of key switch on CPU front SM1038 and SM1039 are under the same condition as RUN ON for 1 scan ON status except when the key switch is at STOP position M9038 SM1038 only after RUN Sree scan and turned off and on Switched off if the key switch is in STOP position SM1038 is on for one scan only and poss mos f RUN flag After ON SM1039 is off for one scan only if the key switch is not in M9039 SM1039 RUN OFF for 1 o scan only FF M9040 sm1040 sm2o6 EAUSE enable OFF PAUSE disabled When RUN key switch is at PAUSE position or remote coil ON PAUSE enabled 2 USE OFF PAUSE n
66. 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores scan time for initially execution type program in 100 ps units Range of 000 to 900 S Every END processing S First END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing e Stores minimum value of scan time in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 Stores minimum value of scan time in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 Stores maximum value of scan time excepting the first scan in 1 ms units Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores maximum value of scan time excepting the first scan in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 e Stores current scan time for low speed execution type program in 1 ms units Stores current scan time for low speed execution type program in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 Stores minimum value of scan time for low speed execution type program in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 Stores minimum value of scan time for low speed execution type program in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 Stores the maximum scan time for all except low speed execution type program s first scan in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 Stores the maximum scan time for all except low speed execution type program s first scan in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 Stores time from completion of scan program to start of next scan in 1 ms units Range from 0 to 65535 Stores time from completion of scan program
67. 10 19 ME T hoa o a RE 10 19 ACCUIACY oai a orbs hh 10 22 PrOCOSSING Hi ni ti agin aaa a 10 22 TR SFC transition device 00 0 eee 10 58 U U I O No designation device 10 59 U 12 G i Intelligent function module device 10 38 Usar MEY as o a 6 3 V V Edge telaren a 10 16 VD Macro instruction argument device 10 60 W W Link register ceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeees 10 29 Watchdog timer eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeens 7 57 WDT Watchdog timer eee eeeeeeeeeeereeeee 7 57 Write during RUN 00 7 35 7 37 7 55 Writing to the time data 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeee 7 9 X X INPUt cee eae eee eee 10 5 Y Y OUIDUD Ja r hk hata ek eee A 10 8 Year 2000 problems eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeees 7 11 Z Z Index register isessesiesrerersrsrsnenses 10 39 ZR Serial number access format of file register ET AE A 10 49 Index 3 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas on a detached island or remote place expenses to dispatch an engineer shall be charged for Gra
68. 10 4 Link Direct Devices JONES vssicscscashesaesscheadacuensesncncncncncndacndacndacndncnsacacachdacadachdasndacadastiacndasaeacndasniacadasaiasndacaiacateles 10 35 10 5 Intelligent Function Module Devices UC I GU5 oo eeeeeeseseeseseseseeseseseeeeseseaeeeeseseaeeteeeseseaeeneasasaeeteeseeaeateneenasaeens 10 38 10 6 Index Registers 2 a a siananshatenanenaahadehaaah a 10 39 10 6 1 Switching between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs 10 40 10 6 2 Switching between scan low speed execution programs and interrupt fixed scan execution type progra M Eaa Sees ecb iat cea cee aea aa Eara a aa aa a anaa iara aa aaa aa aa ara E aaa aa aap aia aa 10 41 10 7 File Redite Marrina i aai A AE aA 10 43 10 7 1 F ile register Capacity eurac diel ieri iair a iri i 10 44 10 7 2 Differences in memory card access method by memory card type s ssssesesssssresrserssrssrsrrsrrsensns 10 44 10 7 3 Registering the file registers 2 2 0 ecesceesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeeesenseeneenneeaees 10 45 10 7 4 File register designation Method ceceeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesaeesaeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeseeeeeeeseeeeenseneeeaes 10 49 10 7 5 Precautions in using file registers ee eee eeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeseeesaeeteeseeeeaeeseeesaeeseeeteeeseeeteeeeeaetaaes 10 50 10 8 Nesting N cenieni aariaa AE E AEE EEE A EE EEEE EEEE 10 52 TOO FROMM GIS oaa aAA A OE S NE ee NM fe le Eee WE ea sees Cece
69. 10 53 10 9 1 Local POINTEIS 02 accuse Wild a ee eevee nair i irii de veel 10 53 10 92 COMMON POINLEIS 2 iis ecto teres eres ae ree a A oleae ate eee dae 10 54 10 10 Interrupt Pointers c ccensnanananhiahahanhaahahehnpahanananababahakuisnahasahanahaaahnae 10 56 TOA AM Other DEVICES kh ch cad heated ah del habeas Aid ella Abate dha ate 10 58 10 11 1 SFC block device BL cceccecceceeseeeeceeceeeeseeeeceeeeneeaecaecaeeeaeeaesaesaeeaeeaecaesaeeeaseaseaeseeseasieseeseaeeates 10 58 10 11 2 SFC transition device TR cceccesceeceeceeeseceeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeeesaesaesaeseaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaesaseeseaeeate 10 58 10 11 3 Network No designation device J eeceeceeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeseeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeneeaes 10 58 10 11 4 I O No designation device U ccceccecceceeseeeeceeceseeeceeeeesaesaeceeseaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaeeaee 10 59 10 11 5 Macro instruction argument device VD ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeeseeeteeeeeeetaaes 10 60 AR OBE FPA Gro at 621 gcse ere eer ee fee ee cere et cere vce reg reece ericereccars reece ercerier rer errererrerterrrreriereyetercet ceri rerreirrererr vere 10 61 10 12 1 Decimal constants K 0 csc8 teice ie ete ieee Weeden Lien cece riii ir 10 61 10 12 2 Hexadecimal Constants H ceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeseceseeesaeeseeeseeesaeeseeseeseeeseaesenseneeaaes 10 61 10 123 Real numbers E 20 4228 aent
70. 1000ms High 110 0 ms 0 1ms 100ms speed Number of empty slots 145 v Points RUN PAUSE contacts System interrupt settings RUN Xx X0 lt 1 FFF nterrupt counter start No 0 768 PAUSE X 0 1 FFF 28 fixed scan interval 100 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms Remote reset 29 fixed I Allow scan interval 40 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms Output mode at STOP to RUN 30 fixed A 5 scan interval 200 ms 0 5ms 1000ms tevious state 31 fixed TI Recalculate output is 1 scan later scan interval i ms 0 5ms 1000ms Floating point arithmetic processing v Perform internal arithmetic operations I High speed execution in double precision nterrupt program Fixed scan program setting Intelligent functional module setting Unit synchronization IV Synchronize intelligent module s pulse up Interrupt pointer settings Compatibility with PLC IV Use special relay special register from SM SD1000 Acknowledge xY assignment Default Check End setup Cancel 1 In the jump instruction jumping to common pointers in other programs is not allowed Common pointers should be used only with sub routine call instructions 10 55 10 55 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 10 Interrupt Pointers I 1 Definition a Interrupt pointers are used as labels at the beginning of interrupt programs Interrupt pointer interrupt program label I lt Interrupt program IRET b A total of 256 interrupt points 10 1255 ca
71. 2 Select Setting the Switches of the Intelligent Function Module The switches of the intelligent function module is to set the switches of an Q series compatible intelligent function module using GX Developer The settings of the switches set by GX Developer is written from High Performance model QCPU to each intelligent function module at the leading edge or reset of High Performance model QCPU Intelligent function GX Developer CPU module Power supply module Pedy Foie Rois On CPU CY Switch setting of the i Parameter module Reset Switch setting intelligent function module mo at the I O assignment Setting the Switches of the Intelligent Function Module In the I O assignment sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box specify the desired switch setting Select Intelli in the type column of a slot for which to set the switches of the intelligent function module Intelli Select Switch Setting Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent functional module Input fomat EE Slot Type Model name Slot Type Model name Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 lt LC Pl PLC PLC Switch setting Of 0 Intell Intelli Detailed setting afalalalalalala afa alalalalala If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correct
72. 2 Automatic refresh settings Set the points to be transmitted by each CPU and the device in which the data is to be stored with the PC parameter multiple PLC settings for when automatic refresh is to be carried out ee Switching between PE ae Change screens setting numbers Sets the header number of the device for which automatic refresh is to be performed uses consecutive numbers from the setup device number to the number of specified points Range of transmission setting for each CPU Send range for each PLC PLC side dyos a 2C share memory G O E gaor G meat A eo teri a e U MEN o en ae a Setting switch range of transmission for each CPU refresh range 1 Itis possible to set four ranges from Setting 1 to Setting 4 for the refresh setting with the setting switch For example it is possible to set the refresh function to divide ON OFF data into bit devices with Setting 1 and other data into word devices with Setting 2 2 The transmission range for each CPU is set in units of two common CPU memory points two words Becomes 2 points when specifying the word device with the CPU device and 32 points when specifying the bit device Machine data for which the point is set at 0 with the range of transmission for each CPU will not be refreshed As the bit device becomes 16 points at one point of the common CPU memory when refreshing is performed with 32 points between BO and B1F on th
73. 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 5 Memory Card 1 Memory card a Amemory card is used to expand the size of an internal memory of the High Performance model QCPU b There are three types of memory cards for use in the High Performance model QCPU SRAM card Flash card and ATA card POINTS 1 Before the memory card can be used for the first time the memory card must be formatted by the GX Dveloper For details regarding the formatting procedure by the GX Dveloper refer to GX Dveloper manuals Before writing data onto a Flash card all previous data stored on the Flash card are erased For this reason to write data onto the Flash card you must first read and copy all previous data stored on the Flash card before writing necessary data thereon Please note that an error may occur if data stored on the Flash card is used in a sequence program with data being written on the Flash card Programs are stored in the memory card in 512 bytes 128 steps step units 2 Stored Data A memory card holds parameter and program data See Section 6 1 for the types of data stored in a memory card 3 Format a Formatting To format a memory card choose Online Format PLC memory and then select Memory card RAM or Memory card ROM in the Target memory list box See Section 6 2 for the PLC Memory Format dialog box b Memory capacity after formatted Table 6 4 shows the memory capacity of a forma
74. 740 760 780 SISIS 4BFADFAFF S1F 79F Prohibit Prohibit Power supply module When module is installed an error occurs Number of CPU Maximum number of extension stages Maximum number Module count setting for 1 3 4 the multiple PLC setting Number eb inocu 64 modules 63 modules 62 modules 4096 7 extension stages Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B QA1S65B QA1S68B QC05B QCO6B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B A maximum of 7 extension base units can be mounted Do not use extension cable longer than 13 2 m 43 28 feet 1 2 3 When using an extension cable it should not be connected to or allowed to come close to the main circuit high voltage and large current 4 When setting the number of extension stages set the number in ascending order to avoid setting the same number repeatedly 5 If Q5 C1 B Q6 C B and QA1S6 0 B are to be mounted on the same extension base unit be sure to connect Q5 C1 B Q6 C1 B at first and then Notes QA1S6 1B Make the setting of the number of levels of an extension base unit starting with Q5 C1 B Q6 C1 B in a descending order Connect an extension cable between the OUT connector of an extension base unit and the IN connector of another extension base unit An error may occur if more than 66 expensed base units are mounted 6 7 8 Refer to section 14 2 1 when
75. A cannot be inserted or remove insert ON Remove insert removed prohibit flag prohibited Memory card OFF Remove insert e Turned ON by user to enable the removal insertion of remove insert prohibited memory card U S New enable flag ON Remove insert enabled Turned OFF by the system after the card is removed Always ON S Initial QCPU Memory card B OFF Unusable usable flags ON Use enabled ON when memory card B is ready for use by user S Initial New Always ON S Initial QCPU Memory card B OFF No protect protect flag ON Protect Goes ON when memory card B protect switch is ON S Initial New Always ON S Initial QCPU Drive 3 flag OFF No drive 3 ON Drive 3 present Goes ON when drive 3 card 2 RAM area is present S Initial Initial SM623 Drive 4 flag OFF Ne dives Always ON ON Drive 4 present Goes ON when drive 4 card 2 ROM area is present S Initial Memory card B one Not imuse Goes ON when memory card B is in use S Initial in use flag In use Memory card B T Remove insert enabled remove insert ON Remove insert prohibit flag prohibited SM640 File register use OEE File register not in use S Status ON File register in use ae SM650 Commentuse OFF File register notin use Goes ON when comment file is in use Statue ON File register in use change OFF Internal memory execution Goes ON while boot operation is in process S Status ON Boot operation in Goes OF
76. An extension which corresponds to the file type designated when the file was written in the High Performance model QCPU by the GX Developer is automatically appended to the file name 2 The following Windows reserved words cannot be used for a file name e COM1 to COM9 e LPT1 to LPT9 e AUX e CON e PRN e NUL e CLOCK b Date amp time The date amp time when the file was written from the GX Developer to the High Performance model QCPU is indicated The on screen date and time indicate the GX Developer side date and time c Size The file size when written from the GX Developer to the High Performance model QCPU is indicated in byte units To view the latest High Performance model QCPU data click on the Update button Files are stored in the High Performance model QCPU program file and standard ROM in 4 byte units 1 step and at the memory card in 1 byte units When calculating a file s size at least 64 bytes 136 bytes for programs will be added to all user created files other than file registers 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 1 About the High Performance model QCPU s Memory 1 User Memory A user memory can be created within the memory of the High Performance model QCPU by using the GX Developer sequence program The High Performance model QCPU has the following built in memories e Program memory e Standard RAM e Standard ROM A memory card can be installed on the High Performance model QCPU to
77. CPU If all SD64 to SD79 anunciator Nos are switched OFF the USER LED on the CPU front display is switched OFF If an error occurs to continue operation with the higher priority over an anunciator when the anunciator is switched ON eliminate the error by executing an LEDR instruction See Section 7 20 2 for precedence In this case executing an LEDR instruction will not switch the anunciator OFF To switch the anunciator OFF you must first eliminate the error before executing the LEDR instruction because the error takes precedence over the anunciator 10 15 10 15 10 DEVICES 10 2 6 Edge relay V MELSEC Q 1 Definition a An edge relay is a device which stores the operation results ON OFF information from the beginning of the ladder block Edge relays can only be used at contacts and cannot be used as coils xo Xt xio vi J A Ir TI Edge relay Stores the X0 X1 and X10 operation results b The same edge relay number cannot be used twice in programs executed by the High Performance model QCPU 2 Edge relay applications Edge relays are used for detecting the leading edge OFF to ON in programs configured using index qualification Ladder example SM400 I Hov ko z1 H Index register Z1 OFF A 7 FOR K10H Repetition 10 times designation xozi vozi z MOZ1 4 1 scan ON at X0 leading edge SM400 INC Z1 7 Increment Index Register Z1 1 f NEXT H Return to FOR instruc
78. Cd PU operation mode aino HW eros C a C A settings eoon SSCS o o i Omane a o Input setings ouside ormege a a Output setings ouside ore up a a Refresh setting Transmission range for each CPU ae a eee CPU devices PAT 1 Necessity of setup column Items that must be set up for multiple PLC systems operations not possible if not set up A Items that may be set up when required for multiple PLC systems Operations carried out with the default values when not set up Items that are the same as single CPU systems x2 Descriptions Items that have the same settings for all CPU modules on the multiple PLC system A Items that have the same settings for all High Performance model QCPUs and PC CPU module on the multiple PLC system items that do not have settings for motion CPUs Items that can be setup up individually for each CPU modules on the multiple PLC system 14 13 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 14 14 MELSEC Q After multiple PLC settings or other parameters are changed reflect the changes to keep uniformity among all machines in the multiple PLC system then reset the PLC No 1 It is possible to transfer across and use the CPU settings and I O allocations set up for other projects with the GX Developer Refer to section 19 2 3 for details on transferring and using multiple PLC settings and I O allocations a CPU count setting setup necessary 1 T
79. Device Setting Set the device to perform sampling trace in the Trace Data Setting of the Sampling Trace screen Sampling trace Execute and status Trace data Conditions Device specification Bit device Device Connect Coil Connect Coil Bit Device Maximum of 50 bit devices can be set as follows X DX Y DY M L F SM V B SB e T contact T coil ST contact ST coil e C contact C coil oJ ahs ek Word device X J Y J B J_ SB BLL S Word Device Maximum of 50 word devices can be set as follows MELSEC Q Close Read file Write file Delete file Read from PLC Write to PLC Trace result EWE H e T current value ST current value C current value D SD W SW R Z ZR eU G J W J SW 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b Setting the Trace Condition Set the trace condition in the trace condition setting of the sampling trace screen The trace condition setting can set to No of traces Trace point setup Trigger point setup and Additional trace information Sampling trace Execute and status Trace data Conditions Close No of traces Additional trace information Read file No of times 2072 T Times T Time After trigger i T Step no Write file number of times fi 024 be Times I Program name 3 Delete file Trace point setup Each scan Y ms D
80. END ON Error common information OFF No error Error individual bie Turns on when there is error individual information and the S information ON Error individual SM1600 is on Each END information New SM1653 STOP contact STOP status e Turns on when in the STOP status New Each END New New SM1654 PAUSE contact PAUSE status Turns on when in the PAUSE status S Each END SM1655 STEP RUN contact STEP RUN status e Turns on when in the STEP RUN status s Each END 1 Stores other system CPU diagnostic information and system information 2 This shows the special relay SM _ _ for the host system CPU 12 For redundant system tracking for Q4AR only Either the backup mode or the second mode is valid for SM1700 to SM1799 All is turned off for standalone system Set by ACPU Applicable OFF Execution not possible ON Execution possible S status e Turns on when tracking is executed normally change SM1712 SM1714 SM1715 SM1716 SM1717 SM1718 SM1719 SM1720 sa Q4AR OFE Hansinission e One scan turns on when the uncompleted SM17722 Block11 corresponding data transmission S status New ON Transmission SM1723 Block 12 p g change Sna SM1724 has been completed SM1725 SM1726 SM1727 SM1728 SM1730 Block 19 SM1731 Block 20 SM1732 Block 21 SM1733 Block 22 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued i Set by ACPU Applicable Exp SM1734 B
81. END processing is executed for the scan with both remote PAUSE contact and PAUSE permission flag SM206 on 2 When the remote PAUSE contact is off or SM206 is turned off the PAUSE state is canceled and the sequence program calculation is performed again from step 0 ON XL ON when PAUSE condition met PAUSE state Fig 7 6 PAUSE Time Chart with Remote PAUSE Contact 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b GX Developer function Serial Communication Module Method The remote PAUSE operation can be performed from the GX Developer function or serial communication module The GX Developer function operation is performed from on line remote operation The serial communication module and Ethernet interface module are controlled by commands complying with the MC protocol For details of the MC protocol refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 1 When the END processing is executed for the scan where the remote PAUSE command was accepted the PAUSE state contact SM204 is turned on When the scan after the PAUSE state contact is turned on is executed to the END process it enters the PAUSE state and stops the calculations 2 When the remote RUN command is received the sequence program calculations are performed again from step 0 Remote PAUSE command Remote RUN command ON ON when PAUSE condition met SM204 RUN PAUSE
82. Execute count The number of times the interrupt program was executed is displayed setting the starting point of when the operation status is at RUN When the number reaches 65536 times it is reset to 0 b Common Comment This indicates comments on the devices to be created at interrupt points 10 to 1255 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 11 3 Scan time measurement 1 What is Scan Time Measurement a This is a function to display the set program interval processing time b To specify a scan time measurement range follow any of the following two steps e Use the circuit monitor screen to make the setting e Use the Scan Time Measurement dialog box to make the setting c The time for the subroutines and interrupt program can be measured as well d The time including the time required for processing sub routines when the sub routine CALL command exists within the range of scan time measurement The amount of time required for executing interruption programs and fixed cycle execution type programs is all added to this Measurement range Main program Sub routine program Measurement range 2 Measuring Scan Time To measure scan time follow the following steps a Display the leading edge of the circuit of which to measure scan time and the set the monitor mode Y20 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b The scan time measurement range is specified The specified area is highligh
83. FO to 255 is turned on by or SET F the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by executing or instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on CPU front to ON position If another F number has been detected the clearing of SD62 causes the nest number to be stored in SD62 When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction the step number at which the error has occurred is stored in BIN code Thereafter each time operation error occurs the contents of SD1010 are renewed App 45 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special i i Corresponding Special Register after Register for Name Meaning Details aah CPU Conversion Conversion Modification When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction the step number at which Step number at k 7 D9011 SD1011 Eforeta whieh operation the error has occurred is stored in BIN code Since p ae ae Secured storage into SD1011 is made when SM1011 changes from off to on the contents of SD1011 cannot be renewed unless SM1011 is cleared by user program ers The I O control mode set is returned in any of the following numbers l ntrol m D9014 SD1014 O control mode aoe ol made 0 Both input and output in direct mode 1 Input in refresh mode output in direct mode 3 Both input and output i
84. H network Usable Unusable system or CC Link system REMARK 1 See Section 4 3 1 for details regarding the refresh mode 10 9 10 9 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 3 Internal relays M 1 Definition a Internal relays are auxiliary relays which cannot be latched by the programmable controller s internal latch memory backup All internal relays are switched OFF at the following times e When power is switched from OFF to ON e When reset occurs e When latch clear operation is executed b There are no restrictions regarding the number of contacts N O contacts N C contacts used in the program No restrictions regarding the quantity used MO switches ON at X0 OFF to ON xO vA T SET MO The internal relay MO ON can only be used for internal High Performance model QCPU processing and cannot MO K20 be output externally TO Y20 MO ON OFF information is output from the output module ye to an external destination X1 MO A M100 lt M2047 Figure 10 5 Internal Relay 2 Procedure for external outputs Outputs Y are used to output sequence program operation results to an external destination 1 Latch relays L should be used when a latch memory backup is required See Section 10 2 4 for details regarding latch relays 10 10 10 10 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 4 Latch relays L 1 Definition a Latch relays are auxiliary relays which can be latched by the programmable
85. High Performance model QCPU has 8192 link register points When subsequent points after Point 8192 are used for link registers change a number of points setting of link registers on the Device sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box 10 29 10 29 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Using link registers in a network system In order to use link registers in the network system network parameter settings must be made Link registers not set in the network parameter settings can be used as data registers 1 For details regarding network parameters refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual 10 2 14 Special link registers SW 1 Definition a Special link registers are used to store data on the communication status and errors of an intelligent function b Because the data link information is stored as numeric data the special link registers serve as a tool for identifying the locations and causes of faults Number of special link register points There are 2048 special link register points from SWO to SW7FF The special link register points are assigned at the rate of 512 points per intelligent function module such as a MELSECNET H network module By default the following points are assigned for link registers as shown below Special link register swo S For the 1st network module SW1FF SW200 5 For the 2nd network module SW3FF SW400 For the 3rd network module SW5FF
86. If the scan time execution time for scan execution type program low speed execution program exceeds the WDT setting value a WDT ERROR error code 5000 occurs and High Performance model QCPU operation is stopped The WDT measurement error is 10 ms Therefore a WDT setting t of 10 ms will result in a WDT ERROR if the scan time is in the following range 10 ms lt t lt 20 ms 1 Use the GX Developer s Program Monitor List to check the execution time of a program being executed See Section 7 11 1 for further information on the GX Developer s Program Monitor List 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 3 Low speed execution type program 1 Definition of low speed execution type program Low speed execution type programs are executed only during constant scanning surplus time or during the period designated for low speed execution program execution time a b c 1 3 For a constant scan time with enhanced control accuracy designate a constant scan time setting at the PLC RAS in the PLC parameter Setting range 0 5 to 2000 ms setting units 0 5 ms To secure execution time for low speed execution type programs at each scan designate a low speed execution program execution time in the PLC RAS of the PLC parameter Setting range 1 to 2000 ms setting units 1 ms In order to execute a low speed execution type program set either the constant scan
87. Module Users Manual d The switch setting of the intelligent function module is valid in the following cases e After the PLC is turned on e When the High Performance model QCPU is reset 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 9 Monitoring Function 1 What is Monitoring Function a This is a function to read the program device and intellignet function module status of the High Performance model QCPU through the GX Developer The High Performance model QCPU performs the END processing to handle monitor requests from the GX Developer The results of High Performance model QCPU s END processing are displayed on the GX Developer side b By setting the monitoring conditions with the GX Developer it is possible to monitor the High Performance model QCPU operation status with specified conditions It is also possible to maintain the monitoring status with specified conditions by setting the monitoring stop conditions c The use of local devices for execution of multiple programs makes it possible to monitor local device data 7 9 1 Monitor condition setting 1 Setting monitor execution conditions when monitoring circuits Choose Online gt Monitor gt Monitor condition to open the Monitor Condition dialog box The following shows an example in which to start a monitoring operation at the leading edge of Y70 Monitor condition B Select when monitoring gt F Device bvth hisor Device Condition ard y tne contents
88. ON a special relay SM62 switches ON and the Nos and quantity of anunciators which switched ON are stored at the special registers SD62 to SD79 e Special relay SM62 0 Switches ON if even one anunciator switches ON e Special register ceeeeeeeee SD62 No of first anunciator which switched ON is stored here SD63 t sakes The number quantity of anunciators which are ON is stored here SD64 to SD79 Anunciator Nos are stored in the order in which they switched ON The same anunciator No is stored at SD62 and SD64 The anunciator No stored at SD62 is also registered in the fault history area c The use of anunciators in the fault detection program permits the user to check for the presence absence of fault and to check the fault content anunciator No by monitoring the special registers SD62 to SD79 when the special relay SM62 switches ON bp EXaMples so oe ee ee ee Ee ee ee a The program which outputs the No of the ON annunciator F5 is shown below Fault detection program xo X10 _ H sT F5 H REIS A OI S TA S62 OFF to ON gt SD62 O0to5 SM62 z SD63 Oto 1 _ Boop spez kayz20 SD64 Oto 5 SD65 0 Output of annunciator A No which switched ON SD79 0 Annunciator ON detection 10 12 10 12 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Anunciator ON procedure a Anunciator ON procedure Anunciator operation can be controlled by th
89. OUT C execution intervals 3 Resetting the counter a Counter present values are not cleared even if the OUT Ci instruction switches OFF Use the RST C_ instruction to clear the counter s present value and switch the contact OFF b The count value is cleared and the contact is switched OFF at the point when the RST C_ instruction is executed Ladder example XO c R co Counter reset timing END RST CO END RST CO END RST CO Sequence program i i i ON xo o Execution RSTCO OFF y instruction t t Count value cleared amp contact OFF Count value cleared amp contact OFF 4 Maximum counting speed The counter can count only when the input condition ON OFF time is longer than the execution interval of the corresponding OUT C instruction The maximum counting speed is calculated by the following formula Maximum counting _ _ htimes sec speed Cmax 100 T 1 1 See Section 10 2 1 for details regarding direct access inputs 2 2 The duty is the count input signal s ON OFF time ratio expressed as a percentage value n Duty 2 T Execution interval of the OUT CC instruction Ti A gt o When T12 T2 n T1472 x 100 When T1 lt T2 n 2 x 100 T1 T2 Ti T2 cr F i Count input signal OFF 10 25 10 25 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q Interrupt counters 1 Definition Interrupt counters are devices which count the number of interrupt factor
90. Processing a The PAUSE state is when the sequence program operations are paused by remote PAUSE function while maintaining the output and device memory status Refer to Section 7 6 2 for details regarding of remote PAUSE function 4 High Performance model QCPU Operation Processing with RUN STOP state Operation processing Sequence program operation processing Device memory Y M L S T C D Executes up to the tole OS saves the output state Maintains the status immediately RUN TOP END COSO asad ang and all output are off before the STOP state Starts executing the operation from the status immediately Determined by the output f he STOP Wh STOP to RUN Starts at step 0 mode of the PLC parameter Be oret ee 9 state Sue device initial value is designated at STOP to RUN however the value is set Local devices are cleared External output The High Performance model QCPU performs the following in any of RUN STOP and Pause state 1 0 module refresh processing e Data communication with the GX Developer and serial communication module e Refresh process of MELSECNET H and CC Link For this reason I O monitor and test operation using GX Developer reading writing from the serial communication communication with another station using MELSECNET H and communication with a remote station over the CC Link can be made even in the STOP or PAUSE status 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUT
91. QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES 1 High Performance model QCPU s file type a The High Performance model QCPU parameters programs comment data etc are assigned file names and extension and are then stored in the following memories e Program memory e Standard ROM e Memory card When reading and writing this data from the GX Developer to the High Performance model QCPU files can be specified by their types parameter program comment etc without regard to their extension The GX Developer automatically assigns the appropriate extension for the file type which has been specified b It is impossible to set and use the same extension stage number with two or more extension base units High Performance model QCPU file management The use of different file and extension names permits multiple files to be stored in the High Performance model QCPU Because the High Performance model QCPU can also process a given program as one file programs created can be managed individually according to their designer process or function by using different program file names Moreover program execution is possible for multiple programs stored at the High Performance model QCPU See Chapter 4 for High Performance model QCPU program execution details File written from GX Developer The High Performance model QCPU stores files written from GX Developer in the memory program memory standard ROM me
92. RST Ci instruction in the sequence program prior to the FEND instruction f The interrupt counter s count value can be read out by using the sequence program MOV instruction 10 27 10 27 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 12 Data registers D 1 Definition a Data registers are memory devices which store numeric data 32768 to 32767 or 0000H to FFFFH b Data registers consist of 16 bits per point with reading and writing executed in 16 bit units b15 a c Ifthe data registers are used for 32 bit instructions the data will be stored in registers Dn and Dn 1 The lower 16 bits of data are stored at the data register No Dn designated in the sequence program and the higher 16 bits of data are stored in the designated register No 1 Dn 1 For example if register D12 is designated in the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in D12 and the upper 16 bits are stored in D13 H _ pov ks00000 oH Processing object D12 D13 D13 D12 Upper 16 bits _Lower 16 bits Ha Je Two data registers can store a range of numeric data from 2147483648 to 2147483647 or from OH to FFFFFFFFn d Data stored by the sequence program is maintained until another data save operation occurs 10 28 10 28 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 13 Link registers W 1 Definition a A link register is the High Performance model QCPU memory used to refresh the High Performance model QCPU with
93. Remote reset section and then write parameters onto the High Performance model QCPU Qn H Parameter x Caystem PLC fle PLC RAS Device Program Bootfie SFC ent Timer limit setup Low 100 Common pointer P After 0 4095 ineei ms 1ms 1000ms High f10 0 ms 0 1ms 100ms speed Number of empty slots xi Pot Allow the RUN PAUSE contact ms 4 contacts remote reset System interrupt settings RUN Xx 0 1 FFF Interrupt counter start No 0 768 PAUSE x X0 X1 FFF 128 fixed scaninterval 100 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms Nar Remote reset 129 fixed feimin V Allow scan interval 40 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms 130 fixed ono pee mode at STOP to RUN kela 20 0 ms 05me 1000me Previous state 131 fixed foo C Recalculate output is 1 scan later scaninterval 100 ms 0 5ms 1000ms Floating point arithmetic processing Interrupt program Fixed scan program setting F Perform internal arithmetic operations I High speed execution in double precision Intelligent functional module setting Unit synchronization I Synchronize intelligent module s pulse up Interrupt pointer settings Compatibility with A PLC IV Use special relay special register from SM SD1000 Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End setup Cancel b When the High Performance model QCPU is at RUN state use remote STOP to arrange the STOP state c Reset High Performance model QCPU with the remote RESET operation 1 For the GPPW functi
94. SM1566 S TRUCK New Q4AR SM1567 SM1568 SM1569 SM1570 SM1571 SM1572 SM1573 SM1574 SM1575 SM1576 SM1577 SM1578 SM1579 SM1580 SM1581 SM1582 SM1583 pans Switehing status trom OFF Normal Turns on when could not be executed normally when the S Error SM1590 ON Switching network module detects a network error and issues a the network module wid ocurrs unsuccessful switching request to the host system CPU App 19 App 19 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List 11 For redundant system Other system CPU information 1 for Q4AR onlySM1600 to SM1650 only valid for the CPU redundant system backup mode so they cannot be refreshed during the separate mode Either the backup mode or the separate mode is valid for the SM4651 to SM1699 SM1600 to SM1699 are all turned off for standalone system Set by ACPU Applicable Number Name Meaning Explanation When Set m OOO aie x2 l OFF No error e Turns on if a error occurs in the diagnosis results s SM1600 Diagnosis error z Including external diagnosis ON Error Each END e Remains on even if returns to normal thereafter New ORF No self e Turns on when an error occurs in the self diagnosis Self diagnosis error diagnosis error results gt New ON Self diagnosis A F Each END iror e Remains on even if returns to normal thereafter OFF No error Error common A e Turns on when there is error common information and the S New information SM1600 is on Each
95. SMIS pioldmode ON Hold range over occurs for the S OUT instruction range check 9 New OFF Redundant system backup mode independent system Redundant system separate mode OFF System A fixed mode ON Previous control system latch mode ON SM1510 Operation mode Start mode when power supply is on e Turns on when the operating mode is redundant system separate Turns on when the start mode for a redundant system when the power is turned on is the previous control system S Initial latch mode Start mode when CPU OFF Initial start e Turns on when the CPU operation mode is hot start when oa l N SMIS is started ON Hot start the redundant system is started up nity ow SM1513 Operation status when OFF Initial start e Turns on when the CPU operation mode is hot start when S Initial CPU is started ON Hot start the redundant system is actually start up Operation mode when OFF Initial start e Turns on when the operation is hot start when the CPU Ne l N Shits CPU is switched ON Hot start operation is switched for a redundant system inital w OFF Output reset Turns on when the output mode during a stop error is S SM1515 Output hold mode ION Output hold output hold Each END SM1516 Operation system OFF Control system status ON Standby system OFF Power supply SM1517 CPU startup status on startup ON Operation Tracking execution system switch starup
96. Setting 3 x Send range for each PLC PLC share memory G Point Stat End Statt__ __End _ 0812 0813 B120 B13F 0804 0807 B140 B17F 0802 0805 B180 B1BF UR c HS The first and last will be calculated automatically with the GX Developer 16 5 16 5 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q e Each of the setting 1 to setting 4 devices can be set up independently For example the PLC No 1 can be set up as a link relay and the PLC No 2 can be set up as an internal relay Refresh setting for PLC No 1 Change screens Setting 1 Change screens Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLC _ RLC share memory G A Pann Nost nd stat ed Noy 16 0802 ott OW Nob 1f osoz oat wi WITF ae ee o RS GED SSeS as aes Ss s Set the same point for all the PLC Refresh setting for PLC No 2 Change screens etting Change screens SCN for each PLC PLC side device PLC PLC fare memo G Dev starting WO pinn Kea Eat Sat Ee _ No1 16 0802 oti WOW Nog 16 0802 0811 ice 16 6 ice e When the PLC No 1 and PLC No 2 devices have been set up with different devices e When the PLC No 1 and PLC No 2 devices have been set up with the same device 16 6 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM Other machine s common MELSEC Q An outline of the operations when the
97. UD GD User s free area The area for performing communication between CPU modules with the use of the multiple PLC system s S TO command FROM command and intelligent function module device UL GL The area used after the number of points set for automatic refresh is used An area between 800H and FFH can be used as the user s free area when automatic refresh is not being performed 16 15 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES MELSEC Q 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES 17 1 Range of Control PLC Communications The relationship between control PLCs and control modules I O modules intelligent function modules special function modules is the same as with independent CPU systems There is no restriction to control the control module with the control PLC 17 2 Range of Non control PLC Communications It is possible for non control PLCs to read the contents of the intelligent function module s buffer memory It is also possible to load non control module input X ON OFF data and another machine module output Y ON OFF data with the PLC parameters Input modules controlled by other machines can be used as interlocks for the host machine and the output status to external equipment being controlled by other machines can be confirmed However it is not possible for non control PLCs to output ON OFF da
98. Use the remote STOP to bring the High Performance model QCPU to the STOP status b Use the Latch Clear to bring the High Performance model QCPU to the Latch Clear status 1 The GX Developer function operations are performed with on line remote operation 2 The serial communication module and Ethernet interface module are controlled by commands complying with the MC protocol For details of the MC protocol refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual c To return the High Performance model QCPU to the RUN status after the remote latch clear perform a remote RUN operation 3 Precautions a Either remote latch clear or latch clear by RESET L CLR switch cannot be performed when the High Performance model QCPU is at RUN status b The latch range for the device set in the parameter mode device setting has a range that makes latch clear RESET L CLR switch valid or invalid Remote latch clear operation is reset independent of latch clear valid invalid setting c Devices that are not latched are cleared when the remote latch clear is executed The data in the failure history storage memory of the High Performance model QCPU will also be cleared by a remote latch clear operation 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 6 5 Relationship of the remote operation and High Performance model QCPU RUN STOP switch 1 Relationship of the Remote Operation and High Performance model QCPU Switch T
99. X Y MELSECNET H LX LY f e During execution of the ZCOM command e During END processing CC Link refresh CC Link RX RY During execution of the COM command e During execution of the ZCOM command f A total of thirty two devices can be registered for enforced ON and OFF g Sequence program operations take precedence when used with an output Y contact h The enforced ON OFF and cancelled status including those that are not set up can be confirmed with the GX Developer Confirmation is also possible with the MODE judgment LED when at least one device is registered the MODE judgment LED will flash 200 ms ON 200 ms OFF i Itis possible to register enforced ON OFF for external I O in the same CPU from multiple GX Developers connected to the network However when enforced ON OFF is registered in the same device from multiple GX Developers it will assume the most recent registered ON OFF status Owing to this there are cases when the GX Developer executed first will display different ON OFF information to the CPU ON OFF information When performing enforced ON OFF from multiple GX Developers ensure that the most up to date information is set with the Load Registration Status switch before executing the enforced ON OFF procedure 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Operation procedure The operation procedure is explained below a Register enforced ON OFF for the specified device On line Debug E
100. additions then the situation shown in the diagram below is to be observed 1 0 X Y X YO t I O numbers being used by the main base units and g f additional base units X Y3FF X Y400 to Held back for future additions X Y4FF X Y500 For MELSECNET H remote I O station For CC Link remote station I O numbers that can be used by remote stations X Y1FFF If network parameter setting is not made with the CC Link system 2048 points in the range from X Y1000 to X Y17FF are assigned to the master local module of the CC Link having the smallest number There is no control over the sequence for allocating IO numbers for MELSECNET H remote I O networks CC Link or other networks 5 10 5 10 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 6 I O Assignment by GX Developer This section describes the I O assignment using GX Developer 5 6 1 Purpose of I O assignment by GX Developer O assignment by GX Developer is used under the following circumstances 1 Reserving points when converting to module other than 16 point modules You can reserve the number of points in advance so that you do not have to change the I O numbers when the current module will be changed to one with a different number of I O points in the future For example you can assign a 32 point I O module to the slot where a 16 point O module is installed at present 2 Preventing I O numbers from changing when converting modules You can avoid the c
101. and month Clock data OFF Ignored i ae displa ON Displa day hour minute and minute are indicated on the CPU O pay 2ispiay front LED display Clock data set OFF Ignored SM1025 SM1026 M9027 SM1027 z z z z z z z z z e N NS N N N N N a R oo N N D Ee e Clock data read OFF Ignored e Reads clock data to SD1025 to SD1028 in BCD when request ON Read request SD1028 is on The SM1029 relay is turned on using a sequence M9028 SM1028 program to process all data communication requests accepted during one scan in the END processing of that scan e The batch processing of the data communication requests can be turned on and off during running e The default is OFF processed one at a time for each END processing in the order in which data communication requests are accepted Batch processing OFF Batch processing not of data conducted communications JON Batch processing requests conducted M9029 SM1029 oe 0 05 SM1030 0 1 second clock Seconds aconds 0 1 seconds 0 1 seconds 0 1 second 0 2 second 1 second and 2 second clocks are generated Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even 0 5 during scan if corresponding time has elapsed seconds 0 5 Starts with off when power is turned on or reset is gag boa performed 1 2 second clock seconds 1 seconds 2n minute clock
102. and output Y of the High Performance model QCPU is produced to the output module intelligent function module The I O refresh is executed before the sequence program operation starts During constant scan execution the I O refresh is executed after the constant scan delay time has elapsed The I O refresh is executed at each constant scan cycle 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 3 Automatic refresh of the intelligent function module When automatic refresh of intelligent function modules is set communication with the intelligent function modules of the designated data is performed Refer to the manual for the intelligent function modules to use for details regarding of the automatic refresh setting of intelligent function modules 4 3 4 END processing This is a post processing to return the sequence program execution to step 0 after completing the whole sequence program operation processing once a When a refresh request is made from the network module refresh processing is performed b When the trace point of the sampling trace is at every scan after END instruction execution the set device status is stored in the sampling trace area POINT 1 When the constant scan function refer to Section 7 2 is set END processing time result is stored for the interval after END processing to the next scan 2 When executing the low speed execution type program the low speed E
103. automatic refresh function is divided into four ranges Setting 1 Link relay B Setting 2 Link register W Setting 3 Data register D Setting 4 Internal relay M and then performed is shown in the illustration below Reading performed Device Setting 1 PLC No 1 Common CPU memory Bo to with the PLC No 1 END process CPU memory PLC No 2 rN wie PLC No 2 transmission data No 1 PLC No 2 transmission Maximum data No 2 2 k words PLC No 2 transmission data No 3 PLC No 2 transmission data No 4 y PLC No 3 A ui PLC No 3 transmission data No 1 PLC No 3 transmission Maximum data No 2 2 k words PLC No 3 transmission data No 3 PLC No 3 transmission data No 4 PLC No 4 x PLC No 4 transmission data No 1 PLC No 4 transmission Maximum data No 2 2 k words PLC No 4 transmission data No 3 PLC No 4 transmission data No 4 16 7 e 3 Precautions a gt S7 A gt ing 2 A Wo Setting 3 PLC No 1 transmission Writing during the END process A PLC No 1 transmission data No 1 PLC No 2 reception data No 1 PLC No 3 reception data No 1 PLC No 4 reception data No 1 PLC No 1 transmission data No 2 PLC No 2 reception data No 2 PLC No 3 reception data No 2 PLC No 4 reception data No 2 PLC No 1 transmission data No 3 PLC No 2 reception data No 3 PLC No 3 reception data No 3 PLC No
104. below Most significant bit for positive negative discrimination Bit name gt b15 b14 b13 b12 b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 215 214 213 912 911 210 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 I Hom om tt Decimal value 32768 16384 81924096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Negative value when most significant bit is 1 Fig 4 13 Numeric Expressions for High Performance model QCPU Registers b Usable numeric data for High Performance model QCPU As shown in Fig 4 11 the numeric expression range is 32768 to 32767 Therefore numeric data within this range can be stored in the High Performance model QCPU registers 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 8 2 HEX Hexadecimal 1 Hexadecimal notation In the hexadecimal system 4 bits of binary data are expressed by 1 digit 4 bits of binary data can express 16 values 0 to 15 In the hexadecimal system values from 0 to 15 are expressed by 1 digit This is accomplished by using alphabetic characters following 9 with a carry occurring after F as follows A comparison of binary hexadecimal and decimal numeric expressions is shown in Table 4 3 below Table 4 3 Comparison of BIN HEX and DEC Numeric Expressions DEC Decimal HEX Hexadecimal BIN Binary 0 0 0 1 1 Eo 2 2 10 3 3 11 9 9 1001 10 A 1010 11 B 1011 12 C 1100 13 D 1101 14 E 1110 15 F 1111 a 16 10 1 0000 17 11 1 0001 47 2F 1
105. code 3009 will be triggered if more than one AnS series corresponding I O module or special function module is set up and the multiple PLC system will fail to start up Control PLCs can be set for each slot a CPU CPU CPU CPU Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module supply 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 2 3 4 4 4 AnS AnS AnS AnS AnS AnS AnS AnS Module No Module 4 Q312B Same CPU set in the control PLC AnS AnS AnS AnS AnS 14 9 QA1S68B The Module No shown in the illustration represents the following CPU1 to CPU4 CPU s machine number Modules 1 to 4 Control PLC s machine number 14 9 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 3 Access range of control PLCs and non control PLCs The access ranges for multiple PLC system control PLCs and non control PLCs are shown below I O setting outside of the grou Access target Control PLCs g group Disabled Enabled input X O o o J x Output Y a a co er een putter Reins o x o o o memory wins d o d x S s 14 10 14 10 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 14 2 4 Modules that have mounting restrictions Product Q series MELSECNET H network modules Q series Ethernet interface modules Q series CC Link system master local modules MELSECNET MINI S3 data link modules AnS series corresponding Special function modules Inter
106. common memory of Motion CPU from High Performance model QCPU with multiple PLC instructions FROM instruction Control instruction from the High Performance model QCPU to the motion CPU with special motion commands Writing and reading of the device data from the High Performance model QCPU to the motion CPU PC CPU module with special interactive multiple PLC communication commands Event issuance from High Performance model QCPU to PC CPU module using instructions dedicated to multiple PLC communication Processing during resets and errors See Sections 14 2 7 and 14 2 8 The processing performed when resets and errors occur are different for the multiple PLC system s No 1 machine and the No 2 to No 4 machines a High Performance QCP for PLC No 1 can be reset with a multiple PLC system CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 and motion CPU cannot be reset b Multiple PLC system operations will be suspended when a stop error occurs with the PLC No 1 It is possible to select whether to suspend or continue with multiple PLC system operations when a stop error occurs with PLC Nos 2 to 4 and motion CPU Clock function An intelligent function module with which the error code and time of occurrence is stored in the buffer memory when an error is triggered is available time data read from the High Performance model QCPU The PLC No 1 time data will be stored as the time that the error occurred regardless of whether the module concerned is a
107. confirmation be checked Multiple CPU setting Defines settings for establishment of a multiple CPU system Number of CPUs Designates the number of CPUs used in the multiple CPU system Designates the operation of the multiple CPU system upon a stopping error of the PLC No 2 to No 4 CPU modules The multiple CPU system is stopped if a stopping error occurs to the PLC No 1 machine Fixed InGur Sting b tside drou Designates whether the input state of the input module and intelligent function p 9 group module controlled by other machines is acquired or not Designates whether the output state of the output module controlled by other Output setting outside group machines is acquired or not Operation mode Designates the devices and the number of points of data transfer in automatic Petresti setting refresh between High Performance model QCPUs of the multiple PLC system Network parameter sae ere Designates network parameters for MELSECNET H and Ethernet CC Link setting Designates parameters for CC Link Designates parameters for MELSECNET H Ethernet and CC Link f O 9 6 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Default Value Setting Range Reference Section PLC CPU No 2 to No 4 PLC No n Empty Designate empty CPU for slots where no High Performance model QCPU is installed No setting e Input output module and intelligent function module e Input high speed input output intelligent input output mixtu
108. connected to the AJ71PT32 S3 A2C or A52G e It is set whether the error checks below are performed or not when the END instruction is processed to set the END instruction processing time e Check for breakage of fuse e Collation check of I O unit e Check of battery Set when an operation error detail factor is stored at SD1091 and remains set after normal state is restored e Set when an error occurred at execution of the microcomputer program package and remains set after normal state is restored After the head address of the required I O module is set to SD251 switching SM251 on allows the I O module to be changed in online mode One module is only allowed to be changed by one setting To be switched on in the program or peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU RUN To be switched on in peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU STOP RUN STOP mode must not be changed until O module change is complete Turned on if the SFC program is registered and turned off if it is not Should be turned on by the program if the SFC program is to be started If turned off operation output of the execution step is turned off and the SFC program is stopped e Selects the starting step when the SFC program is restarted using SM322 ON All execution conditions when the SFC program stopped are cleared and the program is started with the initial step of block 0 OFF Started with t
109. control PLC or a non control PLC 13 6 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS This chapter explains the system configuration of multiple PLC systems and the precautions to observe during multiple PLC system configuration 14 1 System Configuration This sections provides an outline on the equipment configuration of multiple PLC systems the connections with peripheral device and an output of the system s configuration MELSEG Memory card 1 3 QCPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBF QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 14 Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA l Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA Motion CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU 3 Operations cannot be guaranteed p5 when memory cards purchased on the open market are used 0 O10 FO 0 00 00 f iam Main base unit Q series power supply Input Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Output Intelligent function module 2 Additional AnS series modules Additional Q series modules D o j a lt Pun oar qa e Extension cable QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B Additional QA1S6 O base unit QA1S65B QA1S68B Additional Q6 OB base unit Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B ine
110. dialog box set the maximum number of boot files to the number of files stored in the program memory The number of boot files will be decreased by one in the following cases where A header is specified e A PLC parameter of a boot file setting is booted If boot operation is made under the following conditions it may take maximum 200 ms for each 1k steps 4kbyte during boot sequence e To boot from an ATA card To boot from standard ROM with an ATA card installed 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES f MELSEC Q If the program memory is changed when a sequence program is written in the program memory and the PLC is turned on or reset boot operation mode may be selected If the BOOT LED is lit on the front panel of the High Performance model QCPU the boot operation mode is selected Cancel the boot operation mode with the following procedure 1 Write parameters with no boot file settings into the program memory 2 Using the DIP switch of the CPU module set program memory for the valid drive setting DIP switch setting SW2 OFF SW3 OFF 3 Turn off and on the PLC or reset the CPU module After the procedure the settings given in steps 1 and 2 become valid 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES 6 8 Program File Configuration MELSEC Q 1 Program File Configuration Program files consist of a file header an execution program and allocate memory for Write during RUN Program file configu
111. during RUN measurement Monitor Functions being executed O x O OQ Write during RUN a Execution time measurement Loea a y Sampling trace CE e ee ee Can be executed at the same time However the detailed condition can only be set from one GX Developer function peripheral device In this case the detailed condition setting cannot be performed from another GX Developer function peripheral device x Can only be executed from one GX Developer function peripheral device This function cannot be executed by the GX Developer while it is being executed by another GX Developer 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 13 1 Multiple user monitoring function 1 What is Multiple User Monitoring Function a The multiple user monitoring operation can be performed by operating from multiple GX Developers connected to the High Performance model QCPU or the serial communications module b Multiple users can monitor at the same time By setting a station monitor file high speed monitoring can be performed Setting of station monitor file is not necessary 2 Operation Procedure a For multi user monitoring operation create a user defined system file in the following steps 1 Choose Online Format PLC Memory to open the Format PLC Memory dialog box 2 Select program memory from the Target Memory list box 3 Inthe Format section select Create a user setting system area so that its radio button is checked 4
112. error UO Unit warming PLC diagnostics Module s Detailed Information Stop monitor Close f 9 a Base Information The Base Information section shows information about a selected base unit the name of a base unit main base or expansion base 1 to 7 the number of slots base type the number of modules installed on the base 1 The Base name field indicates the main base or expansion base with power source It indicates the expansion base even if a power source module is not installed on the expansion base 2 The Base type field indicates the following abbreviations Q for Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Q for Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B e QA for QA1S65B QA1S68B 3 The Number of Installed Module field indicates the number of modules installed on the base unit b Installed status The Installed status section shows the model name of the selected base unit and the number of points The slot column indicates Not Installed if a base unit is not installed in a particular slot 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q c Parameter status The Parameter status section shows the input output number of each slot of a base unit module type and the number of points If the number of available points and the installed status are displayed in any column of the Parameter status section make the setting so that I O assignments of PLC parameter can match the installed status d Overall Information The Overall Informati
113. execution time and the access time to from the intelligent function modules When reading and processing the data of the intelligent function module frequently in the program use the FROM instruction to read the data at one point in the program and store and process it in a data register instead of using the intelligent function module device every time Otherwise the intelligent function module device accesses the intelligent function module every time the instruction is executed resulting in longer scan time for the program For the intelligent function module device refer to Section 10 5 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 1 5 Communication using the instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules 1 Description of the instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules a QCPU The instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules are the instructions that facilitate programming using the functions of the intelligent function modules For example the OUTPUT instruction which is the instruction dedicated for serial communication modules allows data transmission in user specified message format with no handshaking protocol In this case the communication is possible without considering the buffer memory address of the objective serial communication module Serial communication module rset the channel 63 0 2 b15 to
114. for PLC No 2 to No 4 for which stop errors have been triggered 0 o QO 6 234567 gt a Q 6 QCPU PLC No 3 PLC No 4 lt PLC No 1 PLC No 2 Reset not possible with the multiple PLC system If a reset is attempted all machines on the multiple PLC system will assume the MULTIPLE PLC DOWN status Possible to reset the entire multiple PLC system 1 It is not possible to reset the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 individually with the multiple PLC system If an attempt to reset any of the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 during operation of the multiple PLC system a MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error code 7000 error will be triggered for the other machines and the entire multiple PLC system will be halted However depending on the timing in which the CPU modules have been reset there are cases where errors other than the MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error will halt the other machines A MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error code 7000 error will be triggered regardless of the operation mode set in the PC parameter multiple PLC settings stop continue all other machines on the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 error when the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 are reset refer to Section 14 2 8 for details on the multiple PLC setting operation modes 14 17 14 17 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 14 2 8 Processing when High Performance model QCPU stop errors occur The operations for t
115. fuses have blown are D9100 D1301 input as a bit pattern in units of 16 points D9101 D1302 If the module numbers are set by parameter the parameter set D9102 D1303 numbers are stored D9103 D1304 Bit pattern in units e Also detects blown fuse condition at remote station output D9104 of 16 points modules Do5 D1305 indicating the 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 D9105 D1306 1 1 D9106 Fuse blown modules whose D1300 9 woo O veo 0 0jo0jo D1307 S Error D9107 O Rem module fuses have blown 1 olola 6 olololo D1308 0 No blown fuse 52130 KN badha PAAA New 1 Blown fuse 0 0 0 0 0 0 l present eis E New to New R Indicates a blown fuse Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation New refer to 11 3 Bit pattern in units The module number in units of 16 points whose external power of 16 points supply has been disconnected is input as a bit pattern indicating the If the module numbers are set by parameter the parameter set Ext modules whose __ numbers are used ernal x 3 external power 15 14 13 12 11109 8 765 43 2 1 power SUPPYY Supply has been SD1350 0 o0 o 1 o o o 1 0 0 disconnected QCPU idul disconnected SD1351 ololololilolo 0 0 S Error New Reinote 0 External power a For future s pply pou z Z expansion disconnected St 1 External power App 55 App 55 n 1
116. ie 2 3 Power module Motion CPU d An empty slot is allowed for future addition of a CPU module The number of CPUs including empty slots are set with the CPU count setting and the type is set in the CPU empty setting from the slot immediately to the right of the number of CPUs set with the PC parameter s I O allocation For example when four CPUs have been set with the multiple PLC setting and two High Performance model QCPUs and one motion CPU have been mounted the High Performance model QCPUs are mounted in the CPU slot and slot 0 the motion CPU is mounted in slot 1 and slot 2 is left empty However the empty slot must be on the right side of CPUs Mounting possible Mounting not possible CPU 0 1 2 CPU 0 1 2 2 5 gt 2 D gt E A a 2 3 A 3 Oo oO 8 oO Ss m E S D 5 D 5 E Z a a 14 6 14 6 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q To add a High Performance model QCPU or Motion CPU to a system where the PC CPU is used shift the PC CPU to the right because no CPU module is allowed on the right side of the PC CPU 2 High Performance model QCPU motion CPU and PC CPU module machine numbers a Machine numbers are for identifying the High Performance model QCPUs and motion CPUs mounted to the basic base unit on the multiple PLC system The PLC No 1 is allocated to the CPU slot and the PLC No 2 No 3 and No 4 are allocated to the right of the PLC No 1 CPU slot PLC No 1
117. in a memory card Reading writing to file register Nos outside the registered range points No error occurs even if reading writing occurs to these file registers The reading of data from a file register results in the following e Undefined data is stored in the standard RAM e OH is stored in a memory card 2 File register size check a b Perform a file register size check so that the file register size points setting made for the High Performance model QCPU can allow the reading and writing of data from and to file registers e A file register size check should be executed at step 0 of programs in which file registers are used e After switching to another file register file using the QDRSET instruction execute a file size check e When using the RSET instruction to switch blocks check that the switching destination block has a size of 1k points or more before executing the RSET instruction File register size gt 32k points X switching block No 1k points The available file register size can be checked in the file register capacity storage register SD 647 1 The file register size is stored in SD647 in 1k point units The less than 1k points surplus portion of a file register size is not stored In order to ensure an accurate range of use check be sure to designate the file register setting in 1k point 1024 points units 1 If a file register file is switched to another the file regi
118. in points ZO to 215 IRET 10 42 10 42 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 7 File Registers R 1 Definition a File registers are expansion devices for data registers b File register data is stored in files in the CPU standard RAM the CPU memory card 1 The standard RAM has 32k points assigned for file registers File registers can be used at the same processing speed as data registers 2 Use a memory card if 32k or more points are assigned for file registers m oror Standard RAM Memory card File register RO i i R1 100 is written to R2 LR2 EEEEESS c File registers consist of 16 bits per point with reading and writing occurring in 16 bit modules b15 Fi bo Fin ee Je A os Se Ae ale he a le a d Ifthe file registers are used for 32 bit instructions the data will be stored in registers Rn and Rn 1 The lower 16 bits of data are stored in the file register No Rn designated in the sequence program and the upper 16 bits of data are stored in the designated file register No 1 For example if file register R2 is designated in the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in R2 and the upper 16 bits are stored in R3 DMOV DO a Processing object R2 R3 R3 R2 Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bts ias lt Two file registers can be used to store numeric data from 2147483648 to 2147483647 or from OH to FFFFFFFFH e Thecontent of t
119. in the following way e Install the Motion CPU on the right side of the High Performance model QCPU e Install only one PC CPU module at the right end of CPUs No CPU module can be installed on the right side of the PC CPU module Table 14 2 Installation positions of CPU modules Number of CPUs Installation positions of CPU modules Power mode Power modue Power module Motion CPU Power module Motion CPU Power module Power module Power mode Power module Motion CPU Power module Motion CPU Motion CPU v Power module QCPU Motion CPU Motion CPU ro 14 5 14 5 QCPU Power module QCPU 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q Number of CPUs Installation positions of CPU modules Motion CPU Motion CPU Motion CPU Power module Power module Motion CPU o gt 3 5 2 oc D z O a Power module QCPU Motion CPU Motion CPU x The PC CPU module occupies two slots b Motion CPUs are mounted together in the slot to the right of the High Performance model QCPU High Performance model QCPUs cannot be mounted to the right of motion CPUs Mounting possible Mounting not possible CPU 0 1 Motion CPU w Motion CPU Power module Motion CPU Power module c Install the PC CPU module at the right end in the multiple PLC system No CPU module can be installed on the right side of the PC CPU module CPU 0
120. into the host machine s common CPU memory and the amount of time required to read from other machines common CPU memories These values are added when setting up the refresh settings with the PLC parameter multiple PLC settings b The automatic refresh period of the common CPU memory is calculated in the following equation Automatic refresh time N1 received word points X N2 X number of other machines N3 transmitted word points X N4 us The received word points must equal the word points transmitted by other machines For example if the host machine is the PLC No 1 then this value must equal the number of points transmitted for the PLC No 2 to PLC No 4 e Use the following values for N1 to N4 Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12CPU Q25HCPU c The amount of time required for the automatic refresh process will be 18 prolonged by the following amount of time when processing is duplicated with the automatic refresh function on other machines Prolonged time transmitted received word point lt N5 X number of other machines us Use the following values for N5 CPU type Systems with only a main base Systems that include additional base units Q02CPU QO02HCPU QO6HCPU 0 54 1 3 Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 18 2 18 2 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPUS QCPUS MELSEC Q 2 MELSECNET H refresh a The amount of time required fo
121. it also reduces the amount of space available for user files 1 1 This table shows an example in which 0 k step is allocated for a system area 2 2 In computing the memory capacity 1 step is equal to 4 bytes 3 3 Maximum number of executable program is 124 More than 124 programs can not be executed 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 3 About the Standard ROM 1 What is the standard ROM a The standard ROM is used for the ROM operation of the High Performance model QCPU b Programs stored in the standard ROM are used and booted read to the program memory after the setting is made in the Boot File sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box c The standard ROM does not need formatting d Writing into standard ROMs is performed with the GX Developer s on line PLC Writing flash ROM of Create Program Memory ROM see Section 6 6 1 It is also possible to write in a standard ROM from the memory card with Automatic writing in the standard ROM without having to use the GX Developer 1 Before writing data onto a standard ROM all previous data stored in the standard ROM are erased For this reason to write data onto the standard ROM you must first read and copy all previous data stored in the standard ROM before writing necessary data therein Please note that an error may occur if data stored in the standard ROM is used in a sequence program with data being written in the standard ROM 2 For
122. made in modules of 0 5 ms e When executing constant scan set the constant scan time e When not executing a constant scan leave the constant scan time blank Example When the constant scan is set to 10 ms Qn H Parameter me PLC sstem JPLCHE PLCRAS Device Progam oatie SFC 10 are WDT Watchdog timer setup Error check WV Cary out battery check WDT Setting 200 ins 10ms 2000ms Initial M Carry out fuse blown check execution ms 10ms 2000ms Carry out 1 0 unit comparison Low speed 10ms Constant scannini las ms 10ms 2000ms ing 10 ms 0 5ms 2000ms Operating mode when there is an error Computation error Stop 2 Low speed program execution time Expanded command error Stop 2i m ms 1ms 2000ms Fuse blown Stop Zi 1 0 unit comparison error Stop X Breakdown history Record in PLC RAM Record in the following history file Memory card access error Stop Zj Corresponding PF Memory card operation eror Stop aa ES File name External power supply OFF fStop 2 History no Item 16 100 Intelligent module program ti X execution error Stop i Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End setup Cancel Set the set time of the constant scan larger than the maximum scan time of the sequence program Also set the constant scan set time less than the WDT set time WDT Set Time gt Constant Scan Set Time gt Sequence Program maximum Scan Time If the sequence program scan time is larger
123. modules and the completion device refer to the manual of the intelligent function module being used 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 2 Request from Intelligent Function Module to High Performance model QCPU 8 2 1 Interrupt from the intelligent function module 1 Interrupt from the intelligent function module High Performance model QCPU executes an interrupt program 150 to 1255 by the interrupt request from the intelligent function module For example the serial communication module processes the data reception by an interrupt program when the following data communication functions are executed e Data reception during the communication with no handshaking protocol e Data reception during the communication with bi directional protocol Processing data reception with an interrupt program improves the data reception speed of High Performance model QCPU The objective serial communication module data transmission Serial communication module PLC CPU 2 Main program LH l Occurrence of oe ela Main program Y 1 Interrupt program execution 00 Setting an interrupt from the intelligent function module To execute an interrupt program by the interrupt of the intelligent function module it is necessary to designate the Intelligent function module setting Interrupt pointer setting in PLC system setting of PLC Parameter You shou
124. modules loaded are stored as BIN values END eee Bice VO Notor Stores the upper two digits of the first O number of an I O module number for module i U D9094 that is removed replaced in the online status default value 1004 replacement replacement e Stores baud rate of RS422 S When QnA 0 9600bps 1 19 2kbps 2 38 4kbps changed Kumpera e Indicates the number of modules installed on MELSECNET 10 H modules installed O No e MELSECNET 10 H I O number of first module installed N k etwork MELSECNET 0 H network number of first module installed a e MELSECNET 10 H group number of first module installed number e In the case of standby stations the module number of the standby peg S Initial station is stored 1 to 4 information Information from A Configuration is identical to that for the first module 2nd module Information from f x e Configuration is identical to that for the first module 3rd module Information from e Configuration is identical to that for the first module 4th module App 32 App 32 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set b Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation When A ACPU nee 9 bi TT When Xn0 of the installed CC Link goes ON the bit corresponding to the station switches ON When either Xn1 or XnF of the installed CC Link switch OFF the bit corresponding to the station switches ON S
125. modules of remote I O terminals Error status of the MINI S3 link detected on loaded AJ71PT32 S3 is stored B15 to B8 B7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 a Bits which correspond to the signals of AJ71PT32 S3 shown below are turned on as the signals are turned on e Hardware error X0 X20 e MINI S3 link error datection X6 X26 e MINI S3 link communication error X7 X27 When the AC power supply module is used 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms The value is stored in BIN code It is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON When the DC power supply module is used 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms The value is stored in BIN code It is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON Bits which correspond to faulty AJ71PT32 S3 are turned on When the DC power supply module is used 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms The value is stored in BIN code It is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON When one of FO to 255 is turned on by or SET F the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by or instruction If another F number has been detected the clearing of SD62 causes the next number to be stored in SD62 When one of
126. monitor interval of the GX Developer the monitor will be executed even if a monitor condition is established at a shorter interval than the monitor interval Step No 100 MO l XO D1 5 Monitor timing QCPU 2 Monitor Stop Condition Set Up Choose Online gt Monitor gt Monitor stop condition to open the Monitor Stop Condition dialog box The following shows an example in which to stop a monitoring operation at the leading edge of Y71 Monitor stop condition Select when monitor gt Device Device Condition stop by the contents i c i6bitinteger z of the device goo Bitdevice 7il P Select when monitor gt J Step No stop by Step No Close ul a When Step no is specified 1 The monitor stop timing is when the execution state of the step number specified in the monitor condition becomes the specified state 2 The specification method for the execution status is shown below a When changing from non execution state to executing state lt P gt b When changing from executing state to non execution state lt F gt c Always when executing only lt ON gt d Always when not executing only lt OFF gt e Always regardless of status lt Always gt 3 When Step no is not specified the monitor stop timing is after the High Performance model QCPU END processing 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b When Device is speci
127. motion CPUs are mounted 9 For the input output number of multiple PLC systems other than above see Section 15 1 1 14 3 14 3 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 14 2 Precautions During Multiple PLC System Configuration 14 2 1 Function versions of High Performance model QCPU motion CPUs and PC CPU module that can be sued and their mounting positions 1 Function versions a Allowable function versions and confirmation method 1 To configure a multiple PLC system use the High Performance model QCPU and Motion CPU of function version B 2 To use the PC CPU module use the following High Performance model QCPU and Motion CPU e High Performance model QCPU 03051 or later first five digits of the serial number of function version B e Motion CPU The first digits of the serial number must be as follows Q172CPU H or later Q173CPU G or later 3 The function version of the High Performance model QCPU and Motion CPU can be checked at the following places e Ratings nameplate of High Performance model QCPU and Motion CPU e Product data list of system monitor of GX Developer Refer to Section 2 3 for details b Operations with different function versions Function version A High Performance model QCPUs cannot be used on a multiple PLC system Errors like the ones shown in table 14 1 will be triggered and the multiple PLC system will not start up if function version A High Performance model
128. number which has been turned off by RST F is SD1126 erased from SD64 to SD71 and the contents of data registers succeeding the data register where the erased F number was stored are shifted to the preceding data registers By executing instruction the contents of SD64 to SD71 are shifted upward by one For A3N A3HCPU it can be performed by use of INDICATOR RESET switch on front of CPU module D1128 When there are 8 annunciator detections the 9th one Annunciator is not stored into SD64 to SD71 even if detected detection Annunciator SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SETSET SET SET A F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR detection number number 22222222822 SD1129 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 sjs 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 D1130 25 99 99 99 99 99 15 15 15 15 70 70 70 D1131 65 65 65 0 38 38 0 o 110 D1132 ojojo App 50 App 50 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List 10 Special register list dedicated for QnA ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification ZNRD LRDP for ACPU processing results 7 Ei j gt ZNWR LWTP for ACPU processing results Meaning 0 Normal end 2 ZNRD instruction setting fault 3 Error at relevant station
129. occurrences 2 Count processing a The interrupt counter s present value is updated when an interruption occurs It is not necessary to create a program which includes an interrupt counter function b Interrupt counter operation requires more than the simple designation of a setting value To use the interrupt counter for control purposes comparison instructions lt etc must also be used to enable comparisons with the setting value with an internal relay M etc being switched ON or OFF according to the comparison result The figure below shows a sample program in which MO is switched ON after 10 interrupt inputs occur In this example C300 is the interrupt counter No corresponding to 10 H K10 c300 H mo gt 3 Setting the interrupt counter a In order to use interrupt counters at first interrupt counter No setting must be designated in the PLC system settings in the PLC parameter setting 256 points are then allocated for interrupt counters beginning from the first counter No which is designated If C300 is designated as the first interrupt counter No numbers C300 to C555 will be allocated for interrupt counters C300 10 C301 i C302 12 Interrupt counter 256 points C555 1255 Values corresponding to the interrupt counter No b In order to use an interrupt counter an interruption permitted status must be established by E1 instruction at the main routine progr
130. occurs and the system can continue SFCP OPE ERROR the drive mode Or it is an error where continues stops can be 136 aL eee selected and continues is set FILE OPE ERROR 138 PRG TIME OVER 139 CHK instruction Annunciator detect oy 140 to 147 Vacant 1 The interrupt pointers 132 to 139 is at an execution disable mode when the power is started or High Performance model QCPU is reset When using 132 to 139 use the IMASK instruction to enable execution 2 The 132 interrupt program is not executed upon the following serious errors e MAIN CPU DOWN e END NOT EXECUTE e RAM ERROR e OPE CIRCUIT ERR 7 15 2 LED display when error occurs When an error occurs the LED located on the front of the High Performance model QCPU turns on flicker Refer to Section 7 19 for the details of the LED operation 7 FUNCTION 7 15 3 Cancel error MELSEC Q High Performance model QCPU error cancel operation can be performed only for error that can continue the High Performance model QCPU operation 1 Cancellation of error a Procedures for cancellation of error The error cancel is performed in the following manner 1 Resolve the cause of error 2 Store the error code of the error to be canceled in the special register SD50 3 Switch special relay SM50 from OFF to ON 4 The error is canceled b Status after cancellation of error When the CPU module is recovered from canceling the error the special relay special regi
131. on a single High Performance model QCPU between several High Performance model QCPUs it is possible to reduce the overall system scan time Data processing low speed Control at 1 ms or higher Control at several to several tens of ms Mechanical contral Mechanical control PLC Data processing CPU high speed 2 Wi g a amp Rr 7 z or E 1 A q PES Everything controlled on a single CPU Mechanical control made even father by load dispersion in accordance with control tact b Itis possible to increase the amount of memory used throughout the entire system by spreading the memory used between several High Performance model QCPUs Expansion possible in CPU modules One CPU module added e Program memory expanded e Device memory expanded 3 Enables system configuration through function dispersion By dispersing the functions so that control for production line A and control for production line B is performed on different High Performance model QCPUs it is possible to debug each function individually 13 1 13 1 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 13 2 MELSEC Q 4 Communication can be made between CPU modules in the multiple PLC system The following data transfer can be made between CPU modules in the multiple PLC system a b Automatic refresh setting at GX Developer enables the data transfer between CPU modules The High Performance model QCPU can use the FROM S TO instruc
132. on whether or not link parameters have been M9250 SM1250 i i 2 received ON No reception received from the master station M9251 SM1251 Link relay OFF Normal Depands on the data link condition at the local station ON Abnormal OFF Not being executed ON Forward or reverse loop test execution underway M9253 SM1253 Master station OFF RUN or STEP RUN state Depends on whether or not the master station is in STOP operation state ON STOP or PAUSE state or PAUSE mode Local station M9254 SM1254 other than host OFF RUN or STEP RUN state Depends on whether or not a local station other than the station operation ON STOP or PAUSE state host is in STOP or PAUSE mode state OFF Normal ON Abnormal Depends on whether or not the local station is executing a Hopp test state forward or a reverse loop test Depends on whether or not a local station other than the host is in error Local station M9255 SM1255 other than host station error App 17 App 17 APPENDICES Special Relay List 10 For redundant systems Host system CPU information 1 for Q4AR only SM1510 to SM1599 are only valid for redundant systems All off for standalone systems z Set by ACPU Applicable OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not to hold the output value when a einen Holgimede ON Hold range over occurs for the S IN instruction range check E New OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not the output value is held when a
133. one vacant slot exists 01234567 Power supply QCPU I O number 00x d pe number of a system with PC CPU module The PC CPU module occupies two slots The one on the right side among the two slots is handled as an empty slot 16 empty points are occupied with default seta Therefore the in crane number of the slot on the right side of the PC CPU module is 10H et the empty slot at zero point using I O allocation of PLC Parameters dialog box to assign OOH to the first input output number 12 3 Power supply QCPU QCPU o QCPU PC CPU module eS Pee count e If the number of CPU modules installed in the main base unit is smaller than the CPU count set in the multiple PLC setting of PLC Parameter slots of the right side of actually installed CPU module are handled as empty slots e The hed number for the multiple PLC system can be confirmed with the system monitor 15 1 15 1 il f Empty slot 00H to OFH occupied 15 ALLOCATING MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 15 1 2 I O number of High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module 15 2 O numbers are allocated to the CPU modules with the multiple PLC system in order to allow interactive communications between the CPU modules with the following commands e Multiple PLC commands e Motion dedicated commands e Dedicated communication commands between multiple PLCs The I O numbers for the CPU modules are fixed for
134. or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not possible after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi chance losses lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi s expectations compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties 5 Changes
135. output modules occurs at END processing a Batch reading of the input module ON OFF information is executed in the High Performance model QCPU s internal input device memory when END processing occurs This ON OFF data in the input device memory is then used for processing which occurs when a sequence program is executed b The processing result of the output Y sequence program is output to the High Performance model QCPU s internal output device memory and batch output of the ON OFF data in output device memory to the output module is executed when END processing occurs High Performance model QCPU Remote input Network refresh area module CPU operation processing area 3 At input Input X GX Developer refresh device input area memory P x1 1 At input area for refresh LUecommunication with input module At output For device refresh memory 2 output Y e Input refresh Input information is read in a batch 1 from the input module at END processing and is stored in the input X device memory by an OR operation in the peripheral device input area e Output refresh Data in the output Y device memory is output in a batch 2 to the output module at END processing e When an input contact instruction has been executed Input information is read 3 from the input X device memory and a sequence program is executed When an output contact instru
136. programs in the High Performance model QCPU execution conditions must be designated for each program Execution is impossible for programs without file name and execution condition settings See Section 4 2 for details regarding execution conditions 4 Designating devices a Designate the number of device points used in each program and the number of device points which are shared by all programs See Chapter 10 for details regarding devices which can be used in the High Performance model QCPU b Designate whether or not the internal relays edge relays timers counters and data registers of each program are to be designated as local devices See Section 10 13 1 for details regarding local devices c When creating sub routine programs designate whether or not common pointers are to be used See Section 10 9 2 for details regarding common pointers 5 Device initial value setting Designate whether or not the device initial value settings are to be used for the High Performance model QCPU devices and intelligent function modules See Section 10 13 2 for details regarding device initial values 12 5 12 5 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU MELSEC Q 12 2 2 Procedure for writing programs to the High Performance model QCPU The procedure for writing programs and parameters created at the GX Developer to the memory card installed in the High Performance model QCPU memory card interface is shown
137. range of network modules 1 Only one network module capable of writing reading link direct devices can be used per network number If two or more network modules are installed at the same network number the network module with the lowest first O number will be the one that handles writing reading using link direct devices For example if station No 1 and station No 2 network modules are installed in network No 1 as shown in the figure below the station No 2 network module will handle link direct device operations V Network No 1 Network module Network module Power supply module Station Station No No ao Writing reading using link direct devices not possible Writing reading using link direct devices possible 10 36 10 36 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 3 Differences between link direct devices and link refresh The differences between link direct devices and link refresh are shown in Table 10 4 below Table 10 4 Differences Between Link Direct Devices and Link Refresh Link Direct Device Link Refresh Link relay Ji j K4B0 or later BO or later Program 3 R 4 Link register Ji j WO or later WO or later notation M Link special relay Jc i K4SB0 or later SBO or later method Link special register Ji i SWO or later SWO or later Number of steps 1 step All network module link Refresh parameter Network module access range devices designated range Access data guarantee r
138. scan time for low speed execution type programs processing time App 36 4 Scan information Number Name Meanin Explanation tel ace a ia Execution type of program being executed File name of low speed execution in progress Current scan time in 1 ms units Current scan time in 100 us units Initial scan time in 1 ms units Initial scan time in 100 ps units Minimum scan time in 1 ms units Minimum scan time in 100 us units Maximum scan time in 1 ms units Maximum scan time in 100 us units Current scan time in 1 ms units Current scan time in 100 us units Minimum scan time in 1 ms units Minimum scan time in 100 ps units Maximum scan time in 1 ms units Maximum scan time in 100 us units END processing time in 1 ms units END processing time in 100 ps units Special Register List Set by Program number of program currently being executed is stored as BIN value S Status change Program number of low speed program currently being executed is stored as BIN value e Enabled only when SM510 is ON S Every END processing S Every END processing Stores current scan time in 1 ms units Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores current scan time in 100 us units Range from 00000 to 900 Example A current scan of 23 6 ms would be stored as follows D520 23 D521 600 e Stores scan time for initially execution type program in
139. selected for the following cases e When not using the file registers e When designating the file registers to be used in the sequence program The QDRSET instruction is used to designate which file registers are to be used b When to select Use the Same File Name as the Program 1 This setting should be selected when the file registers having the same file name as the sequence program are to be used 2 Ifthe program is changed the file registers are automatically changed to conform to the new program name There are also cases where it is convenient to use the file registers as local devices which can only be used with the program currently being executed 3 The number of file register to use can be set by writing to PLC on line oS EXAMPIG 325 Sem ete ee ee Se ep pe a ee SS en Ser a Se When file registers A C having the same name as the programs A to C are to be used operation is as shown below At program A execution File register A is accessed At program B execution File register B is accessed At program C execution File register C is accessed aa Program A execution Synchronized Ro Program A execution Program A execution Synchronized po Program A execution i Seas j Program A execution Senctronized s Ro Program A execution Lo Lo 10 46 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q POINT File registers dedicated to each program may not be des
140. serve as contacts or coils For the case of QCPU For the case of AnS 4 Bit designation of XO DO 5 word device XO H lt DOA MOV Do Kamo Switches b10 of DO ON and M10 gt The 1 0 status OFF 1 0 of b5 of DO is used as ON OFF data MOV T KAMO Do H Y x DOS 000 b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO t gt Bit designation Word device designation b Direct processing in 1 point units is possible within a program simply by using direct access inputs DX _ and direct access outputs DY _ For the case of QCPU Direct access input For the case of AnS _ MO DxX10 M9036 Ht lt DY100 SET M9052 lk Always ON utput to output M9036 module at SEG KiX10 K1B0 instruction execution X10 to X13 refresh Read from input Mo 510 y module at 00 gt instruction execution M9036 SEG KIY100 K1B0 Y100 to Y103 refresh c Differential contacts HH eliminate the need for converting inputs to pulses For the case of QCPU For the case of AnS Differential contact xo Xt xo HL vo H Y100 MO XI Y100 gt ON at leading Y100 edge of X0 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q d The buffer memory of intelligent function module e g Q64AD Q62DA can be used in the same way as devices when programming For the ca
141. setting Sampling CH1 Time number of times specifying Number of times CH1 Average time average number of times setting Setting range Time 2 to 5000 ms Number of times 4 to 62500 times CH2 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable CH2 Sampling process averaging process setting Sampling Details Select input Make text file End setup Cancel The designated initial setting data is stored in the intelligent function module 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q b Automatic refresh setting For the automatic refresh setting designate the device at High Performance model QCPU to store the following data e Digital output of Q64AD e Maximum minimum values of Q64AD e Error code The automatic refresh setting of Q64AD is designated on the following automatic refresh setting screen of GX Configurator Automatic refresh setting screen Auto refresh setting _ fx Module information Module model name Q644D Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type A D Conversion Module Module side Module side Transfer PLC side Laj Setting item Buffer size Transfer direction Device word count CH1 Digital output value 1 1 gt D11 CH2 Digital output value 1 1 gt D12 CH3 Digital output value 1 1 gt D13 CH4 Digital output value 1 1 gt CH1 Maximum value 1 1 Be CH1 Minimum value 1 1 gt CH2 Maximum val
142. settings Error operation mode at the stop of PLC Change screens Setting gt I All stati 0 of PLCI 5 Send range for each PLC PLC side device IV All station stop by stop error of PLC2 PLC ARNEO eiA I All station stop by stop error of PLC3 Point Stat End Start End I All station stop by stop error of PLC4 No 1 0 No 2 0 No3 0 No 4 0 The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W RZR Jsettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check End Cancel 19 4 19 4 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 1 Multiple PLC settings x No of PLC r Out of group input output settings IT Input condition of group outside is taken NoofPic 4 gt a Operating mode T Output condition of group outside is taken r Refresh settings Change screens Setting 7 Error operation mode at the stop of PLC F Al of PLCI Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLC PLC share memory G Dev starting I All station stop by stop error of PLC3 Point Stat End Stat End I All station stop by stop error of PLc4 Not 0l Too J No 2 0 No 3 0 No 4 0 The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W RZR Jsettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check Cancel Multiple PLC settings No of PLC
143. than the constant scan set value the High Performance model QCPU detects PRG TIME OVER an error code 5010 the sequence program is executed with the scan time by Constant scan Sequence program ignoring the constant scan Constant scan setting 0 3 5ms 3 5ms lll 4ms at 5 3ms 3 7ms 0 2ms gt lt Scan where the constant scan is not normal Fig 7 2 Operation when the Scan Time is More than the Constant Scan If the value is larger than the WDT set time the High Performance model QCPU detects a WDT error and stops the program execution 7 3 7 FUNCTION c MELSEC Q The sequence program processing stops during the wait time from the last END processing execution until the next scan starts 1 2 If a low speed execution type program is used its execution will be interrupted for 0 5 ms a constant scan time setting If an interrupt error occurs after the END processing is executed or a low speed execution type program exists the interrupt program or low speed execution type program is executed Constant Scan Time Difference This section describes the precision of a constant scan time setting 1 The remaining portion wait time of a constant scan time setting is 0 02 ms on QO2CPU and 0 1 ms on QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU when the following programs are not executed e low speed execution type program e interrupt program e fixe
144. the Ethernet IP address of the 1st module is stored QCPU information in buffer memory Remote e Vacant With QCPU the Ethernet error code of the 1st module is read with the ERRORRD instruction Information from 2n ormationi fro g Configuration is identical to that for the first module module i S Initial New Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices Information from 3rd oe e Configuration is identical to that for the first module module No of modul ot moguls Indicates the number of modules installed on Ethernet installed Ethernet I O No of the 1st module installed No Ethernet network No of the 1st module installed Ethernet Ethernet station No of the 1st module installed Initial information Ethernet IP address of the 1st module installed Ethernet group No of the 1st module installed Information from F ormatio Configuration is identical to that for the first module 4th module S Ethernet error code of the 1st module installed Configuration is identical to that for the first module Information from 3rd TA Configuration is identical to that for the first module SD362 to Ethernet Configuration is identical to that for the first module S SD368 information 9 B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 0 to 0 Not used L Instruction reception status of channel 1 Instruction reception status of channel 2 Ethernet Instruction reception status of channel 3 instruction Instruction receptio
145. the base unit 9 3 3 Installation and removal of module 9 4 Setting the Extension Number of the Extension Base Unit 9 5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable 9 6 Wiring 9 6 1 The precautions on the wiring 9 6 2 Connecting to the power supply module 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10 1 Daily Inspection 10 2 Periodic Inspection 10 3 Battery Replacement 10 3 1 Battery service life 10 3 2 Battery replacement procedure A 15 A 15 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 Troubleshooting Basics 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 1 Troubleshooting flowchart 11 2 2 Flowchart for when MODE LED is not turned on 11 2 3 Flowchart for when MODE LED is flashing 11 2 4 Flowchart for when POWER LED is turned off 11 2 5 Flowchart for when the RUN LED is turned off 11 2 6 When the RUN LED is flashing 11 2 7 Flowchart for when ERROR LED is on flashing 11 2 8 When USER LED is turned on 11 2 9 When BAT ARM LED is turned on 11 2 10 Flowchart for when BOOT LED is flashing 11 2 11 Flowchart for when the output module LED does not turn on 11 2 12 Flowchart for when output load of output module does not turn on 11 2 13 Flowchart for when unable to read a program 11 2 14 Flowchart for when unable to write a program 11 2 15 Flowchart for when it is unable to perform boot operation from memory card 11 2 16 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs 11 2 17 Flowchart for wnen CONTROL BUS ERR occurs 11 3 Error Code List 11 3 1 Procedure for reading error cod
146. the base units I O assignment may not work correctly The followings result if the preset number of slots differs from that of the installed base units 1 When the designated number of slots is larger than that of the installed base unit Among the designated slots those after the slots occupied by the installed base unit will be empty slots For example when 8 slots are designated for a 5 slot base unit 3 slots will be empty slots Q35B type main base unit 0123 4 on 4 10 Empty __ Empty PH aH __ Empty __ gt Three slots are occupied The number of points for the empty slots is the one designated by PLC system of PLC Parameter or with I O assignment Default value is 16 points 2 When the designated number of slots is smaller than that of the base unit being used The slots other than those designated are disabled For example when 8 slots are designated for a 12 slot base unit the 4 slots on the right of the base unit are disabled If a module is installed to the disabled slot an error SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs Q312B type main base unit 01234567 Prohibit Prohibit Prohibit Prohibit G oa 5 D 3 e Module can be installed When module is installed When eight slots are set an error occurs 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 3 Setting screen and setting items for Base mode of GX Developer PLC name PLC system PLC fie PLCRAS Device
147. the input voltage falls to or below 85 AC AC DOWN Number of times for power 65 DC power of the rating during calculation of the detection AC DOWN CPU module the value is incremented by 1 and stored in BIN code The relevant station bit goes ON when any of the Installed MINI S3 X n 0 X n 20 X n 6 n 26 X n 7 n 27 or X n 8 X n 28 goes ON Goes ON when communications between the installed MINI MINI link Error detection S3 and the CPU are not possible D9004 format QnA errors state B15 B9B8 BO change 8th 1st 8th 1st module module module module lt 4 gt 4 gt Information on Information on Blown fuse Number of module Value stored here is the lowest station I O number of the module 2069 with blown fuse with the blown fuse S Error D9090 VO module VOimodile The lowest I O number of the module where the I O module O Rem SD61 verification _ verification error Det i S Error D9002 verification number took place error number module number S SD62 Anpuneiator AnnuNciator The first annunciator number to be detected is stored here Instruction D9009 number number 4 execution S SD63 Number of Number or Stores the number of annunciators searched Instruction D9124 annunciators annunciators execution S Error O Rem App 27 App 27 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation es ACPU aeni DTT
148. the program memory Corresponding Use the following file Use the following fie Corresponding Corresponding File name File name Capacity K 1K 1018K points Comment fle used in a command File for local device Notused Not used Use the same file name as the program C Use the following file Corresponding Corresponding memory memory a Use the following file Corresponding File name memory ras File name Acknowledge XY assignment Defaut Check Endsetup Cancel d Write the device initial value data and parameter settings to the High Performance model QCPU 10 70 10 70 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 3 Precautions for the use of device initial values a In cases where both device initial value data and latch range data are present the device initial value data takes precedence Therefore the latch range data is overwritten by device initial value data at power ON b Device initial values cannot be used in areas where no setting is made for switching from STOP to RUN for data that is changed by a program at power ON Create a program to specify a device by using the MOV instruction in the main routine program Use the TO instruction to write data onto the buffer memory of the intelligent function module For details regarding the setting procedures for the device initial value range device initial value data items and for writing the device initial values
149. the program and comments in High Performance model QCPU from a GPPW peripheral device The Password Registration is set for the specified memory program memory standard memory memory card program file device comment file and device initial file There are two descriptions of items to be registered e The file name is not displayed and read write cannot be performed as well e Write cannot be performed to the file Read only If the password is registered file operations from GX Developer cannot be performed unless the same password is input 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 1 Password Registration To perform the password registration select GX Developer Online Password setup keyword set up for writing to PLC Register password Password registration change Password is set up for the PLC and the project currently selected on GPPW a gt Target memory Program memory Device mer Y Data type Data name Registration Password Registration condition 1_ Program MAIN main fwrite protect 2_ Program MAINI Write protect W 3 Program MAIN2 Write protect g 4 Program MAINS Write protect x 5_ Program MAIN4 Write protect 6_ Comment MAIN Write protect viv Batch Settings Close Each item is described below a Target memory 0 Set the memory storing the file whose password is to be registered or changed b Data type eee Specifies the type of a file sto
150. time or low speed execution program execution time Set the execute type of the low speed execution program to low speed in the program of the PLC parameters The low speed execution type program is used for programs which do not require execution in each scan for example programs for printer output 2 Executing multiple low speed execution type programs When multiple low speed execution type programs are used they are executed one by one in ascending number order of the program in the PLC parameters 3 Execution time of the Low speed execution type program to be executed per scan If all the low speed execution type program operation is completed within one scan and there is surplus time the processing executed after that depends on the ON OFF status of special register SM330 and the execution condition for low speed execution type programs a 1 Asynchronous method SM330 OFF Method in which low speed execution type program operation is continued in the surplus time Synchronous method SM330 ON Method in which even if there is surplus time low speed execution type program operation is not continued and operation starts again from the next scan Operation method for low Execution condition for low speed execution type programs speed execution type i When constant scan time When low speed execution programs is set program execution time is set Asynchronous method type program is re executed 1 Con
151. times 1 1 Where QO2HCPU is compared with Q2ASHCPU S1 4 Increase in debugging efficiency through high speed communication with GX Developer In the High Performance model QCPU a time required for writing reading of a program or monitoring has been reduced through the high speed communication at a speed of 115 2kbps max by the RS 232 and a communication time efficiency at the time of debugging has been increased In the QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU a high speed communication at a speed of 12Mbps is allowed through the USB 26k step program transfer time Q25HCPU USB 12 Q25HCPU RS 232 30 Q2ASHCPU i 86 A2USHCPU S1 94 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Unit s 5 AnS series I O module or special function module are available For Q series if an appropriate module is not available the AnS series I O module or special function module can also be used for the High Performance model QCPU through the use of the QA1S65B QA1S68B extension base unit 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 6 Saved space by a reduction in size The installation space for Q series has been reduced by approx 60 of the space for AnS series Comparison of installation space MELSEG Aise2P POWER MITSUBISHI MELSEG At SHepu Aisxio A ERROR RESET RESET Aisyso enn A1SX41 Aisya Epp 1SX81 Aisys1 ene 1SX4 rf ALS L ak paat DE a er eee e ae i gt O lt lt x A RNO H
152. to D99 specified It assumes that these three programs are executed in the order of A gt B gt C gt END processing A B DO When local devices are DO in Program C is monitored D100 is monitored after Program specified C is executed When local devices are DO inthe displayed program is D100 is monitored after the not specified monitored displayed program is executed If the local device monitor setting is made and Program B is displayed for example this makes it possible to monitor the local devices in Program B High Performance model QCPU Program execution A gt B gt C Program A Program B Program C X0 X20 HmovP HmovP X1 X21 H H The local device data of the program B The local device monitor is is displayed set and the program B is monitored EX In case that the local device is from DO to D10 D0 4 is displayed when XO is on and D9 8 is displayed Personal computer when X11 is on Install the GX Developer 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Monitoring the Local Devices Monitor local devices in the following steps Connect the personral computer to the CPU module Display the circuit with the circuit mode Change the mode to the monitor mode Select Tool Vv Select Option j e e e e Display option window y Select Program type j e e e e Change to the option selection windo
153. to the High Performance model QCPU refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 10 71 10 71 11 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 11 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU PROCESSING TIME 11 This chapter describes how to estimate the length of High Performance model QCPU processing time 11 1 Reading High Performance model QCPU s Scan Time The length of scan time is the total of the following times I O refresh time e Instruction execution time e END processing time 1 W O refresh time a IO refresh time is the total time required for refreshing input output data of the following modules e Input module e Output module e Intelligent function module special function module b 1O refresh time is given in the formula I O refresh time Number of inputs 16 lt N1 Number of outputs 16 XN2 The table below shows N1 and N2 CPU type ar E Q30B QA1SOB Q30B A QA1SOB EA EA B 2 Instruction execution time Qo2cPu a Instruction execution time is the total processing time required to execute an instruction in a program on the High Performance model QCPU For details on the execution time of each instruction see the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions b Overhead time is required for an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program Add overhead time to execution time 3 END processing time a END processing time is the High Performance model Q
154. type programs When multiple scan execution type programs are used they are executed one by one in ascending number order of the program in the PLC parameters 3 END processing END processing occurs when all initial execution type programs are completed and the scan execution type program is then executed from the next scan The END processing network refresh can be performed for each program while several scan execution type programs are executed To do this include a COM instruction at the end of each scan execution type program STOP to RUN Power ON to RUN First scan i Second scan i Third scan j Forth scan END processing i Initial execution type program 9 _ _ 0 END 0 END 0 END Scan execution type program A 0 END o END 0 Scan execution type program B m o END o END Scan execution type program C m __ Scan time 4 Constant scan setting 1 When constant scanning is designated the scan execution type program is executed at each designated constant scan period 1 The constant scan function executes the scan type program repeatedly at regular intervals For details regarding of the constant scan refer to Section 7 2 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 5 Scan time a The scan time is a total of following the execution time of the scan execution type program and END processing If multiple scan execution type programs are used the sc
155. use by control vy data Channel _ ee 4 Channel ae ee EES Ennn 2 b A completion device should be designated for the instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules The designated completion device turns ON for one scan when the execution of the instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules is completed When the completion device turns ON another instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules can be executed to the same intelligent function module To use two or more instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules to one intelligent function module be sure to execute the next instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules after the completion device turns ON 2 Note a b If the instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules are executed and High Performance model QCPU is switched from RUN to STOP before the completion device turns ON the completion device turns ON one scan later when High Performance model QCPU is switched to RUN next time The instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules can be executed to the intelligent function modules of the main base unit and expansion base unit The instruction dedicated for intelligent function modules cannot be executed to the intelligent function module installed to the remote I O station of MELSECNET H For the instruction dedicated for intelligent function
156. used to manage sub routine and interrupt programs separately from the main routine program Multiple sub routine and interrupt programs can be created for a single stand by type program Scan execution type program Scan execution type program Main routine Main routine program program P100 Sub routine z 3 z program J Stand by type program program program 3 10 Interrupt program 2 When stand by type program execution is completed processing returns to the program which was active before the stand by type program was executed The operation which occurs when a stand by type program s sub routine and interrupt programs are executed is shown below CALL P100 command execution Interrupt error factor occurred END aa END processing END processing Scan execution type program E P100 RET Sub routine program H 10 IRET Interrupt program 1 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q b Changing the program setup 1 Create a program that is compatible with all programs and use it only to execute necessary programs Programs designated by PLC parameter setting as stand by type programs can be converted to scan execution type programs and executed in a sequence program Changing the execute type by the High Performance model QCPU can be performed by PSCAN PLOW PSTOP and POFF instructions See Section 4 2 3 c The following methods can be used to conv
157. v Program memory Acknowledge XY assignment Multi ing Default Check End Cancel b c 2 Store the setup parameters and the programs to be booted in the memory card Operations with High Performance model QCPU automatic writing in the standard ROM 1 2 3 Switch of the power supply to the PLC Mount the memory card that contains the parameters and programs to be booted onto the High Performance model QCPU Set the parameter s valid drive in the mounted memory card with the CPU s dip switches e When a SRAM card is mounted SW2 ON SW3 OFF e When a Flash ATA card is mounted SW2 OFF SW3 ON Switch on the power supply to the PLC BOOT LED will flash when automatic writing in the standard ROM has been completed and the High Performance model QCPU will assume a suspension error status Switch of the power supply to the PLC Remove the memory card and then set the parameter s valid drive in the standard ROM with the CPU s dip switches e Standard ROM SW2 ON SW3 ON The parameters and programs will be booted from the standard ROM to the program memory when the PLC is switched on to enable actual operations 6 15 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 2 Precautions This section outlines the precautions that should be observed when automatically writing in a standard ROM a If the file to be booted fro
158. 0 1111 2 Hexadecimal numeric expression High Performance model QCPU registers data registers link registers etc consist of 16 bits Therefore as expressed in hexadecimal code the numeric value range which can be stored is 0 to FFFFu 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 8 3 BCD Binary Coded Decimal 1 BCD notation BCD numeric expressions are binary expressions with a carry format identical to that of the decimal system As with the hexadecimal system BCD expressions are the equivalent of 4 binary bits although the BCD system does not use the A to F alphabetic characters A comparison of binary BCD and decimal numeric expressions is shown in Table 4 4 below Table 4 4 Comparison of BIN BCD and DEC Numeric Expressions BCD Binary Coded Decimal 9 1 10 11 DEC Decimal BIN Binary 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Carry E ot N O 2 BCD numeric expression High Performance model QCPU registers data registers link registers etc consist of 16 bits Therefore as expressed in BCD code the range of numeric values to be stored is O to 9999 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 8 4 Real numbers floating decimal point data 1 Real numbers Real numbers are single precision floating decimal point data 2 Internal expression of floating decimal point data The High Performance model QCPU s internal expr
159. 0 0 e eee eeeeeeeeees 10 31 D G D Data register 2 1 10 28 Global device ceeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeteeeeeeneeees 10 63 Data register D eseseeeeeeeteeeeeeeteetees 10 28 GX Configurator cccccceeeeeereenees 8 2 14 12 Data stored on the memory card 00 6 4 GX Developer ee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteetenees A 18 Decimal constants K 10 61 Device initial ValUC cccccseeeeseeseseesees 10 69 H Device liSt re 10 1 H Hexadecimal constants eeeeeee 10 61 Direct ACCESS INPUt ccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeees 10 6 HEX Hexadecimal sccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 46 Direct ACCESS OULPUL c cee eeeeseeeeeeeees 10 9 Hexadecimal constants H 10 61 Direct mad secorre ea T 4 41 High speed retentive timer ST 005 10 21 Drive NUMDED c cccccceesecesseceseeesseeeeeeeeees 6 5 High speed timer T ccccccceeseeseeseeeeeneens 10 20 Index 1 Index 1 l Interrupt pointer sassessessesresrerrsrrsrrsrnensns 10 56 I O No designation device Un 10 59 Index register Z oo ceeeesceeseeeeeteeeteeeeeeeneees 10 39 Initial execution monitor time 0 eee 4 16 Initial execution type program s es 4 15 Initial SCAN TIME cece eee eeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteees 4 16 Input response TIME eee eee eeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeee 7 21 Intelligent function module device U lt 2 G 2 10 38 Internal relay M ceceseeseeseeseeeneeeeeeeeee
160. 0 150 170 Y180 Y1A0 Y1C0 10F 12F 14F 16F 17F Y19F Y1BF Y1DF x1 This is the case where the number of points for an empty slot is set to 16 with PLC system setting of PLC Parameter 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q b I O assignment with GX Developer Designate slot No 3 to 32 points on the I O assignment screen of GX Developer Qn H Parameter PLC name PLC system F s PLCRAS Device Program Boot file SF O assign t 1 0 Assignment o pee Model name Points Start xy lt eA Select 32 points t wo z Detailed setting When the type is not selected 3 2 3 2i s the type of the installed module 4 z a z will be selected e 55 X M Lz lers x 7 z If the start x and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting Increase cable Ponts Base mode name Auto C Detail Increasel 8 fixation 12 fixation Read PLC data nerease4 nereased ajajajaja Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End setup Cancel c I O number assignment after the I O assignment with GX Developer Q38B 0o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 gt 2 2 e gt 2 2 2 2 3 fala 3 5 gt Q 3 5 3 cll Eh ES EAE BA S ess E O E E E E E E E gt 5 5 5 5 3
161. 0 620 640 660 680 System configuration 2 S S 31F 33F 35F 37F 39F SBFSDF SFF __ 5BFISDFISFF 61F 63F 65F 67F 69F Extension base unit Q68B Extension base unit QA1S68B Sid edensin Power supply module Sih extension a Power supply module stage L32 33 37 stage 55 56 57 58 59 60 420 I4A0 6EO 760 5 SIS 71F 73F 75F ion base unit Q65B Extension base unit QA1S65B ih extension Power supply module Power supply module stage 41 63 Prohibit Prohibit 55F 57F 59F ban care When module is installed an error occurs Maximum number of f Seven Extension Stages Extension Stages Maximum number of I O modules to be 64 modules installed Maximum number of Extension base unit Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B QA1S65B QA1S68B 1 Extension bases unit of up to seven stages can be used 2 Do not use extension cable longer than an overall extension length of 13 2m 43 31ft 3 When using an extension cable do not bind it together with the main circuit high voltage and heavy current line or do not lay down them closely to each other 4 When setting the No of the expansion stages set it in the ascending
162. 11 Execution Time Measurement This is a function to display the processing time of the program being executed This is used to find out the effect of each program s processing time on the total scan time There are three functions to the execution time measurement The details of each function are indicated in sections 7 11 1 to 7 11 3 e Program monitor list e Interrupt program monitor list e Scan time measurement 7 11 1 Program monitor list 1 What is Program Monitor List a This is a function to display the processing time of the program being executed b The scan time number of times executed and processing time by item can be displayed for each program 2 Using the Program Monitor List a Choose Online Monitor Program monitor list The Program Monitor List dialog box appears on screen b The scan time number of times executed and processing time by item can be displayed for each program b Program monitor list x a gt Total scan time Scan execution part detailed scan time Moritartime ms Sum of scan time ms 0 10 _ a E 000 __END cperton imete iia S o ooo 20o Low speed programms Lowspeed a c gt Each program execution status Presram Eeoae Scantinetns Evecue count aman Sen O MAINT a ii H MAIN4 Low speed tant estes Te MAINZ wat 0 000 _ E Startup program Stop program Close 7 FUNC
163. 1217 SD1218 D1219 If a local station detects an error the bit corresponding to the station number becomes 1 Example When station 6 and 12 detect an error bits 5 and 11 in SD1216 become 1 and when SD1216 is monitored its value is 2080 820H Stores the local station numbers which contain mismatched parameters or of remote station numbers for which incorrect I O assignment has been made L25 L41 L571 L24 L40 L56 Device Bit number 515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bo SD1220 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 SD1221 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 SD1222 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33 SD1223 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 L49 If a local station acting as the master station of tier three detects a parameter error or a remote station contains an invalid O assignment the bit corresponding to the station number becomes 1 Example When local station 5 and remote I O station 14 detect an error bits 4 and 13 in SD1220 become 1 and when SD1220
164. 17 2 Ethernet modules LED display 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 2 Constant Scan 1 What is Constant Scan The scan time differs because the processing time differs depending on whether the instruction which is used in the sequence program is executed or not Constant scan is a function to execute the sequence program repeatedly while maintaining the scan time at a constant time Because O refresh is made prior to execution of the sequence program use of the constant scan function helps maintain the I O refresh interval at a constant rate even if the sequence program execution time varies Scan time when constant scan is not used Sequence program END processing END 0 ENDy 0 END 0 f tp H 5ms 5ms Scan time when constant scan setting is set to 7 ms _ Sequence program END processing END 0 END 4 ange Wait time 5ms 2ms 7ms Sequence program A Sequence program B Sequence program C 7 END processing Wait time 8ms 10ms Fig 7 1 Constant scan operation When using a low speed execution type program the constant scan function setting or low speed execution type program execution time must be set 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Setting the constant scan time a b The constant scan time setting is performed with the parameter mode PLC RAS The constant scan setting range is 0 5 ms to 2000 ms A setting can be
165. 2 1 KQ fo Cc Ke e See the manual of Q compatible MELSECNET H and No setting Ethernet No setting e See the manual of CC Link 9 7 9 7 10 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 DEVICES This chapter describes all devices that can be used in the High Performance model QCPU 10 1 Device List The names and data ranges of devices which can be used in the High Performance model QCPU are shown in Table 10 1 below Table 10 1 Device List Default Values Parameter Reference Class Type Device Name Designated Number of Points Range Used Section Setting Range 8192 points XO to X1FFF Section 10 2 1 Output 8192 points YO to Y1FFF Section 10 2 2 Internal relay 8192 points MO to M8191 Section 10 2 3 8192 points LO to L8191 Section 10 2 4 Bit devices i 2048 points FO to F2047 Section 10 2 5 Section 10 2 6 Change possible Section 10 2 9 for 29 k words or Section 10 2 8 less 3 Section 10 2 7 Internal user devices 2048 points TO to T2047 Retentive timer STO to T2047 Section 10 2 10 Section 10 2 13 Section 10 3 1 Bit devices Section 10 2 11 Section 10 2 12 EYO to FY4 Section 10 3 1 Special relay 2048 points SMO to SM2047 Impossible Section 10 3 2 FDO to FD4 Section 10 3 1 Word devices F 7 2 Special register 2048 points SDO to SD2047 Section 10 3 3 8192 points Jn XO to Jn X1 FFF 8192 points Jn YO to Jn Y1 FFF Link direct 16384 points Jn BO to Jn B3
166. 24 N A1SJ71UC24 R2 R4 PRF computer link module CC Link master local module A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 Modem interface module A1SJ71CMO S3 ME NET interface module A1SJ71ME81 e A dedicated instruction for the next module which was present in the QnA A series program instruction cannot be used for the High Performance model QCPU Re writing using FROM TO instruction is required Module Name High speed counter module _ A1SD61 A1SD62 A1SD62D S1 A1SD62E MELSECNET MINI S3 A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ711T32 S3 A1SD75P1 S3 P2 S3 P3 S3 A1SD75M1 M2 M3 ID module A1SJ711D1 R4 A1SJ711D2 R4 2 Software package a Programs for the High Performance Model QCPU can be created using GX Developer Version 4 or later b GX Developer Version 6 or later is required to use the functions that have been added in the High Performance Model QCPU products whose first 5 digits of the serial number are 02092 c GX Developer Version 6 or later is required to use the functions that have been added in the High Performance Model QCPU products whose first 5 digits of the serial number are 03051 Positioning module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 3 Confirming the Serial No and Function Versions The QCPU serial No and function versions can be confirmed on the rating nameplate and GX Developer s system monitor 1 Confirming the serial No and function versions on the rating nameplate MELSEC Q MITSUBI
167. 25HCPU general purpose PLC Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU are also mentioned when providing individual explanations for each module 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 2 Features High Performance model QCPU has the following new features 1 Controllable multiple I O points All High Performance model QCPUs support 4096 points X YO to FFF as the number of actual I O points capable of getting access to the I O module installed on the base unit They also support 8192 points max X YO to 1FFF as the number of I O devices which can be used in the remote I O stations such as MELSECNET H remote I O NET CC Link data link and MELSECNET MINI S3 data link 2 Lineup according to program capacity The optimum CPU module for the program capacity to be used can be selected QO02CPU QO2HCPU 28k step QO6HCPU 60k step Q12HCPU 124k step Q25HCPU 252k step 3 Realised high speed processing Depending on the type of the sequencer high speed processing has been realized Example when LD instruction is used Q02CPU 0 079us Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 0 034us In addition an access to the intelligent function module or an increase in speed of the link refresh of the network have been realized by the connection system System bus connection of the newly developed base unit Access to the intelligent function module 20us word approx 7 times 1 MELSECNETHH link refresh processing 4 6ms 8k word approx 4 3
168. 3 From the Trace Condition select one of the following e Execute by overwriting the conditions on PLC side Overwrite trace condition to the existing trace file e Execute by following conditions written on PLC side Execute the program with the conditions in the trace file specified in Trace Data Condition Results storing dest e Read the trace results form the High Performance model QCPU and display the data 1 Reads the trace from the Read from PLC 2 The read trace results appears in Trace Results display When sampling trace is executed once the trace is not executed second time When re executing execute the TRACE instruction and reset the sampling trace 3 Precautions a Set the sampling trace file in the memory card SRAM b The sampling trace can be executed from another station on the network or serial communication module However the trace cannot be executed from multiple areas at once The trace can only be executed from one area with High Performance model QCPU c The trace information trace file registered in the High Performance model QCPU is registered in the SRAM card and latched As the condition data is stored in the trace file even if the power is off or the High Performance model QCPU is reset the sampling trace can be executed under registered trace conditions At power OFF to ON High Performance model QCPU reset latched trace information is cleared in the cases where e The SRAM
169. 4 Interruption during END processing If an interrupt factor occurs during an END processing waiting period during constant scanning the interrupt program corresponding to that factor will be executed c See Section 10 6 2 for details regarding index register processing when switching to an interrupt program from a scan execution type program or low speed execution program 4 High speed execution of an interrupt program and overhead time By default High Performance model QCPU will perform the following process when executing an interrupt program e To hide and restore an index register See section 10 6 2 e To hide and restore the file name of a file register in use The above listed processes are not performed if an option to Execute at a High Speed is selected in the PLC System Setting sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box This will make it possible to shorten the duration of overhead time required for execution of an interrupt program OVERHEAD TIME us CREE LOW SPEED EXECUTION HIGH SPEED EXECUTION QO2CPU po S ao k Q02HCPU Q06HCPU REMARK 1 For details regarding the IMASK and EIl instructions refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions To execute interrupt programs l0 through 131 and 148 through 1255 use an El instruction to enter the interrupt programs into an interrupt enabled status x2 See Section 10 10 for details regarding the priority ranking of interrupt programs x3
170. 4 reception data No 3 PLC No 1 transmission data No 4 PLC No 2 reception data No 4 PLC No 3 reception data No 4 data No 4 data No 1 PLC No 1 transmission KA S data No 2 N PLC No 1 Maximum x transmission data No 3 PLC No 1 transmission 2k words lt Y y i User s free area J H data No 4 Device ranges set for the use of the automatic refresh function cannot be set in local devices If the device ranges set for the use of the automatic refresh function are set in local devices the settings will not be reflected back onto the refresh data Do not set devices for the use of the automatic refresh function in the file register of all programs If devices for the use of the automatic refresh function are set in the file register of all programs automatic refresh will be performed on the file register that corresponds with the last scan type program executed 16 7 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q c There are cases where old data and new data will become mixed up for each machine depending on the timing of refreshing the host machine and reading data from other machines When performing the automatic refresh function create an interlock program similar to the one shown below that uses the first device to be refreshed for each machine and do not use the data from other machines when old data do
171. 5 5 O a om Q a om Q Q 2 5 5 5 5 a Oo o o 6 L 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 points points points points points points points points X00 oe me 60 i es me a X1F X3F X5F 7F Y9F YBF YDF YFF Q68B 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 2 2 2 o K 2 2 2 3 lesleslesles F B 3 2 e S2 32 S2 S82e 4 2 2 2 gt Scl gt c F gt c gt ec 5 5 5 a s gs gsj es 2 2 a m nar S 58 53 53 Es ARE 2 a a hosel wos Oe Se S oe z 32 32 32 32 16 32 32 32 2g points points points points points points points points 100 120 140 160 180 Y190 Y1B0 Y1D0 11F 13F 15F 17F 18F Y1AF Y1CF Y1EF 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 2 Changing the I O number of slots Change the I O number of a currently vacant slot slot No 3 to X200 through X21F so that the I O numbers of slot No 4 and later slots do not change when a 32 point input module is installed to the currently vacant slot slot No 3 a System configuration and I O number assignment before the I O assignment with GX Developer Q38B o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 gt Lv Lv 2 D 2 2 2 2 5 a 3 J Q 5 3 3 3 Silo s s s8 F amp 8 8 84 8 fe W E O E E E E E gt 3S 5 5 5 5 5 5 Q a a a jon om Q Q 2 5 5 5 5 a Oo O0 0 0 e g 32 32 32 16 32 32 32 32 points points points points points points points points X00 X20 X40 60 Y70 Y90 YBO YDO X1F X3F X5F 6F Y8F YAF YCF YEF
172. 6 Instruction Related Registers a ici SD705 During block operations turning SM705 ON makes it possible to use h k i D7 i Mask pattern Mask pattern the mask pattern being stored at SD705 or at SD705 and SD706 if SD706 double words are being used to operate on all data in the block with the masked values Number of vacant Sp714 communicati Stores the number of vacant blocks in the communications request S During on request area for remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32 S3 execution registration areas Patterns masked by use of the IMASK instruction are stored in the SD715 following manner IMASK B15 Bi BO r sore rsncton Mask pation SD715 15 to 1 Io butng execution mask pattern SD716 131 to 117 116 SD717 SD717 147 to 133 132 D718 i D719 Accumulator Accumulator For use as replacement for accumulators used in A series programs S U New Program No Program No Ht nation Lo nation Stores the program number of the program to be loaded by the SD720 9 9 PLOAD instruction when designated for PLOAD _ for PLOAD instruction instruction No of vacant registration Designation range 1 to 124 Stores the number of vacant registration area for the request for area for CC ae B z S During SD730 communication with the intelligent device station connected to i execution Link Tone A 1S J61QBT61 communic
173. 9 SD18 D20 D20 SD19 SD21 5D21 D20 5D22 Vacant 5D22 Vacant Sai SD23 SD23 SD22 Vacant 024 024 D23 SD25 5D25 SD24 5D26 5D26 5D25 D26 6 For details of the parameter numbers refer to the user s manual of the CPU used n n n n n n n n n n n g g g g g g g iw iw iw iw N N N N N N N o oa A wo N i o N o App 26 App 26 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Set b Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation wii A ACPU ps si DoT T Error number that mber th forms error r SD50 Error reset performs error reset Stores error number that performs error reset O Rem All corresponding bits go ON when battery voltage drops e Subsequently these remain ON even after battery voltage has been returned to normal B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Bit pattern Battery low indicating where CPU error gt Memory card A alarm latch battery voltage drop Memory card A error occurred gt Memory card B alarm gt Memory card B error When QCPU is used this flag is always OFF because memory card B is used as standard memory e Same configuration as SD51 above Subsequently goes OFF when battery voltage is restored to Bit pattern indicating where SD52 Battery low normal S Error New battery voltage drop When QCPU is used this flag is always OFF because memory occurred card B is used as standard memory e Every time
174. 900 Power cut file OFF No power cut file Goes ON if a file is present during access when power is S U Status New ON Power cut file present interrupted change S Status change After step trace OFF Not after trigger trigger ON Is after first trigger S Status change OFF Keyboard input RKEY notregistered Goes ON at registration of keyboard input A Instruction execution registration flag ON Keyboard input OFF if keyboard input is not registered registered App 10 App 10 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 9 A to Q QnA conversion correspondences Special relays SM1000 to SM1255 are the relays which correspond to ACPU special relays M9000 to M9255 after A to Q QnA conversion All of these special relays are controlled by the system so that users cannot turn them ON OFF in the program If users want to turn these relays ON OFF the program should be modified to use QCPU QnACPU special relays For SM1084 and SM1200 through SM1255 however if a user can turn ON OFF some of special relays M9084 and M9200 through M9255 before conversion the user can also turn ON OFF the corresponding relays among SM1084 and SM1200 through SM1255 after the conversion For details on the ACPU special relays see the user s manuals for the individual CPUs and MELSECNET or MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manuals The processing time may be longer when converted special relays are used with QCPU Uncheck A series CPU
175. ARAMETER ERROR error code written with the GX TORENS 3012 will be triggered in the host 3012 will be triggered in the host Developer machine if they do not match machine if they do not match STOP RUN is not possible as a MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error code 7000 error will be triggered in the host machine No sameness check will be run When machines in the RUN mode exist When a stop error has been triggered After multiple PLC system parameters unavailable with the Motion CPU are changed for the High Performance model QCPU or PC CPU module in a multiple PLC system including a Motion CPU be sure to reset the High Performance model QCPU for PLC No 1 or turn off and on the PLC Otherwise the High Performance model QCPU or PC CPU module checks consistency with multiple PLC system parameters of the Motion CPU causing a PARAMETER ERROR error code 14 16 14 16 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 14 2 7 Resetting the multiple PLC system It is possible to reset the entire multiple PLC system by resetting the PLC No 1 The CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 I O modules and intelligent function modules will be reset when the PLC No 1 is reset If a stop error is triggered for any of the machines on the multiple PLC system either reset the PLC No 1 or restart the sequencer power supply ON gt OFF gt ON after the problem has been recovered Recovery is not possible by resetting the CPU modules
176. App 1 Special relays SM are internal relays whose applications are fixed in the programmable controller For this reason they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the normal internal relays However they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to control the CPU and remote I O modules The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user in sequence program or test operation at a peripheral device S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt indicated only if setting is done by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error is generated Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc Indicates special relay M9 L corresponding to the ACPU Corresponding ACPU Change and notation when there has been a change in contents m pgg Items indicated as New have been newly added for High performance model QCPU QnACPU e Indicates the corresponding CPU type name Rem Can be applied to all CPU types and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Can be a
177. Basic base unit and extension base unit SRAM card Abbreviation for Q2MEM 1MBS type SRAM card Flash card General name for Q2MEM 2MBS and Q2MEM 4MBS type Flash card ATA card General name for Q2MEM 8MBS Q2MEM 16MBS and Q2MEM 32MBS type ATA card Memory card General name for SRAM card Flash card and ATA card Power supply module General name for Q61P A1 Q61P A2 A1S61PN A1S62P and A1S63P type power supply module Battery General name for battery for Q6BAT type CPU module and Q2MEM BAT type SRAM card Extension cable General name for QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC100B type extension cable Qas TB General name for Q52B and Q55B that accept the Q series I O and intelligent function lt modules High Performance model QCPU motion CPU that controls any of the I O and Control CPU intelligent function modules loaded on the main or extension base unit For example when the module loaded on slot 3 is controlled by the CPU No 2 the CPU No 2 is the control CPU of the module on slot 3 Non controlled module Non group module I O or intelligent function module other than the controlled module For example when the module loaded on slot 3 is controlled by the CPU No 2 the module on slot 3 is the non controlled module of the CPU Nos 1 3 and 4 Controlled module I O or intelligent function module controlled by the control CPU For example when the module loaded on slot 3 is controlled by t
178. C Detail 15140 14 Increase Increase2 8 fixation settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Eam Cmca Increase3 Increased 12 fixation Increase5 settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data Acknowledge XY assignment Multi tinc Default Check End Cancel 3 Precautions a The system will be adversely affected by noise etc when the input response time is set to high speed Set the input response time in consideration of the environment in which the system is being used b The input response time cannot be amended for the A1S161 interruption module that supports the AnS series No processing will be performed with interruption modules that support the AnS series even if the input response time is set in the slot c The GX Developer Version 6 SW6D5C GPPW E or later is required when changing the response time of the interrupt module The input response time of the interrupt module cannot be amended with the SW5D5C GPPW E or earlier GX Developers Fixed at 0 2 ms default setting d The input response speed setting is valid in the following cases e After the PLC is turned on e When the High Performance model QCPU is reset 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 8 Setting the Switches of the Intelligent Function Module Qn H Parameter 1
179. CPU processing time common to the above listed items 1 and 2 b The table below shows the length of END processing time CPU Type END Processing Time ms QO2CPU QO2HCPU QOBHCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 11 1 Tied 11 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 11 2 Factors Responsible for Extended Scan Time The following functions increase the length of scan time When using any of the following functions add a value of extended time to values obtained from Section 11 1 e MELSECNETH H refresh e CC Link automatic refresh e Sampling trace e GX Developer monitoring e Local devices e Execution of multiple programs e Installation removal of a memory card e File register with the same filename as a program 1 MELSECNET H refresh MELSECNETHH refresh requires additional processing time to refresh data between the High Performance model QCPU and the MELSECNET H network module For details on MELSECNETHH refresh time see Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual 2 CC Link automatic refresh CC Link automatic refresh requires additional processing time to refresh data between the High Performance model QCPU and the CC Link s master local module When a CC Link master local module is installed extended scan time can be shortened by adjusting a CC Link setting to a system setting For details on CC Link automatic refresh time see the QJ61BT11 Type CC Link System Master Local Module Users Ma
180. D at CPU front is ON 3 Anunciator OFF procedure amp processing content a Anunciator OFF procedure An anunciator can be switched OFF by the RST Fis LEDR BKRST and OUT F instructions 1 An anunciator No which has been switched ON by the SET F instruction can be switched OFF by the RST F lt instruction 2 The LEDR instruction is used to switch OFF the anunciator Nos stored at SD62 and SD64 3 Use the BKRST instruction if you want to switch all the anunciator Nos within a specified range 10 13 10 13 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 4 The OUT F instruction can execute ON OFF of the anunciator No by the same instruction However if an anunciator is switched OFF by the OUT F instruction the processing at anunciator OFF item b below does not occur Execute the RST F2 LEDR or BKRST instructions after the anunciator has been switched OFF by the OUT F instruction 1 To switch OFF only the anunciators stored at SD62 and SD64 Fault detection program ___ Annunciator ON program Display reset input LEDR H SD62 and SD64 annuciators OFF program To switch OFF all anunciators which are ON Fault detection program ___ Annunciator ON program _ Display reset input BKRSTP FO K10H FO to F9 OFF program For details regarding the LEDR and BKRST instruction refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions b Processing at anunciator OFF 1 Special registe
181. F I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 5 2 Remote station I O number It is possible to allocate High Performance model QCPU device input X and output Y to remote station I O modules and intelligent function modules and perform control with the MELSECNET H remote network the CC Link and other remote I O systems olfoJroicl liclo ofolxrix rlirla IN st sa 5 a i ea a A ee a ZISIEISIXIS S Slalx x lt s ojalg izolo S q S G SO C s 3 d d ae z z e e A A Allocation of QCPU input X and MELSECNET H output Y possible Remote Remote station station CC Link When using High Performance model QCPU device input X and output Y in remote stations I O numbers that succeed the numbers used by the main base units and additional base units I O modules and intelligent function modules will be allocated For example if X YO to X Y3FF are being used by the main base units and additional base units O modules and intelligent function modules then numbers above X Y400 can be used by the remote station However the I O numbers for remote stations should be set in consideration of additions to the main base units and additional base units I O modules and intelligent function modules For example if 1024 points from X YO to X Y3FF are being used by the main base units and additional base units and 256 points from X Y400 to X Y4FF are to be held back for use with future
182. F if boot designation switch is OFF change progress Goes ON when memory card B cannot be inserted or removed n n n n n n n z z z z z z z D D D D D D a N N N N N e e a R N a Goes ON when file register is in use SM660 Boot operation Goes ON when access is made to area outside the range OFF Within access range of file register R of memory card A ON Outside access range Set within END processing e Reset at user program Memory card A SM672 file register access range flag App 7 App 7 APPENDICES Special Relay List Continued Meaning Explanation When Set Goes ON when access is made outside the range of file registers R of memory card B Set within END processing e Reset at user program Memory card B SM673 file register access range flag OFF Within access range ON Outside access range 6 Instruction Related Special Relays ee Sa OFF Carry OFF SM700 Carry flag ON Carry ON Number of output characters selection Carry flag used in application instruction Instruction execution When SM701 is OFF 16 characters of ASCII code are output When SM701 is ON output conducted until NUL 00H code is encountered OFF 16 characters output ON Outputs until NUL MELSEC Q Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A OFF Search next e Designates method to be used by search instruction oe pearen menon ON 2 part search Data must be arranged for 2 part search
183. FF No errors Depends on whether or not a local station has detected an error detect state ON Error detection error in another station Depends on whether or not a local or a remote O station has detected any link parameter error in the master station Depends on the results of initial communication between a local or remote I O station and the master station Parameter communication etc Depends on the error condition of a local or remote I O station Depends on the error condition of the forward and reverse loop lines of a local or a remote I O station Depends on whether the local station is online or offline or is in station to station test or self loopback test mode SM1241 Forward eop ine QFE Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line error ON Abnormal SM1242 Reverse loap line OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line error ON Abnormal OFF Loopback not being conducted Loopback Meets SM11243 ali s ON Loopback implementation QnA Depends on whether or not loopback is occurring at the local station M9246 SM1246 Data not received OFF Reception Depends on whether or not data has been received from ON No reception the master station 3 OFF Reception Depends on whether or not a tier three station has MEN SMISLA Eei Data notreceived ON No reception received data from its master station in a three tier system Parameters not OFF Reception Depends
184. FFF p 3 Impossible devices Link special relay 512 points Jn SBO0 to Jn SB1FF 16384 points Jn Wo to Jn W3FFF Word device Bit device Section 10 4 Link special register 512 points Jn SWO to Jn SW1FF 10 1 10 1 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q Default Values Parameter Class Type Device Name Designated Pipierence yR Number of Points Range Used Section Setting Range i Un GO to f Buffer register 65536 points Un G65535 2 Impossible Section 10 5 Index Word device Index register 16 points ZO to Z15 Impossible Section 10 6 register 0 to 1018 k points File register Word device File register 0 points s l 1k ane Section 10 7 Nesting Nesting 5 points Noton14 Impossible Section 10 8 4096 points PO to P4095 Section 10 9 Impossible Interrupt pointer 256 points 10 to 1255 Section 10 10 Constants Real number constants E 1 17549 38 to E 3 40282 38 Section 10 12 3 h Character string ABC and 123 Section 10 12 4 constants REMARK x1 For the timer retentive timer and counter bit devices are used for the number of points and the coil and the word device is used for the present value x2 The actual number of usable points varies according to the intelligent special module For details regarding the buffer memory s number of points refer to the Intelligent Special Function Module Manual x3 Inputs outputs step relays link special relays link special regist
185. For assurance of station unit blocks in cyclic data see the MELECNET H Network System Reference Manual 4 8 4 8 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 5 Program creation restrictions a A device which is switched ON by a PLS instruction in an interrupt program will remain ON until that interrupt program is executed again XO XO PLS Mo F PLS Mo0 H END 0 IO JIRET END 0 END 0 IO IRET END 0 ON gae a i iON Switched OFF by PLS MO instruction Switched ON by PLS M0 instruction at XO leading edge OFF to ON b ADI status interruption prohibited is established during execution of an interrupt program Do not execute El DI instructions in the interrupt program c Timers cannot be used in interrupt programs As timers are used at OUT T _ instructions to update present values and switch contacts ON and OFF the use of a timer in the interrupt program would make a normal time count impossible d The following commands cannot be used in the interrupt program e COM e ZCOM e El e DI e When the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed when measuring time such as the scan time or execution time the measured time will become the value obtained by adding the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program Thus if the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed the values stored in the following special
186. High Performance Model QCPU Q Mode MITSUBISHI Function Explanation Program A O semes o series Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEG Q e SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment When using Mitsubishi equipment thoroughly read this manual and the associated manuals introduced in this manual Also pay careful attention to safety and handle the module properly These SAFETY PRECAUTIONS classify the safety precautions into two categories DANGER and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions e DANGER resulting in death or severe injury CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Design Precautions lt DANGER e Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or the PLC module Otherwise trouble could result from erroneous output or erroneous operation 1 Outside the PLC construct mechanical damage preventing interlock circuits
187. High Performance model QCPU Protection of the whole CPU by making system settings of the High Performance model QCPU Protection of the memory card by setting the write protect switch of the memory card File by file protection using password e The MELSECNET H remote I O network facility can be executed when the MELSECNET H network module of function version B and GX Developer Version 6 or later are used e The feature in 13 is the function added to the High Performance mode QCPU whose upper five digits of the serial No are 03051 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 Programs MELSEC Q 1 Program management by memory card is possible a Programs created at GX Developer can be stored in the QCPU s program memory standard ROM or memory card QCPU Program memory Parameter A a a a mt Program Memory card Standard ROM 1 RAM Parameter Parameter beat te ha 2 Progam File register File register _ only read process is enabled ROM Standard RAM 2 ee a eels I File register _ Program 32k word File register When flash card is used only read process is enabled x1 The standard ROM is used when parameters and programs are written to ROM x2 The standard RAM is used when access to the file register need to speed up b The QCPU processes programs which are stored in the program memory QCPU Program memory Execution of program Parameter in program memory
188. I code 8 characters 46H F 45H E SD20 48H H 47H G SD21 Extension 2EH 49H I 2EH SD22 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH J SD23 SD24 Vacant SD25 SD26 Time value actutally measured Number Meaning SD16 Time 1 us units 0 to 999 us SD17 Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 Vacant SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 Program error location Number Meaning SD16 SD17 File name Error SD18 ASCII code 8 characters indivi SD19 Eror one individual SD20 Extension 2EH S Error New O Rem information information SD21 ASCII code 3 characters SD22 Pattern SD23 Block No SD24 Step No transition No SD25 Sequence step No L SD26 Sequence step No H x Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number 0 0 to 0 O k __SFC block designation present Not used 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 Parameter number Annunciator Intelligent function number CHK module parameter instruction error malfunction for QCPU only number Number Meaning Number Meaning Number Meaning SD16 Parameter No 6 SD16 No SD16 Parameter No 6 SD17 SD17 SD17 Error code for intelligent SD18 SD18 function module 5D19 5D1
189. ICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 4 Common CPU Memory The common CPU memory is for exchanging data between CPU modules and consists of 4 096 words between OH and FFFn The common CPU memory consists of four areas the host machine operation information area the system area the automatic refresh area and the user s free area An area consisting of the number of automatic refresh points from 800H is used as the automatic refresh area when the automatic refresh of device data is set up The beginning of the user s free area starts from the address immediately after the end of the automatic refresh area 800H to 811H becomes the automatic refresh area if the number of automatic refresh points is 18 11H points and the area after 812H becomes the user s free area The configuration of the common CPU memory and the necessity of accessing sequence programs are shown in the illustration below Host machine Other machines Common CPU memory Writing Reading Writing Reading Oft t lt to ROSI machine Operation Not possible Not possible Not possible Possible information area 1FFH 200H to System area Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible tepai I ame Oe Automatic refresh area Not possible Not possible Not possible Not possible to User s free area Possible Not possible Not possible Possible C O 1 Use the S T
190. ION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 5 Operation Processing during Momentary Power Failure The High Performance model QCPU detects a momentary power failure to the power module when the input power voltage is lower than the regulated ranges When the High Performance model QCPU detects a momentary power failure the following operation processing is performed 1 When momentary power failure occurs for less than permitted power failure time a The output is maintained when the momentary power failure occurs and file name of the file accessed and error history are logged Then the system interrupts the operation processing The timer clock continues b When there is an SFC continue specification a system saving processing is performed c When a momentary power failure ends the operation processing is resumed d Even if the operation is interrupted due to momentary power failure the watchdog timer WDT measurement continues For example if the GX Developer PLC parameter mode WDT setting is set at 200 ms when a momentary failure of 15 ms occurs at scan time 190 ms the watchdog timer error is set Momentary power failure occurrence Power recovery END oie END ites QCPU interrupts the operation Fig 4 6 Operation Processing When Momentary Power Failure Occurs 2 When a power failure occurs for more than the permitted power failure time The High Performance model QCPU starts initially PLC power is turned on The
191. LSEC Q 10 7 4 File register designation method 1 Block switching format The block switching format designates the number of file register points in 32k point RO to R32767 units If multiple blocks are used the RSET instruction is used to switch to another block No for further file register settings Settings are designated in the RO to R32767 range in each block RSET K1 H Ro designation Memory card at block 1 RO MOV DO RO H Block 0 R32767 RSET k2 H RO designation gt at block 2 Block 1 Mov po Ro H R32767 RO Block 2 lI DADWIYIIYYPYIYYYN 2 Serial number access format This format is used for designating file register settings beyond 32k points without switching blocks Nos Multiple blocks of file registers can be used as a continuous file register Memory card MOV Do zR32768 ZRO f Block 0 ZR32767 Mov Do zRe5536 H ZR32768 Block 1 ZR65535 ZR65536 Block 2 MDLPPLPILYYIVV 10 49 10 49 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 7 5 Precautions in using file registers 1 Using file register Nos not registered or outside the registered range a When file register files are not registered in the High Performance model QCPU no error occurs even if reading writing to file registers The reading of data from a file register results in the following e Undefined data is stored in the standard RAM e OH is stored
192. MELSEC Q 1 Definition of initial execution type program a An initial execution type program is executed once only at power ON or when STOP to RUN switching occurs b PLC parameters c This program s execute type is designated as initial in the program of the In the same manner as the initial processing for the intelligent function module the initial execution program is executed only once and is not required in subsequent scans An instruction that contains a complete device cannot be used for an initial execution type program because the complete device needs several scans to complete the execution Control with one program Program to execute at every scan 1 L Using initial execution type program Program A Initial execution type program Division into initial execution type program Program B and scan execution type Scan execution type program 2 Using multiple initial execution type programs When multiple initial execution type programs are used they are executed one by one in ascending number order of the program in the PLC parameters 3 END processing END processing occurs when all initial execution type programs are completed and the scan execution type program is then executed from the next scan Power supply ON STOP to RUN i T A a Initial execution type program A y Initial execution type program B
193. Main base unit 13 a Stage setting connector 8 9 10111213 1415 gt S era 2 Extension base unit for module e 2 3B Q68B installation corresponding to SO 3 the Q series Q5__ B Q6__ B is connected s i to the main base unit or Q5L1B Q6 _B 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 QA1S68B a lL Power supply Extension base unit for module installation corresponding to 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 the AnS series QA1S6L_ B is connected to the end of Q5 _ B Q6 _ B or aaisess QATS6LB 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 3 Base Unit Assignment Base Mode There are Auto and Detail modes to assign the number of modules of the main and extension base units of High Performance model QCPU 1 Auto mode In Auto mode the number of slots is assigned to the base units according to that of the installed main and extension base units The I O numbers are assigned according to the modules which can be installed to the current base unit a For 3 slot base unit 3 slots are occupied Q33B type main base unit 0 1 2 See 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l Power supply QCPU L Five slots are not occupied Q63B type expansion base unit 3 4 5 Power supply ai m m i e m i a m d 1 1 1 1 1 1 l L Five slots are not occupied Q63B type expansion base unit 6 7 8 Power supply
194. Main routine program ccccceeeeeeeeeeees 4 3 Memory card ccecceeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeenees 6 11 Monitor condition setting ccceeeees 7 25 Monitoring the local devices 0 ce 7 30 N N Nesting etii an 10 52 O COUTOUE CY T N N E A A 10 8 P P POMON pariri eaa E TIRE 10 53 Password ii E es 7 65 PLOW instruction ccccccscccssscsseceseeeseees 4 14 POFF instruction cccccccsccsssccsseesesseeeseees 4 14 Pointer P sss vata er E 10 53 Precautions for the use of device initial values 10 71 Precautions when using timers 0 10 23 Priority OF LED opar a 7 76 Procedure for using device initial values 10 70 Processing at annunciator OFF 10 14 Processing at annunciator ON 008 10 12 Program construction 1 6 Program execute tyPe eeeeeeeeseeseeeteeeteees 4 10 Program Memory ececeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeeateees 6 6 Program monitor list 7 39 PSCAN instruction c ccccccccseceeseesesseeeneees 4 14 PSTOP instruction ccccccccccscccssecesseeeseeees 4 14 Purpose of I O assignment 5 11 Purpose of I O assignment using GX Developer eccecceceeceeceeteseeseeeeeeeeeaes 5 11 Q GPU oranes n EETA E A 18 QONGO AREE EEE EEE 2 4 7 23 ONG PU ck aa AE aceite steees A 18 QNHG PW tsintial attention E A 18 R R File register ceccccssecseseeseseeeeneeeees 10 43 Reading from the ti
195. ND processing starts after the all low speed execution type programs are completed Refer to Section 4 2 3 for details regarding of the low speed execution type program and low speed END processing 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 RUN STOP PAUSE Operation Processing The High Performance model QCPU has three types of operation states RUN STOP and PAUSE states The High Performance model QCPU operation processing is explained below 1 RUN Status Operation Processing a RUN status is when the sequence program operation is performed from step 0 to END FEND instruction to step 0 repeatedly b When entering the RUN state the output state saved at STOP by the parameter output mode setting during STOP to RUN c The processing time of switching from STOP to RUN until the beginning of sequence program operation changes with system configurations but usually is 1 to 3 seconds However this time may be longer depending on the conditions 2 STOP Status Operation Processing a STOP status is when the sequence program operations are stopped with the RUN STOP switch or remote STOP is performed Refer to Section 7 6 1 for details regarding of remote STOP function The STOP status is also caused by a stopping error b When entering the STOP state save the output state and turn off all output The device memory of other than the output Y is retained 3 PAUSE Status Operation
196. O command to write the free user area of the host machine from the High Performance model QCPU The Motion CPU is not provided with an S TO command so that it cannot write in the free user area of the host machine For the writing method from the PC CPU module to the free user area of the host machine refer to the manual of the PC CPU module x2 To read from the High Performance model QCPU use the FROM command or intelligent function module device UD GL Because the Motion CPU is not provided with the FROM command or intelligent function module device reading cannot be made from the Motion CPU For the reading from the PC CPU refer to the manual of the PC CPU 16 13 16 13 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 1 Host machine operation information area OH to 1FFH a The following information is stored in the host machine with multiple PLC systems These will all remain as 0 and will not change in the case of single CPU systems 1 Table 16 1 List of host machine operation information area Common memory Detail Description 2 address The area to confirm if information is stored in the host machine s operation information area 1H to 1Fx or not On Availability of Information 0 Information not stored in the host machine s operation information availability flag information area 1 Information stored in the host machine s operation information area l Diagnostic error The num
197. OCK EXE ERROR When an instruction is executed SFC step execution error STEP EXE ERROR When an instruction is executed Watchdog error supervision WDT ERROR PLC error Program time exceeded PRG TIME OVER Al MULTI CPU DOWN Heel e When the power is turned on when reset Multiple PLC consistency error CPU VER ERR e When the power is turned on when reset Instruction code check When an instruction is executed Other PLC maior error e When the power is turned on when reset Annunciator check F 2k k ok k When an instruction is executed CHK Instruction check lt CHK gt ERR x gt x x When an instruction is executed 1 Can be changed to continues in the GX Developer function parameter setting 7 62 7 62 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 15 1 Interrupt due to error occurrence The QCPU can execute the interrupt pointer interrupt program set when an error occurs An error that can set the calculations to continue stop in the GX Developer function parameter mode PLC RAS executes the calculation for the error set as continue The error set to stop executes the stop error interrupt program 132 The errors corresponding to interrupt pointer are listed below Interrupt pointer Corresponding error message 132 Stop all errors x 133 Vacant a he 134 UNIT VERIFY ERR FUSE BREAK OFF EX POWER OFF SP UNIT ERROR 135 OPERATION ERROR When the error
198. P ECE ERROR EX POWER OFF ICM OPE ERROR FILE OPE ERROR 2nd point 135 344 Error factor 2 10th point 2 5 CHK instruction execution Anunciator detection 2 i i i 2 2 Vacant 10th point 2ms 4 Intelligent function Specifies which intelligent module factor 5 function module is used 18 to 223 with parameters 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 56 55 54 53 REMARK x1 1stto 12th points are allocated in order beginning from the sequence start generator module installed closest to the High Performance model QCPU x2 The internal times shown are the default setting times These times can be designated in 0 5 ms units through a 0 5 ms to 1000 ms range by the PLC system settings in the PLC parameter setting x3 When an error interruption with 132 error that stops operation occurs the High Performance model QCPU is not stopped until 132 processing is completed x4 Execution of error interruptions is prohibited for the interrupt pointer Nos 132 to 139 when the power is turned on and during a High Performance model QCPU reset When using interrupt pointer Nos 132 to 139 set the interruption permitted status by using the IMASK instruction x5 To use the intelligent function module interrupt the intelligent function module setting interrupt points setting is required for the PLC system setting of the PLC paramet
199. PI ZE put condition of group outside is taken Output condition of group outside is taken Opg mode r Refresh settings trot operation mode at the stopS PLC Change screens Seting gt Vv tation stop by stop error of ALC s Send range for each PLC PLC side device P LAA tation stor by stop enoret PU 2 tpt BU cece Dev starting F All station stop by stop error of PYC3 Pont Stat End Stat End IV All station stop by stop error of PLC4 _No 1 of No 2 oj No 3 oj No 4 oj The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W R ZR Jsettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check End Cancel a A MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error code 7000 error will be triggered for the CPU modules and the multiple PLC system will be halted when a stop error is triggered in CPU modules for which the Stop all machines on a n machine error has been set See POINT on the next page for details b A MULTIPLE PLC ERROR error code 7010 error will be triggered for all other machines but operations will continue when a stop error is triggered in CPU modules for which the Do not stop all machines on a n machine error has been set 14 18 14 18 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 14 19 MELSEC Q POINT A MULTIPLE PLC DOWN stop error will be triggered for the machine o
200. Parameter List continued I O allocation Designates the state of installation of each module of the system Designates the type of the installed module Type O allocation Designates the model of the installed module Memorandum for users who do not use the CPU module Number of points Designates the number of points of each slot Sere aie input output Designates the first input and output numbers of each slot Base model Designates the model of the used main base unit and expansion base unit Memorandum for users who do not use the CPU module Designates the model of the power module installed to the basic and expansion Power module model base units Memorandum for users who do not use the CPU module Bxoaiision cable t dal Designates the model of the expansion cable Memorandum for users who do not P use the CPU module Number of slots Designates the number of slots of the basic and expansion base units The number of slots is designated for each base unit Switch setting Designates various switches of the intelligent function module iH Basic setting error control CPU upon H W error hardware error of the intelligent function module I O response time he ia the response time of the input module and input output mixture Control CPU mer Nia the control CPU of the input output module and intelligent function i Contents of I O allocation MELSECNET Ethernet setting and CC Link setting can X Y allocation
201. Performance model QCPU motion CPU PC CPU module that are to control the multiple PLC system s I O modules and intelligent function modules a Q series I O modules and intelligent function modules can be selected as control PLCs for each slot b AnS series I O modules and intelligent function modules are set as control PLCs on the same CPU modules Q38B Control PLCs can be Q68B selected for each slot o a e a N ore wo a A oa Power supply QA1S68B 16171819 Power supply All of the same control QA1S68B PLCs are selected Power supply 15 3 15 3 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM 16 1 It is possible to perform the following interactive transmission between each CPU modules with a multiple PLC system Automatically refreshing the device data between each CPU modules with multiple PLC system parameter settings Data transfer between other High Performance model QCPU and PC CPU module via CPU common memory using multiple CPU instructions FROM S TO instructions Also data reading of High Performance model QCPU from CPU common memory of Motion CPU using multiple CPU instructions FROM instruction Control instruction from the High Performance model QCPU to the motio
202. Program Boot fie SFC ij 1 0 Assignment Switch setting Detailed setting If the start Xx and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting Base mode Auto C Detail 8 fixation 12 fixation 171 Increase cable a Base model name Power model name pes Points Main Increase Increase2 Inctease3 Increased Increase5 A A a Base model name Designate the model name of the installed base unit with 16 or less characters High Performance model QCPU does not use the designated model name It is used as a user s memo or for parameter printing b Power model name Designate the model name of the installed power supply module with 16 or less characters High Performance model QCPU does not use the designated model name It is used as a user s memo or for parameter printing c Increase cable name Designate the model name of the extension cable being used with 16 or less characters High Performance model QCPU does not use the designated model name It is used as a user s memo or for parameter printing d Points Used with High Performance model QCPU Select the number of points for the slot of the base unit being used from the followings 2 2 slots e 3 3 slots e 5 5 slots 8 8 slots
203. Q 12 2 Procedure for Multiple Programs This section describes the procedure for writing multiple programs split up according to function process designer to the High Performance model QCPU and executing them 12 2 1 Items to consider when creating multiple programs To create multiple programs it is necessary to set in advance the size of each program the device used and the program file name etc 1 Program size considerations Set the program capacity within the range of the High Performance model QCPU program capacity The program capacities of the High Performance model QCPU s are shown below e Q02CPU 28 k steps QO2HCPU 28 k steps QO6HCPU 60 k steps Q12HCPU 124 k steps Q25HCPU 252 k steps Decide whether the parameters are to be stored in the program memory the standard ROM or the memory card If they are to be stored in the program memory the standard ROM the area available for the program will be the capacity shown above minus the parameter data size 2 Designating a program file name Designate the file name of the program to be stored in the High Performance model QCPU This file name is used when writing the program and parameters from the GX Developer to the High Performance model QCPU and when designating the program to be executed in the High Performance model QCPU See Chapter 6 for details regarding file names 3 Designating the program execution conditions In order to execute multiple
204. Q68B oO i oO N wo ar A a ol Empty Intelligent function module Intelligent unction module Intelligent unction module Intelligent unction module Output module Output module Output module oxi oo IN OUT oo oo oo OO oo 32 32 32 32 16 points points points pointsipoints points points points FO 110 130 150 170 Y180 Y1A0 Y1C0 S 10F 12F 14F 16F 17F Y19F Y1BF Y1DF oo N oo N oo N Power supply module 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS b MELSEC Q O assignment with GX Developer Designate the head I O number of slot No 3 to 200 and that of slot No 4 to 70 on the I O assignment screen of GX Developer Qn H Parameter C name PLC system PLC 120 Assignment Puce Paints Switch setting 200 is designated as the Detailed setting head I O number 70 is designated as the head 41414 Al alata 0070 1 0 number BAERS When the head I O number is not designated the I O number following the 3rd slot Standard setting If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way will be assigned c Q38B
205. QCPU hardware setting Set High Performance model QCPU Dip switches to specify a parameter driven drive Insert a memory card Insert a memory card in a slot if you want to store parameters or programs on the memory card during the boot run Write parameters and programs using GX Developer Write parameters on the parameter driven drive Write a program Into the memory specified in the Boot file sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box Execute a program Reset the High Performance model QCPU with the RESET L CLR switch After the boot run is completed in the specified memory the BOOT LED lights up 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 3 Changing Program Files While the High Performance model QCPU is in the Run Status a While the High Performance model QCPU is in the RUN status addition change deletion of program files from the standard ROM or memory card to the program memory can be made by using any of the following instructions in a sequence program e PLOAD Loading program from memory card e PUNLAOD Unloading program from program memory e PSWAP Load Unload For details on the PLOAD PUNLAOD and PSWAP instructions see the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Even if a program file is changed while the High Performance model QCPU is in the RUN status the settings specified in the Program sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box will remain unchanged When the High Perfor
206. QCPUs The PC CPU module is installed on the extreme right side in the multiple PLC system The total number of High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module must be up to four Multiple PLC system parameters See Section 14 2 6 In comparison with independent CPU systems there are more PLC parameter items on a multiple PLC system Of the PC parameters that have been added to the multiple PLC system the parameters that must be set are listed below e Number of CPUs Sets the number of mounted High Performance model QCPUs motion CPUs and PC CPU module that are in use e Control PLC settings Sets which High Performance model QCPU motion CPU and PC CPU module controls while modules Sameness check see Section 14 2 6 A setting exists to indicate that the QCPU motion CPU PC CPU module used are the same in the number of CPUs control PLC settings and other multiple PLC system parameters The High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU PC CPU module run a check sameness check to ascertain that the multiple PLC system parameters are the same when the sequencer power is set at ON the High Performance model QCPU is reset and the STOP status is changed to the RUN status The multiple PLC system will not start up if an error is triggered during the sameness check Concept of the I O number see Section 15 1 The right side of the installed CPU module is input output number OOH in the multiple PLC system For this re
207. R A 14 9 14 2 4 Modules that have mounting reStriCtiONS eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeseeeseeseeeseeseeeseeeteeeseataes 14 11 14 2 5 Usable GX Developers and GX Configurators c cccceccesceeeeeeeeeeseceeeeceaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaesaeseeeeaeeaes 14 12 14 2 6 Parameters that enable the use of multiple PLC SyStemMS c ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaee 14 13 14 2 7 Resetting the multiple PLC system 00 ccceecceeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaeeaee 14 17 14 2 8 Processing when High Performance model QCPU stop errors OCCU ecceceeteeeeeeeeeeteeaes 14 18 14 2 9 Reducing the time required for multiple PLC system proCeSSing e cseceeeeteeseeteeeeeeeeeeeaes 14 20 15 1 Concept behind Allocating V O NUMDETS scsccscseseseseseseseseeseseeeeesseseseeeeescaeenseeeeaeaeeneesssaeeneeeesaeaeeeeaeatatens 15 1 15 1 1 I O modules and intelligent function module I O NUMbETS 2 cceceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaes 15 1 15 1 2 I O number of High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module 15 2 15 2 Purpose of PC Parameter I O Allocations with the GX Developer csccseeseeeeeeeseeeeseeesateeeateeeaeeeeees 15 3 16 1 Automatic Refresh of Common CPU Me mory scccesscecceseeceseseeseseseseeseseeesneseseeeseeseseaeeneeasasenseeaeasateneeeseaeens 16 2 16 2 Communication with Multiple PLC Commands and Intelligent Function Modu
208. ROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION MELSEC Q CONDITIONS e When the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed at a measuring time such as the scan time or execution time the measured time will become the value obtained by adding the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program Thus if the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed the values stored in the following special registers and GX Developer monitor values will become longer than when the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is not executed 1 Special registers e SD520 SD521 Current scan time e SD522 SD523 Initial scan time e S D524 SD525 Minimum scan time e SD526 SD527 Maximum scan time e S D528 SD529 Current scan time for low speed e SD532 SD533 Minimum scan time for low speed e SD534 SD535 Maximum scan time for low speed e SD540 SD541 END processing time e S D542 SD543 Constant scan wait time e S D544 SD545 Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs e SD546 SD547 Execution time for low speed execution type programs e SD548 SD549 Scan program execution time e S D551 SD552 Service interval time 2 GX Developer monitor values e Execution time measurement e Scan time measurement e Constant scan 4 33 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 Operation Processing 4 3 1 Initial processing This is a preprocessing for sequ
209. Represents the program using the intelligent function module device or the FROM TO instruction 8 3 1 Communication using device initial value 1 Device initial value The device initial value is used to designate the initial setting of the special function module without using a program The designated device initial value is written from High Performance model QCPU to the special function module when High Performance model QCPU is turned ON is reset or is switched from STOP to RUN 2 Designation of the device initial value In the device initial value setting of GX Developer designate the intelligent function module device as the device of the device initial value 1 For the device initial value refer to Section 10 13 2 2 For the intelligent function module device refer to Section 10 5 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 3 2 Communication using FROM TO instruction 1 FROM TO instruction At the execution of the FROM TO instruction the data stored in the buffer memory of the special function module can be read or data can be written to the buffer memory of the special function module The FROM instruction stores the data read from the buffer memory of the special function module to the designated device The TO instruction writes the data of the designated device to the buffer memory of the special function module 1 For the details of the FROM TO instruction refer to t
210. SD1019 D1020 D1021 SD1028 SD526 1 second counter Clock data Clock data Clock data D SD213 D9019 D9020 D9021 D9022 D9025 D9026 D9027 D9028 Clock data Maximum scan time 10 ms units Constant scan time User sets in 10 ms units Scan time 1 ms units Count in units of Ims Clock data year month Clock data day hour Clock data minute second Clock data day of week Corresponding CPU If scan time is larger than the content of SD526 the value is newly stored at each END Namely the maximum value of scan time is stored into SD526 in BIN code Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in multiples of 10 ms 0 No setting 1 to 200 Set Program is executed at intervals of set value x 10 ms Scan time is stored and updated in BIN code after every END When the PC CPU starts running it starts counting 1 every second It starts counting up from 0 to 32767 then down to 32768 and then again up to 0 Counting repeats this routine e Stores the year 2 lower digits and month in BCD B15 to Bi2B11_to_B8B7__to__B4 B38 Bo Example L H8707 Month Stores the day and hour in BCD B15 to Bi2B11 to B8B7 to B4B3 Bo Example 31th 10 o clock H3110 e Stores the Minute and second in BCD B15 to B12B11 to B8 B7 to B4 B3 ll OO _ ae Minute Stores the day of the week in BCD B15 to Example 35 minutes 48 seco
211. SHI MODEL Serial No First five digits Function version SERIAL 03051 000000000044 LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN J 2 Confirming the serial No and function versions on the system monitor list of product information The High Performance model QCPU serial No and function version can be confirmed with the list of product information on the GX Developer Version 6 or later system monitor The intelligent function module High Performance model QCPU s serial No and function version can also be confirmed Serial number Function version Product Information List Intelli Q QU71LP21 25 32pt 0000 020810000000000 None i None z None i ed None 7 CSV file creating Close 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION MELSEC Q 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION Performance specification of QCPU module is as follows Table 3 1 Performance specification Model name Item Remark Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Control method Repetitive operation of stored program Po Direct input output is possible by direct 1 O control method Refresh mode in peer 3 put output specification DXO DYO Program language Relay symbol language logic symbolic language Sequence control dedicated language MELSAP 3 SFC Processing speed LD X0 0 079ys 0 034us Po sequence instructions MOV DO D1 0 237uUs 0 102uUs a 360 except intelligent
212. SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 14 2 5 Usable GX Developers and GX Configurators 14 12 1 Usable GX Developers GX Developer Version 6 SW6D5C GPPW E or later can be used on multiple PLC systems GX Developer Version 5 SW5D5C GPPW E or earlier cannot be used Usable GX Configurators The GX Configurators listed can be used without modification on multiple PLC systems 14 12 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 14 2 6 Parameters that enable the use of multiple PLC systems 14 13 1 Parameters that enable the use of multiple PLC systems In comparison with the single CPU system the multiple PLC system must have the CPU count control CPU refresh setting automatic refresh setting of other PLC parameters The PLC parameters must be uniform except for some among all the CPU modules used in the multiple PLC system Give similar settings to the PC CPU if one is included using the PC CPU setting utility For the setting method see the manual of the PC CPU 2 The PLC parameter settings for use with multiple PLC systems The PLC parameters necessity of setup and descriptions that are required for using multiple PLC systems are listed in table 14 3 Table 14 3 Setting list for the multiple PLC and I O allocation I O allocation rr a ee wea i f o T o e e C SC SCO Base setting Besems o SO o Poner soppy modemo J S M Yd O Sd Detailed settings Cutput mode dumngerors J E
213. Scan setting range is determined by the units of time intervals as follows e In the unit ms 0 5 to 999 5 e In the unit s 1 to 60 4 In units This column is used to specify the units ms s of fixed scan intervals 4 11 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 5 File Use Setting The PLC File Setting sheet of the PLC Setting dialog box has several options file register device s initial value comment and local device Specify whether to use files of these options for each program By default the option Use PLC file setting is selected If the option Not used is selected the File Use setting is made as listed below in the table Setting item Processing when the option Not used is selected File registers can not be used in the program e heb The device initial value is not set when the program file name and Device initial value a A ny the device initial value is the same Comment Comments can not be used in the program Local devices are not hidden or restored at the time of program conversion Local device 6 I O Refresh Setting High Performance model QCPU uses the I O Refresh setting to update output and input from an I O module and an intelligent function module The I O Refresh Setting button is used to update the range of selected programs Make the I O Refresh setting for a scan execution type program if you want to receive an input X or produce an output Y before exe
214. Slot PLC No 2 Slot PLC No 3 Slot PLC No 4 Power supply These machine numbers are used for the following purposes with the multiple PLC system e To access the High Performance model QCPU when the GX Developer personal computer is not connected e To set up control PLCs with the I O allocation b The High Performance model QCPU stores its own number in the special register SD395 It is recommended to build a program for checking the own number of the High Performance model QCPU The creation of a host number confirmation programs will enable easy verification when High Performance model QCPUs are not mounted correctly and when programs are written into other machines with the GX Developer In the program shown below the annunciator F1 will be set at ON when the High Performance model QCPU writing programs is a machine other than the PLC No 1 SD395 1 The USER LED on the front of the High Performance model QCPU will be illuminated when the annunciator F1 is set at ON The number of the annunciator that has been set at ON will also be stored in a special register SD62 fo K1 0395 et F1 Set a PLC number used for comparison For the own number confirmation method for the Motion CPU and PC CPU module see the manual of the Motion CPU and PC CPU module 14 7 14 7 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 14 2 2 Precautions when using Q series corresponding I O modules and intellige
215. TION MELSEC Q a Total Scan Time The monitor time set in WDT the watchdog timer of PLC RAS Setting in the parameter mode and total scan time for each program type are displayed 1 Monitor Time The monitoring time for the scan execution type program initialization program and low speed execution type program are displayed If the scan time exceeds this time the High Performance model QCPU displays the watchdog timer error Sum of Scan Time The total time in each item stated in Scan Time Details for Scan Execution are displayed Constant indicates the constant scan waiting time when the setting is made for constant scan b Scan Time Details for Scan Execution The details of the scan time are displayed 1 2 Program The total execution time of the scan execution type program is displayed END operation Time The END operation time is displayed Low Speed Execution Type Program This indicates the total execution time of a low speed execution type program when making the setting for the execution time of a low speed execution type program or constant scan time Constant Waiting The constant scan stand by is displayed when setting the constant scan time However when the low speed execution type program execution time is set as well this value is 0 000 ms c Each Program Execution Status The program execution status of the program specified in Auxiliary Setting of the paramet
216. The execution period of the initial execution type program can be monitored by this timer The default value is not set When monitoring the execution time of the initial execution type program designate the Initial execution monitor time in a 10 ms to 2000 ms range at the PLC RAS settings in the PLC parameter Setting unit 10 ms b The low speed execution type program is executed after the execution of the initial execution type program is completed To use the low speed execution type program specify the time that is longer than the sum of the initial scan time and the execution time of the low speed execution type program c When the initial scan time exceeds the set initial execution monitor time WDT ERROR error code 5000 occurs and CPU module operation is stopped POINT When the initial execution monitor time is designated there will be a 10 ms error in the count value Therefore a monitor time setting t of 10 ms will result in a WDT ERROR when the initial scan time is in the range 10 ms lt t lt 20 ms 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 2 Scan execution type program 1 Definition of scan execution type program a Scan execution type programs are executed once per scan beginning from the scan which follows execution of the initial execution type program b Set the execute type to scan in the program of PLC parameters 2 Executing multiple scan execution
217. To execute the Write to PLC Flash ROM function set the length of GX Developer s time check to 60 seconds or longer Shorter time check may cause a time out on the GX Developer side To execute the Write to PLC Flash ROM function via the CC Link network by operating from a GX Developer at a local station set the length of CC Link s CPU monitoring time SWOA to 60 seconds or longer The default is 90 seconds Use the default value when making the setting 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES d f MELSEC Q When the Write to PLC Flash ROM function is executed all files stored in the standard ROM or on the Flash card are erased before a batch of files specified by the GX Developer are written No files can be added to the standard ROM or Flash card To add new files to old files read all the old files from the High Performance model QCPU and write them again onto the High Performance model QCPU The Write to PLC Flash ROM function can be executed when the High Performance model QCPU is in the RUN status However for the following cases execute the Write to PLC Flash ROM function after the High Performance model QCPU enters into the STOP status 1 The file registers of the Flash card is used in a sequence program 2 The file registers are used in a sequence program by setting the file register to set not to use in the PLC parameter If the Write to PLC Flash ROM function is executed when the High Per
218. U Programming Manual SFC 1 SD1200 to SD1255 are used for QnACPU These relays are vacant with QCPU 2 Special register SD1500 and later are dedicated for Q4ARCPU App 22 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List 1 Diagnostic Information Gorresp nding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU Si 9 pL L e Ee fret e oom Be errors error code Contents identical to latest fault history information change Year last two digits and month that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code B15 to B8 B7 to BO Example Year 0 to 99 Month 1 to 12 October 1995 H9510 The day and hour that SDO was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit lock time for Beamer Nae i ane Example diagnosis error B15 to B8 B7 to BO New occ rrencg STS Day 1 t031 Hour 0 to 23 10 p m on 25th occurrence H2510 The minute and second that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code BI5 to B8 B7 to Bo Example Minutes 0 to 59 Seconds 0 to 59 35 min 48 sec past the hour H3548 e Category codes which help indicate what type of information is being stored in the common information areas SD5 through SD15 and the individual information areas SD16 through SD26 are stored here B15 to B8 B7 to BO Individual information Common information O Rem category codes category codes The common information category codes store the following codes 0 No error Unit module No PLC No Base No
219. When ae ACPU nee 9 Do TT e LED display ASCII data 16 characters stored here B15 A B8 t to BO D220 15th character from the right 16th character from the right D221 13th character from the right 14th character from the right SD222 11th character from the right 12th character from the right S When D223 9th character from the right 10th character from the right SD224 7th character from the right 8th character from the right D225 5th character from the right 6th character from the right SD226 3rd character from the right 4th character from the right SD227 1st character from the right 2nd character from the right changed 1 to 7 No of e Stores the maximum number of the expansion bases being expansion installed A k kR Main base 0 QA Bis iste expansion QCPU end expansion Remote se When no expansion 1 Q Bis to base is installed the installed value is fixed to 0 7th expansion base A Q base installed differentiation A mode Q mode B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO SD243 Expansion 3 Expansion 2 Expansion 1 Main No of base SD244 slots Expansion 7 Expansion 6 Expansion 5 Expansion 4 As shown above each area stores the number of slots being installed Loaded Loaded maximum When SM250 goes from OFF to ON the upper 2 digits of the final fa New O Rem maximum I O I O No I O number plus 1 of the
220. X Developer File Operation and File Handling Precautions cccccseceseeseseceeeseeseseeteeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeaeeteees 6 21 OSE AFIS OP SretlOny 5a 252 R T stachuetsdinedds R R stabectsaels 6 22 6 9 2 File handling precautions enie a T eden nine TOO 6 22 DSS PI SIZS sys Ea A cots hl Seg cnet adh ceed Nes eek a et Recent hah eel Men eta al Auta Sua went 6 23 ASFUNCTIONOISt 3c scala ae bahia bahia abil iinet 7 1 T2 Constant ocana aaa vere peers eye a a cere rerrprreerete reer ere reer erreerrrereeere re 7 2 To LAEI FUNCION tact dita talc ttl t tlt tl cit tcl tcl cl testa A at tlhe tata lke tabard tats 7 5 A 8 A 8 7 4 Setting the Output Y Status when Changing from STOP Status to RUN Status ccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 7 TD GIOCKFUNGCHION KEAP EAE TE AE E EE EE E EEE 7 9 7 6 Remote Operation a a a aaa a aaa a deed Taaa aa aa aa a ia 7 12 726 1 Remote RUN STOP a a s cin eee ea lt te eee ee 7 12 76 2 REMOtE PAWS EAE TEA AE bt ses deck A atch gS E AA AEA AA A ahi eters 7 15 7 6 3 Remote RESET Areas a i Se in eh ee 7 17 7 6 4 Remote latch clear cceeccsccccsssseeeessseecesssseeceesseeecsseseeecsesaeeesessaeeeseeseeescsaeeesecsaeeesesseeseseaeeeessaeeeeses 7 18 7 6 5 Relationship of the remote operation and High Performance model QCPU RUN STOP switch 7 20 7 7 Selecting the Response Time of the Q series Compatible Input Module and Interrupt Module I O Response TE errr errr eer ere erer errr eer erect er er erere
221. a PARAMETER ERROR error code 3000 is caused POINT If the PLC parameter s I O allocation switch settings and the network parameters are changed switch the power supply to the PLC on once again ON OFF ON or reset the High Performance model QCPU If the PLC is not turned off and on ON OFF ON or the High Performance model QCPU is not reset the new PLC parameter s I O allocation switch settings and network parameters are not validated 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Table 9 1 Parameter List Designate the label and comment for the CPU module to be used PLC name settings These settings do not affect CPU operation Label Designates the label setting name and use Designates the comment setting i These are the settings required for using the CPU module PLC system settings f Default values are available for PLC control l Low Speed timer f Timer setting f Designates the low speed high speed timer settings High Speed timer RUN PAUSE contact Designates the contact which controls the CPU module s RUN PAUSE operation Enables disables the remote reset operation from the GX Developer processing precision ee the assignment of interrupt pointers 150 to 1255 leading I O Nos and interrupt pointer setting leading SI Nos of an intelligent function module Number of vacant slot points Designates the number of vacant slot points in the base extension base midule Interrupt counter Designates t
222. a eal Local devices used by Lx Local devices used by the file name ABC the file name DEF 2 Cautions e If SM776 is ON the local device data is read when the sub routine program is called and the local device data is saved after the execution of the RET instruction Accordingly scan time is elongated by the time as shown below when a sub routine program is executed once with the setting of SM776 ON See Section 10 13 1 e ON OFF setting of SM776 is possible in unit of CPU Setting in unit of file is not possible If the ON OFF setting of SM776 is changed while a sequence program is executed the control is made according to the information after change For details on SM776 see Appendix 1 of this manual 10 66 10 66 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q f Using local devices when executing an interrupt fixed scan execution type program It is possible to use local devices that are used by the file where an interrupt fixed scan execution type program is stored when executing an interrupt fixed scan execution type program Whether or not such local devices are used is set by special relay SM777 ON OFF setting 1 Switching over local devices by setting ON OFF for a special relay SM777 Sea eee ee N ne Executes calculation by the local devices that are used by the file OFF which was executed before the execution of the interrupt fixed scan execution type program Executes calculation by the local devices that are used by th
223. ach program after power ON or STOP to RUN switching of the High Performance model QCPU is shown below Power ON STOP to RUN K 7 i Executed only once at power ON Initial execution or STOP to RUN type program lt e Be eNA Satie Wh er Aad Bae A e A ES OS a Run only when constant scan or e execution EE N low speed program execution time e program ype prog has been set lt a e END processing gt Fxied scan execution i 2 aeee specified cyclic type program Stand by type Run only when execution request is given Scan type program program 1 Not all execute types need to be set for the High Performance model QCPU Use the items marked with as needed such as the Initial execution low speed execution stand by and fixed scan execution type programs 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 3 Changing the Execute Type a The Execute Type setting made in the Program Setting sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box can be changed at any time while a sequence program is executed To change the execute type of a program use a PSCAN PLOW PSTOP or POFF instruction PLOW L NPSN scan PSCAN execution Scan execution Vaal Low L NPSN scan execution program ype program type program t PSTOP POFF PSCAN Stand by type program b The table below shows the timing
224. aeenseessaeeteeeeeaeateneeeaeas 2 6 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 3 1to3 3 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS 4 1 to 4 52 4al Sequence Program issnin iad asia tae lan ed ce 4 1 4 1 1 Main routine Program a AA AA AAAA 4 3 4122 SUB FOUTING PFOGFAINS aces AA ET 4 4 AML SAMOLUPt PLOGKAINS oss eich bees foe c Suck betebee fag cduck a efeaisbddg daste Hestenddy sgudicieatieedesdubeaisste a 4 6 4 2 Program Execute ype sia wtih tea hatin date hth hia Nain OAA 4 10 4 2 1 Initial execution type program ee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeceaeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeeseaeeeaeeeaeeeas 4 15 4 2 2 Scan execution type program ceccecceceeseceeceeceeeeaeceeceeeeaeeaecaeseeeaecaeceeseeeeaesaeseeseaeeeseeseaesaeeeeseeeeateaes 4 17 4 2 3 Low speed execution type program 0 00 ceeceeeeeeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaseateeas 4 19 4 2 4 Stand by type programi ssis dnai aeaaaee aaa Aa a a AEE aA AA EEE A A A aaa 4 25 4 2 5 Fixed scan execution type PrOQKaIn ceecceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeteesneeeaes 4 31 4 3 Operation PoCESSiINO eie nene aaea a NEA A GENON ONERE E EETA TREENAA ES 4 34 431 Initial PrOCESSING annern ai E a a a a 4 34 4 3 2 I O refresh I O module refresh ProC SSiNQ cccccecceseseeseeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaesaeseeaeeaes 4 34 4 3 3 Automatic refresh of the intelligent function mo
225. aees 7 63 715 3 Cancel eroism ina cee ecreree tecreeeer ere e a a a ern terre a a a a aN 7 64 716 Failure Histoty iccticcch ccc ee tee data tbaita dette dale dail dl aitailanen dain adia lata dened atl tad 7 65 PAE SYStEM Prolect 2 a4 cnadkain santana vedas Seana Loe aa A nee hag 7 66 7 17 1 Password reQistratiOn ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeseeeseaeseaeseaeseaeseaeeeaeseaeseaeeeaeeeaeseaeeateseaeeeaeeeaeeeas 7 66 Sal Te Ramot PaSSword eoria ein ee tein ee ial nia eee 7 68 7 18 Monitoring High Performance model QCPU System Status from GX Developer System Monitor 7 71 TEER DiS Plays 22 echt ee Rh A ill a ah ch ctl all abel ale ota katate lalla alate rhale 7 75 PASAY CED display ct 45 Sino Sie Al ae sa ie ene ia Si ee ee 7 75 719 2 Priority Seting wie teiecsel ected dete aaa de eet cede deen 7 77 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE 8 1to8 9 8 1 Communication Between High Performance model QCPU and Q series Intelligent Function Modules 8 1 8 1 1 Initial setting and automatic refresh setting using GX Configurator cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 8 2 8 1 2 Communication using device initial VAlUC eececceceeseeeeeeeceeeeaeeaeceeeeeeeaesaeseeeeeeeaesaeseeseaeeaeeaeeaeeaees 8 3 8 1 3 Communication using FROM TO instruction cccecceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeceeseeeeaeeaeseeseaeeaeseeeeteaes 8 4 8 1 4 Communication using the intelligent function
226. am 10 26 10 26 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 4 Precautions a One interrupt pointer is insufficient to execute interrupt counter and interrupt program operation Moreover an interrupt program cannot be executed by an interrupt counter setting designated in the PLC system settings in the PLC parameter setting b If the processing items shown below are in progress when an interruption occurs the counting operation will be delayed until processing of these items is completed The count processing starts after the execution of programs is completed Even if the same interruption occurs again while processing of these items is in process only one interruption will be counted e During execution of sequence program instructions e During interrupt program execution e During execution of a fixed scan execution type program c The maximum counting speed of the interrupt timer is determined by the longest processing time of the items shown below e Instruction with the longest processing time among the instructions used in the program e Interrupt program processing time e The processing time of a fixed scan execution type program d The use of too many interrupt counters will increase the sequence program processing time and may cause a WDT ERROR If this occurs either reduce the number of interrupt counters or reduce the counting speed for the input pulse signal e The interrupt counter s count value can be reset by using the
227. amending and canceling remote passwords a Remote password setup Remote passwords are set up on the GX Developer s remote password setup screen The GX Developer is then connected to the High Performance model QCPU into which the remote password is to be set and the password uploaded The High Performance model QCPU will transmit the remote password to specified serial communication modules and Ethernet modules when the power supply to the sequence is switched on or the High Performance model QCPU is reset b Amending and canceling remote passwords It is possible to amend and cancel remote passwords by connecting the GX Developer to the relevant High Performance model QCPU Remote passwords set in the High Performance model QCPU can be amended or cancelled by setting up an amended password or canceling a remote password with the GX Developer Remote passwords cannot be amended or cancelled from a remote location For example an outline of what will happen when a remote passwords is set up amended or cancelled from an Ethernet module is shown below GX Developer Ethernet Power supply N N The remote password is transmitted to QJ71E71 when the power is switched on or the system reset GX Developer A check is run on the remote password The remote password is set up amended or cancelled and the result written in the QCPU 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Remote password lock unlock processing Unloc
228. amount of time when requests for refreshing are issued by other CC Link modules at the same time on a multiple PLC system Prolonged time transmitted received word point lt N5 X number of other machines s The amount of data transmitted received is the following transferal data e Link refresh data RAs AY Se SW Refer to the following table for N5 N5 CPU type Systems with only a main base unit Q02CPU Systems that include additional base units 0 54 1 30 QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 18 3 18 3 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM This Chapter explains the standard procedures for starting up the multiple PLC system 19 1 Flow chart for Starting Up the Multiple PLC System C Vv Clarification of function sharing in multiple PLC system scecececeseseseseees Clarify the control and functions executed by each CPU Y Purpose of each device and allocation crvcccccccecccseoees TO USE automatic refresh of common CPU memory reserve continuous refresh points For automatic refresh of common CPU memory refer to G Section 16 1 Selection of module to be used eeeeeeeceesee0000000 Select the modules for realizing the functions executed in the multiple PLC system Installation of module sevccececcececeesese Stall the selected module to the main base unit and expansion base unit GX Dev
229. an time is the total time required to execute all the programs When an interrupt program fixed cycle execution type program is executed the value added to the interrupt program fixed cycle execution type program s execution time will become the scan time b The scan time present value minimum value and maximum value are measured at the High Performance model QCPU and the results are stored in special registers SD520 SD521 and SD524 to SD527 1 The initial scan time can therefore be checked by monitoring the SD520 D521 and SD524 to SD527 special registers Current value D520 SD521 Minimum value SD524 SD525 Maximum value SD526 SD527 gt Stores less than 1 ms initial scan time unit ws gt Stores the initial scan time in 1 ms units If the SD520 value is 3 and the SD521 value is 400 the initial scan time is 3 4 ms x1 The accuracy of the scan time stored at the special registers is 0 1 ms The scan time count will continue even if a watchdog timer reset instruction WDT is executed at the sequence program 6 WDT Watchdog timer This is the timer which monitors the scan time and its default setting is 200 ms This WDT setting can be designated in a 10 ms to 2000 ms range in the PLC RAS settings of the PLC parameter Setting units 10 ms When using the low speed execution program set the WDT greater than the scan time plus the execution time of the low speed execution program
230. an times Maximum standby time The host machine will reach the maximum standby time in the following cases with a multiple PLC system e When four CPU modules are used on the multiple PLC system e When additional base units are in use e When intelligent function modules that possess vast quantities of data are mounted onto additional base units e When four CPU modules simultaneously access modules mounted onto additional base units Reducing the time required for multiple PLC system processing The following methods are available for reducing the amount of time required for multiple PLC system processing Combine modules with many access points such as MELSECNET H and CC LINK refresh etc together into a main base unit Set modules with many access points such as MELSECNET H and CC LINK refresh etc as control module on a single CPU module and ensure that simultaneous access does not occur Reduce the number of MELSECNET H and CC LINK refresh access points Reduce the number of automatic refresh points between CPU modules It is possible to reduce scan time by amending the following PC parameter settings e A series CPU compatibility setting e Floating point arithmetic processing Refer to Section 18 3 for details 14 20 14 20 15 ALLOCATING MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 15 ALLOCATING MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM I O NUMBERS 15 1 Concept behind Allocating I O Numbers Multiple PLC as ossess I O numbers
231. ance The self diagnosis processing detects and displays the error when an error occurs when the High Performance model QCPU power is turned on or during High Performance model QCPU RUN mode It also stops High Performance model QCPU calculations 2 Processing for Error Detection a When the High Performance model QCPU detects an error it turns on ERR LEDs When an error is detected special relays SMO SM1 are turned ON and an error code of the error is stored in the special register SDO When multiple errors are detected error codes of the latest errors are stored in the special register SDO For error detection use special relays and special registers in programs so that these devices can interlock with sequencers and mechanical systems b The High Performance model QCPU stores 16 latest error codes Refer to Section 7 16 The failure history can be checked in the GX Developer function PLC diagnostics mode The failure history can be stored even when the power is shut off using the battery backup 3 High Performance model QCPU operation at the time of error detection a When an error is detected from the self diagnosis there are two types of modes that the High Performance model QCPU operation can change to 1 High Performance model QCPU calculation stop mode Stops the calculation at the point when the error is detected and turns off all output Y 2 High Performance model QCPU calculation continue mode When an error i
232. and OFF if not 7 ON SFC program present registered S Initial M9100 prog P Goes OFF if SFC dedicated instruction is not correct e Initial value is set at the same value as SM320 Goes ON automatically if SFC program is present SFC program will not execute if this goes OFF prior to Start stop SFC OFF SFC program stop SFC program processing S Initial M9101 program ON SFC program start e Subsequently starts SFC program when this goes from U format change OFF to ON Subsequently stops SFC program when this goes from ON to OFF App 4 App 4 APPENDICES Special Relay List Continued Explanation When Set MELSEC Q SFC program start state Presence absenc e of continuous transition for entire block Continuous transition prevention flag Output mode at block stop SFC device clear mode Output during end step execution Operation mode for low speed execution type program App 5 OFF ON Initial start Restart Continuous transition not effective Continuous transition effective When transition is ON executed When no transition OFF Preserves Clear device Preserves device OFF Preserves Asynchronous mode ON Synchronous mode e Initial value is set at ON or OFF depending on parameters When OFF all execution states are cleared from time SFC program was stopped starts from the initial step of block wh
233. ands that use Intelligent function module device UO GH The CPUs on the multiple PLC system write data into the host machine s common CPU memory with the use of the S TO command FROM The data written to the CPU common memory of the host machine with the S TO command is read by High Performance model QCPU of other machines with the use of the FROM command and UDOGO Non linked device data also read directly when the command is executed PLC No 1 PLC No 2 Common CPU memory Host machine s operation information area Common CPU memory Host machine s operation information area System area System area Automatic refresh area for writing in the PLC No 1 Data written with the S TO command Read with FROM instruction or UL AGC Written with the S TO command Sequence program FROM command execution Sequence program S TO command execution 16 1 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 1 Automatic Refresh of Common CPU Memory 1 Automatic refresh of common cpu memory a Automatic refresh of the common CPU memory is a function of automatic data transfer between CPU modules in END processing of the CPU As the device memory data of other machines is automatically read when the automatic refresh function is used is possible for the host machine to use the device data of other machines Data is transmitted between the fo
234. ange If Start XY is not designated for a slot the I O number continuing from the last number of the currently designated slot is assigned 2 Avoid the I O number designation of each slot from overlapping the I O numbers assigned by High Performance model QCPU An error SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs when the I O numbers overlap 2 Slot status after I O assignment When the I O number is assigned to a slot the assigned I O number takes precedence regardless of the actual installation of a module a If the designated number of I O points is smaller than that of the actually installed I O module some I O points of the installed module are not used For example if a slot where a 32 point input module is installed is designated for a 16 point input module the latter 16 points of the 32 point input module are disabled If the designated number of I O points is larger than that of the actually installed I O module the points exceeding the points of the actually installed module are set as dummies 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q c Be sure to set the same module type for the installed module and the I O assignment If the module type of the I O assignment is different from that of the actually installed module a malfunction may result For the intelligent function module make sure that the numbers of I O points are the same Actually installed module I O assignment Input module Output vacant Output module Input va
235. ange Word units 16 bits REMARK 1 For details regarding the MELSECNET H network system refer to the For Q MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual 2 For details regarding network parameters common parameters and network refresh parameters refer to the following manuals Detailed information Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual e Setting procedures GX Developer Operating Manual Windows Version 10 37 10 37 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 5 Intelligent Function Module Devices U G 2 1 Definition a b The intelligent function module devices allow the High Performance model QCPU to directly access the buffer memories of intelligent function modules special function modules which are installed at the main base unit and extension base unit Intelligent function module devices are designated by the intelligent special function module input output No and the buffer memory address Designation method U TI GEI Buffer memory address setting range 0 to16383 decimal x1 Intelligent function module special function module I O No Setting If the input output No is a 3 digit value designate the first 2 digits For X YFO X Y1F0 Designate 1F Setting range 00H to FEH When digital output values of channels CH 1 to CH 4 of the Q64AD Type Analog Digital Conversion Module X Y0 to X YF installed in Slot 0 of the main base unit are stored in DO to D3 the output input num
236. arrow Qn H Parameter x Ive YX Modelname icy PLCNo v B I iG Switch setting PLC PLCNo2 PLCNo3 v IPLCEmaty v Detailed setting 7 HEH If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting Base mode M Auto eres C Detail Increase1 Unctease2 Increase3 8 fixation Increases j Increases 12 fixation settings should be set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC settings Default Check End Cancel A PARAMETER ERROR error code 3010 will be triggered for all mounted CPU modules in the following cases The number of mounted CPU modules exceeds the number set with the CPU count setting e No CPU module is installed in slots set for PLC No 1 to No 4 14 14 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q b Operation mode setting optional This is set to continue operation of other machines upon a stopping error of PLCs No 2 to No 4 The operation mode for the PLC No 1 cannot be amended all machines will suspend operations when a stop error is triggered for the PLC No 1 Refer to Section 14 2 8 for further detail
237. ason the position of input output number 00H varies according to the number of installed CPUs However because each PC CPU module occupies two slots one slot for CPU and one empty slot the input output number deviates by the number of points set to the empty slot Default empty 16 points 13 5 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 13 6 6 MELSEC Q Interactive transmission with non control PLCs see Chapter 17 a Itis possible to control I O modules and intelligent function modules controlled by the host machine in the same way as on an single CPU system b Itis not possible to output ON OFF data to modules that are not controlled by the host machine or write in the buffer memory of intelligent function modules It is possible to read I O data from non control modules with PLC parameter settings It is possible to confirm the status of modules controlled by other machines the control status of other machines and control the host machine Interactive transmission between each CPU modules on a multiple PLC system see Chapter 16 It is possible to perform the following interactive transmission between each CPU modules with a multiple PLC system Automatically refreshing the device data between each CPU modules with multiple PLC system parameter settings Data transfer between other High Performance model QCPU and PC CPU via CPU common memory using multiple PLC instructions FROM S TO instructions Reading CPU
238. ati on request SD th il k i fth i SD736 PKEY input PKEY input SD ti at temporarily stores eyboard data input by means of the S During New QnA PKEY instruction execution App 40 App 40 APPENDICES Message storage 0 Limit set 1 Limit not set PID limit setting Remaining No of simultaneous execution of CC Link dedicated instruction Mask pattern of IMASK instruction Mask pattern App 41 Special Register List Continued ae bsi Stores the message designated by the MSG instruction to B8 B7 to BO SD738 2nd character 1st character SD739 4th character 3rd character SD740 6th character 5th character SD741 8th character 7th character SD742 10th character 9th character SD743 12th character 11th character SD744 14th character 13th character SD745 16th character 15th character SD746 18th character 17th character SD747 20th character 19th character SD748 22nd character 21st character D749 24th character 23rd character D750 26th character 25th character SD751 28th character 27th character SD752 30th character 29th character D753 32nd character 31st character SD754 34th character 33rd character SD755 36th character 35th character SD756 38th character 37th character SD757 40th character 39th character SD758 42nd character 41st character SD759 44th
239. below In order to write programs and parameters to the High Performance model QCPU memory card the memory card must be installed the valid parameters drive settings must be designated by the High Performance model QCPU DIP switches SW 2 SW 3 and the boot settings for the PLC parameters must be designated by the GX Developer For details regarding High Performance model QCPU DIP switches refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Hardware Design and Maintenance amp Inspection When writing programs and parameters to the High Performance model QCPU program memory the steps indicated by asterisks below are not required Procedural steps shown in C3 boxes are performed at the GX Developer and those shown in 1 boxes are performed at the High Performance model QCPU gorena Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual Start the GX Developer Mode selection screen is displayed Change the number of device points ToS esans Refer to Section 10 1 2 Change the number of device points at the device setting item in the PLC parameter Create the program which is to be executed in the CPU 12 6 12 6 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU 12 7 Use the device initial value Right click on the device memory and make a data entry for device initial values Select Use device memory from the device memor
240. ber and the buffer memory address are specified as shown below Q64AD An 11 CH 1 Digital output value 12 CH 2 Digital output value 13 CH 3 Digital output value 14 CH 4 Digital output value Processing speed The processing speed for intelligent function module devices is a b Reading or writing the buffer memory of the intelligent function module special function module is rather faster than the processing speed of FROM TO instructions For example case of MOV U0 G11 DO To conduct reading the buffer memory of the intelligent function module special function module and another process in a single instruction add the processing speed of FROM TO instruction and processing speed of instruction to setup the reference value For example case of U0 G11 DO D10 If the same buffer memory of the same intelligent function module special function module is used two or more times in a sequence program the processing speed can be increased by using the FROM instruction to read that buffer memory data to a High Performance model QCPU device 1 1 For details regarding buffer memory addresses and applications refer to the manual for the intelligent function module special function module in question 10 38 10 38 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 6 Index Registers Z 1 Definition a Index registers are used in the sequence program for indirect setting index q
241. bers of errors triggered during diagnostics is stored with dH Diagnostic error number BIN The year and month that the error number was stored in the common CPU memory s 1 address is stored with two digits of the BCD code The day and time that the error number was stored in the common CPU memory s 1 address is stored with two digits of the BCD code The minutes and seconds that the error number was stored in the common CPU memory s 1 address is stored with two digits of the BCD code Stores an identification code to determine what error information has been stored in the common error information and individual error information Corresponding special register Time the diagnosis Time the diagnosis error occurred error occurred Error information Error information identification code identification code Common error Common error The common information corresponding with the number of the information information error triggered during diagnostic is stored Individual error Individual error The individual information corresponding with the number of the information information error triggered during diagnostic is stored 1Cu Switch status CPU switch status Stores the CPU switch status LED status CPU LED status Stores the CPU s LED bit pattern P i P ion F 1FH VEY operation CP op sate Stores the CPU s operation status status status b The host machine s operation information area is updated when the contents of the co
242. block stop for SFC program use 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Default Value Setting Range Reference Section 200 ms 10 ms to 2000 ms 10 ms units Section 4 2 2 No setting 10 ms to 2000 ms 10 ms units Section 4 2 1 No setting 10 ms to 2000 ms 10 ms units Section 4 2 3 Checked Checked Not checked Section 7 15 No setting 0 5 ms to 2000 ms 0 5 ms units Section 7 2 No setting 1 ms to 2000 ms Section 4 2 3 Stored in th in th Stored in the program memory Saat Fe ie memon olor tie Section 7 16 X 8 k points Y 8 k points S 8 k points SB 2k points and SW 2 k points are fixed Including the above points 3 7 k words a total range of 29 k Section 10 1 words is available Section 10 2 e For one device Max 32 k points e Total number for the bit devices Max 64 k points D 12 k points W 8 k points SW 2 k points Only 1 range is designated for each device of B F V T ST C D W Section 7 3 r 2 fio RTRs D Section 10 13 1 Program name execution type fixed scan for fixed scan execution file use setting I O refresh setting during boot Clear the program memory during boot poses O E data name and source drive senes No setting The destination drive is automatically set in the program Section 6 6 memory the standard ROM Do not execute automatic refresh to the standard ROM C e d the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual a SFC volume 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Table 9 1
243. cant Input module output module Intelligent Error SP UNIT LAY ERR Vacant Vacant Intelligent function module Input output Error SP UNIT LAY ERR Vacant slot Intelligent d Be sure to assign the I O numbers so that the last I O number is within the range of FFF or less An error SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs when the last I O number exceeds FFFH System monitor of GX Developer shows kx as an I O address 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 7 Examples of I O Number Assignment This section shows the examples of the I O number assignment using GX Developer 1 When changing the number of points of an empty slot from 16 to 32 points Reserve 32 points to the slot position currently empty slot No 3 so that the I O numbers do not change when a 32 point input module is installed in the future The empty slot for slot No 12 is not changed from 16 points 1 a System configuration and I O number assignment before the I O assignment with GX Developer Q38B Input module ro Input module Input module N 2 Output module w lt Output module gt Output module Power supply module X40 60 Y70 Y90 YBO YDO XSF 6F Y8F YAF YCF YEF Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Output module oe N Power supply module 110 13
244. capacity after formatting The memory capacity of the program memory after formatting is as follows Table 6 1 Memory capacity after formatting 1 Model Name Max Number of Files Stored Q02CPU 28 k steps 114688 bytes Q02HCPU 28 k steps 114688 bytes 28 QO6HCPU 60 k steps 245760 bytes amp o lt Q12HCPU 124 k steps 507904 bytes Q25HCPU 252 k steps 1032192 bytes c Formatting precautions 1 Formatting of program memory The High Performance model QCPU program memory can only be used after being formatted by the GX Developer When formatting the program memory designate whether or not a system area is to be allocated for user settings Up to 16 k steps in 1 k step units can be allocated for the user setting system area 2 System area 0 to 15k steps Unit of 1k step User files Parameters programs etc Memory capacity after formatting System area setting If RS 232 and USB interfaces are connected to the GX Developer the system area user setting data is used for registering monitor data from the GX Developer connected to serial communication module The allocation of space for system and user defined areas will make it much easier to perform monitoring operation by operating from the GX Developer connected to the serial communications module Although the designation of a user setting area speeds up monitoring from the GX Developer connected to serial communication module
245. card registered in a trace file is not inserted e The trace file is corrupted This requires registering trace information once again by operating from the GX Developer To clear data perform the latch clear operation with the RESET L CLR switch d This is performed by connecting the High Performance model QCPU and GX Developer function peripheral device e While in the STOP status the High Performance model QCPU cannot read sampling trace results To enable the High Performance model QCPU to read the sampling trace results enter the High Performance model QCPU into the RUN status f When executing the sampling trace ensure that trigger conditions cannot be satisfied at trigger points If the trigger conditions are met when executing the sampling trace they will not recognized as trigger conditions 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 13 Debug Function with Multiple Users 1 What is Debug Function with Multiple Users a This is a function to execute debug from multiple GX Developer function peripheral devices connected to High Performance model QCPU or Serial communication module at the same time b If debugging tasks are classified by process or by function this is used when debugging from different files from multiple GX Developer function peripheral devices is performed at once 2 Function Description The debug function combination for multiple users are as follows Functions to be executed Execution time Sampling
246. ce S Status New completion ON End change SM820 Step traco OFE Not prepared Goes ON after program trace registration at ready U New preparation ON Ready SM821 Step trace starts OFF Suspend e When this goes ON step trace is started S Status n format P ON Start e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF change n Step trace Goes ON when step trace execution is underway S Status 5 M9181 Goes OFF at completion or suspension change ue underway Goes ON if even 1 block within the step trace being executed is triggered Goes OFF when step trace is commenced i ithin th i Step trace After OFF Is not after all triggers Sees ON all picks Withinithe step trace being executed are triggered trigger Ons Is afterall triggers Goes OFF when step trace is commenced SM825 Step OFF Not completed Goes ON at step trace completion S Status tracecompleted JON End Goes OFF when step trace is commenced change Trace error e Switches ON if error occurs during execution of trace S Status OFF Normal change Sampling trace JON Errors Goes ON if error occurs during execution of sampling S Status error trace gane SM827 Status latch error OFF Normal Goes ON if error occurs during execution of status latch S Status New ON Errors ose Program trace OFF Normal Goes ON if error occurs during execution of program S Status SM828 New error ON Errors trace change 8 Latch area B Ahen S SM93
247. ch clear b The devices that were set to invalid RESET L CLR switch can only be cleared by an instruction or GX Developer clear operation 1 Instruction to clear method Reset with the RST instruction or send 0 with the MOV FMOV instruction 2 GX Developer clear method Clear all device memory in the online PLC memory clear including latch Refer to the GX Developer operating manual for details of the GX Developer operation methods POINT To clear file registers or local devices use the RST instruction to perform a reset operation or use the MOV FMOV instruction to transmit 0 See following manual for the MOV FMOV instruction QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common instructions 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 7 Input Output Processing and Response Lag 4 7 1 Refresh mode The High Performance model QCPU features a refresh type input output processing format in which a batch communication with the input output module occurs at END processing A direct communication format is also possible by using direct access inputs outputs at the sequence program to enable direct communication with the input output module when the sequence program instructions are executed For details regarding direct inputs and direct outputs refer to Sections 10 2 1 and 10 2 2 respectively 1 Definition of refresh mode With the refresh mode batch communication with the input
248. ch counts the number of input condition leading edges in sequence programs 2 Count processing A counter is a device which counts the number of input condition leading edges in sequence programs a When and OUT C instruction is executed the following counter processing occurs coil ON OFF present value update count value 1 and contact ON OFF Counter present value update and contact ON OFF processing do not occur at END processing Ladder example x0 K10 lt co Processing at OUT CO Instruction X0 OFF to ON OUT CO END END Sequence program Processing content Coil ON OFF Present value update Contact ON OFF b The present value update count value 1 occurs at the leading edge OFF to ON of the OUT C instruction The present value is not updated in the following OUT C instruction statuses OFF ON to ON ON to OFF Ladder example xo K10 It lt co Present value update timing END OUT CO END OUT CO END OUT CO Sequence l I I I program j i i ON i i X0 OFF i ON CO coil OFF Present value update Present value update 10 24 10 24 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c Multiple counters can be used within a single scan to achieve the maximum counting speed In such cases the direct access input DX 2 method should be used for the counter input signals 1 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT END C Cr C END Ci Cii Sequence _ l E cae eee ae gt
249. character 43rd character SD760 46th character 45th character SD761 48th character 47th character SD762 50th character 49th character SD763 52nd character 51st character SD764 54th character 58rd character SD765 56th character 55th character SD766 58th character 57th character SD767 60th character 59th character SD768 62nd character 61st character SD769 64th character 63rd character Designate the limit for each PID loop as follows B15 B1 SD774 Loop16 to Loop2 SD775 Loop32 to Loop18 Stores the remaining number of simultaneous execution of the CC Link dedicated instructions Stores the mask patterns masked by the follows B15 MASK instruction as B1 BO SD781 163 149 148 SD782 179 165 164 MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU po IT Corresponding CPU S During execution S During execution App 41 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List 7 Debug Qorresp nding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU Si 9 beLT LI D806 Stores file name with extension from point in time when status latch D807 was conducted as ASCII code D808 B15 to B8 B7 to BO D809 SD806 Second character First character D810 SD807 Fourth character Third character Status latch Status latch SD808 Sixth character Fifth character S During file
250. character of extension ater sacle of soos ae capacity word units e block number block number change drive drive number the QCDSET instruction change S Status change App 39 App 39 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU ee 9 DoC IT SD651 e Stores the comment file name with extension selected at the parameters or by the QCDSET instruction in ASCII code SD652 B15 to B8 B7 to SD651 Second character First character SD653 Comment file Comment file SD652 Fourth character Third character S Status N i i ew SD654 name name SD653 Sixth character Fifth character change SD654 Eighth character Seventh character SD655 SD655 First character of extension 2ExH ence SD656 Third character of extension Second character of Soes Soes Soss s0656 Stores the drive number where the boot designation file QBT is ve S Initial New being stored Boot Stores the file name of the boot designation file QBT operation B15 to B8 B7 to BO designation SD661 Second character First character 9 SD662 Fourth character Third character file SD663 Sixth character Fifth character S Initial New i i SD664 Eighth character Seventh character i SD665 First character of extension 2Ex i i Second character of SD666 Third character of extension extension
251. cial function modules When 32 point input module is installed on the right of High Performance model QCPU X0 to X1F are assigned as I O numbers 5 I O numbers of vacant slots If the base unit has vacant slots where no I O modules or no intelligent function modules special function modules are installed the points designated by PLC system setting of PLC Parameter are assigned to the vacant slots Default value is 16 points When the assignment of base units is conducted in Auto mode the number of empty extension stages is not assured even if the extension stage is skipped at the stage number setting connector of the base unit Smaller input output numbers are assigned first To reverse empty extension stages for future expansion use the PLC parameter to set the base unit 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q The following shows the example of the I O number assignment when the base unit is set in Auto mode without I O assignment Q35B 5 slots occupied 0 2 3 qene Slot No 0 v2 ao ao Lv 5 A 2 S or ee E E sells OJ 5 5 5 513 Allocate the I O number with 2 5 5 7 6 fo the I O points of each slot L 16 16 32 16 64 points points points points points De aperea O numbering direction X00 X10 X20 Y40 Y50 i The slot number
252. common information PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 information If a fuse blown or I O verify error occurred in the module loaded in the MELSECNET H remote I O station the network number is stored into the upper 8 bits and the station number into the lower 8 bits Use the I O No to check the module where the fuse blown or I O verify error occurred File name Drive name Example Number Meaning ABCDEFGH IJK SD5 Drive B15 to B8 B7 to BO SD6 42H B 41H A SD7 File name 44H D 43H C SD8 ASCII code 8 characters 46H F 45H E SD9 48H H 47H G SD10 Extension 3 2EH 49H I 2EH SD11 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH J SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Vacant 3 Refer to REMARK 1 Extensions are shown below SDI0 SDT i i Higher8 bits Lowers bits Higher bits Extension name Filetype po STH THT 4H Deviceinitialvalue PSH THAW QDR Fileregister o Local device App 24 App 24 APPENDICES MELSEC O Special Register List Continued Set by Corresponding 2 memes Explanation Corresponding Time value set Meaning Time 1 us units 0 to 999 us Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms Vacant ram error location Meaning File name ASCII code 8 characters Extension 2EH ASCII code 3 characters Pattern 4 Block No Step No transition No Sequence step No L Sequence step No H
253. communication port UDP IP HTTP port Refer to the following manuals for further details on the remote password function e Using Serial Communication Modules Q corresponding Serial Communication Module Users Manual application e Using Ethernet Modules Q corresponding Ethernet Interface Module Users Manual basic 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 18 Monitoring High Performance model QCPU System Status from GX Developer System Monitor 1 In Case of GX Developer Version 4 SW4D5C GPPW E or GX Developer Version 5 GSW5D5C GPPW E The System Monitor window provides the following information about the High Performance model QCPU connected to the personal computer e Base information e Installed information e Parameter status Overall information e Product information System Monitor a gt Base Information Overall Information d Base Name Main Base Number of Slot 8 Number of Base 1 Base Type Q Number of Installed Module 1 Number of Module b Installed status Product informatiorr e o 1 Z 3 4 5 6 0108100000000000 A Base QIJELUnmo Unmo Unmo Unmo Unmo Unmo Unmo F z x R i Base Module BTlljunti juntijuntijuntijuntijuntijunti R 32pt ng ng ng ng ng ng ng Main base QZ5H C E Eka El y S Es C gt Parameter status E I O Address BBs Ie Ll Status E Unit system error 4 Unit
254. compatibility setting within the PC system setting in GPPW parameters when converted special relays are not used The following are additional explanations about the Special Relay for Modification column When a special relay for modification is provided the device number should be changed to the provided QGPU QnACPU special relay When W is provided the converted special relay can be used for the device number When AX is provided the device number does not work with QCPU QnACPU Special Relay List ACPU Special Special Applicable Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details PP aes CPU Relay Conversion Modification e Turned on when there is one or more output units of OFF Normal which fuse has been blown Remains on if normal status M9000 SM1000 Fuse blown ON Fuse blown module with is restored blown fuse present Output modules of remote I O stations are also checked fore fuse condition Turned on if the states of I O module is different form entered states when power is turned on Remains on if normal states is restored I O module verification is done also to remote I O station modules Reset is enabled only when special registers SD1116 to V O module OFF Normal verification error JON Error SD1123 are reset OFF Normal e Turned on when the MINI S3 link error is detected on M9004 SM1004 NIMI link error i even one of the AJ71PT32 S3 modules being ON Error loaded Remains on if n
255. completed OFF Not completed Switches ON at completion o change tee Sampling trace ON End A r S Status Goes ON at completion of sampling trace completed change SM806 Status latch OFE Not prepared Goes ON when status latch is ready Si Status preparation ON Ready change smear Status latch OFF gt ON Latch Runs status latch command pa New command SM808 Status latch ORE Laiciinet completed Comes ON when status latch is completed Aas 9055 completion ON Latch completed change SM809 Status latch clear OFF ON Clear Enable next status latch u New App 9 App 9 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ied ee Sey Program trace OFF Not ready i S Status SM810 preparation _ ON Ready Goes ON when program trace is Goes ON when program vaceis ready New SM811 Start progra OFF Suspend e Program trace started when this goes ON S Status New trace ON Start Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF change Program trace OFF Suspend fot under ON Start ON when program trace execution is underway ESES way Program trace Program trace trigger goes ON when this goes from OFF oa Status Smala trigger leans Start to ON Identical to PTRA instruction execution status Sae After progral OFF Not after trigger 7 S Status lsme14 trace trigger ON After trigger Goes ON after program trace trigger change New SM815 Program tace OFF Not completed Goes ON at completion of program tra
256. controller s internal latch memory backup Latch relay operation results ON OFF information are saved even in the following cases e When power is switched from OFF to ON e When reset occurs The latch is backed up by the High Performance model QCPU battery b Latch relays can be switched OFF by latch clear at the High Performance model QCPU However the latch relay set as Latch 2 Cannot clear with Latch Clear key for device setting in the PLC Parameter dialog box cannot be turned off even when the RESET L CLR switch remote latch clear is made for latch clear of it c There are no restrictions regarding the number of contacts N O contacts N C contacts used in the program No restrictions regarding the quantity used LO switches ON at X0 OFF to ON The latch relay LO ON can only be used for internal QCPU processing and cannot be output externally LO ON OFF information is output from the output module to an external destination Figure 10 6 Latch Relay 2 Procedure for external outputs Outputs Y are used to output sequence program operation results to an external destination Internal relays M should be used when a latch memory backup is not required See Section 10 2 3 for details regarding internal relays 10 11 10 11 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 5 Anunciators F 1 Definition a Anunciators are internal relays used by the user in fault detection programs b When anunciators switch
257. ction has been executed Output information is read 4 from the output Y device memory and a sequence program is executed e When an output OUT instruction has been executed The sequence program operation result 5 is stored in the output Y device memory Fig 4 7 Input Output Information Flow at Refresh Mode 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 1 The peripheral device input area can be switched ON and OFF by the following e Test operation by the GX Developer e A network refresh by the MELSECNET H network system e Writhing from a serial communication module e CC Link automatic refresh 2 The output Y device memory can be switched ON and OFF by the following e Test operation by the GX Developer e A network refresh by the MELSECNET H network system e Writhing from a serial communication module e CC Link automatic refresh x3 The remote input output refresh area indicates the area used when automatic refresh setting is made to the input X with MELSECNET H and CC Link Automatic refresh of the remote input refresh area is executed during END processing 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 2 Response lag Output response lags of up to 2 scans can result from input module changes See Fig 4 8 Ladder examples 55 LF Y5E Ladder for switching the Y5E output ONin response to an X5 input ON Fastest possible YSE ON Input refresh Input re
258. cuting the fixed scan execution type program b There are following 5 execute types 1 Initial execution Initial This program type is executed once only at power ON or when STOP RUN switching occurs See Section 4 2 1 2 Scan execution Scan This program type is executed once per scan beginning from the scan which follows execution of the initial execution program See Section 4 2 2 3 Low speed execution Low speed This program type is executed only when a constant scan setting is made or when a time is set for execution of low speed execution programs When a constant scan setting is made the program is executed during the surplus time of a scan execution type program e When a time for execution of low speed execution programs is set the program is executed during this set time See Section 4 2 3 4 Stand by Wait This program is executed only when its execution is requested See Section 4 2 4 5 Fixed scan execution Fixed scan Program that is executed at time intervals specified in the Fixed scan and In units columns of the Program Setting sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box See Section 4 2 5 c Scantimes of programs being executed except the fixed scan execution type program can be checked on the monitor of the program list See Section 7 11 1 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 2 Flow of each program of High Performance model QCPU The flow of e
259. d ehacenecubccenelshsaeescuhiaussdegudvesefiaceselsbiaeescebice 10 10 10 2 4 Latchrelays Danninin annie a n i r i a een vie 10 11 10 2 5 Anunciators F eean r aad Ha Aeae Ea R ATA eh a eed AS A A A ATAARE 10 12 1020 Edgerelay NV aaa A SAA AAEE AAA A AAAA 10 16 10 2 7 Link relays E ANE E A O E A E AA E E E E 10 17 10 2 8 Special link relays SB cceccecceseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeaecaeeeeeeaeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseesaeseseeseeeaee 10 18 1 0 2 9 Step relays S c 28 ites apelin a a a welded desta tens line ead 10 18 10 20 Timers T era A tenon tien satin tnd sna Satna setae 10 19 10 2 11 Counters C tan aon wet ara ais as aldo eis ie led ee i ee a 10 24 10 2 12 Data registers D k aa E E R E a a N 10 28 TAIS hink registers Waa aE AR A EAA 10 29 10 2 14 Special link registers SW cccecessececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeaeeaecaesaeeeeeeaeeaeseeeaseaesaeseeseateeseeseaeeaee 10 30 10 3 Internal System Devices ccscecsesesesesseseseseseesesesesceseseseeseseseaessseaeseseeseseaeaeeeaeseaeenssessesseneesaeaeeteeseeaeateeenesaeens 10 31 10 3 1 Function devices FX FYs FD u 2 6 ccecshiteicnndlead eee ddiee a a daai aieiaa 10 31 10 3 2 Special relays SM cccecceseeccccceceeseeseceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeaeeaecaecaeeaeeaecaesaeseaeeaesaesaeeeaeeaeeaeeaseaesaeseeseaseate 10 33 10 3 3 Special registers SD cccceecceccecesseeeeceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaecaeesaeeaecaeseeeaeeaeeaeseeseaseaesaseeseaesaeeeeeeaseate 10 34
260. d for commands that use many real arithmetic operations with internal arithmetic operations such as the SIN command and COS command when double precision is set e Real arithmetic operations will be performed faster owing to the internal arithmetic operations being performed with short precision 82 bit when Do not perform internal arithmetic operation in double precision is set and there are also cases where a certain amount of precision will be lost ms Ims 1000ms Common pointer P After 0 4095 speer igh 100 ms 0 1ms 100ms ed Number of empty slots 16 v Points RUN PAUSE contacts System interrupt settings puc MIN 2 i Interrupt counter start No 0 768 PAUSE X X0 X1FFF 128 fixed scan interv al 100 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms 40 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms 20 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms 10 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms Interrupt program Fixed scan program setting To turn off Perform gt etic operations High speed execution internal arithmetic Intelligent functional module settin Unit synchronization Synchronize intelligent module s pulse up operations in double Interrupt painter settings e precision uncheck F7 Use special relay special register from SM SD1000 the check box Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check Endsetup Cancel 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q At the binary system the portion of the value following the decima
261. d from the link module OFF Writes For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate ON Does not write whether to write to the link module OFF Operative network oe ON for Sl andby network A f e ON Standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or S Initial New MELSECNET 10 standby active is assumed module 3 OFF Reads For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether information ON Does not read to read from the link module OFF Writes For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate Ne ON Does not write whether to write to the link module wW OFF Operative network pote Chior Si andbynetwork A ON Standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or S Initial New MELSECNET 10 y standby active is assumed module 4 OFF Reads For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether U New information ON Does not read to read from the link module OFF Writes For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate u New ON Does not write whether to write to the link module Goes ON when a CC Link error is detected in any of the installed QJ61QBT11 Goes OFF when normal operation Status New Gopu change Remote OFF Normal is restored Goes ON when a CC Link error is detected in any of the installed A 1S J61QBT11 Stays ON even after normal S Error operation is restored OFF SFC program absent ON if SFC program is correctly registered
262. d scan execution type program Wait time is 0 5 ms when a low speed execution type program is used If the maximum processing time for one instruction in a low speed execution type program is 0 5 ms the remaining portion of constant scan time is the same as described in 1 If the maximum processing time exceeds 0 5 ms constant scan delays for an excessive duration Interrupt is enabled while an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed If constant scan time runs out when an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is executed constant scan cannot be finished When an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is used constant scan time could be shifted by the execution time of an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program Refer to QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions for the command processing time 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 3 Latch Functions 1 What is Latch Functions a The values of each High Performance model QCPU device are set back to the default bit device OFF and word device 0 when e The PLC power is turned on e The reset operation is performed e There is a momentary power failure for more than the permissible amount of time Latch is a function to maintain the device details when the above conditions occur The availability of latches does not affect the operation performed by a program b The latch can be used to continue contr
263. data from the link registers LW of intelligent function modules including MELSECNET H network module Link registers are used to store numeric data 32768 to 32767 or 0000H to FFFFH High Performance model QCPU MELSECNET H network module Link register W Link register LWO Link refresh Linkrefresh setting range When used outside the MELSECNET H network system s range link registers can serve as data registers b Link registers consist of 16 bits per point with reading and writing executed in 16 bit modules b15 on bo Wil ec Oe ls ae we ae Ge ae c Ifthe link registers are used for 32 bit instructions the data is stored in registers Wn and Wn 1 The lower 16 bits of data are stored in the link register No Wn designated in the sequence program and the higher 16 bits of data are stored in the designated register No 1 Wn 1 For example if link register W12 is designated at the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in W12 and the upper 16 bits are stored in W13 H _ pmov ks500000 we Processing object W12 W13 W13 W12 Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits ed gt In two link register points 2147483648 to 2147483647 or OH to FFFFFFFFd data can be stored d Data stored by the sequence program is maintained until another data save operation occurs The MELSECNET H network module has 16384 link register points The
264. details regarding the formatting procedure by the GX Developer refer to GX Developer manuals 3 Programs are stored in the standard ROM in units of 1 k steps 2 Data Storage A standard ROM stores data such as parameters and programs See Section 6 1 for the data to store in the standard ROM 3 Memory Capacity Table 6 2 shows the memory capacity of standard ROMs Table 6 2 Memory Capacity Q02CPU 28 k steps 114688 bytes In computing a memory capacity 1 step is equal to 4 bytes 28 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 4 About the Standard RAM 1 What is the standard RAM a The standard RAM is used when using file registers or local devices without a memory card being installed on the High Performance model QCPU b When using the High Performance model QCPU for the first time a standard RAM must be formatted before use by operating from the GX Developer See the GX Developer manual for a GX Developer format procedure c Data can be written onto the standard RAM by using the online function Write to PLC 2 Stored Data A standard RAM holds two files file register file and local device file Any other files cannot be written onto a standard RAM 3 Format a Formatting To format a standard RAM choose Online Format PLC memory and then select Standard RAM in the Target memory list box See Section 6 2 for the PLC Memory Format dialog box b Memory capacity after forma
265. dule ee ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeens 4 35 A 3 4 END processing ii Ges eran adn A ea ech ed eee ed cere eae dae 4 35 4 4 RUN STOP PAUSE Operation ProCeSSing sscsssscsesessseseseseseeseseeeseeseseaeeeeeacaeeeeeeseaeaeeeesessaeeteneesasaeeeeataeas 4 36 4 5 Operation Processing during Momentary Power Failure cscscscseseseseseeeseseseeseseseeeeseseseeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeas 4 37 A 7 A 7 AG Water Clear PKOCSSSING attr cers sass cstacathastersfeactacacacatstertartase tact sistas ae teaatacsteest a a tarts iot 4 38 4 7 Input Output Processing and Response Lag s sscsesseseseseseeseseseseeseseseeeeseseseeeesescaeateeacaeaeeesaeaeaeeteeeesaeaeeeeenaeas 4 39 APN ROTOSH MOU wz isc b 2ictinaaeiie sh epieteaten a a a a 4 39 A 7 2 DIWECt MOC i pecs eat ce a ea et te a ee ie a 4 42 4 8 Numeric Values which Can Be Used in Sequence Programs ssssescesesteseceseeeseseeeseaeaeeneeeaeaeeteeeeeeeaeeeeaeaees 4 44 4 8 1 BIN Binary Code 00 lec ain ae ei an eet i neler reii irii ei eens tevin entered 4 46 4 8 2 HEX Hexadecimal 2 eeeceecceeccesceeseeeeceneeenecenseenseesseenseesseeseesaeeseeesaeeseeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeseaesneesneeeneetaes 4 47 4 8 3 BCD Binary Coded Decimal ccccecesseesececceseeseeeeceeeeneeaecaecaeeeaeeaecaeeaaeeaesaecaeseaeeaesaeseseateaneeseateaes 4 48 4 8 4 Real numbers floating decimal point data 0 ee eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaee
266. e 16 bit x Decimal g Program 2048 2047 2046 2045 2043 0 0 0 a 15559 5458 0 0 a 0 15559 15559 5458 5458 0 0 15559 5458 0 0 15559 5458 0 0 155 545 ll v Count 2048 Timefsec Program 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q f The execution status of the sampling trace function is stored in the special relay SM800 SM802 SM804 and SM805 If an error occurs while the sampling trace function is used SM826 turns on The use of special relays in a sequence program permits a check of the execution status of the sampling trace function 1 When the write is completed at the trace data and trace conditions settings made on the GX Developer SM800 sampling trace ready turns on SM800 indicates whether the sampling trace can be executed or not 2 When a sampling trace start request is accepted the sampling trace starts and SM802 sampling trace execution turns on SM802 indicates whether the sampling trace is executed or not e A trace start request comes from the GX Developer e SM801 is turned on 3 When a next trigger condition is satisfied SM804 after sampling trace trigger after turns on SM804 indicates whether the trigger conditions are satisfied or not e A trace start request comes from the GX Developer e The TRACE instruction is executed e SM803 is turned on 4 After the sampling trace is completed SM805 sampling trace c
267. e Designates the CPU module operation mode to be established when an error is Operation mode at error occurrences PES Designates whether or not to detect a specified error Designates the constant scanning time Low speed execution program Designates the time setting for low speed execution program execution at each execution time scanning Failure log Designates the storage designation for the CPU module fault history These settings designate the number of points for each device the latch range Device settings and the local device range Number of device points Designates the number of device points used Latch 1 range Latch clear key enabled Latch 2 range er D he latch here the latch clear key is disabled Latch clear keydisabiedi esignates the latch range where y Local device setting Designates the device range used for local devices rodra s tin Specifies a program name and execution conditions to write several programs 9 9 onto the CPU module Boot option Designates whether the program memory is cleared or not during boot Designates the latch range where the latch clear key is enabled Boot file setting Boot file setting Designates the boot operation program file type data name and destination drive ANOMALE roten Designates whether automatic refresh to the standard ROM is made or not to standard ROM SFC setti Designates the SFC program start mode starting conditions and the output mode settin g in a
268. e a The low speed scan time is the total time required for low speed execution type program execution and low speed END processing If multiple low speed execution type programs are used the low speed scan time is the total time required to execute all the programs plus the low speed END processing time When an interrupt program fixed cycle execution type program is executed the value added to the interrupt program fixed cycle execution type program s execution time will become the low speed scan time b The low speed scan time is measured by the High Performance model QCPU and the result is stored in special registers SD528 to SD535 1 The low speed scan time can therefore be checked by monitoring the SD528 to SD535 special registers 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS Current value SD529 Initial value SD531 Minimum value SD533 Maximum value SD535 Stores less than 1 ms initial scan time unit us gt Stores the initial scan time in 1 ms units If the SD528 value is 50 and the SD529 value is 400 the low speed scan time is 50 4 ms POINT x1 The accuracy of the scan time stored at the special registers is 0 1 ms The scan time count will continue even if a watchdog time reset instruction WDT is executed in the sequence program 7 Low speed execution monitor time The execution time of the low speed execution type program can be monitored by this time
269. e PLC system PLC fie PLC RAS 5 SFC VO assignment modules are not to be mounted by type ers Select Detailed Settings on the I O assignment window Skt Toe Panera Seat to display the detail settings window oO PLC PLONo1 v v 3 00 LIRE PLCNo 2 y 310 2 PLC PLONo3 v y 3E20 3 IP PLC Empty v vxj 20 4 3 3 X v 5 ea z z 6 55 z z z7 J6 6 x v If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting Increase5 Base model name Power model name m Base mode Auto Inctease1 C Detail Increase2 8 fixation Increase3 Increased 12 fixation settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Control PLC settings required item HAW error time PLC operation mode ie e Selects the control PLCs PLC No 1 to No 4 for i o each slot PLC No 2 e Function version A intelligent function modules set the PLC No 3 control PLC No 1 PLC Empty e Output modules and special function modules that support the AnS series set a single machine in all slots Jsettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC End Setup of parameters other than the multiple PLC system settings Set para
270. e blown fuse and XY registers SD1100 to SD1107 and I O module verify error VO verification OFF 800 to FFO storage registers SD1116 to SD1123 according to the error display XY combination of ON OFF of the SM1197 and SM1198 X Y e Recovers the setting data stored in the CPU at restart OFF Data recovery disabled when sampling trace status latch is executed ON Data recovery enabled SM1199 should be ON to execute again Unnecessary when writing the data again from peripheral devices Data recovery of online sampling trace status latch MELSEC Q App 15 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Meaning Details Relay Conversion Modification Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device ZNRD instruction LRDP instruction OFF Not accepted read instruction has been received SM1200 for ACPU z P Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNRD i ON Accepted gt reception for instruction master station Use the RST instruction to reset ZNRD instruction Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device LRDP instruction A read instruction execution is complete OFF Not completed be SM1201 ON End p e Used as a condition contact for resetting M9200 and completion for M9201 after the ZNRD instruction is complete master station Use the RST instruction to reset
271. e reduced Overhead time us Not executed at high speed Executed at high speed Q02CPU 230 QO2HCPU QOSHCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 4 Cautions on programming a Adevice turned ON by a PLS instruction of a fixed scan execution type program is kept turned ON until the same type of the fixed scan execution type program is executed again CPU type Fixed scan execution X0 XO type program execution END 0 0 JENDENDg END 0 OJEND END 0O ON gene cP Do _ iON MO OFF H Switched OFF by PLS MO instruction Switched ON by PLS M0 instruction at XO leading edge OFF to ON b During the execution of a fixed scan execution type program interruption is prohibited DI Therefore do not execute EI DI instructions during the programming of the fixed scan execution type program c During the programming of a fixed scan execution type program a timer cannot be used Because the timer updates the current values and turns ON OFF at the time of execution of OUT T _ instruction if the timer is used during the programming of the fixed scan execution type program the current values will be updated only when the fixed scan execution type program is executed and normal measurement will be disabled d When a fixed scan execution type program is executed an interruption must be allowed by an El instruction of the initial execution type program scan execution type program 4 32 4 32 4 SEQUENCE P
272. e One unit only x A maximum of 4 modules if the network parameters for CC Link are set and controlled by the GX Developer There is no restriction in the number of modules when the parameters are set by the special purpose instructions for the CC Link For details on the CC Link System Master Local Unit that can set parameters with the special purpose instructions refer to the manual for the CC Link Master Local module b When the AnS series special function modules shown below are used a limitation is given to an accessible device range e A1SJ71J92 S3 type JEMANET interface module e A1SD51S type intelligent communication Accessible device range Input X Output Y X YO to 7FF Internal relay M Latch relay L M0 to 8191 Link relay B BO to FFF BoF oo DO to 6143 Link register w WO to FFF FO to 2047 c A graphic operation terminal can be used only for the GOT900 series Basic OS matching Q mode and communication driver must be installed The GOT800 series A77GOT and A64GOT cannot be used 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q d The modules shown below cannot be used Module Name MELSECNET IO network A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 A1SJ71QLP21 module A1SJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21GE A1SJ71QBR11 MELSECNET Il B data link A1SJ71AP21 A1SJ71AR21 A1SJ71AT21B module A1SJ71QE71 B2 S3 B5 S3 Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 B5 S3 Serial communication module A1SJ71QC
273. e PLC No 1 and with 32 points between B20 and B3F on the PLC No 2 the number of transmission points is two for the PLC No 1 and two for the PLC No 2 3 The number of transmission points is a maximum of 2 k points 2 k words with a total of four ranges for each CPU module making a total of 8 k points 8 k words for all CPUs Ch Settin 1 x 2k points 2k words 7795 screens 5 per CPU Send range for each PLC 8 k points 8 k words gt h _ PLC share memory G Dev stating BOJ for all CPUs pinn Poset Ea sot f ed PLC side device The common CPU memory Seti ieiounisot nr AN oa cent ol BE 2 points 2 words No2 2 osoof can B20 Nog a osoo 03 BO BF Nos IK 2 Se eee is set in two points and the bit device becomes 32 points when bit device is specified on the CPU device Not refreshed as the number of points for PLC No 3 and PLC No 4 is 0 16 3 16 3 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM 16 4 Change screens Setting 1 MELSEC Q 4 The common CPU memory occupied with automatic refresh refreshing becomes the total of setting 1 to setting 4 The first and last addresses of the common CPU memory being used will be displayed in hexadecimals when the number of transmission points are set The machine for which the transmission points have been set in setting 1 and setting 2 will become the last address of the setting 2 common CPU memory Up u
274. e SET Fi and OUT csinstructions 1 The SET F lt instruction switches the anunciator ON only at the leading edge OFF to ON of the input condition and keeps the anunciator ON when the input condition switches OFF In cases where many anunciators are used the OUT F lt instruction can be used to speed up the scan time 2 The OUT F instruction can switch the anunciator ON or OFF It takes longer to do so than the SET F instruction If the anunciator is switched OFF by using an OUT F instruction this will require the execution of an RST Fi or LEDR instruction Use a SET Fi instruction to switch the anunciator ON POINT 1 If switched ON by any method other than the SET Fi and OUT F instructions the anunciator functions in the same way as the internal relay Does not switch ON at SM62 and anunciator Nos are not stored at SD62 SD64 to SD79 b Processing at anunciator ON 1 Data stored at special registers SD62 to SD79 a Nos of anunciators which switched ON are stored in order at SD64 to SD79 b The anunciator No which was stored at SD64 is stored at SD62 c 1 is added to the SD63 value SET F50 SET F25 SET F2047 Z a an oe a SD62 o gt 50 50 50 SD63 0 gt 1 gt 2 gt 3 SD64 o gt 50 50 50 SD65 o gt 25 25 SD66 o o gt 2047 Up to 16 annunciator SD67 0 0 0 No can be stored SD79 o 0 0 ol 2 Processing at CPU USER LE
275. e assigned as shown below SBO For 1st network module 512 points SB1FF SB200 5 For 2nd network module 512 points SBSFF 2048 points SB400 5 For 3rd network module 512 points SB5FF SB600 For 4th network module 512 points SB7FF For details regarding special link relays used at the QCPU refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 10 2 9 Step relays S A step relay is an SFC program device For details regarding procedures for using step relays refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC Because the step relay is a device exclusively for the SFC program it cannot be used as an internal relay in the sequence program If used in this manner a SFC error will occur and system operation will be stopped system down 10 18 10 18 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 10 Timers T Timers are of a forward timer type with the time measurement beginning when the coil switches ON and ending time out when the present value exceeds the setting value The present value matches the setting value when a time out occurs There are two types of timers a low high speed that allows the current value to return to 0 when a timer coil switches OFF and a retentive timer that retains the current value even when a timer coil switches OFF Timers Timers Low speed timers E High speed timers Retentive timers Low speed retentive timers AE High speed retentive t
276. e file ON 3 where the interrupt fixed scan execution type program is stored Operation at SM777 OFF File name DEF File name ABC Standby program XO DECP D1 0 HP Occurrence XO a r 7 of interrupt __INCP DO Se 2 He Interrupt o pt prog program _ _fIRET END a Read write of the Local devices used by local devices Local devices used by the file name ABC the file name DEF Operation at SM777 ON File name DEF File name ABC Standby program XO DECP _Di 0 HE o oo o Occurrence 7 5 a of interrupt x2 Execution of the i i 1 INCP DO int t 1 Interrupt on interrupt program program 2 ihe IRET END e a Read write of the local devices Local devices used by EA Local devices used by the file name ABC the file name DEF For details on SM777 see Appendix 1 of this manual 10 67 10 67 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Cautions e If SM777 is ON the local device data is read before the interrupt fixed scan execution type program is executed and the local device data is saved after the execution of the IRET instruction Accordingly scan time increases when an interrupt fixed scan execution type program is executed once with t
277. e indicated as Yi in the sequence program For example a 10 input becomes Y10 2 Direct access outputs are ON OFF data which is output to the output module using the direct mode 2 CPU module Output module Output refresh area ome DY 10 ON OFF data output These outputs are indicated as DY in the sequence program For example a 10 input becomes DY10 b Differences between refresh outputs amp direct access outputs With direct access outputs the output module is directly accessed by executing an instruction and the processing speed is therefore slower than that for refresh outputs A refresh output takes longer to process instructions than a direct access output Moreover direct access outputs can only be used for outputs used with the output module and intelligent special function module which are installed at base unit and extension base unit The refresh and direct output differences are shown in Table 10 3 below Table 10 3 Differences Between Refresh Outputs amp Direct Access Outputs Refresh Input Direct Access Outputs Main base unit 8 0 Extension base unit 8 8 Processing speed u s OUT Y DY Main base unit 4 0 Extension base unit 4 8 Output module installed at base extension base unit Outputs of intelligent function module Usable Usable installed at base extension base unit Outputs of I O link module installed at base extension base unit Outputs used at MELSECNET
278. e initial value and select Add to spe cify a device initial value range Select Use device memory from the device memory registration setting and specify the device to be used In the PLC file setting in the PLC parameter designate the name of file to be used for the designated device initial values In the boot file setting item in the PLC parameter designate the file name of parameter and program to be read from the standard ROM In the program settings in the PLC parameter designate the name of the program to be executed and its execution condition Connect the GX Developer to the CPU Set the CPU s RUN STOP ERR LED switches ON key to the STOP position then switch the power ON In the GX Developer online mode select the program memory and use the PLC memory batch operation to format the program memory 2 12 3 12 3 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU 12 4 2 In the GX Developer online mode select the standard ROM and write the parameter data and created program Use the CPU s RESET L CLR switch to execute a reset CPU s BOOT LED switches ON End MELSEC Q If a boot file setting is not made or when writing parameters or programs onto the program memory the BOOT LED does not light up 12 4 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU MELSEC
279. e model QGPU RUN When the High Performance model QCPU is in the RUN status you can write programs or files in any of the following steps e Writing data in the circuit mode during the RUN status e Writing data by using pointers during the RUN status see Section 7 13 2 e Writing a batch of files during the RUN status 7 10 1 Writing data in the circuit mode during the RUN status 1 Writing data in the circuit mode during the RUN Status a Writing data in the circuit mode during the RUN status is used to write a program during the High Performance model QCPU RUN status b Changing the program can be performed without stopping the process in High Performance model QCPU program using writing data in the circuit mode during the RUN status D Xe J GX Developer Change by GX Developer and write in High Performance model QCPU at the conversion c Writing to the program during RUN can be performed from a GX Developer function peripheral device connected to another station in the network Change by GX Developer and write in High Performance model QCPU at the conversion Personal computer GX Developer 7 FUNCTION 2 MELSEC Q Precautions Take a note of the following when writing during RUN a 1 2 The memory that can be written during RUN is only program memory 1 If the write during RUN is performed while booting a program from a memory card RAM the pr
280. e programs in the past can be stored in the memory as they are in the form of the corrected histories If amemory card is not installed a program can be stored onto the standard ROM built in the High Performance model QCPU and 32k 128k points of file registers can be handled by the standard RAM Data can be written automatically to standard ROM You need not use GX Developer to write parameters programs on a memory card to the standard ROM of the High Performance model QCPU When the standard ROM is used to perform ROM operation you can load a memory card into the High Performance model QCPU and write parameters programs on the memory card to the standard ROM Hence you need not carry GX Developer personal computer to rewrite the parameters programs File registers as big as 128k points can be handled by the Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU whose function version is B The total size of file registers of the QOD2CPU QOD2HCPU QO6HCPU and Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU whose function version is A is 32k points 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 10 External I O can be turned ON OFF forcibly If the High Performance model QCPU is in the RUN mode you can operate GX Developer to turn external inputs outputs ON OFF forcibly independently of the program execution status You need not put the High Performance model QCPU in the STOP mode to perform wiring operation tests by forced ON OFF of outputs 11 Remote password can be set When access to an Ethernet mod
281. e tier system Valid only for the master stations in a three tier system y M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203 M9204 M9205 M9206 M9207 M9208 the master station in tier two matches that of the master Sets master e Depends on whether or not the B and w data controlled station B and W by higher link master station host station is sent to eanemission OFF Transmits to tier2 and lower link local stations tertiary stations P SM1208 tier 3 When SM1208 is OFF B and W of host station is range for lower ON Transmits to tier2 only sent to tertiary stations link master When SM1208 is ON B and W of host station is stations only not sent to tertiary stations Link parameter Set to ON not to match B and W of the higher and lower check command OFF Executing the check links When SM1209 is ON the link parameters of the M9209 SM1209 for lower link function higher and lower links are not checked master stations ON Check non execution e When SM1209 is OFF the link parameters of the higher only and lower links are checked M9210 SM1210 Link card error for OFF Normal Depends on presence or absence of the link card master station ON Abnormal hardware error Judged by the CPU Link module error 7 OFF Normal M9211 SM1211 Ea for local station ON Abnormal use OFF Online M9224 SM1224 Link state ON Offline station to station Depends on whether the master station is online or offline test or self loopback or is i
282. eaeeeeseaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenas 4 49 4 9 Character String Data iiia haia aaa aada aa aia aa aa aaia daadaa aaa aaa aa aa aaa aaia aa aidaa iaid 4 52 5 1 Relationship Between the Number of Stages and Slots of the Extension Base Unit c ccceeeeeeeees 5 1 5 2 Installing Extension Base Units and Setting the Number Of Stages cccssceesseeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeteneees 5 2 5 3 Base Unit Assignment Base MOE sesers aa A NAAA E 5 3 54 Whatare AO NUMDSTS naiean a aa a a a aiaa a aa reece aa iae 5 7 5 5 Concept of I O Number ASSIQNIMe hn t s cececseseceseseeseseseeeeseseseeceseseseeseseaeaeeneseseaeseeeseaeaeeteaeasateneeeaeaeeteneeeaeateneees 5 8 5 5 1 I O numbers of main base unit and extension base UNItS cccecceceeseeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeaeeeseeeeaeeaes 5 8 5 5 2 Remote station O NUMDEM ccccecceceeseeeeceeeeseeaecaeceeeeaecaecaeseeeaesaecaesaeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseataeseeseaeeaees 5 10 5 6 VO Assignment by GX Developer scccccscesessesesesesseseseseseeseseeeeseseseeeeaeseseetesacseseeeeaeseseatesaesenseneseeseeteneeseateatens 5 11 5 6 1 Purpose of I O assignment by GX Developer ceccesceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeseeseeesaesaeseeeeaesaeeaeseeeeaes 5 11 5 6 2 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer ccecceceeseeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeaesaeseseaesaeeaeseeteateaes 5 12 5 7 Examples of I O Number ASSIQNMen cscececeseseeseseseeeeseseseeeeseseseeesea
283. eaeeneseaeseeacaeeeeeeeaeateneaeeseeesasetenseeasateteets 5 15 5 8 Checking the O NUMbE6rS 2a c ttn beta ea Wada donald ed ea ddan dee ni ade 5 18 6 1 About the High Performance model QCPU S M MOr y s cssesseseseseseeseseeeseeseseeeeeeseseseeneeseaeeteeeeeaeeteneeeasateneees 6 3 6 2 Program MEMO iirc eerie eee eek le cau dlgh ceeded RAAE eve cue eveues evel cues evee dle AAAA 6 6 6 3 About the Standard ROM csesscsesesesesseseseseeseseseeeescseseeeeseseaeeeeseacseaeeeaeaeaeensseseaeeeesecseaeeneasssaeeneeeesaseteneesasaeeneets 6 8 6 4 About the Standard RAM ccecscsesscssseessseseeseseeeeeeseseseeeeseseseeeseaeseseeaeaeseaeeasacseaeeeeasaeseateneaeseaeeesssnseeteeeeeeatensees 6 9 6 5 Memory Caldane a tapas aaa kas A Gp certian nace srr ede cies acd eneeacee eee 6 11 6 6 Writing Data in the Standard ROM or on the Flash Card ccscsscsssseseeseseeseseeesceseeeeseeeseeeeseaeeteeeeessaeeneeeseatens 6 12 6 6 1 Writing Data in the standard ROM or on the flash card using the GX developer 0eeeee 6 12 6 6 2 Automatic writing in the standard ROM automatically writing all data from the memory card to the Standard ROM yscclien fess terest evel E E A A eed dieelivehaes 6 14 6 7 Executing Standard ROM Memory Card Programs Boot Run ccsscsessceseseseseseeeeeeseseseesesteneeesesteneeeaeatens 6 17 6 8 Program File Gonfiguration siicncirash dita ad eaaa aa aaa aa aa aa a aaan an a aeaa 6 18 6 9 G
284. ecifications functions programming 13JF60 debugging error codes and others of MELSAP3 Option How to Use This Manual This manual is prepared for users to understand memory map functions programs and devices of the CPU module when you use MELSEC Q series sequencers The manual is classified roughly into three sections as shown below 1 Chapters 1 and 2 Chapters 3 to 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapters 9 and 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapters 13 to 19 This manual does not explain the functions of power supply modules base units extension cables memory cards and batteries of QCPU For these functions refer to the manual shown below QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Describe the outline of the CPU module and the system configuration The feature of CPU module and the basics of the system configuration of CPU are described Describe the performance specifications executable program I O No and memory of the CPU module Describes the functions of the CPU modules Describes communication with intelligent function modules Describe parameters and devices used in the CPU modules Describes the CPU module processing time Describes the procedure for writing parameters and programs created at the GX Developer to the CPU module Describes an overview of the multiple PLC system the system configuration the I O numbers communications between CPU module
285. ect valid file Protection description Method iming PN Set the High Prohibits all write control nde Performance model All of CPU All files specification to the High QCPU system setting Performance model QCPU switch SW1 on Memory card i Performs drive protect forthe Set write protect switch All files i Always module memory card and write protect jon the memory card on The attributes for a file is Programs i Change the attributes for changed to the following ir File module Device comments Ot es _ j the file in the Password Always tins 1 Read Write display prohibit Device initial values i an Registration 2 Write prohibit The control instruction read write display and write are mentioned above are as follows Item Description Ata High Performance model QCPU operation specification from Control specification remote operation Remote RUN remote STOP etc Read Write display Program read write operations Write Operation that writes the program and tests POINT The following functions set with the PLC parameters and High Performance model QCPU dip switches will be executed when the High Performance model QCPU system s SW1 setup switch is set to ON even if the system protect function is activated e Booting from the standard ROM and the memory card e Automatic writing in the standard ROM 7 17 1 Password registration Password is used to prohibit the data read and write of
286. ecured Sixteen times the number of transmission points will be set if a bit device is specified in the CPU device For example If the total number of transmission points for PLC No 1 to No 4 is ten then 160 points will be set between BO and B9F when the BO link relay is specified 16 4 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 The CPU devices are set as follows e Itis possible to change the device and set up settings 1 to 4 The same devices can also be specified as long as the device range for settings 1 to 4 are not duplicated Setting 1 In the case of link relays Change screens Setting 18 Send range for each PLC PLC side device RUE PLC share memory G Dev stating BOJ It is possible to change the device Pott Stat End Stat End and set up settings 1 to 4 0800 oso BOC 0800 0801 No3 4l 0800 0803 0800 0801 Setting 2 In the case of link registers Change screens Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLC PLC share memory G Point Stat End Stat End e The same devices can be specified for settings 1 to 4 However as setting 1 in the illustration on the left uses CEE SSS SSS Sas SSS 160 points between BO and BOF ce OR BAO and higher can be used for setting 3 No part of a device number can be Setting 3 In the case of link relays duplicated as shown with BO to B9F on setting 1 and B90 to B10F on setting 3 Change screens
287. ed Z0 1 execution type program x For interrupt program Z0 is changed to 3 Word devices should be used to transfer index register data from an interrupt or fixed scan execution type program to a scan or low speed execution type program 10 41 10 41 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 When the High speed execution check box is ON a If ascan execution type program low speed execution type program is switched to an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program index register data will not be saved restored b If data is written onto index registers by using an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program the values of index registers used for an scan low speed execution type program will be corrupted i Switch i i Scan low speed ing iInterrupt program Reset Scan low speed execution type program Executed program i execution type Fixed scan execution gt execution type program itype program program Transf Transf Index register value Zo 1 ered 70 1 to zo 3 ered 1 _ 79 3 Index register storage area For scan low speed Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 Z0 0 x For interrupt program Z0 is changed to 3 c Before writing data onto index registers by using an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program use the ZPUSH ZPOP instruction to save restore the data SM400 lo I ZPUSH DO e a store the SM400 ZPOP D0 The data after DO is stored
288. ed as a device initial value file in the High Performance model QCPU s program memory standard RAM or memory card At power ON or on switching from STOP to RUN the High Performance model QCPU writes the data from the device initial value file to the specified device or intelligent function module buffer memory GX Developer Device initial High Performance model QCPU t Program memory Standard ROM Memory card value range setting Device initial value data setting 10 69 Device initial value writing gt Device initial value file Device initial value writing Designated Power supply ON device STOP to RUN Intelligent function module 10 69 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c Device initial values can be used at the following devices 1 Timer present value T 7 Special link register SW 2 Retentive timer present value ST 8 File register RO to R32767 3 Counter present value C 9 Intelligent function module device 4 Data register D UCA GT3 5 Special register SD 10 Link direct device JE3 WW 3 6 Link register W JO SWL 2 Procedure for using device initial values a Designate the device initial value range settings in the device mode in the device initial value setting screen b Designate the device initial value data settings in the device mode screen Device initialization range setting screen Device mode screen
289. ed in a program memory are written No files can be added to the standard ROM or Flash card The memory capacity of a standard ROM or Flash card is the same as that of a program memory A memory of a larger size than the memory capacity of a program memory cannot be used To execute the Write the program memory to ROM function set the length of GX developer s time check to 60 seconds or longer Shorter time check may cause a time out on the GX Developer side To execute the Write the program memory to ROM function via the CC Link network by operating from a GX Developer at a local station set the length of CC Link s CPU monitoring time SWOA to 60 seconds or longer The default is 90 seconds Use the default value when making the setting 2 Write to PLC Flash ROM a b The Write to PLC Flash ROM function is useful when writing a batch of files specified by the GPPW onto a standard ROM or Flash card The Write to PLC Flash ROM function can fill all available space in a standard ROM or Flash card If a program that contains a small number of steps is written on a Flash card it will take long to fill the Flash card with programs When a RS 232 interface is installed at Q2MEM 4MBF a baud rate of 115 2k bps takes about 14 minutes To write data on a Flash card increase a baud rate or use a USB interface If the Write to PLC Flash ROM function is executed from a local station communication time will get longer
290. ed to Continue in the GX Developer function parameter setting 2 Can be set to No in the GX Developer function parameter setting Also checking is not performed when SM251 is on gt 3 Can be set to No in the GX Developer function parameter setting 7 61 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q Self Diagnosis List Continued from the preceding page Diagnosis description Diagnostic timing When the power is turned on when reset REMOTE PASS ERR Paswoderr _fpewove passer f When switched from STOP to RUN e When the power is turned on when reset INSTRUCT CODE ERR STRESS e When switched from STOP to RUN e When the power is turned on when reset No END i i MISSING END INS SSG S e When switched from STOP to RUN e When the power is turned on when reset Poi i AN T SET P SENP When switched from STOP to RUN e When the power is turned on when reset Poi i AN T SET I a SEIO When switched from STOP to RUN Operation check error Default ad Stop 1 OPERATION ERROR When an instruction is executed FOR to NEXT i i Bak to instruction structure FOR NEXT ERROR CALL to RET instruction structure Ee CAN T EXECUTE P When an instruction is executed Program error error Interrupt program eror SFC operation check error al SFCP OPE ERROR When an instruction is executed Default Stop SFC program execution error ISFCP EXEERROR EXE ERROR When switched When switched from STOPtoRUN STOP to RUN SFC block execution error BL
291. eed programs MELS Corresponding ACPU m9 OCILI 36 S Every END processing S Every END M9038 processing S Every END M9039 processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Status change S Status change S Status change M9034 format change S Status change Every END processing Every END processing EC Q Applicable CPU APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List 4 Scan information cee halle Low speed OFF Completed or not executed Goes ON when low speed execution type program is Every END executed execution flag ON Execution under way processing e When this goes from OFF to ON the module service interval designated by SD550 is read to SD551 through 552 Reads module OFF Ignored service interval ON Read 5 Memory cards Memory card A OFF Unusable S Initial SM600 usable flags ON Use enabled ON when memory card A is ready for use by user nitial Goes ON when memory card A protect switch is ON S Initial SM602 Drive 1 flag OFF No grive 1 e Goes ON when drive 1 card 1 RAM area is present S Initial ON Drive 1 present SM603 Drive 2 flag OFF Nadie 2 Goes ON when drive 2 card 1 ROM area is present S Initial ON Drive 2 present SM604 Memory card A OFF Notinuse Goes ON when memory card A is in use S Initial in use flag ON In use Manion card Be JORF Remove insert enabled Goes ON when memory card
292. el Such use will result in a pointer configuration error error code 4021 10 54 10 54 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Common pointer range of use In order to use common pointers the first common pointer No must be designated in the PLC system settings in the PLC parameter setting A range of common pointers starts from a specified pointer number to P4095 However only pointer numbers subsequent to the local pointer range can be designated by parameter setting as common pointers If a total of 400 points are used in three programs 100 points in Program A 100 points in Program B and 200 points in Program C for example all local pointers after P400 can be used as common pointers If the last number of local pointers used in several programs overlaps the first number of common pointers a pointer configuration error Error Code 4020 will occur Program A Program B Program C PO to P99 used PO to P99 used PO to P199 used in program in program in program PO to P99 occupy 100 points PO to P99 occupy 100 points PO to P199 occupy 200 points y Total of 400 points used All pointers after P400 can be used as common pointers Common pointer settings screen Set the head number of the common 170 assignment pointers here Qn H Parameter Came PLC system PLC fie PLC RAS Device Program Boo Timer limit setup Low fico 2 Common pointer p j400 After 0 4095 Seat ms 1ms
293. eloper startup ccvcccccccccccccoeee Start the GX Developer Version 6 or later For the starting method refer to the GX Developer operating manual Multiple PLC setting control CPU setting and other parameter settings scecececeseseseseees Create parameters and sequence programs for PLC No 1 Creation of sequence programs to No 4 For multiple PLC settings and control CPU settings refer to Sections 16 1 and 19 2 For automatic J refresh of device data refer to Section 16 1 PLC power ON cevcccccccecccccseee Select STOP at the RUN STOP switch of the QCPU and turn off the RESET L CLR switch and turn on the PLC Connection of PC and QCPU PLC No 1 1 eeseseseeseeeeeseees Connect the PC from which GX Developer has been started and the QCPU with the QCPU of the PLC No 1 using RS 232 cable or USB cable Parameter and program writing ccvcccccccccccocoees Write parameters and sequence programs to the PLC No 1 For PLC No 2 to No 4 select and write the applicable CPU according to the connection destination 19 designation PLC No 1 QCPU resetting eeeeeeecceesee0000000 Set the RESET L CLR switch of the QCPU of the PLC r n No 1 in the RESET position 1 1 For systems with a PC CPU module install GX Developer Version 7 or later to the PC CPU module to connect the High Performance QCPU with GX Developer via the bus Refer to the GX Developer Version 7 or later operating manual for details 19 1 19 1 19
294. emory to the file 1 When the history count in the parameter history file is changed 2 When a memory card which has a different history count than the parameter is set d The storage area in the failure history file is as follows File in the set memory card Amount that can be stored Max 100 can be changed x1 When the number of storage exceed the amount that can be stored the oldest history is overwritten with the latest history Even if the failure history file set in the parameter does not exist in the memory card the High Performance model QCPU does not yield an error The High Performance model QCPU only performs the processing to store the failure to the failure history storage file 2 Failure History Clearing Method The failure history storage memory failure history file are cleared using the failure history clear in the GX Developer PLC diagnosis mode Data files stored in the High Performance model QCPU failure history storage memory and failure history file in the memory card can be cleared with a failure history clear 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 17 System Protect The High Performance model QCPU has a few protection functions system protect for the program changes to processing of general data obtained from a third party other than the designer access processing from GX Developer function or serial communication module There are the following methods for system protects Valid Item to protect Prot
295. en the FROM TO instruction is executed Battery low BATTERY ERROR e Always Default Yes 3 1 0 module verification Default When the END instruction is executed i NIT VERIFY ERROR Stop Default Yes Intelligent function module e When the power is turned on when reset paean pame emun minis When switched from STOP to RUN intelligent program execution ee SP UNIT ERROR e When the FROM TO instruction is executed Default Stop on function moduleversion SP UNIT VER ERR e When the power is turned on when reset No parameter MISSING PARA e When the power is turned on when reset Boot error BOOT ERROR When the power is turned on when reset Memory cate operation orror ICM OPE ERROR When the memory card is installed removed Default Stop File setting error FILE SET ERROR e When the power is turned on when reset File access error Default Stop Instruction execution not possible CAN T EXE PRG e When the power is turned on when reset e When the power is turned on when reset Parameter setting check PARAMETER ERROR lt When switched from STOP to RUN e When the power is turned on when reset Link parameter error LINK PARA ERROR When switched from STOP to RUN SFC parameter error SFC PARA ERROR e When switched from STOP to RUN Intelligent funetion Module SP PARA ERROR e When the power is turned on when reset parameter error FILE OPE ERROR When an instruction is executed 1 Can be chang
296. ence operation execution and is performed only once as shown in the table below When the initial processing is completed the High Performance model QCPU goes in the RUN STOP switch setting status See Section 4 4 High Performance model QCPU status Initial processing item When the power When reset is When STOP is turned on executed to RUN The I O module initialization Boot from the standard ROM memory card Device initialization of the range not latched bit device OFF word device 0 Execution of self diagnosis in the QOPU Start of the MELSECNET H network information setting and network communication witch setting of intelligent function module C Link data setting Ethernet data settin Setting of device initialization values ar loo er ee eee i C e lt a a Automatic allocation of the I O number of installed modules We Aires a ee Eae ee el ee a es a ae M a aa executed x not executed REMARK x1 When parameters or programs are changed in the STOP status reset by the RESET L CLR switch When the RUN STOP switch is turned from STOP to RUN without the reset RUN LED flashes When the RUN STOP switch is turned from RUN to STOP to RUN again the High Performance model QCPU goes in the RUN status and the When STOP to RUN status becomes effective 4 3 2 I O refresh I O module refresh processing In I O refresh an input X is received from the input module intelligent function module
297. er mode is displayed 1 2 3 3 Precaution Program The program name is displayed in the order set in the parameter Execute The program type set in the parameter is displayed Scan Time The actual scan time current value is displayed At the program stop wait state the scan time is displayed as 0 000 ms Constant waiting The number of times the program was executed is displayed setting the starting point of when the measurement is started as 0 When the number reaches 65536 times it is reset to 0 The ex times remains even when the program is stopped The scan time of a constant scan execution type program being executed is not displayed on screen but a dash is displayed in the Scan Time column 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 11 2 Interrupt program monitor list 1 What is Interrupt Program Monitor List a This is a function to display the number of executions of the interrupt program l0 to 1255 b This is used when confirming the execution status of the interrupt program 2 Using the Interrupt Program Monitor List a Choose Online Monitor Interrupt program monitor list The Interrupt Program Monitor List dialog box appears on screen b The following shows an execution example of the interrupt program monitor list Interrupt program monitor list Cut in pointer Common comment 2512 100ms 6280 40ms 12560 20ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a b a
298. er s multiple PLC settings determines whether output can be loaded from output modules and intelligent function modules being controlled by other machines Multiple PLC settings No of PLC r Dutt of group input output settings Loe put condition of group outside is taken No of Pl 7 l Output condition of group outside is taken Input outside of group setting Output condition of group is taken Do not load output outside of group setting amp Output condition of group is taken Load output outside of group setting Operating mode r Refresh settings Error operation mode at the stop of PLC Change screens Setting1 Y VV All station stop by stop error of PLC IZ All station stop by stop eror of PLC2 pc Send ange for each PLC ERA I All station stop by stop error of PLC3 Point Start End Start End J All station stop by stop error of PLC4 No 1 No 2 0 No 3 0 No 4 a The applicable device of head device is B M Y D WRZR settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check End Cancel a When Load output condition outside of group has been set 1 Loads ON OFF data output to output modules and intelligent function modules by other machines into the host machine s output Y with the END process s input refresh function 2 Output Y loading is performed for the modules mounted onto the
299. er strings in sequence programs They are designated by quotation marks e g ABCD1234 Usable characters All ASCII code characters can be used in character strings The QCPU is sensitive to uppercase and lowercase characters Number of designated characters Character strings extend from the designated character to the NUL code 004 You can use up to 32 characters for a character string in an instruction such as MOV 10 62 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 13 Convenient Uses for Devices When executing multiple programs in the High Performance model QCPU local devices among the internal user devices can be designated to execute each of the programs in an independent manner Moreover the device initial settings can be used to designate device and intelligent function module special function module data settings without using a program 10 13 1 Global devices amp local devices A number of programs can be stored and executed in the High Performance model QCPU High Performance model QCPU devices which can be shared by all the programs are global devices and those used independently by each of the programs are local devices 1 Global devices a Global devices are devices which can be shared by all the programs being executed in the High Performance model QCPU Global devices are stored in the High Performance model QCPU s device memory with all programs using the same devices High Performance model QCPU
300. eration STOP No3 PLC operation STOP switch STOP p Enor status No Present Ei 7000 MULTI CPU DOWN 4100 OPERATION ERROR 7001 MULTI CPU DOWN Eror log Clear log Year Month Da OPERATION ERROR 2000 11 6 c Observe the following procedures to restore the system 1 Confirm the cause of the PLC No 1 error with the PLC diagnostics function 2 Remove the cause of the error 3 Either reset the PLC No 1 or restart the power to the PLC All machines on the entire multiple PLC system will be reset and the system restored when the PLC No 1 is reset or the power to the PLC is restarted 14 19 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 14 2 9 Reducing the time required for multiple PLC system processing 1 Multiple PLC system processing A bus base unit pattern extension cable is used by the CPU module when accessing the I O module and intelligent function module and this bus cannot be used by plural CPU module at the same time The CPU modules that attempted buss access afterwards when plural CPU module use the bus simultaneously will assume the Standby status until processing for the CPU module that executed the procedure first has been completed This Standby status the amount of time the CPU module must wait will cause delays in input and output on the multiple PLC system and result in extended scan times Refer to Chapter 18 for details on extended sc
301. ere the start request was made S Initial When ON starts from execution block and execution U step active at time SFC program was stopped ON is enabled only when resumptive start has been designated at parameters SM902 is not automatically designated for latch When OFF transition occurs at one scan one step for all blocks When ON transition occurs continuously for all blocks in one scan In designation of individual blocks priority is given to the continuous transition bit of the block Designation is checked when block starts When continuous transition is effective goes ON when continuous transition is not being executed goes OFF when continuous transition is being executed e Normally ON when continuous transition is not effective When block stops selects active step operation output All coil outputs go OFF when OFF Coil outputs are preserved when ON Selects the device status when the stopped CPU is run after the sequence program or SFC program has been modified when the SFC program exists Selects the output action of the step being held when a block is ended by executing the end step All coil outputs go OFF when OFF Coil outputs are preserved when ON e Asynchronous mode Mode where the operations for the low speed execution type program are continued during the excess time e Synchronous mode Mode where the operations for the low speed execution type program are started from
302. erformance model QCPU control has been suspended A suspension error BOOT OK Error Code 9020 will be triggered when automatic writing in the standard ROM has been completed It is necessary to reset the High Performance model QCPU or restart up the power supply to the sequencer after automatic writing in the standard ROM has been completed 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 1 Execution procedure for automatically writing in the standard ROM Observe the following procedure for automatically writing in the standard ROM a Crane PLC system PLC tie PLCRAS Device Pram Soatte SFC 0 segment Operations with the GX Developer Settings for automatically writing in the standard ROM 1 Boot option I Clear program memory System area assured steps 0 K steps 0 15K step M Memory card lt to gt Standard ROM all data auto write Boot file setting Add a tick to Writing all data from the memory card to the standard ROM with the PC parameter s boot file settings This sets the parameters and programs to be booted with the boot file Set the place of transmission in the Standard ROM settings Add a tick to Writing all data from the memory card to the standard ROM Set the place of transmission in the Standard ROM E Program MAIN Transfer from Transterto JA gt PARAM Standard ROM Program memory gt MAIN Standard ROM v Program memo ce Y MAINI Standard ROM
303. erformance model QCPU b The data storage in the program memory is backed up by High Performance model QCPU s built in batteries Q6BAT c Before the High Performance model QCPU can be used for the first time the program memory must be formatted by the GX Developer For details regarding the formatting procedure by the GX Developer refer to GX Developer manuals POINT 1 Before the High Performance model QCPU can be used for the first time the program memory must be formatted by the GX Developer For details regarding the formatting procedure by the GX Developer refer to GX Developer manuals 2 Programs are stored in the program memories in 1 k step units 2 Data Storage Data on parameters and programs can be stored in the program memory For the types of data stored in the program memory see Section 6 1 3 Format a Formatting Choose Online Format PLC memory to open the Format PLC memory dialog box Select Program memory from the Target Memory list box Format PLC memory Connection target information Connection interface COM1 lt gt CPU unit Target PLC Station no Host PLC type 025H Target memory Program memory x Format Type C Do not create a user setting system area the necessary system area only Create a user setting system area an area which speeds up monitoring from other stations System area K steps 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q b Memory
304. ernal devices High Performance model QCPU reads writes the data from to the buffer memory 8 1 Communication Between High Performance model QCPU and Q series Intelligent Function Modules The following methods enable the communication between High Performance model QCPU and intelligent function modules e Initial setting or automatic refresh setting using the GX Configurator e Device initial value e FROM TO instruction e Intelligent function module device e Instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules The following table shows the communication timing for the communication methods with intelligent function modules described above Communication timing Storage location High Communication method with intelligent function Performance modules model QCPU O Can be stored Cannot be stored 1 Indicates whether the data designated by the GX Configurator of the device initial value etc is stored in High Performance model QCPU or in an intelligent function module x2 Represents the internal memory of High Performance model QCPU or a memory card x3 Intelligent represents an intelligent function module x4 Represents the program using the intelligent function module device the FROM TO instruction or the instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 1 1 Initial setting and automatic refresh set
305. ers For the interrupts from the intelligent function module see Section 8 2 1 10 57 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 11 Other Devices 10 11 1 SFC block device BL This device is used for checking if the block designated by the SFC program is active For details regarding the use of SFC block devices refer to the QOPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 10 11 2 SFC transition device TR This device is used for checking if a forced transition is designated for a specified transition condition in a specified SFC program block For details regarding the use of SFC transition devices refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 10 11 3 Network No designation device J 1 Definition The network No designation device is used to designate the network No in data link instructions 2 Designating network No designation device The network No designation device is designated in the data link instruction as shown below H uP READ Jn S1 S2 3 gt Network No designation device n network No gt Instruction name gt Network No designation instruction For details regarding data link instructions refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual 10 58 10 58 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 11 4 I O No designation device U 1 Definition I O No designation devices are used with intelligent function module instruction module instructions to desig
306. ers remain at their default values which cannot be changed 10 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 Internal User Devices Internal user devices can be used for various user applications The number of usable points setting is designated in advance default value for internal user devices However this setting can be changed by PLC parameter device setting Device setting screen Qn H Parameter e PLC em PLC Device total K words The total number of device points is up to 29 K words Sym Dig Dev Latch 1 Latch 1 Latch 2 Latch 2 Local Local point start end start end dev start dev end Input relay 16 8 Output relay Y 16 8k Intemalrelay M 10 8k Latch relay L 10 8k C Linkrelay B 16 8k Annunciator Feel 2K C Link special SB 16 2K Edge relay v 10 2k Step relay S 10 8 Timer T 10 2k Retentive timer ST 10 OK Counter Cc 10 ik Data reqister_ D 10 12K Link teaister_ w 16 K lt gt _ _ Default value Link special SW 16 2k Dev point can be changed at devices where a Dev point The bit device total is up to 64 Kbits value is shown in brackets Word device K words Latch 1 It is possible to clear using the latch clear key Latch 2 Clearing using the latch clear key is disabled Bit device K bits Acknowledge XY assignme
307. ersion users can also set data at registers 1200 to 1255 For more detailed information concerning the contents of the ACPU special registers see the individual CPU users manual and the MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link system reference manual Supplemental explanation on Special Register for Modification column For the device numbers for which a special register for modification is specified modify it to the special register for QCPU QnACPU For the device numbers for which is specified special register after conversion can be used Device numbers for which x is specified do not function for QCPU QnACPU Special Register List ACPU Special Special Corr spondihg Special Register after Register for Name Meaning Details CPU Conversion Conversion Modification e When fuse blown modules are detected the lowest number of detected units is stored in hexadecimal Example When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have blown 50 is stored in hexadecimal To monitor the Number of i 7 5 i D9000 SD1000 Fuse blown module with n mber by peripheral devices perform monitor operation blown fuse given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1100 to SD1107 are reset to 0 e Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote I O stations e Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting switch numbers or base slot numbers when fuse blow occurred V O module for A0J2 Extension base
308. ert a program which is to be executed 1 Selecting the program to be executed from a single management program e Using a constantly executed scan execution type program as the management program a stand by type program which conforms to the designated conditions is converted to a scan execution type program and is executed Scan execution type programs which are not required can be converted to stand by type programs e The operation which occurs when ABC DEF GHI and JKL stand by type program execute types at a single management program are converted is illustrated below Scan execution type program Control program e PSCAN is an instruction MO s es a pscan vaso tamer te seste When M0 is on switch z the ABC program from a i Mi type program stand by type program to a l eins hea PSTOP ABC PSTOP is an instruction scan execution type program l that switches the specified l PSCAN DEF ABC program to a stand When M1 is on switch Bos z 5 by type program the ABC program from PSTOP DEF kapi a scan execution type program to a stand by type program Stand by program ABC Stand by Stand by Stand by program program program DEF GHI JKL 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 2 When changing the execute type of another program from the scan execution
309. es 11 3 2 Error code list 11 4 Canceling of Errors 11 5 I O Module Troubleshooting 11 5 1 Input circuit troubleshooting 11 6 Special Relay List 11 7 Special Register List APPENDICES APPENDIX 1 Error Code Return to Origin During General Data Processing APPENDIX 1 1 Error code overall explanation APPENDIX 1 2 Description of the errors of the error codes 4000H to 4FFFH APPENDIX 2 External Dimensions Diagram APPENDIX 2 1 CPU module APPENDIX 2 2 Power supply module APPENDIX 2 3 Main base unit APPENDIX 2 4 Extension base unit INDEX About Manuals The following manuals are also related to this product In necessary order them by quoting the details in the tables below Related Manuals Model Code QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection casas This manual provides the specifications of the CPU modules power supply modules base modules 13JL97 extension cables memory cards and others Option QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions etoso Describes how to use the sequence instructions basic instructions advanced instructions and micro 13 JF58 computer programs Option QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual PID Control Instructions SH 080040 This manual describes the dedicated instructions used to exercise PID control Option 13JF59 QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC SH 080041 This manual explains the system configuration performance sp
310. es aie i A es 10 62 10 12 4 Character Strings Jise aeeie Hearse ened sheet dived etl wiv etait dive 10 62 10 13 Convenient Uses for D VICOS escccecesecscsesceseseseeseseseseeseseseseesescaeseeseacacaeeaeaeseaeeeeseaeaeaeeeasasaeeteesacaeateneeasatens 10 63 10 13 1 Global devices amp local devices eeececceceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeaeeaecaecaeeaeeaeeaesaeeeaeeaeeeseaseaesaeeneeeaeeaee 10 63 10 132 Device initial Valu6s 3 i de doo ded pai beh chia ekase asssehiciescinsieestisidesiibviensehis 10 69 11 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU PROCESSING TIME 11 1to11 4 11 1 Reading High Performance model QCPU S Scan Time csssssscseseseseeeseeeeeseeeesseeseaeseeeeaeseeeeeeeeeaeees 11 1 11 2 Factors Responsible for Extended Scan Time c cscesecsesecesesseseseeeseeseseeeeeescaeeeeeeaeseatensesacaeeteeeaeaeateneeaeaeens 11 2 11 3 Factors Responsible for Shortened Scan Time scscscscscssscscscsesesecscceeeeeeeseseeeeeeeaeeeeieeseseaeass 11 4 12 1 Writing Procedure for 1 Program ssscscsscscseseseseseseseeesesenenenesenenanesenenenenenenenesenenenenenenenenenanenenanenenenenenenenenens 12 1 12 1 1 Items to consider when Creating one PrOQraM ceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteeseeeseeeseeeteeeteneeaaes 12 2 12 1 2 Procedure for writing programs to the High Performance model QCPU sssssssssesssesesesese 12 2 12 2 Procedure for Multiple Progr aS sereen 12 5 12 2 1 Items to consider when creating Multiple Program
311. es get mixed up with new data An example of a program set up with the following multiple PLC setting refresh settings is shown below e CPU device DO e PLC No 1 transmission points 1024 points DO to D1023 e PLC No 2 transmission points 1024 points D1024 to D2047 Do Used for the PLC No 1 interlock to gt PLC No 1 transmission device D1023 D1024 IN Used for the PLC No 2 interlock to PLC No 2 transmission device D2047 Example of a program on the transmission side Interlock with bO of the PLC No 2 yee device D1024 Transmission data set in DO to D1023 Example of a program on the reception side Interlock with bO of the PLC No 1 we device DO Operation using the transmission data DO to D1023 Writing command 16 8 po 0 gt J bO of the PLC No 1 first device DO for the use of the interlock is set at ON when transmission data setting has been completed D1024 0 gt bO of the PLC No 2 first device D1024 for the use of the interlock is set at ON when operations using the received data have been completed 16 8 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 2 Communication with Multiple PLC Commands and Intelligent Function Module Devices 1 Communication with multiple PLC commands S TO command FROM command and intelligent function module device ULAG
312. es the refreshed ON OFF status from Link RX is to be refreshed ea Inputnot covered above Maintains the enforced ON OFF status outside of the refresh range Outputs the results of the sequence program OFF is output operations Output from modules mounted onto the base Output from High Performance model QCPUs for which the MELSECNET H module LX is to Output be refreshed Output from High Performance Outputs the results of the model QCPUs for which the CC sequence program OFF is output Link RX is to be refreshed operations Assumes the result of the sequence program Assumes the OFF status operations Outputs the results of the sequence program OFF is output operations Output not covered above outside of the refresh range 2 The enforced ON OFF settings are cleared with the following operations e Power supply OFF ON e Reset with the CPU RESET L CLR switch e Reset with remote reset operations 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q e The timing for external I O enforced ON OFF is shown in the table below Output e During END processing input e During the execution of commands refresh that used direct access output DY e During the execution of commands OUT SET DELTA RST PLS that used direct access input DX PLF FF LDF MC LD LDI AND ANI OR ORI LDP LDF ANDP ANDF ORP ORF e During END processing MELSECNET H refresh e During execution of the COM command I O modules on the base
313. esesesseseseeeseeseseeeseeeeseateneeaeaeeteeeasseateneeasacens 19 1 19 2 Setting Up the Multiple PLC System Parameters Multiple PLC Settings Control PLC Settings 19 3 192 1 System conr OA oss ik Sve scab detactu castes blots a a cvs a a n AA el A AR 19 3 19 2 2 Creating NEw SYSTEMS siks otsaren ieaiaia eea aaa aaa aaae a eaaa aa aaae Saaana aaway 19 4 19 2 3 Using existing preset multiple PLC settings and I O allocations ccccssssscseteseseseeeeesesstesetsneneeeseeeees 19 7 APPENDICES App 1 to App 58 APPENDIX TSpecial Relay List nacactoiesoktladanadadhsaadtidsliiaididei va daiwa ladies App 1 APPENDIX 2 Special Register List s cscssscseseceeceseseeseseseeeeseeeeeeeceeeescseaeeneessaeeeeeeseeeeasatenseeeaseeaeaeateeeeeasaeeneens App 22 APPENDIX 3 List of Interrupt Pointer Nos amp Interrupt Factors 0 ce eececececeecteeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneaeaeaeneneneaeaes App 58 INDEX Index 1 to Index 3 Related manual cseee QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection CONTENTS 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview 1 2 Features 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 System Configuration 2 2 Precaution on System Configuration 2 3 Comfirming Serial Number 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE 4 1 Performance Specification 4 2 Part Names and Settings 4 3 Switch Operation After Writing in Program 4 4 Latch Clear Operation 4 5 Automatic Writing O
314. eset according to the following items As a result you can control High Performance model QCPU without using GX Developer for I O assignment To assign I O numbers follow the items below 1 Number of slots of base units The number of slots of the main and extension base units are set according to the Base mode setting For Base mode refer to Section 5 3 a In Auto mode the number of slots is determined as the available number of modules installed to each base unit For example 5 slots are assigned for a 5 slot base unit and 12 slots are assigned for a 12 slot base unit b In Detail mode the number of slots is determined as the one designated by I O assignment of PLC Parameter 2 Order of I O number assignment The I O numbers are assigned to the modules from left to right consecutively starting from OH assigned to the module on the right of the High Performance model QCPU in the main base unit 3 Order of I O number assignment for extension base units The I O numbers for extension base units are assigned continuing from the last number of the I O number of the main base unit The I O numbers for extension base units are assigned to the units from left 1 00 to right consecutively in the order of the setting of the stage setting connectors of the extension base units 4 I O numbers of each slot Each slot of base units occupies the points of I O numbers of the installed I O modules or intelligent function modules spe
315. esponse time of the input modules and the switch setting of intelligent function modules 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 6 2 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer 1 I O assignment for each slot You can designate Type module type Points number of I O points and Start XY head I O number individually for each slot of the base unit For example to change the number of I O points of the designated slot you can designate only the number of I O points The items other than designated are set to the status where the base unit is installed The I O assignment is conducted according to the I O assignment setting of PLC Parameter Switch setting Detailed setting If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting Increase cable Base mode uang Auto C Detail re zH 8 fixation ae 12 fixation v Read PLC data Acknowledge xY assignment Default Check End setup Cancel a Slot Displays the slot No and the ordinal position of the slot in the base unit If the base unit is not designated in Detail mode the stage number of the base unit is shown as and the ordinal number of a slot is counted from slot 0 of the main base unit b Type Used with High Performance model QCPU Select the type of module being in
316. essing Remote contact Remote operation from the GX Developer or Serial Communication Internal program instruction Note Priority is earliest first Errors Test not yet executed During X Device test device test execution puna Y e Set when the device test mode is executed on GX Developer type i device test During X Y device test Request App 30 App 30 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set b Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation When oa ACPU ac 9 be TT When error is generated the LED display flicker is made according D9038 ae to the error number setting priorities D3039 format Priorities 5 to 8 The setting areas for priorities are as follows change B15 B12B11 B8B7 B4B3 BO U SD207 Priority 4 Priority3 Priority2 Priority 1 New See Section 7 9 5 REMARK for the priority order The year last two digits and month are stored as BCD code at SD210 as shown below Clock data B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 to B4B3 so Example D210 Clock te D902 SD210 Clock data year month i July 1993 9025 1 H9307 The day and hour are stored as BCD code at SD211 as shown below Clock data B15 to B12B11 to to so Example SIU O Rem SD211 Clock data day hour AR 5 31st 10 a m Request D9026 1 i i I I 1 H31 1 0 The minutes and seconds after the hour are stored as BCD code at SD212 as shown below Clock data B15 to B12B11 to B8 B7
317. ession of received real number data is explained below Real number data is expressed as shown below using 2 word devices 1 Mantissa x 2 characteristic The bit configuration used for internal expression of floating decimal point data is shown and explained below b31 b30 b23 b22 b16 b15 bO N A i J b23 to b30 bO to b22 Characteristic Mantissa b31 Mantissa code e Mantissa code The mantissa code is expressed at b31 as follows 0 Positive 1 Negative e Characteristic The n of 2n is expressed in various ways at b23 to b30 depending on the b23 to b30 BIN value n Not used 127 126 2 1 0 1 b23 to b30 FFH FEH FDH 81H 80H 7FH 7EH 02H O1H 00H 125 126 Not used e Mantissa For a binary value of 1 XXXXXX the XXXXXX portion of the value is expressed at bO to b22 23 bits 3 Calculation examples Calculation examples are shown below the nnnnn X indicates an X system data expression a Storing 10 10 1010 1 91000 2 2 Mantissa code Positive to 0 Characteristic 3 to 82H to 10000010 z2 Mantissa 010 00000 00000 00000 00000 z The data expression will therefore be 412000001 as shown below Code Characteristic Mantissa 0 10000010 01000000000000000000000 A V IN y Me V S y BN y IN y P y y J l l l l l l l l 4 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 4 49 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q
318. evice Current value Condition Read from PLC a 2 Write to PLC c Te Trace result EEEE H Current value Condition r 1 No of trances a The total number of times sets the number of times to execute the sampling trace from trace execution to trace complete b The number of times after trigger sets the number of times to executes the sampling trace from trigger execution to trace complete Trace start Trigger point m Trace complete Pee l After trigger number of traces No of times Number of total times c The setting range for each number of times is shown below After trigger number of times lt No of times lt 8192 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Trace Point Setup This sets the timing to sample trace data Select one from the following a Each Scan Performed for END instruction for every scan b Interval Performed at every specified time c Detailed Sets the device and step no The setting method and trace data sampling timing is the same as when setting the monitor condition in section 7 9 1 The devices that can be set in the detailed condition are as follows e Bit Device X Y M L F SM V B SB T contact ST contact C contact J LAX J LAY J _ B J _ SB BLAS e Word Device T current value ST current value C current value D SD W SW R Z ZR U LAG J _ W J ASW The following attributes can be set for the above devices e Bit device number of di
319. example T1 coil is ON the OUT T1 instruction cannot be skipped using a CJ instruction etc If the OUT T instruction is skipped the timer s present value will not be updated c Timers cannot be used in interrupt programs and fixed cycle execution programs d Ifthe timer set value is 0 the contact goes ON when the OUT T instruction is executed e Ifthe setting value changes to a value which is higher than the present value following a timer time out the time out status will remain in effect and timer operation will not occur f Ifa timer is used at a low speed execution type program the present value will be added to the low speed scan time when the OUT T instruction is executed See Section 4 3 2 for details regarding the low speed scan time g If two timers are used the ON OFF ladders should be created as shown below TO K10 c T1 1 second measurement following TO ON T1 K10 c TO 1 second measurement when T1 ON TO lt Mo ON OFF repeated every 1 second 10 23 10 23 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 11 Counters C Counters are up counter types with the contact being switched ON when the count value equals the setting value count out condition There are two counter types counters which count the number of input condition start ups leading edges in sequence programs and counters which count the number of interrupt factor occurrences 1 Definition A counter is a device whi
320. executed the special function module continues its processing and suspends processing of the FROM TO instruction until the processing is completed As a result the scan time becomes longer by the period to wait the completion of the processing of the special function module 2 The following are the special function modules which suspend the FROM TO instruction e A1S63ADA A1S66ADA e A1SD61 A1SD62 A1SD62D A1SD62E e A1SD70 A1SD71 S2 A1SD71 S7 e A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ71T32 S3 A1SD51S e A1SJ711ID1 R4 A1SJ71ID2 R4 2 Countermeasures against the effects of quicker access to the special function module To use a special function module with High Performance model QCPU adjust the execution time with SM415 2n ms clock and SD415 2n ms clock setting The initial value of SD415 is 30 When SD415 is used for interlock of the FROM TO instruction the FROM TO instruction is executed at every 120 ms SM400 MOVP K30 sD415 SM415 FROMP HO Ki DO Kt 1 To change the clock value of SM415 store the new value in SD415 2 For details of SM415 refer to appendix 1 For details of SD415 refer to appendix 2 8 9 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q 9 PARAMETER LIST There are two types of promoters used in QCPU s procedures PLC parameters that are used when operating a PLC and network parameters that are used when connecting to the MELSECNET H or CC Link system The following items required for confi
321. ferences are shown in Table 10 2 below Table 10 2 Differences Between Refresh Main base unit 8 0 0 079 Extension base unit 8 0 Processing speed u s N LD X DX A 0 034 Main base unit 4 0 i 3 Extension base unit 4 8 Input module installed at base extension base unit Inputs of intelligent function module installed at base extension base unit Sear ssanie Inputs of I O link module installed at base extension base unit Inputs used at MELSECNET H network 1 See Section 4 3 1 for details regarding the refresh mode 10 6 10 6 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c The same input number can be designated for a refresh input and a direct access input If used as a refresh input after being used as a direct access input operation will be based on the ON OFF data read at the direct access input Operation is based on the ON OFF data read at the END processing input refresh Direct access input ick is based on the rail data read at the input module Operation is based on the ON OFF data read at the direct access input Figure 10 3 Refresh Input amp Direct Access Input 1 When debugging a program an input X can be set to ON OFF as described below e OUT Xn instruction OUT X1 ye command 4 gt lt xX e GX configurator test operation 2 An input X can be used in the following cases e Destination device for Rx refresh of CC link e Destination device for refresh of li
322. fied Word Device or Bit Device can be specified 1 When Word Device is selected The monitor stop timing is when the current value of the specified word device becomes the specified value A current value can be expressed in decimal digits hexadecimal digits 16 bit integral numbers 32 bit integral numbers or real numbers 2 When Bit Device is specified The monitor stop timing is when the execution status of the specified bit device becomes the specified value Either the leading edge or the fall can be specified for execution condition 3 Precautions a When monitoring after setting the monitor condition the file displayed on the GX Developer is monitored Match the file to be monitored by executing the New PLC Read and file name on the GX Developer b When monitoring the file register and the file register is not specified 0 is displayed c Perform the monitoring by matching the device allocation of the High Performance model QCPU and GX Developer d When monitoring the buffer memory of the intelligent function module the scan time takes longer just like when executing the FROM TO instruction e Multiple users can execute monitoring at the same time When multiple users are executing monitoring at the same time take note of the following e High speed monitoring can be performed by increasing 1k step in the system area for every station s monitor file during formatting of internal memory Up
323. following additional base unit slots I O allocation type Mounted module Output module Pp o Inteligent function module Inputmodile fF Outputmodle ooo mem inteligent function module 3 Itis possible to load output ON OFF data being controlled by other machines with direct access output 4 Remote station output such as vacant slots MELSECNET H and CC Link cannot be loaded Use automatic refresh of common CPU memory and send the ON OFF output data for remote stations to use the ON OFF output data for MELSECNET H CC Link and other remote stations in other machines Output b When Do not load output condition outside of group has been set It is not possible to load ON OFF data output to output modules and intelligent function modules by other machines into the host machine s output Y remains at OFF 17 3 17 3 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES 17 4 MELSEC Q 3 Output to output modules and intelligent function modules It is not possible to output ON OFF data to non control modules ON OFF will be performed within the High Performance model QCPU when the output from output modules and intelligent function modules controlled by other machines such as sequence programs have been set to ON OFF but this will not be output to output modules or intelligent function modules 4 Accessing the intelligent function module buffe
324. for the specified amount Sampling trace sss data monitoring If the trigger point is executed the sampling trace area data is latched after sampling the number of times specified Fig 7 8 Sampling Trace Operation 7 FUNCTION e MELSEC Q The trace result displays the ON OFF status of the bit device for the sampling cycle and the current value of the word device Trace result Bit device Contact Coil Display units 10 Nd 2040 2030 2020 2010 20 D0 1 co Coil 4 ia Count 2048 Timefsec Step Program Word device Current value 16 bit Decimal be 2048 2047 2046 2045 2044 2043 204 a D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D100 15559 15559 15559 15559 15559 15559 15 D300 5458 5458 5458 5458 5458 5458 545 KENI Count 2048 Timefsec Step Program Device details are read under trigger conditions specified in the trigger point setting Sampling is performed at each scan Before the sampling is finished by a trigger operation of a peripheral device data is collected twice because the timing of sampling is the same as that of trigger conditions Trace result Bit device Contact Coil Display units 10 x Sampling trace data 10 0 E 20 D0 1 co Coil Data when trigger condition met Count 2048 Time sec Step Word device Current valu
325. formance model QCPU is in the RUN status an error may occur and the High Performance model QCPU may stop running While the Write to PLC Flash ROM function is executed the read write cannot be made from other modules This may cause a time out on the side of other modules When the High Performance model QCPU is expanded to the STOP status and PLC writing flash ROM is being performed do not set it in the RUN status RUN cannot be performed normally when writing in the flash ROM Perform RUN after writing in the flash ROM has been completed 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 6 2 Automatic writing in the standard ROM automatically writing all data from the memory card to the standard ROM Automatic writing in the standard ROM means writing the parameters and sequence programs stored on the memory card into the High Performance model QCPU s standard ROM without the use of the GX Developer The writing of parameters and sequence programs into the memory card is performed with the GX Developer SW6D5C GPPW E or higher As shown in the diagram below the parameters and sequence programs are booted from the memory card to the program memory with automatic writing in the standard ROM and the booted parameters and sequence programs are then written from the program memory into the standard ROM High Performance model QCPU Memory card Parameters Parameters Boot e Sequence e Sequence pr
326. formed when executing sequence program instructions With High Performance model QCPU direct mode I O processing can be executed by using direct access inputs DX and direct access outputs DY See 10 2 1 for direct access inputs See 10 2 2 for direct access outputs High Performance model QCPU Remote input refresh area CPU operation processing area 3 2 GX Developer Input X H device memory Output module memory e When an input contact instruction has been executed An OR operation is executed for the input module s input information 1 and peripheral device input area s input information 2 and the result is stored in the input X device memory This data is then used as input information 3 at sequence program execution e When an output contact instruction has been executed Output information 4 is read from the output Y device memory and a sequence program is executed e When an output OUT instruction has been executed The sequence program s operation result 5 is output to the output module and is stored in the output Y device memory Fig 4 9 Input Output Information Flow at Direct Mode 1 The GX Developer input area can be switched ON and OFF by the following e Test operation by the GX Developer e A network refresh by the MELSECNET H network system e Writhing from a serial communication module e CC Link automatic refresh 2 The output Y device mem
327. fresh Output refresh 0 END 056 END 0 ON OFF 1 External contact 1 ON OFF X5 i i QCPU ON devices OF O o Y5E i ON OFF External load Lag time Minimum 1 scan The fastest possible Y5E ON occurs if the external contact is switched ON immediately prior to the refresh operation X5 then switches ON at the input refresh Y5E at step 56 switches ON and the external load switches ON at the output refresh following execution of the END instruction In this case the time lag between the external contact ON and the external load ON is 1 scan Slowest possible Y5E ON Input refresh Input refresh Output refresh 0 END 056 END 0 ON i i i OFF i i External contact i ON i OFF X5 i i QCPU ON devices OFF Y5E i ON OFF External load i Lag time Maximum 2 scan The slowest possible Y5E ON occurs if the external contact is switched ON immediately prior to the refresh operation X5 then switches ON at the input refresh Y5E at step 56 switches ON and the external load switches ON at the output refresh following execution of the END instruction In this case the time lag between the external contact ON and the external load ON is 2 scan Fig 4 8 Output Y change in response to input X change 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 7 2 Direct mode 1 Definition of direct mode In the direct mode the communication with the input output modules is per
328. function module dedicated instruction i 24 Constant scan Set parameter values to 0 5 to 2000 ms configurable in multiple of 0 5 ms p function to make regular scan time specify Program H ram memory drive S ae ae 2 g ry 28k steps 60k steps 124k steps 252k steps See Section 6 2 capacity i d RAM veran car Capacity of loading memory cards 1 Mbyte maximum See Section 6 5 Memory card ROM Capacity of loading memory cards See Section 6 5 Memory drive 2 Flash card 4 MERR maximum ATA card 32 Mbyte maximum capacity Standard RAM drive 3 64k tk byte O 256 kbyte 3 See Section 6 4 Standard ROM drive 4 112 kbyte 240 kbyte 496 kbyte 1008 kbyte See Section 6 3 PLC share memory 8 kbyte See Section 14 2 4 Program memory o e er See Section 6 2 Memory card RAM See Section 6 5 Memory card 288 See Section 6 5 ROM See Section 6 5 1 file each for file Standard RAM 2 register and local device see Section 6 4 Standard ROM 14 ase See Sections Number of usable points I O device points 8192 points X YO to 1FFF in program Number of points I O points 4096 points X Y0 to FFF accessible to actual input output modules 1 Maximum number of executable program is 124 More than 124 programs can not be executed 2 The maximum number of sequence steps in the case of a single program that can store the parameters in other drive and can be executed by CPU module is obta
329. g o 1st point 132 2 Errors that stop operation Vaan O UNIT VERIFY ERR 4th point 134 FUSE BREAK OFF 240 5th point om SP UNIT ERROR 22 6th point OPERATION ERROR 7th point 243 FCP OPE ERROR eee 8th point Error factor 3 4 Sone o interrupt module z SFCP ECE ERROR th point factor 11th point FILE OPE ERROR 12th point 13th point 139 CHK instruction execution Anunciator detection 14th point e 140 to V 149 acant 3rd point 15th point 4th point F a 5th point equence sta 6th point generator module i ath point 9th point __ Specifies which intelligent r 150 to Intelligent function 10th point 5 function module is used 18 to 223 1255 module factor 11th point with parameters 12th point toms 1st point 2nd point 16th point 100ms Internal timer factor 40ms x2 20ms 240 241 242 243 244 46 47 248 249 50 51 52 24 25 226 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 56 55 54 53 REMARK 1 1st to 12th points are allocated in order beginning from the sequence start generator module installed closest to the QCPU 2 The internal times shown are the default setting times These times can be designated in 0 5 ms units through a 0 5 ms to 1000 ms range by the GX Developer PLC system settings in the PLC parameter setting x3 When an error interruption with 132 error that stops operation occurs the QCPU is not stopped until 132 processing i
330. g Explanation Praia ACPU ae ta SDLL 2 7 Stores as BIN code the error No of the error that occurred Diagnosis error A S Each No during the other system CPU diagnosis END e Stores the latest error currently occurring D1600 Diagnosis error Diagnosis error e SD1600 stores the updated date and time Bee itrehice Diagnosis error Stores each of the BCD two digits S Each New sp1603 time occurrence time Refer to SD1 to SD3 for the storage status END SD1 SD1601 SD2 gt SD1602 SD3 SD1603 Error Error Stores the error comment information individual information n D1604 information information classification code classification _ classification e Refer to SD4 for the storage status D1605 D1606 D1607 D1608 D1609 D1610 D1611 D1612 D1613 D1614 D1615 D1616 D1617 D1618 D1619 e Stores the individual information for the error code Refer to D1620 SD16 to SD26 for the storage status D1621 Error individual Error individual SD16 SD1616 SD17 SD1617 SD18 gt SD1618 S Each information information D19 SD1619 SD20 SD1620 SD21 SD1621 END D1622 SD22 gt SD1622 SD23 gt SD1623 SD24 gt SD1624 D1623 SD25 gt SD1625 SD26 gt SD1626 D1624 D1625 D1626 D1650 Switch status CPU switch Stores the CPU switch status S Each New status e Refer to SD200 for the storage status SD1650 SD200 END e Stores the CPU s LED status e Sh h ff 1 wh 2 wh Each SD1651 LED sta
331. g the reset operation during power off Section 7 3 Function to select the output Y status output before STOP output after the calculation execution transition from STOP to RUN when the CPU module is set from STOP status to RUN status Clock function i Remote RUN STOP Function to stop and start operating the CPU module Remote PAUSE Function to temporarily stop the CPU module Remote RESET Remote latch clear Function to clear the CPU module latch data Section 7 6 4 Input response time selection for input module compatible with Q Series Input response time selection for high speed input module compatible with Q Series Input response time selection for interrupt module compatible with Q Series Switch setting of intelligent function Use this function for various settings of the intelligent function module Refer to each intelligent Section 7 8 module compatible with Q Series function module for the details of the setting ae A This function monitors the status of programs and devices on the CPU module U by operating from Monitoring function Section 7 9 the GX Developer Set monitor conditions This function monitors using a fine timing of the CPU module Section 7 9 1 The response time of the input module compatible with Q Series can be selected from 1 ms 5 ms Section 7 7 1 10 ms 20 ms and 70 ms with this function Default 10 ms 7 The response time of the high speed input module compatible with Q Series can be selected from
332. ge instructions PLS instruction and P instruction are arranged upon completion of writing leading edge instruction is not executed The leading edge instruction is executed when the execution conditions are disarranged then arranged 3 SCJ instruction If the execution conditions of the SCJ instruction are arranged upon completion of writing a jump to the designated pointer occurs even ina scan cycle 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 10 2 Writing a batch of files during RUN 1 File Write During RUN function a The file write during RUN function is used to write a batch of files onto the High Performance model QCPU as shown below in the table i High Performance model QCPU Built in Memory Card RAM Memory Card R emory Name y ae ae Memory ae RAM a ROM I Card a Card ATA F module a aad Program Device comment E a ee ee ee eee ee Ii x X x X Device initial value E a a E l File register SFC trace data Failure history data PLC user data O Writable data x Unwritable data A Writable data for access from a sequence program Program file A CoL Personal computer GX Developer The file write during RUN allows writing three types of files e Program program memory SRAM card ATA card e Device comment program memory SRAM card ATA card e File register standard RAM SRAM card Any other files cannot be written while the High Performance model QCPU is in the RUN status
333. gister hina z Format PLC memory G Range specification ZR 0 82767 Arrange PLC memory PLC side fle name MAIN a Cana Total free space okie Bytes Writing of the file register to the QCPU Writing of the parameter to the QCPU 10 45 10 45 10 DEVICES 10 46 MELSEC Q 1 Designating file registers for use The standard RAM or the memory card file registers which are to be used in the sequence program are determined by the PLC file settings in the PLC parameter setting Qn H Parameter me PLC tem PLCfie JPLCRAS Device Progam Boctle SFC 1 0 assonment File register Device initial value a Not used Not used _ Use the same file name as the program b i Use the same file name as the program Conespondng Memory card RAM gt memory Corresponding c C Use the following file memory Use the following fie Corresponding memory Corresponding memory File name File name Capacity K 1K 1018K points Comment file used in a command File for local device Notused Notused C Use the same file name as the program Use the following file Corresponding Corresponding memory memory C Use the following file Corresponding File name memory File name Acknowledge XY assignment Defaut Check Endsetup Cancel a When to select Not Used This setting should be
334. gits specification e Word device bit number specification 3 Trigger Point setup This sets the point to execute the trigger Select one from the following a At the time of TRACE order The time of execution of TRACE instruction is the trigger b At the time of trigger operation The trigger operation from a GPPW function peripheral device is the trigger c Detailed setting The device and step number is set The setting method and trigger execution timing is the same as the monitor condition setting in Section 7 9 1 4 Additional trace information The added information for every trace is set Multiple items can be selected from the following of none of the items have to be selected a Time Stores the time when the trace was executed b Step No Stores the step number when the trace was executed c Program Name The program name that executed the trace was stored 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q c The created trace data and trace condition is written to the memory card RAM The trace file is written to the memory card RAM The trace file is written to the memory card in Write to PLC in the Sampling Trace screen The files are written in the memory card with file names so multiple trace files can be stored d Sampling trace is executed The sampling trace is executed in Execute and status in the Sampling Trace screen Sampling trace x Close Trace data Conditions Opera
335. gment Standard setting Multiple PLC Setting Execute the multiple PLC parameter utilization Cancel OE Multiple PLC s E m No of PLC Ar Dut of group input output settings A TE IV Input condition of group outside is taken T Output condition of group outside is taken r Operating mode r Refresh settings Error operation made at the stop of PLE Change screens Seting J All station stop by stop error of PLC1 an An CAEN 3 end range for eac side device T Allstation stop by stop error of PLC2 1 pyc PLC share memory G Dev starting D0 I All station stop by stop error of PLC3 Paint Start End Start End All station stop by stop error of PLC4 No 1 1024 0800 OBFF DO D1023 No 2 1024 0800 OBFF 01024 02047 No 3 512 0800 OSFF 02048 02559 No 4 512 0800 OSFF D2560 D3071 The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W RZR settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check Cancel d 19 Qn H Parameter E PLC name PLC system 1 0 assignment r 1 0 Assignment 1 Switch setting Detailed setting Ifthe start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting
336. gnificance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT B8 Simulation data QDS Parameters QPA B9 CPU fault history QFD Device comments QCD B10 SFC trace QTS S Status change New QnA Device initial value QDI B11 Local device QDL File register R QDR B12 Sampling trace QTS B13 Status latch QTL B14 Program trace QTP B15 Memory SD604 card A use conditions Indicates memory card B models instal B8 B7 B4 B3 Bo a Drive 3 0 Does not exist RAM model 1 SRAM S Initial 0 Does not exist Drive 4 1 SRAM ROM model 2 EPROM 3 FLASH ROM Drive 4 is fixed to 3 because it has built in flash ROM App 38 App 38 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU Ri 9 DoC IT Indicates memory card B models installed B15 B8 B7 B4 B3 Bo 0 lt y Memory card Memory card Drive 1 0 Does not exist i RAM model 1 SRAM S Initial New 0 Does not exist Drive 2 OM aa 2 EEPROM mode 3 Flash ROM Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units S Initia Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units S Initial Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A Q4AR Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units The conditions f
337. grams The PLC System sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box provides the option to save protect or restore index register data Z0 to Z15 when switching between a scan execution type program and a low speed execution type program or between an interrupt program and a fixed scan execution type program If you do not want to write date onto index registers when using an interrupt program fixed scan execution type program turn on the High speed execution check box in the Interrupt program Fixed scan program setting section of the PLC System sheet in the PLC Parameter dialog box This will enable you to switch between programs quickly 1 When the High speed execution check box is OFF a When the scan low speed execution type program is switched to the interrupt fixed cycle execution type program the scan low speed execution type program s index register value is first saved and is then transferred to the interrupt fixed scan execution type program b When the interrupt fixed scan execution type program is switched to the scan low speed execution type program the saved index register value is reset i Switch Scan low speed rete iInterrupt program i Reset Scan low speed Executed program execution type Fixed scan execution gt execution type i program itype program program i Transf Index register value Z0 1 erred 79 1 to Z0 3 Z0 1 Saved Reset Index register storage area For scan low spe
338. guring multiple PLC systems onto PLC parameters in function version B QCPUs have also been added e Multiple PLC setup e Control PLC setup I O allocation This chapter shows a listing of PLC parameters and network parameters used for GX Developer For details regarding each setting item refer to the section or manual indicated For GX Developer setting procedures see the GX Developer Operating Manual The parameters written from the GX Developer will be validated within the QCPU in the following cases e When the power supply to the PLC is switched on e When the CPU is reset e When the CPU changes from STOP to RUN However the PLC parameter s I O allocation switch settings and the network parameters will be transmitted from the QCPU to a specified intelligent function module in the following cases and will be validated within the intelligent function module e When the power supply to the PLC is switched on e When the CPU is reset The PLC parameter s I O allocation switch settings and the network parameters will not be transmitted from the QCPU to a specified intelligent function module when the QCPU is changed from STOP to RUN Switch the power supply to the PLC on once again ON OFF ON or reset the QCPU when the PLC parameter s I O allocation switch settings and the network parameters have been amended If the High Performance model QCPU is changed from STOP to RUN after PLC parameter change without this procedure
339. hange in the I O numbers when an I O module other than 16 point module or intelligent function module special function module is removed due to a malfunction 3 Changing the I O numbers to those used in the program When the designed programs I O numbers are different from the actual system I O numbers each modules I O numbers of base units can be set to program l O numbers 4 Setting the input response time of input modules and interrupt modules I O response time To match the input response time of the input modules and interrupt modules to the system select Type in the I O assignment beforehand For details refer to Section 7 7 5 Setting the switch of intelligent function modules To set the switch of the intelligent function module select Type in the I O assignment beforehand For details refer to Section 7 8 6 Setting outputs during High Performance model QCPU error To set the output status retain clear of the output modules and intelligent function modules when the High Performance model QCPU stops the operation due to a stop error select Type in the I O assignment beforehand 7 Setting High Performance model QCPU operation during a hardware error of intelligent function modules To set the High Performance model QCPU operation continue stop during a hardware error of an intelligent function module select Type in the I O assignment beforehand The I O assignment is necessary for the setting of the r
340. he AND ON blocks As shown below the monitor execution condition is established when X1 is ON Whether X is ON or OFF does not affect the monitor execution condition 2nd step Ves ae x 1 LD X1 2 AND X2 3 OR X3 4 ANB 5 OUT Y20 b When only Device is specified Word Device or Bit Device can be specified 1 When Word Device is selected The monitor data sampling timing is when the current value of the specified word device becomes the specified value Type a current value in decimal digits or hexadecimal digits 2 When Bit Device is specified The monitor data sampling timing is when the execution status of the specified bit device becomes the specified value Either the leading edge or the fall can be specified for execution condition c When Step no and Device is selected The monitor data sampling timing is when the state right before execution of the specified step and the execution state present value of the specified bit device word device become the specified state 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q When Step no 100 lt 1 gt Word Device D1 K5 is specified as the detailed condition in the following circuit a monitor execution condition is established at the leading edge of the 100th step where D1 5 XO MO 100th step Y20 INC D1 The monitor interval of the GX Developer depends on the processing speed of the GX Developer When a monitor condition is established during the
341. he CPU No 2 the module on slot 3 is the controlled module of the CPU No 2 CPU numbers Numbers assigned to differentiate between the High Performance model QCPU and motion CPU loaded in a multi PLC system The CPU on the CPU slot is the CPU No 1 the one on slot 0 is the CPU No 2 the one on slot 1 is the CPU No 3 and the one on slot 2 is the CPU No 4 Single PLC system System loaded with the High Performance model QCPU on the CPU slot to exercise control PC CPU module MELSEC Q series compatible PC CPU module Non control CPUs High Performance model QCPUs and or motion CPUs other than the control CPU For example when the module loaded on slot 3 is controlled by the CPU No 2 the CPU Nos 1 3 and 4 are the non control CPUs of the module on slot 3 Multi PLC system A 19 System loaded with up to four High Performance model QCPU motion CPU and PC CPU modules on the main base unit to exercise control A 19 1 OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q This Manual describes the function program and device of the High Performance model QCPU Refer to the following functions for details on power supply modules base units extension cables memory cards battery specifications and other information High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspections 1 Additional functions with products whose first 5 digits of the serial number are 02092 The fo
342. he High Performance model QCPU operation status is as follows with the combination of remote operations to RUN STOP switch Remote operation RUN stop PAUSE RESET Latch clear Cannot Cannot STOP PAUSE 4 4 operate operate STOP STOP STOP STOP RESET 5 Latch clear x1 When performing the operation with remote RUN contact RUN PAUSE contact must be set in the parameter mode PLC system setting x2 When performing the operation with remote PAUSE contact RUN PAUSE contact must be set in the parameter mode PLC system setting In addition the remote PAUSE enable coil SM206 must be set ON x3 Remote reset enable must be set in the parameter mode PLC system setting x4 RESET or LATCH CLEAR can be performed if the High Performance model QCPU changed to the STOP state from a remote operation x5 This includes a situation where the High Performance model QCPU is stopped due to error 2 Remote Operations from the Same GX Developers When remote operations are performed from the same GX Developer the status of the remote operation that is executed last will be effective 3 Remote Operations from Multiple GX Developers While a remote operation is being performed by one GX Developer another remote operation cannot be performed by another GX Developer After a remote operation that is being performed by one GX Developer is cancelled a new remote operation can be performed by another GX Developer For example a remo
343. he data is stored in one point DO A two work instruction requires 2 words i CALLP PO oH Po 1 DMOV RO rot ee ee The data is stored in two points DO and D1 The destination of 32 bit multiplication division operation requires 4 words H oaur PO ca nH RO R10 oH t 5 The data is stored in four points DO to D3 e Active devices cannot be used in a sub routine program that contains arguments If devices assigned for function registers are used values of the function registers will not properly be returned to a calling program if Lone rono H Pol D RO R10 FDO MOV KO D3 Since the points DO to D3 are used for FDO D3 can not be used for the sub routine program e High Performance model QCPU s word data devices can be used 1 For a procedure for using function devices see the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 10 32 10 32 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 3 2 Special relays SM 1 Definition a A special relay is used to store High Performance model QCPU status data 2 Special relay classifications Special relays are classified according to their applications as shown below a For fault diagnosis SMO to SM199 b System information SM200 to SM399 c System clock system counter SM400 to SM499 d Scan information SM500 to SM599 e Memory card information SM600 to SM699 f Instruction related SM700 to SM799 g F
344. he entire system will differ when a PLC No 1 stop error has been triggered and when the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 stop error has been triggered on the multiple PLC system 1 When a stop error occurs in the PLC No 1 a A MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error code 7000 error will be triggered for the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 and motion CPUS and the multiple PLC system will be halted when a stop error is triggered in the PLC No 1 Please refer to point on the next page for datails b Observe the following procedures to restore the system 1 Confirm the cause of the PLC No 1 error with the PC diagnosis function 2 Remove the cause of the error 3 Either reset the PLC No 1 or restart the power to the PLC All machines on the entire multiple PLC system will be reset and the system restored when the PLC No 1 is reset or the power to the PLC is restarted 2 When astop error occurs in the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 Whether the entire system is halted or not is determined by the multiple PLC setting s Operation Mode setting when a stop error occurs in the CPU modules for PLC No 2 to No 4 The default setting is for all machines to be stopped with a stop error If all machines are not required to be suspended when a stop error occurs in the CPU modules click the field so that all machines are not halted indicated with the D arrow Multiple PLC settings x No of PLE r Dut of group input output settings 9 No of
345. he file register is retained even when the power is turned off or reset It is not initialized even if latch clear is conducted Use a sequence program to initialize the file register when the power is turned off or reset For example to clear the RO to R2047 file registers upon power on of the PLC write 0 using an FMOV instruction 10 43 10 43 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 7 1 File register capacity 1 Using the Standard RAM A maximum of 32 k file register points can be stored in the standard RAM The standard RAM holds file registers and local devices When local devices are not used all 32 k points can be assigned for file registers 2 Using the SRAM Card The size of a file can be expanded at the rate of 32 k words per block up to the rate of 16 blocks per 505 k words The number of expandable blocks depends on the size of programs or device comments stored on a memory card 3 Using the Flash Card The size of a file can be expanded at the rate of 32 k words per block up to the rate of 32 blocks per 1018 k words The number of expandable blocks depends on the size of programs or device comments stored on a memory card For details regarding the High Performance model QCPU memory cards see Section 6 1 10 7 2 Differences in memory card access method by memory card type File registers are stored in three types of memories standard RAM SRAM card and Flash card Note that the file register access method differs dependi
346. he following manuals QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 2 For the details of the buffer memory of the special function module refer to the manual of the special function module being used 8 3 3 Communication using the intelligent function module device 1 Intelligent function module device The intelligent function module device is the buffer memory of the special function module represented as a device of High Performance model QCPU in High Performance model QCPU programs It enables reading data stored in the buffer memory of the special function module to be read or writing data to the buffer memory of the special function module 2 Difference from the FROM TO instruction The intelligent function module device can be handled as a device of High Performance model QCPU enabling the processing of data read from the special function module with one instruction This saves the number of steps in the entire program The processing speed is the total of the instruction execution time and the access time to from the intelligent function modules When reading and processing the data of the special function module frequently in the program use the FROM instruction to read the data at one point in the program and store and process it in a data register instead of using the intelligent function module device every time Otherwise the intelligent function module device accesses to the special function module eve
347. he interrupt counter first No Fixed cycle interval Specifies time intervals at which to execute interrupt pointers 128 to 131 Interrupt program fixed scan Pip 7 Specifies whether to perform the high speed execution of an interrupt program program setting Specifies whether to bring the start of a CPU module into synchronization with the start of an intelligent function module Bate yp sad Specifies whether to use MELSEC A Series special relays special registers Compatibility with A Series CPU SM1000 SD1000 to SM1299 SD1299 PLC file settings Designates the various files used in the CPU module File registers Designates the file for file registers to be used in the program Module synchronization Comment file for instructions Designates the file for comments to be used in the program Device initial values Designates the file for the device initial values to be used in the CPU module Local device file Designates the file for local devices to be used in the program o 1 N 9 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC Q Default Value Setting Range Reference Section No setting Max of 10 characters No setting Max of 64 characters i taal Hooms w ms to 100 0 ms Section 10 2 10 Section 7 6 1 Section 7 6 3 an output X before STOP output output is 1 scan later Perform internal arithmetic operation Check Not Checked to perform internal arithmetic operation with double precision with double Section 4 8 4
348. he moti SP SFCS equests startup of the motion SFC program ee Requests the start of operations for the servo program SP SVST q p program SP CHGV the real mode SP CHGA and the cam axes For example it is possible to start up the motion CPU s motion SFC from the High Performance model QCPU with the use of the S P SFCS command High Performance model QCPU Motion SFC Startup request Motion SFC S SFCS command m One High Performance model QCPU module can operate up to 32 special motion commands and communication dedicated commands between multiple PLCs omitting the S P GINT command at one time However if the special motion commands and communication dedicated commands between multiple PLCs omitting S P GINT command are made at the same time the commands will be executed in order from the first command accepted If there are 33 or more unexecuted commands an OPERATION ERROR error code 4107 will be triggered Refer to the motion CPU Programming manual for details on and the necessity of use of the motion dedicated commands 16 11 16 11 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 3 2 Reading and writing device data It is possible to read and write device data into the motion CPU from the High Performance model QCPU with the use of the communication dedicated commands between multiple PLCs listed in the table below Reading or writing can not take place from the High Pe
349. he number of CPU modules to be used on a multiple PLC system are selected with the PC parameter s multiple PLC setting indicated with the A arrow Multiple PLC settings x Out of group input output settings NostPtt TI No of PLC EMR v m Operating mode Error operation made at the stop of PLC T Input condition of group outside is taken JT Output condition of group outside is taken r Refresh settings Change screens Setting Y Al tation stop by stop error of PLET 2 M Allstation stop by stop error of PLC2 PLC aed fue l es I Al station stop by stop error of PLC3 Pont Stat End Stat End T Allstation stop by stop error of PLC4 _ No 1 ol L No 2 of No 3 of No 4 of The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W R ZR Jsettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check End Cancel Ensure that the CPU count set for the multiple PLC system is the same as the number of CPUs actually mounted When a vacant slot is to be held back for the purpose of mounting additional CPU modules in the future set CPU Vacant with the parameter s I O allocation setting For example if four CPUs are to be set up for use with the multiple PLC setting and one CPU space held back for future use then set CPU Vacant in slot 2 indicated with the B
350. he output data in a manner identical to decimal data High Performance modle QCPU Numeric data designation BINP K4x0 Do Digital display CHERE l YF Y3 A BCD D5 K4Y30 H BCD output BIN data 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS 4 8 1 BIN Binary Code MELSEC Q 1 Binary code In binary code numeric values are expressed by numerals 0 OFF and 1 ON numerals When counting in the decimal system a carry to the tens column occurs following 9 8 to 9 to 10 In the binary system this carry occurs following 1 0 to 1 to 10 The binary 10 therefore represents the decimal 2 Binary values and their respective decimal values are shown in Fig 4 2 below Table 4 2 Binary and Decimal Numeric Value Comparison DEC Decimal BIN Binar i 0001 0000 Carry 0010 0011 Carry 0100 0101 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 Carry 2 Binary numeric expression a High Performance model QCPU registers data registers link registers etc consist of 16 bits with a 2 value is allocated to each of the register bits The most significant bit initial bit is used to discriminate between positive and negative 1 When most significant bit is 0 Positive 2 When most significant bit is 1 Negative The numeric expressions for the High Performance model QCPU registers are shown in Fig 4 13
351. he setting of SM777 ON See Section 10 13 1 ON OFF setting of SM777 is possible in unit of CPU Setting in unit of file is not possible e If the ON OFF setting of SM777 is changed while a sequence program is executed the control is made according to the information after change g Clearing the Local Device Data The local device data is cleared in the following cases where 1 The CPU is turned on or reset 2 The CPU enters from the STOP status into the RUN status The local device data cannot be cleared by operating from the GX Developer To clear the local device data follow the above listed steps 1 and 2 10 68 10 68 10 DEVICES 10 13 2 Device initial values 1 Definition MELSEC Q a Using device initial setting values the data used for a program can be stored in device or intelligent function module buffer memories without using a data setting program The use of device initial values provides a shortcut to specify device data ina program without using a device data setting program initial program Data setting by initial processing program SM402 Device initial value MOV H100 DO MOV H2020 D1 J Power supply ON STOP to RUN H Power supply ON STOP to RUN H Device memory gt Device memory b In order to use the device initial values the device initial data must be created in advance at the GX Developer device and this data must be stor
352. he step of the block being executed when the program stopped Once turned on the program is latched in the system and remains on even if the power is turned off Should be turned off by the sequence program when turning on the power or when starting with the initial step of block 0 Selects consecutive or step by step transfer of steps of which transfer conditions are established when all of the transfer conditions of consecutive steps are established ON Consecutive transfer is executed OFF One step per one scan is transferred App 14 APPENDICES ACPU Special Relay Special Relay after Conversion SM1104 SM1180 SM1182 SM1196 SM1197 SM1198 SM1199 Special Relay for Modification SM324 vex Special Relay List Continued Details e Set when consecutive transfer is not executed with Continuous OFF When transition is consecutive transfer enabled Reset when transfer of one transition completed step is completed suspension flag ON When no transition Consecutive transfer of a step can be prevented by writing an AND condition to corresponding M9104 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalen of D9108 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalen of D9109 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalen of D9110 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalen of D9111 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalen of D9112 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalen
353. hest No of the local pointer in use The High Performance model QCPU s OS computes the number of points used Even if only P99 is used in a program for example the number of points used will be counted as 100 between PO and P99 Therefore when local pointers are used at several programs the pointer settings should begin from PO If the total number of pointers total for all programs exceeds 4096 points a pointer configuration error error code 4020 occurs occupied points is 100 points is 1 __ pine PXAMples oo 0 Ss Ses eas Seg aoe ee ee SS eS eee ERS See PESTS SA SSeS CEES SRS SEES If the local pointer points are used as follows the total is 600 points Program A Program B Program C PO to P99 used in P100 to P199 used Only P299 is used I program in program in program PO to P99 occupy PO to P199 occupy 200 points PO to P299 occupy 300 points Total of 600 100 points points used lf PO to P99 are used If PO is used the the number of number of occupied 10 9 2 Common pointers 1 Definition a Common pointers are used to call sub routine programs from all programs being executed in the QCPU Program A Program C oat P204 H P204 CALL Po RET FEND Program B Fa CALL P205 FEND Label b The same pointer No cannot be used again as a lab
354. his program is a program executed at specified intervals Without describing an interrupt point and IRET instruction a fixed scan execution can be performed for each file The type of execution is set to Fixed San by the program setting of PLC parameters 2 Execution of fixed scan execution type program a b c Interrupt factor R E E Fixed scan execution type program execution When multiple fixed scan execution type programs are present a fixedsan execution type program executed for a specified time is executed When multiple fixed scan execution type programs have been executed for a specified time at the same timing these programs are executed in the ascending order of numbers for the program setting of the PLC parameters When fixed scan execution type programs and interrupt programs 128 to 131 have been executed for a specified time at the same timing the priority of execution is given to the interrupt programs Execution during network refreshing When the execution conditions of fixed scan execution type programs are established during the network refreshing the network refresh is suspended and interrupt programs are executed Accordingly even if the block assurance of cyclic data for each station is made by the MELSECNET H network system the assurace will not be given if a device set at a station to be refreshed is used in the interrupt programs 1 i 10ms f 10ms gt l Sit
355. ial Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification e Turned on off with a peripheral device SD1044 For sampling Step or time during At scanning 0 trace sampling trace At time Time 10 msec unit Stores the value in BIN code D9049 SD1049 7 44 50 1 Corresponding CPU Stores the block number of the expansion file register which is used as the work area for the execution of a Block number of Work area for ae SFC program in a binary value extension file er SFC banister Stores 0 if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller 9 which cannot be expansion file register No 1 is used or if SM320 is OFF Stores code numbers of errors occurred in the SFC program in BIN code 0 No error Error code 80 SFC program parameter error generated by SFC 81 SFC code error program 82 Number of steps of simultaneous execution exceeded 83 Block start error SFC program D90 D90 error number gt lt aE a 84 SFC program operation error Stores the block number in which an error occurred in Blocknumber the SFC program in BIN code D9051 SD1051 Error block where error prog e P In the case of error 83 the starting block number is occurred stored Transition condition Stores the transfer condition number in which error 84 D9053 D1053 Error transition number where error occurred in the SFC program in BIN code occurred Stored 0 when errors 80 81 82 and 83 occurred
356. icated instruction executable Switches ON when the number of the CC Link dedicated ON CC Link dedicated instructions that can be executed simultaneously reaches instruction not 32 Switches OFF when the number goes below 32 executable U Status change dedicated instruction executable 7 Debug S Status i P Trace preparation OFF Not prepared Switches ON when the trace preparation is completed chango im Ten oe trace ONM Ready Goes ON when sampling trace is ready Status new ana oe change e Trace is started when this relay switches ON Trace start OFF S d Trace is suspended when this relay switches OFF M9047 QCPU uspen All related special Ms switches OFF N e trace ON star Sampling trace started when this goes ON M9047 Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF e Switches ON during execution of trace M9046 QCPU in progress a SM802 Sampling trace S Status execution in Goes ON during execution of sampling trace change M9046 progress ae ee foe ee SM803 OFF gt ON Start ERE SER RA trace Sampling trace trigger goes ON when this goes from OFF to ON Identical to STRA instruction execution state S Status A h N af d RN fter trace ter race rigger OFF Not after trigger Switches ON after trace is triggere change After sampling ON Spier rigger Goes ON after sampling trace trigger S Status trace trigger change A S Status T l h N let f trace 9043 QCPU race
357. ices allocated for C APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set b Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation When a ACPU aie 9 be TT f Number of points k Device Stores the number of points currently set for D devices allocated for D New O Rem n g wo Q N a location Number of points Same as p Stores the number of points currently set for W devices S Initial allocated for W parameter contents Number of points allocated for SW Reserves the designated time for communication processing with GX Developer or other units The greater the value is designated the shorter the response time reserved for Time reserved for for communication with other devices GX Developer serial END communicat communication communication units becomes pro essing New QCPU ion i Setting range 1 to 100 ms processing If the designated value is out of the range above it is assumed to no setting The scan time becomes longer by the designated time No of 9 ot modules Indicates the number of modules installed on Ethernet installed O No e Ethernet I O No of the 1st module installed N k ewon Ethernet network No of the 1st module installed e Ethernet group No of the 1st module installed Ethernet station No of the 1st module installed S Initial New Vacant Ethernet With QCPU
358. ich designate hexadecimal or BCD data in sequence programs For BCD data designations 0 to 9 digit designations are used Hexadecimal constants are designated as H11 settings e g H1234 See Section 4 8 3 for details regarding hexadecimal code 2 Designation range The setting ranges for hexadecimal constants are as follows e For word data 16 bits HO to HFFFF HO to H9999 for BCD e For 2 word data 82 bits HO to HFFFFFFFF HO to H99999999 for BCD 10 61 10 61 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 12 3 Real numbers E 1 Definition Real numbers are devices which designate real numbers in the sequence program Real numbers are designated as E settings e g E1 234 x1 _ Emovp E1 234 DO See Section 4 8 4 for details regarding real numbers Designation range The setting range for real numbers is 1 0x2 to 1 0x2 0 and 1 0x2 to 1 0x2 Designation method Real numbers can be designated in sequence programs by a normal expression or an exponential expression e Normal expression The specified value is designated as it is For example 10 2345 becomes E10 2345 e Exponential expression The specified value is multiplied by a x10 exponent For example 1234 becomes E1 234 3 1 The 3 in the above example represents a 10 value 1 0 10 12 4 Character string 1 10 62 Definition Character string constants are devices used to designate charact
359. ied tools or correctly soldered Imperfect connections could result in short circuit fires or erroneous operation e Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it could result in short circuits fire or erroneous operation Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Such debris could cause fires damage or erroneous operation e The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation Startup and Maintenance precautions lt gt DANGER e Do not touch the terminals while power is on Doing so could cause shock or erroneous operation e Correctly connect the battery Also do not charge disassemble heat place in fire short circuit or solder the battery Mishandling of battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires e Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning the module or retightening the terminal or module mounting screws Not doing so could result in electric shock Undertightening of terminal screws can cause a short c
360. ies modules 1 2 Connecting order of extension base units When using both Q5_ B Q6_ B and QA1S6 _ B connect all Q5__JB Q6__ B modules closer to the main base unit then connect QA1S6_ B modules Setting order of the stage numbers for extension base units Extension base units require the setting of the extension stage numbers 1 to 7 using the stage No setting connector Assign the extension stage numbers starting from 1 to 7 to the extension base units counting from the one which is connected to the main base unit Cautions to assign extension stage numbers to extension base units a Assign consecutive numbers to extension stages If you assign stage numbers to base units in Auto mode and assign some stage numbers to no modules 0 is assigned to the skipped stage as the number of slots Consequently the number of vacant slots does not increase The I O assignment also assigns 0 to the skipped stage as the I O points b It is impossible to set and use the same extension stage number with two or more extension base units c You cannot use the system if two or more connector pins are inserted to the stage setting connector On the contrary you cannot use the system if no connector pin is inserted to the stage setting connector 01234567 Q Setting of extension B 9 B i i seca S Q38 gt
361. igh Performance model QCPU to a personal computer it is possible to perform monitoring and tests on all modules being controlled by the multiple PLC system s High Performance model QCPU in the same way as with a single CPU system Other station High Performance model QCPUs on the same MELSECNET H Ethernet or other network can also be accessed It is possible for all High Performance model QCPUs on a multiple PLC system to be accessed from a GX Developer that is connected to other stations on the same network 13 4 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 13 3 Differences with Single CPU Systems 13 5 The differences between single CPU systems and multiple PLC systems are explained below 1 Function versions see Sections 14 2 1 to 14 2 5 a Function version B High Performance model QCPUs are supported by multiple PLC systems Function version A High Performance model QCPUs cannot be used on a multiple PLC system b All I O modules can be used on a multiple PLC system c Use function version B intelligent function modules on the multiple PLC system Function version A intelligent function modules can be used if set up as control PLC by the PLC No 1 Mounting position of CPU module see Section 14 2 1 High Performance model QCPUs can be mounted on the CPU slot from the right hand side of the power unit sequentially The motion CPUs are mounted together on the slot to the right of the High Performance model
362. ignated with some instructions Refer to the allowable device in the programming manual of each instruction for details c When to use Use the Following Files 1 This setting should be selected when a given file register is to be shared by all executed programs 2 Specify the desired parameters in the Corresponding memory File name and Capacity text boxes The High Performance model QCPU creates a file register file with the specified parameters If a parameter is not specified in the Capacity test box this may result in the following e If a file register file with the specified filename is stored on the specified drive that file register file is used e If a file register file with the specified filename is not found on the specified drive a parameter error 3002 will occur e When an ATA card is used a memory card ROM cannot be registered with the targeted memory If a memory card is registered with the targeted memory a parameter error 3000 will occur when a file register file is written onto the High Performance model QCPU 2 File Register Setting Use the device memory screen to specify a filename of a file register file a Device Label RO x Display 16 bit integer x oec g 3 4 5 6 Device name 0 1 2 a a clololololololololololololololo elolololelololololelololol
363. imers With a timer setting instruction format a device is assigned for a low speed timer or high speed timer The OUT TO instruction is used to assign a device for a low speed timer The OUTH TO instruction is used to assign a device for a high speed timer With a timer setting instruction format a device is assigned for a low speed retentive timer or high speed retentive timer The OUT TO instruction is used to assign a device for a low speed retentive timer The OUTH TO instruction is used to assign a device for a high speed retentive timer 1 Definition a Low speed timers are those that are only operative while the coil is ON b The time measurement begins when the timer s coil switches ON and the contact switches ON when a time out occurs When the timer s coil switches OFF the present value becomes 0 and the contact switches OFF Ladder example oo XO K10 When X0 switches ON the TO coil switches ON and the To contact switches ON 1 second later The low speed timer measures time in 100 ms units Time chart ON X0 OFF iN ON TO coil TO contact 2 Measurement units a The default time measurement units setting for low speed timers is 100 ms b The time measurement units setting can be designated in 1 ms units within a 1 ms to 1000 ms range This setting is designated in the PLC system settings in the PLC parameter setting 10 19 10 19 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q High speed timers 1
364. in the memory specified in the PLC File sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box b Selecting a file register file If a memory for file registers is selected a filename of a file register file is displayed Select the desired filename of a file register file c Specifying the capacity and filename This section is used to specify the capacity of file registers and a filename of the file register file to be written onto the High Performance model QCPU QCPU side filename 1 The capacity of file registers can be specified from ZRO in the units of 256 points If file registers cannot be assigned from ZRO this will result in a file register file that contains points from ZRO to the last point For example if the storing range of file registers are designated from ZR1000 to ZR1791 a file register file will contain points from ZRO to ZR1791 Specify file registers from ZRO because undefined data is from ZRO to ZR999 A check on the capacity of file registers is made in the units of 1K points The capacity of file registers should be specified from RO in the units of 1K points 2 This section is used to specify a filename that is different from the specified filename of a file register file d Storing a file register file in the High Performance model QCPU s memory This button is used to store a file register file with the specified number of points in the specified High Performance model QCPU s memory 10 48 10 48 10 DEVICES ME
365. in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi general purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or National Defense purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications Note that even with these applications if the user approves that the application is to be limited and a special quality is not required application shall be possible When considering use in aircraft medical applications railways incineration and fuel devices manned transport devices equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices in which human life or assets could be greatly affected and for which a particularly high reliability i
366. ined from the following equation Program capacity File header size default 34 steps For details on the program capacity and files see Chapter 6 3 The memory capacity of the Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU with the first five digits of the serial number being 02091 or earlier is 64 kbyte 4 The shared CPU memory will not be latched The shared CPU memory will be cleared when the PLC s power is switched on or the CPU module is reset 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION MELSEC Q Table 3 1 Performance specification continued Model name pT Modetname o o O gos Internal relay M Default 8192 points MO to 8191 Latch relay L Default 8192 points LO to 8191 Link relay B Default 8192 points BO to 1FFF Default 2048 points TO to 2047 for low high speed timer Select between low high speed timer by instruction Set the measurement module of low high speed timer by parameter Low speed timer 1 to 1000 ms 1 ms unit default 100 ms High speed timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1 ms unit default 10 ms Set parameter values to specify usable point Default 0 point for low high speed timer Select between low high speed retentive timer by instruction Set the measurement module of low high speed retentive timer by parameter Low speed retentive timer 1 to 1000 ms 1 ms unit default 100 ms High speed retentive timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1 ms unit default 10 ms e Normal counter default 1024 points CO to 1023 eee counter maxim
367. ined with the battery Q6BAT attached to the CPU module 1 A battery is necessary even if the sequence program is stored as a standard ROM or a ROM in a memory card for usage 2 Take care that if the battery connector is disconnected from the connector of the High Performance model QCPU when the High Performance model QCPU is turned off the latch range device memory is not retained but becomes undefined 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 4 Setting the Output Y Status when Changing from STOP Status to RUN Status 1 Output Y Status when changing from STOP Status to RUN Status When changing from RUN status to STOP status the RUN status output Y is stored in the sequence and all the outputs Y are turned OFF The state after transition from STOP to RUN can be selected from the following two options with the High Performance model QCPU e The output state prior to STOP is output e The output is cleared Default After transition from STOP to RUN the output Y state prior to STOP is output then the program is executed a Previous State After the output Y status before the STOP status is output the sequence program calculations are performed b Recalculate Output is 1 Scan later Clears all output Y and outputs the output Y after executing the sequence program calculations STOP status to RUN status NO Output after calculation execution Replay output YES Replay output Output the output Y s
368. ing However because the High Performance model QCPU operation is based on BIN if the High Performance model QCPU uses values designated in the BCD method as they are it handles the values as BIN The High Performance model QCPU operation based on such values will be different from the operation specified by the designated values A BIN instruction is therefore provided for the High Performance model QCPU to convert BCD input data to the BIN data which is used by the High Performance model QCPU A program which converts numeric data to BIN data can be created at the sequence program in order to allow numeric settings to be designated from an external source without regard to the corresponding BIN values High Performance model QCPU Numeric data designation Digital switch m HH enp Ka Do aalam BCD input x0 XF L BIN data BCD D5 K4Y30 Fig 4 11 Digital Switch Data Input to High Performance model QCPU 2 External numeric outputs from High Performance model QCPU A digital display can be used to display numeric data which is output from the High Performance model QCPU However because the High Performance model QCPU uses BIN data it cannot be displayed at the digital display as is ABCD instruction is therefore provided for the High Performance model QCPU to convert the BIN data to BCD data A program which converts BIN data to BCD data can be created at the sequence program in order to display t
369. ing replaced is set in SD251 is set on line I O module replace ment is enabled when this relay is ON Only one module can be replaced at each setting OFF No replacement To replace an I O module in the RUN state use the Q2A S1 SM251 VO change flag ON Replacement program or a peripheral device to turn this relay ON to END M9094 Q3A replace an I O module in the STOP state turn this relay Q4A ON in the test mode of a peripheral device Q4AR Do not switch between RUN and STOP states until I O module replacement is completed Effective for the batch refresh also effective for the low speed cyclic e Designate whether to receive arrival stations only or to receive all slave stations OFF Operative network eee ON iat Si angby network 3 a ON Standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or S Initial MELSECNET 10 standby active is assumed module 1 For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether U information ON Does not read to read from the link module OFF Writes For refresh from CPU to link B W etc designate ON Does not write whether to write to the link module i Goes ON for standby network OFE Operative network If no designation has been made concerning active or S Initial New MELSECNET 10 CN Standby network standby active is assumed module 2 OFF Reads e For refresh from link to CPU B W etc indicate whether information ON Does not read to rea
370. ing Explanation ici ot ACPU Corresponding po TT Set the basic period 1 second units use for the process ice Basic period period control instruction using floating point data one Floating points data SD1501 SD1500 Process control Process control instruction detail instruction detail error code error code Process control Process control instruction instruction e Shows the error process block that occurred in the process S Error generated error generated error control instruction occurrence location location Operation mode e Shows the detailed error contents for the error that occurred S Error in the process control instruction occurrence Shows the power out time S during the automatic switch P CPU start from hot start to initial start in the operation mode when the S Initial Hot start switch ower out time p CPU is started up SEE request Request origin Stores the request origin at work No when the SM1590 is S Error SD1590 network No network No turned on occurrence x 1 Stores the host system CPU information App 56 App 56 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue 14 For redundant systems Other system CPU information 1 for Q4AR only SD1600 to SD1659 is only valid during the back up mode for redundant systems and refresh cannot be done when in the separate mode When a standalone system SD1600 to SD1699 are all 0 Corresponding Number Name Meanin
371. ion 7 7 2 0 1 ms 0 2 ms 0 4 ms 0 6 ms and 1 ms with this function Default 0 2 ms Section The response time of the interrupt module compatible with Q Series can be selected from 0 1 ms ion 7 7 0 2 ms 0 4 ms 0 6 ms and 1 ms with this function Default 0 2 ms Section 7 3 This function monitors and or tests the local devices of the designated program using the GX Monitor test local Devices e g prog 9 Section 7 9 2 Turn ON OFF external I O This function forcibly turns the external I O of the CPU module on or off from the GX Developer Section 7 9 3 Write during RUN This function writes programs when the CPU module is in the RUN status Section 7 10 re This function displays the processing time of a program being executed the number of times to Measure execution time A o Section 7 11 execute an interrupt program and the execution time of a program Program list monitor Interrupt program monitor Scan time measurement Sampling trace function Multiple user debugging function Selt Diagnosis function This function prevents the programs from being altered by the GX Developer communication i System protect AE ss mee prog 9 y p Section 7 17 F This function provides read write protection for files stored in the CPU module against access from Password registration Section 7 17 1 the GX Developer A function to prevent illegal access from external sources with serial communication modules and Remote password Section 7
372. ion modules in the same way as a single CPU system It is possible to access non control modules in the following ways e Refresh the input for I O modules and intelligent function modules the PLC parameter multiple PLC setup is necessary e Read the intelligent function module s buffer memory e Download the output data for the output module the I O combination module and the intelligent function modules However it is not possible to access non control modules in the following ways e Outputting data to the output module and intelligent function module e Writing data into the intelligent function module s buffer memory CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Input module Input module 2 3 3 E D z fc Output module Intelligent function module Input module aa Intelligent function module rm Output module j H i Possible to read with the QCPU2 Possible to read with the QCPU1 4 DX Developer access range a It is possible to write parameter programs and perform monitoring and tests in High Performance model QCPUs connected to personal computers To access High Performance model QCPUs that are not connected to personal computers specify the High Performance model QCPU to be accessed connection destination specification with the GX Developer It is possible for the GX Developer to access the High Performance model QCPU regardless of the control modules and non contro modules By connecting a single H
373. ion of enforced ON OFF for external I O ON orange A mode Flicker green 200 ms on 200 ms off with registration of enforced ON OFF for external I O Indicates the CPU module operation status On When operating with the RUN STOP switch at RUN Off When stopped with the RUN STOP switch at STOP Or when an error that stops operation is detected Flicker When writing parameters ad programs during STOP and when setting the RUN STOP switch from STOP RUN Perform the following operations in order to illuminate the RUN LED after program writing Set the RUN STOP switch to RUN STOP RUN e Reset the system with the RESET L CLR switch e Switch on the power to the PLC again Perform the following operations in order to illuminate the RUN LED after parameter writing e Reset the system with the RESET L CLR switch e Switch on the power to the PLC again When the RUN STOP switch has been set to RUN STOP RUN after the parameters have been amended the parameters related to intelligent function modules and other network parameters will not be reflected back Indicates the CPU module error detection status On When a self diagnosis error that does not stop the operation except for battery error is detected Set the operation error set mode to continue in the parameter mode PLC RAS setting Normal When an error that stops the operation is detected When automatic writing to the sta
374. iple programs requires overhead time of each program being executed Add overhead time to the total processing time CPU Type Processing Time ms Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Conditions n Number of program files Installation Removal of a memory card Installation removal of a memory card requires additional processing time If a memory card is installed or removed add 1 scan time to the total processing time Processing Time ms Memory Card Memory Card Inserted Removed Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU CPU Type 11 3 11 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 8 File register File register requires additional processing time Add the processing time of file registers to the total processing time CPU Type Standard Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02CPU 0 9440 2n QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 0 40 0 1 lt n Conditions n number of program files 11 3 Factors Responsible for Shortened Scan Time The length of scan time can be shorted by making changes to the PLC Parameter setting as follows e A PLC Compatibility with A Series CPU Arithmetic operation of floating point 1 A PLC Compatibility with A Series CPU When Use special relay special register after SM1000 SD1000 is set in the PLC system settings of the PLC parameter the scan time can be reduced by the value in the following table by setting to Do not use special relay s
375. ircuit or malfunction Overtightening of screws can cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction Startup and Maintenance precautions A CAUTION e The online operations conducted for the CPU module being operated connecting the peripheral device especially when changing data or operation status shall be conducted after the manual has been carefully read and a sufficient check of safety has been conducted Operation mistakes could cause damage or problems with of the module e Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so could cause trouble erroneous operation injury or fire e Use acellular phone or PHS more than 25cm 9 85 inch away from the PLC Not doing so can cause a malfunction e Switch all phases of the external power supply off before mounting or removing the module If you do not switch off the external power supply it will cause failure or malfunction of the module Disposal Precautions A CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste REVISIONS x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Dec 2000 SH NA 080038 B Add the Q33B type basic base unit and Q63B type extension base unit Change Chapter 11 1 to 3 to Section 11 1 to 11 3 Unify the name from the software package GPP function ladder logic test tool function GPPW etc to the product name GX Developer GX Configura
376. is monitored its value is 8208 2010H Stores the local or remote station numbers while they are communicating the initial data with their relevant master station Device Bit number b8 b5 UR UR D1224 9 6 D1225 D1226 D1227 QnA UR UR 25 22 UR UR 41 38 UR UR 57 54 The bit corresponding to the station number which is currently communicating the initial settings becomes 1 Example When stations 23 and 45 are communicating bit 6 of SD1225 and bit 12 of SD1226 become 1 and when SD1225 is monitored its value is 64 40H and when SD1226 is monitored its value is 4096 1000H Stores the local or remote station numbers which are in error Device Bit number b8 b5 UR UR 9 6 D1228 D1229 D1230 D1231 UR UR 25 22 UR UR 41 38 UR UR 57 54 The bit corresponding to the station number with the error becomes 1 Example When local station 3 and remote I O station 14 have an error bits 2 and 13 of D9228 become 1 and when SD1228 is monitored its value is 8196 2004H App 53 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification Corresponding CPU Stores conditions D1232 for up to numbers St
377. k returns to normal status data link in forward loop values in D9205 and D9206 remain 1 and 3 Reset using sequence program or the RESET key Stores the number of retry times due to transmission error Count stops at maximum of FFFFH RESET to return the count to 0 Stores the number of times the loop line has been switched to reverse loop or loopback Count stops at maximum of FFFFH RESET to return the count to 0 Stores the local station numbers which are in STOP or PAUSE mode Device number b15 Li6 L32 L48 L64 b14 L15 L31 L47 L63 b13 L14 L30 L46 L62 b12 L13 L29 L45 L61 b11 Li2 L28 L44 L60 b10 L11 L27 L43 L59 b9 b6 L10 L7 L26 L25 L23 L42 L41 L39 L58 L57 L55 b5 L6 L22 L38 L54 b4 bt L5 L2 L21 L18 L37 L34 L53 L50 D1212 D1213 D1214 D1215 When a local station is switched to STOP or PAUSE mode the bit corresponding to the station number in the register becomes 1 Example When station 7 switches to STOP mode bit 6 in SD1212 becomes 1 and when SD1212 is monitored its value is 64 40H App 52 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification Name D1216 D1220 D1221 D1222 Local station Local station parameters
378. ks the Ethernet module remote passwords for the access source via modems serial communication modules and the Ethernet Access to the High Performance model QCPU is enabled if the remote password matches up For example an outline of what will happen during remote password lock unlock processing with an Ethernet module is shown below The remote password is unlocked relesed and access to the QCPU is allows The remote password locking process is performed when the line is closed GX Developer Ethernet The remote password is transmitted to QU71E71 when the power is switched on or the system reset A check is run on the remote password GX Developer 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Procedure for setting up the remote password GX Developer Remote Password Remote Password Setup screen Advanced Remote Password Setup screen a Setup screen Remote password setup Detail is required with the QU71E71 Remote password se tings r Password settings Password fo r Password active module settings QU71E71 vjoooo Detail qg7ic2z24 0100 aes Necessary setting Mo setting Alreadyset J Clear Setting completion Cancel b Setup fields Model selection QJ71E71 QJ71C24 Cs SetupyNotsetup O O Z O FTP communication port TCP IP GX communication Adds a check to the valid transceiving port TCP IP remote password port GX Developer
379. l Note The internal system software version may differ from the version indicated by the version symbol printed on the case eIna multiple PLC system configuration the PLC number of the 7 QCPU function host CPU is stored S Initial Ver B or later PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 Multiple PLC number Corresponding R Set by Corresponding Expl xplanation When set ACPU Following programmable controller CPU RUN 1 is added each 1 second Number of counts in wing prog S Status counter 1 second units manila e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 Stores value n of 2n second clock Default is 30 Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 SD415 2nms clock onime clock units Stores value n of 2nms clock Default is 30 setting e Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 __ Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the PLC is set to Scan Number of counts in Spano counter each scan RUN 2 Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 e Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the PLC is set to Number of counts in RUN e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 rocessin e Used only for low speed execution type programs P 9 x Not counted by the scan in an initial execution type program App 35 App 35 APPENDICES Execution program No Low speed program No Maximum scan time Current scan time for low speed execution type programs Maximum
380. l QCPU enters the operation state set at the RUN STOP switch after it is reset 2 Even if the Allow check box of the Remote reset section in the PLC System sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box the remote process of the GX Developer is completed However the reset process does not proceed in the High Performance model QCPU and therefore it is not reset If the state of the High Performance model QCPU does not change though a reset process is performed at the GX Developer check if the Allow check box of the Remote reset section in the PLC System sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box is turned on 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 6 4 Remote latch clear 1 What is Remote Latch Clear a The remote latch clear resets the device data latched to the High Performance model QCPU using the GX Developer function or other function when the High Performance model QCPU is at the STOP state b Remote latch clear is useful when the High Performance model QCPU is in the following areas In these cases the operations are performed in combination with the remote RUN STOP e When the High Performance model QCPU is at a position out of reach e When performing latch clear of the control board High Performance model QCPU from an external source 2 Remote Latch Clear Method The remote latch clear can only be performed from GX Developer function or serial communication module To perform the remote latch clear follow the following steps a
381. l be impossible Program A High Performance model QCPU Program memory Standard Main routine ROM Memory card program Write Program A Program B Write Use a common pointer x This does not have to be created in order See 10 13 1 for execution of a sub routine program that contains local devices Refer to Section 10 9 for details regarding common pointers and local pointers 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q c Gathering interrupt programs into a single program 1 Create the interrupt programs in order beginning from step 0 of the stand by type program An END instruction is required at the end of the interrupt program 2 Because there are no restrictions regarding the creation sequence of interrupt programs the pointer numbers need not be assigned in ascending order when creating multiple interrupt programs Program A CPU module Program memory Standard ROM Memory card Main routine Pe Program A FEND 0H lt Y10 IRET Interrupt lt program 132 yi1 c JRT 128 lt Y12 A e JIRET END Interrupt pointer See Section 10 10 for details regarding interrupt pointers 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONDITIONS CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION MELSEC Q 4 2 5 Fixed scan execution type program 1 Definition of fixed scan execution type program a b T
382. l dimension mm in 98 H x 27 4 W x 89 3 D 3 86 x 1 08 x 3 52 Pointer P Number of device Interrupt pointer points is fixed Number of device points Refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for details for QCPU general specification 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS Sequence programs and SFC programs can be executed at the High Performance model QCPU This chapter describes the sequence program configuration and execution conditions SFC programs are not described in this manual For details regarding SFC programs refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 4 1 Sequence Program 1 Definition of sequence program a A sequence program is created using sequence instructions basic instructions and application instructions etc 7 Sequence instruction XO MO 4 H Ga TO ____________________ y30 a x1 1 Basic instruction Bn kaxio Do x41 Application instruction FROM H5 KO D10 K1 H b There are 3 types of sequence program main routine programs sub routine programs and interrupt programs For details regarding these programs refer to the following sections of this manual e Main routine programs Section 4 1 1 e Sub routine programs Section 4 1 2 e Interrup
383. l point is calculated as follows 0 1 1 0 1 t t t t This bit expresses 2 This bit expresses 2 This bit expresses 2 This bit expresses 24 0 1101 2 27 22 24 0 5 0 25 0 125 0 875 10 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 9 Character String Data 1 Character String Data The High Performance model QCPU uses ASCII code data 2 ASCII code character strings ASCII code character strings are shown in the Table below 00H NUL code is used at the end of a character string 1717171717474 4 of ofojo i f1 1 1 of ofi ifofo f1 1 of 1fof i1 f of1 of1 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 8 9 A B JC DI E F OO oO OO O O OJ OF 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS This section describes the necessary information on the I O number assignment for the data exchange between High Performance model QCPU and I O modules or intelligent function modules 5 1 Relationship Between the Number of Stages and Slots of the Extension Base Unit High Performance model QCPU allows the system configuration using eight base units one main base unit and seven extension base units However the number of available slots modules is limited to 64 slots including vacant slots An error SP UNIT LAY ERR occurs when a module input output or intelligent function module is installed to
384. ld also designate System setting at the intelligent function module To execute an interrupt program by the interrupt from the intelligent function module refer to the manual of the intelligent function module being used 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 3 Communication Between High Performance model QCPU and AnS Series Special Function Modules The following methods enable the communication between High Performance model QCPU and the special function modules compatible with AnS series e Device initial value e Intelligent function module device e FROM TO instruction The following table shows the communication timing for the communication methods with special function modules described above Communication timing Storage location 1 2 Communication method with special function High modules Performance STOP gt Instruction High model QCPU execution processing Performance Special reset model QCPU Device initial value ec ee ae ea ae ee ee ee FROM TO instruction 4 O Inteligent function module device To o Executable Not executable x1 Indicates whether the data of the device initial value is stored in High Performance model QCPU or in a special function module x2 Represents the internal memory of High Performance model QCPU or a memory card 3 Special represents a special function module x4
385. le Changing the response time of the interrupt module means to amend the input response speed for interrupt modules QI60 that support the Q series to 0 1 ms 0 2 ms 0 4 ms 0 6 ms and 1 ms Input from external sources is accepted at the input response speed set for the interrupt module The default setting for the input response time is 0 2 ms ON External input i i i o OFF Interrupt module y Input response time 2 Input response time setup Input response time is set up with the I O allocation for PLC parameters Select Interrupt from amongst the slot types for which the input response time is to be set Interrupt selection Advanced settings selection Input response time selection e Program Bootfile SFC 1 0 assignment x Intelligent functional module detailed setting ime HAW eror Modelname eecttime tine PLC 1 0 refponse Control PLC moie operation tife e mode Slot e c PLC Model name PLC Fa Points Stan e witch setti ere OF 0 interupt 16points Detailed setting a alalalalala alalalalalalala If the start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard settingl Base model name Power model name xtention cable Base mode C Auto
386. le Devices 16 9 16 3 Interactive Communications between The High Performance model QCPU and Motion CPU 16 11 16 3 1 Control instructions from the High Performance model QCPU to the motion CPU 16 11 16 3 2 Reading and writing device data oo eeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeesaeeseeseeseeseeseeseeeteaeteeeeenetaaes 16 12 16 4 Common CPU Memory u cscececesesseeseseseeseseseseesesesesescseseeseseacaeeeseseaeseeseaeseaeesaessaeetsaeasaeaeeeacasaeeneeeesaeeteneeeasatess 16 13 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES 17 1to17 5 17 1 Range of Control PLC Communications c cscececscsesesesesseseseseescseseeeeseaeseeeeseseaeeeeeeeeaeaeeneeeasaeenseseeaseteeeseasatens 17 1 17 2 Range of Non control PLC Communications ecceeceseeseseseseeseseceeeeseseseeeeseseaeeeseseacaeeeeeeasaeeteseeateteesnesaeens 17 1 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPUs 18 110 18 3 18 1 Concept behind CPU Scanning Tirme csccscsecesesscseseceseeseseseseeseseseeeeseseseeeesescaeeeseeeeseaeenssasaeeteeseeaeateeeenaeaeens 18 1 18 2 Factor to Prolong the Scan Time csessesecsseeseseseseeeseseseeescseseseeseseseeeseseaeeeseseaeeeseaeaeaeensacasaeensesaeaeaeeeeeeaeaeens 18 2 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 19 1to 19 9 19 1 Flow chart for Starting Up the Multiple PLC System cccecesesccs
387. le input module An input response time setting is not made for a slot of an AnS Series compatible input module c The input response speed setting is valid in the following cases e After the PLC is turned on e When the High Performance model QCPU is reset 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 7 2 Selecting the response time of the high speed input module 1 Selecting the response time of the high speed input module Changing the response time of the high speed input module means to amend the input response speed for high speed input modules QX40 S1 that support the Q series to 0 1 ms 0 2 ms 0 4 ms 0 6 ms and 1 ms Input from external sources is accepted at the input response speed set for the high speed input module The default setting for the input response time is 0 2 ms ON External input OEF i ON High speed OFF 1 input module Input response time 2 Input response time setup Input response time is set up with the I O allocation for PC parameters Select Hi input from amongst the slot types for which the input response time is to be set Hi input selection Advanced settings selection Input response time selection Qn H Parameter Intelligent functional module detailed setting PL ir HAW eror Mide nami Erare time PLC 1 0 resppnse Control PLC mode operation tir fi m 1 0 Assignment lo paints If the
388. llowing functions have been added to the High Performance model QCPU products whose first 5 digits of the serial number are 02092 e Automatic write to standard ROM see Section 6 6 2 e External I O can be turned ON OFF forcibly see Section 7 9 3 e Remote password setting see Section 7 19 e Q12HCPU Q25HCPU s increased standard RAM capacity see Chapter 3 Section 6 4 e MELSECNET H remote I O network compatibility see Section 1 1 e Interrupt module QI60 compatibility See Section 7 7 3 2 Additional functions with products whose function version is B The following functions have been added to the High Performance Model QCPU products whose function version is B e Applicability to the multiple PLC system see Chapters 13 to 19 3 Additional functions with products whose first 5 digits of the serial number are 03051 e Installation of PC CPU unit into the multiple PLC system see Chapters 13 to 19 POINT 1 When using a QCPU with the first five digits of the serial number being 02091 or earlier skip the pages explaining the functions added to those with serial numbers starting with 02092 2 When a multiple PLC system is not in use skip Chapters 13 to 19 2 When a PC CPU unit is not in use skip Chapters 13 to 19 3 Refer to Section 2 3 to confirm High Performance model QCPU serial numbers and function versions High Performance model QCPU is the generic term for the Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q
389. llowing manner Factor number default value Hexadecimal 15 to 1211 to 8 7 to 4 3 to 0 bit 15 to 0 bit D207 Priority order 4 Priority order 3 Priority order 2 Priority order 1 SD207 4 3 2 1 a Factor number setting area D208 Priority order 8 Priority order 7 Priority order 6 Priority order 5 SD208 8 si Factor number setting area Priority order 10 Priority order 9 gt SD209 0 Neglected Factor number setting area 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q The description and default priority for the factor number to be set in the special registers SD207 to SD209 are as follows ened Factor number a Priority f Description Remarks Hexadecimal a ac own Power shutoff UNIT VERIFY ERR I O module verification error FUSE BREAK OFF Fuse shutoff DES E FILE OPE ERROR File access error ee Low speed execution monitoring time time up mI deemed 7 7 Annunciator Pa e O e t o pareve fd A Clock data 1 When leaving the LED turned off at the error described above set the factor number setting area each 4 bits which stores the factor number corresponding to SD207 to SD209 to 0 Example To leave the ERR LED off when a fuse shutoff error is detected set the factor number setting area to 0 where the error number is 2 sp209 sp208 gt sp207 gt ol oj ajo s 7l6 5 4 3 0 1
390. llowing parties during automatic refresh of common CPU memory e Between High Performance model QCPU and High Performance model QCPU e Between High Performance model QCPU and Motion CPU e Between Motion CPU and Motion CPU e Between High Performance model QCPU and PC CPU module e Between Motion CPU and PC CPU module An outline of operations when the No 1 machine performs automatic refresh on the 32 points between BO and B1F and when the No 2 machine performs automatic refresh on the 32 points between B20 and B3F PLC No 1 PLC No 2 Common CPU memory Common CPU memory Host machine s operation Host machine s operation information area information area System area System area Automatic refresh area for writing in the No 1 machine Automatic refresh area for 3 Reading performed with writing in the No 2 machine the PLC No 2 END process A User s free area User s free area 1 Writing performed with the PLC No 1 END process 2 Writing performed with the PLC No 2 END process Device memory Device memory 1 6 BO to B1F For use of the PLC No 1 4 Reading performed with gt BO to B1F For use of the PLC No 1 B20 to B3F Fe f the PLC No 1 a DEPL No 1 B20 to B3F Fi f the PLC No 1 0 to For use of the PLC No 1 END process to For use of the 0 1 The processes performed during the PLC No 1 END process 1 The BO to B1F
391. lock 23 SM1736 SM1737 SM1738 SM1739 SM1740 SM1741 SM1742 SM1744 SM1745 SM1746 SM1747 SM1748 SM1749 SM1750 ock 40 M1752 SM1752 us eo f Pers ransmission SE Block 42 ng scan turns on when the M1754 Transmission trigger uncompleted SM1754 ae S status M1755 jend flag ON Transmission SM1755 an east data transmission change new Sone as been completed M1756 end SM1756 M1757 SM1757 M1758 SM1758 M1759 SM1759 M1760 SM1760 M1761 SM1761 M1762 SM1762 M1763 SM1763 M1764 SM1764 M1765 SM1765 M1766 SM1766 M1767 SM1767 M1768 SM1768 M1769 SM1769 M1770 SM1770 M1771 SM1771 M1772 SM1772 M1773 SM1773 M1774 SM1774 M1775 SM1775 App 21 App 21 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 2 Special Register List App 22 The special registers SD are internal registers with fixed applications in the programmable controller For this reason it is not possible to use these registers in sequence programs in the same way that normal registers are used However data can be written as needed in order to control the CPU and remote I O modules Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special designation has been made to the contrary The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set b
392. ly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting Base model name Power model name Increase cable Base mode Points name G Auto LEIS ISIE IS lele Jo for Jeo fro Jo a 2 z C Detail in Increasel Inctease2 Inctease3 Z 8 fixation End setup Cancel Inctease4 12 fixation IncteaseS Read PLC data Designate the contents of the Acknowledge XY assignment Defaut Check Endsetup Cancel intelligent function module switch 3 Precautions a Do not apply the switch setting for an intelligent function module to an AnS Series compatible special function module If the switch setting for an intelligent function module is specified for an AnS Series compatible special function module an error SP PARA ERROR will occur b For details on the switch setting for an intelligent function module see the manual of the intelligent function module in use c The switch settings for interruption modules with the GX Developer Version 6 SW6D5C GPPW E or higher are made by setting the type to Interruption The switch settings for interruption modules with the SW5D5C GPPW E or earlier GX Developers are made by setting the type to Intelligent Refer to the following manual for further details on the interruption module s switch settings e Building Block I O
393. ly is not required for the Q50B type extension base unit 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 Configuration of peripheral devices for High Performance QCPU Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA ae USB cable 1 To be procured yourself Only QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU can be used High Performance model QCPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU RS 232 cable QC30R2 PEERED 3 LS EERO SS EEE or SEK REE EEE ERSS SSE RSs SEE f Personal Computer GX Developer or later PC card adapter Q2MEM ADP SW4D5C GPPW E x1 For writing into memory card on GX Developer and USB cable refer to the operating manual of the GX Developer 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 3 Outline of system configuration Main base unit Q312B Power supply module 0123 45 67 8 9 1011 lt Slot No Extension cable Extension base unit Q612B merece w aaz The figure shows the configuration ta0l1col1e0 2001220 124012601280 when 32 input output modules are SIS SIS l loaded to each slot 1BF 1DF 1FF 21F 23F 25F 27F 29F 2BF Extension base unit Q68B Extension base unit QA1S68B Power supply module Power supply module g J 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 320 340 360 380 3A0 3C0 3E0 5A0 5C0 5E0 60
394. m package Head I O number for replacement X2F0 H2F Output module numbers in units of 16 points of which fuses have blown are entered in bit pattern Preset output unit numbers when parameter setting has ce performed 14 13 12 11 10 4 2 1 Example Input module PRES E ala Ula 1 o olo Bit pattern in units kvcoj of 16 points sD1101 0lo olo ofo 0 olo Fuse blown indicating the module E modules whose fuses have blown SD1107 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 B0 ae fuse blow e Fuse blow check is executed also to the output module of remote I O station If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program e Sets value for the step transfer monitoring timer and the number of F which turns on when the monitoring timer timed out b15 to b8b7 to bO Step transfer Timer setting valve monitoring timer and the f number at setting time out Timer setting 1 to 255 s in seconds F number setting By turning on any of MSM708 to SM1114 the monitoring timer starts If the transfer condition following a step which corresponds to the timer is not established within set time set annunciator F is tuned on When I O modules of which data are different from those entered at power on have been detected the I O unit numbers in units of 16 points are entered in bit pattern Preset I O
395. m the memory card shares the same name as a file residing in the program memory the memory card data will be overwritten Also if the file to be booted from the memory card does not share the same name as a file residing in the program memory it will be added to the program memory The FILE SET ERROR Error code 2401 will be triggered at this time if the capacity of the program memory is exceeded It is possible to select whether to perform the boot after the program memory has been cleared or perform the boot without clearing the program memory when booting from the memory card to the program memory Performing the boot after the program memory has been cleared when automatically writing in the standard ROM prevents the program memory from overflowing during the boot c The Write all data from the memory card to the standard ROM setting for the boot file only becomes valid when the High Performance model QCPU parameter valid drive setting is at Memory Card The Write all data from the memory card to the standard ROM setting for the boot file is disabled if the parameter valid drive setting is Program Memory or Standard ROM 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 7 Executing Standard ROM Memory Card Programs Boot Run 1 Executing High Performance model QCPU programs a The High Performance model QCPU processes programs which are stored in the program memory The High Performance model QCPU does n
396. mal ON Battery low OFF Normal ON Battery low OFF AC DC DOWN not detected ON AC DC DOWN detected OFF Normal ON Error OFF Normal ON Operation error OFF Normal e ON if diagnosis results show error occurrence Includes external diagnosis Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored Comes ON when an error occurs as a result of self diagnosis e Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored When SMO is ON ON if there is error common information When SMO is ON ON if there is error individual information ON if battery voltage at CPU or memory card drops below rated value Stays ON subsequently even after normal operation is restored e Synchronous with BAT ALARM LED Same as SM51 but goes OFF subsequently when battery voltage returns to normal Comes ON it a momentary power interruption of less than 20ms occurred during use of the AC power supply module and reset by turning the power OFF then ON Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less than 10ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less than 1ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON Goes ON if MINI S3 link error is detected at even one of the installed AJ71PT32 S3 modules Stays ON subsequently even after normal operation is
397. mance model QCPU is in the STOP status the settings made in the Program sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box must be adjusted to any changes addition change or deletion of program names made when the High Performance model QCPU was in the RUN status If no adjustment is made in the Program sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box an error may occur when the High Performance model QCPU enters from the STOP status to the RUN status 4 Precautions for Executing Programs in the Standard ROM Memory Card a For boot run store parameters PLC parameters of the boot file setting in a standard RAM or memory card If parameters are stored in a program memory and a parameter drive drive is set to Program Memory the boot file setting made in the PLC Parameter dialog box is ignored As a result a boot run is not performed when power is turned on or when the PLC is reset If programs are written in the program memory during the RUN status while a boot run is performed by using a memory card RAM any change made will be reflected in programs stored on the memory card RAM For details on the writing of programs during the RUN status see Section 7 10 If programs are written in the program memory during the RUN status while a boot run is performed by using a standard ROM memory card ROM any change made will not be reflected in programs stored in the standard ROM or on the memory card ROM In the Boot File sheet of the PLC Parameter
398. manual for the relevant intelligent function module for details on the detailed information for intelligent function modules f Base information Enables the Overall Information and Base Information to be confirmed 1 Overall information Enables the number of base units in use and the number of modules mounted on the base units to be confirmed 2 Base information Enables the base name the number of slots the base type and the number of modules mounted onto the base for the selected base unit main base unit additional base units 1 to 7 to be confirmed g List of product information Enables the individual information for mounted CPU modules I O modules and intelligent function modules to be confirmed type series model number head I O control PLC serial No function version Serial No Function version Product Information List Intelli Q QU71LP21 25 32pt 0000 020810000000000 None w None ad z None ia None CS file creating Close 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 19 LED Display The High Performance model QCPU has an LED to indicate the High Performance model QCPU operation status on the front of the High Performance model QCPU The display details of each LED are described below 7 19 1 LED display 1 The details of the LED display are shown below LED name Display Description Indicates the High Performance model QCPU mode Q mode A mode ON green Q mode No registrat
399. me data ce 7 9 Real numbers E cccsccceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneees 4 48 10 62 Refresh iMp tb onnsa nnana 10 6 Index 2 S Refresh Mode ataei e era aaa 4 38 Refresh Output cceeccsecceeccteceeeeeteeeteeetes 10 9 Remote latch Clear oo eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenteees 7 19 Remote Operation cceeccesceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 7 12 Remote PAUSE cccccececeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 7 15 Remote password ccccceeeeees 7 1 7 67 Remote RESE Ties iavininn dieiiint aie 7 17 Remote RUN STOP ccccssceseeeeeeteees 7 12 Remote station I O nUMbe 00ceeeeee 5 10 Retentive timer OUT ST 02 ccceeesenees 10 21 RUN Status eranen aaie eeik deae 4 35 S Step relay ccccecceceeseececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaes 10 18 SB Special link relay s s 10 18 Scan execution type program s 4 17 Scan ME Wi catenin tatoo param Wiener 4 18 SD Special register cceeeeeeeeeeeee 10 34 SD415 2n ms clock setting 0 ceeeeee 8 9 SD520 SD521 Scan time present value 4 18 SD522 SD523 Initial scan time 4 16 D524 SD525 Scan time Maximum value 4 18 D526 SD527 Scan time Minimum value 4 18 SD528 SD529 Low speed scan time Present value aa m hiatus r ee aise hat Sneaes latina 4 24 SD530 SD531 Low speed scan time Initial value Beale Pacts alas hanes tat ee Nata cl tele ead atta 4 24 SD532 SD533 Low speed scan time Minimum value Mia
400. meters written onto the hard disk or floppy disk 19 6 19 6 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 19 2 3 Using existing preset multiple PLC settings and I O allocations Start GX Developer started up Opens the GX Developer s PC parameter setup window ESSE PEC He ESSE Davies CR EES EEE Select Multiple PLC settings to display the multiple PLC setup window Refer to the GX Developer s operation manual Label Comment Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC setti Transferring multiple PLC settings yar EN pea Click on Diversion multiple PLC parameters Iny anditior No of PLC E gt a i Output cor j mode _ Refresh setting Change screens Setting X The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W RZR Jsettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check End Cancel Setting up transferred projects e Select the project into which existing multiple PLC settings sez and I O allocations are to be transferred Click on Open Project drive a Drive Path JASMELSEC Project name Cancel 19 7 19 7 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM 1 Diversion of multiple PLC parameter x It is executed multiple PLC parameter utilization and all followina parameters will be overwritten 1 0 Assignment Setting I 0 Assin
401. module AeVICE ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeteeeeeneeaees 8 4 8 1 5 Communication using the instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules 0 0 8 5 8 2 Request from Intelligent Function Module to High Performance model QCPU escsseesseteeeeeeeteeeeteees 8 6 8 2 1 Interrupt from the intelligent function module oe ee eee eeceeeeeteeeteeeteeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeseeteeeteeeteeeteeteeetanes 8 6 8 3 Communication Between High Performance model QCPU and AnS Series Special Function Modules 8 7 8 3 1 Communication using device initial ValUC eececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeseeseeesaesaeseeseaeeaeeneeaeeaees 8 7 8 3 2 Communication using FROM TO instruction cecceseeceeeceeeeseeeeceeceeeeaecaeseeeeeeeaesaeseeseaesaeeaeeeeeeaes 7 8 8 3 3 Communication using the intelligent function module AeVICE ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaees 7 8 8 3 4 Effects of quicker access to the special function module and countermeasures against them 7 9 9 PARAMETER LIST 9 1to9 6 10 DEVICES 10 1 to 10 71 10 Devito Listiice gec cccst snes staentie dientie A 10 1 10 2 Mero User Devices sc 2e 8 ei chek ils E agli a 10 3 pE ET CX aside Be cs sesso doc andes sees Sas dd sha ate oat aban cea EAE aba Soar ab EEE AEA EEE 10 5 10 2 2 Outputs Ye ie atk teeta ete ak E E ee tania did 10 8 9 0 2 3 Internal relays M cc ccscccsctusecesecegdacuehescceatcubcaessbubanesccuscauhe
402. mory card 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 4 File details A file name file size and writing date of the file which are set at the time of creation by the GX Developer will be appended to each file written in the High Performance model QCPU When monitoring the files by the GX Developer the files are displayed as shown below Read from PLC x Connecting interface COM1 lt gt EPU unit PLC Connection Station no Host PLC type Q25H Tagetmemoy Progammenoy Tie File selection Device data Program Common Local Esu Param Prog Cancel all selections Close a pe Program Al 99 10 13 12 19 24 2140 MAINT 99 10 1312 19 26 2140t Related functions MAIN2 99 10 13 12 19 28 2140 MAINS 99 10 13 12 19 32 2140F MAIN4 99 10 13 12 19 34 21408 MAINS 99 10 13 12 19 36 2140 MAING 99 10 13 12 19 40 21408 AA uamo ARMM tat aA aan Remote operation 4 ed Clear PLC memory Cc Format PLC memory d Arrange PLC memory Refresh view Create title Total free space p volume Bytes a File name 1 The file name consists of the file name max 8 chars and the extension 3 chars A file name of any file written from the GX Developer onto the High Performance model QCPU will be displaced on screen in uppercase characters When naming a file by using a sequence program type a file name in uppercase characters
403. mory card RAM then use the PLC memory batch operation to format the memory card mode select the memory card RAM and write the parameter data and created program Use the CPU s RESET L CLR switch toexecute a reset CPU s BOOT LED switches ON End In the GX Developer online MELSEC Q ERR LED switches ON When the device initial value is designated write the device initial value in the designated memory during the PLC file setting in the PLC parameter If a boot file setting is not made or when writing parameters or programs onto the program memory the BOOT LED does not light up 12 8 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 13 1 Features 1 Multi control a Since each system is not configured on one High Performance model QCPU but on the High Performance QCPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module according to the system the development efficiency and ease of maintenance of the system can be enhanced b Each CPU module in the multiple PLC system controls the input output module and intelligent function module of the base unit slot by slot 13 GX Developer groups the input output modules and intelligent function modules controlled by each CPU module in the multiple PLC system 2 Enables system configuration through load dispersion a By dispersing the high load processing performed
404. multiple PLC system will start up if all machines have the same settings b The operations described in table 14 4 will be performed when all machines do not have the same settings In this event check the multiple PLC settings and I O allocations and set all machines with the same settings To start the multiple PLC system reset the High Performance model QCPU for PLC No 1 or turn off and on the PLC power ON gt OFF gt ON For the action after the High Performance model QCPU for PLC No 1 is reset refer to Section 14 2 7 Table 14 4 List of sameness check contents Item Not CPU CPU Nos 1 to 4 When the power to the PLC is switched on e A comparison check will be run on the When PLC No 1 is reset multiple PLC settings and I O allocations for PLC No 1 e A PARAMETER ERROR error code 3012 will be triggered in the host machine if they do not match A comparison check will be run on the multiple PLC settings and I O allocations for the machine in the RUN mode with the lowest number A PARAMETER ERROR error code 3012 will be triggered in the host machine if they do not match e When the RUN STOP A comparison check will be run on the je A comparison check will be run on the switch has been changed ae multiple PLC settings and I O allocations multiple PLC settings and I O allocations When machines in from STOP to RUN for PLC No 2 for PLC No 1 the RUN mode do e When parameters are A PARAMETER ERROR error code A P
405. n D3230 ew STOP or PAUSE mode becomes 1 Example When local stations 7 and 15 are in STOP mode itions bits 6 and 14 of SD1248 become 1 and when SD1251 for up to numbers SD1248 is monitored its value is 16448 4040H Stores the loca in error Device Bit A ions number 515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bo SD1253 SD1252 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 SD1253 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 SD1254 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33 j SD1255 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 L49 SD1254 The bit corresponding to the station number which is in error becomes 1 i Example When local station 12 is in error bit 11 of SD1252 SD1255 becomes 1 and when SD1252 is monitored its value is 2048 800H Stores conditions for up to numbers Local station itions D9251 QnA Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 station number other than the host which is D9252 SD1252 11 Fuse blown module Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU P E pL L D1300 The numbers of output modules whose
406. n _____ Instruction reception status of channel 4 S Initial L Instruction reception status of channel 5 nitial reception status of 1st module _______________ Instruction reception status of channel 6 status __________________ Instruction reception status of channel 7 Instruction reception status of channel 8 ON Received Channel is used OFF Not received Channel is not used B4 B3 B2B1 BO SD303 SD304 SD315 SD340 SD342 SD344 SD345 to SD346 D347 SD348 to D354 SD355 to D361 SD362 to SD368 D340 SD345 to SD346 SD348 to SD354 SD355 to SD361 SD380 App 34 App 34 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Correspondin Set by p 9 Corresponding Meaning Explanation When set ACPU CPU be TT Information from Configuration is identical to that for the first module Ethernet 2nd module instruction Information from na csi Configuration is identical to that for the first module S Initial reception 3rd module status Information from e Configuration is identical to that for the first module 4th module Stores the internal system software version in ASCII code The data in the lower byte z position is indefinite Higher byte Lower byte The software version is stored Software Internal system in the higher byte position version software version For version A for example 41H is stored S Initia
407. n for up to numbers SD1232 is monitored its value is 256 100H 57 to 64 D1238 D1239 Stores the number of times the following transmission Number of times Stores errors have been detected communications cumulative total CRC OVER AB IF errors detected of receive errors Count is made to a maximum of FFFFH RESET to return the count to 0 Stores whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET11 e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET 11 stations Stores conditions become 1 for up to numbers Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or 33 to 48 unconnected become 0 Device Bit number b515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 be b5 b4 b3 b1 SD1202 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L2 SD1203 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L18 SD1241 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L34 type D1242 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L50 e If a local station goes down during the operation the contents before going down are retained Stores conditions Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to SD1231 for up to numbers are ORed If the corresponding bit is 0 the 49 to 64 corresponding bit of the special register above becomes valid If the own master station goes down the contents before going down are also retained D1240 D1241 Local station link
408. n CPU with special motion commands Writing and reading of the device data from the High Performance model QCPU to the motion CPU with special interactive multiple PLC communication commands Also event issuance from High Performance model QCPU to PC CPU module using instructions dedicated to multiple CPU communication Automatic refresh of device data Automatic refresh of the common CPU memory is a function of automatic data transfer between CPU modules in END processing of the CPU As the device memory data of other machines is automatically read when the automatic refresh function is used is possible for the host machine to use the device data of other machines PLC No 1 PLC No 2 Common CPU memory Common CPU memor Host machine s operation Host machine s operation information area information area System area 5 System area Reading performed Automatic refresh area for with the PLC No 2 Automatic refresh area for writing in the PLC No 1 END process writing in the PLC No 2 User s free area User s free area Writing performed with the PLC No 2 END process Device memory For use of the PLC No 1 For use of the PLC No 2 Writing performed with the PLC No 1 END process Device memory For use of the PLC No 1 For use of the PLC No 2 Reading performed with the PLC No 1 END process Exchanging data with multiple PLC commands and comm
409. n be used total for all programs being executed 2 Interrupt pointer No amp interrupt factor a As shown below there are four types of interrupt factor e QI60 A1S161 factor Interrupt input from the QI60 A1 S161 interruption module e Sequence start generator Interruption input from special function module factor modules which can dictate an interrupt start to the High Performance model QCPU QI60 A1SI61 excluded iba Fixed cycle interruption by High Performance model QCPU s internal timer Internal time factor e Error interruption a se Interruption by an error that does not stop sequence program operation e Intelligent function Interruption by an intelligent function module module interrupt x To use the intelligent function module interrupt the intelligent function module setting interrupt points setting is required for the PLC system setting of the PLC parameters For the interrupts from the intelligent function module see Section 8 2 1 10 56 10 56 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q b A list of interrupt pointer Nos and interrupt factors is given in Table 10 5 below Table 10 5 List of Interrupt Pointer Nos amp Interrupt Factors Priority Priority I No Interrupt Factors Interrupt factors QI60 A1S161 interrupt module factor Internal timer factor 10 57 Vacant UNIT VERIFY ERR FUSE BREAK OFF SP UNIT ERROR OPERATION ERROR SFCP OPE ERROR SFC
410. n error occurs during execution M9011 SM1011 SM56 Operation error OFF No error flag ON Error of application instruction Remains on if normal status is restored M9012 SM1012 SM700 Carry flag nae ee me e Carry flag used in application instruction Clears the data memory including the latch range other than special relays and special registers in remote run mode from computer etc when SM1016 is on Clears the unlatched data memory other than special Data memory OFF Ignored SM1016 clear flag ON Output claered Data memory OFF Ignored clear flag ON Output claered relays and registers in remote run mode from computer etc shen SM1017 is on User timing clock No 0 e Relay which repeats on off at intervals of predetermined User timing clock eran No 1 When power is turned on or reset is per formed the clock User timing clock e a starts with off No 2 Set the intervals of on off by DUTY instruction SM1023 User timing clock No 3 DUTY ni n2 M9020 SM1024 oe timing clock SM1017 SM1020 SM1021 SM1022 LX e Writes clock data from SD1025 to SD1028 to the clock redest ON Sol request wresenkused element after the END instruction is executed during the q 7 RELOAVESEPI scan in which SM1025 has changed from off to on Clock data error Si nails e Switched on by clock data SD1025 to SD1028 error Clock data is read from SD1025 to SD1028
411. n external destination x1 BO HH B100 n B1FFF Figure 10 7 Link Relay 2 Using link relays in the network system In order to use link relays in the network system a network parameter setting is required Link relays for which no network parameter setting has been designated can be used as internal relays or latch relays 1 For details regarding the network parameters refer to the For Qs MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual 2 The MELSECNET H Network Module has 16384 link relay points assigned High Performance model QCPU has 8192 link relay points assigned When using subsequent points after Point 8192 change the number of link relay points by using the Device Setting sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box 10 17 10 17 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 8 Special link relays SB 1 Definition a A special link relay indicates the communication status and error detection of an intelligent function module such as the MELSECNET 10H Network Module b Because special link relays are switched ON and OFF in accordance with various problems which may occur during a data link they serve as a tool for identifying data link problems 2 Number of special link relay points There are a total of 2048 special link relay points between SBO and SB7FF Special link relays are assigned at a rate of 512 points per each intelligent function module such as the MELSECNET 10H Network Module Special link relays ar
412. n interlock to prevent simultaneous access during interactive data communication with the FROM command the S TO command and commands that use UD GO There are cases where old data and new data will be mixed together if simultaneous access is carried out e A SP UNIT ERROR error code 2115 will be triggered if data is written into the common CPU memory of other machines with the S TO command and commands that use UD GO f A SP UNIT ERROR error code 2114 will also be triggered if data is written into the common CPU memory of the host machine with commands that use UD GO g A SP UNIT ERROR error code 2114 will be triggered if data is read from the common CPU memory of the host station with the FROM command and commands that use UL GU h A SP UNIT ERROR error code 2110 will also be triggered if access is attempted on a non mounted machine with commands that use UA GO 16 10 16 10 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 16 3 Interactive Communications between The High Performance model QCPU and Motion CPU 16 3 1 Control instructions from the High Performance model QCPU to the motion CPU It is possible to issue control instructions from the High Performance model QCPU to the motion CPU and read and write device data with the special motion commands listed below Control instructions from motion CPU to motion CPU can not be used Command name Description S SFCS R f t
413. n refresh mode The operation states of CPU as shown below are stored in SD203 B15 to B12B11 to B8B7 to B4 B3 to BO oo RUN RUN op am HH sca STOP Operating state Operating state of 2 PAUSE xl D9015 D1015 SD203 2 Remains the same in ii remote RUN STOP mode Status in program Remote RUN STOP o Except below by parameter setting RUN Po Aw x 1 When the CPU is in RUN mode and SM1040 is off the CPU remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE mode Main program ROM Main program RAM Subprogram 1 RAM Subprogram 2 RAM Subprogram 3 RAM Subprogram 1 D9016 SD1016 Program ROM e Indicates which Sequence program is run presently number Subprogram 2 One value of 0 to B is stored in BIN code ROM Subprogram 3 ROM Main program E PROM Subprogram 1 E PROM Subprogram 2 E PROM Subprogram 3 E PROM If scan time is smaller than the content of SD520 the D9017 SD1017 SD520 Sean time Minimum Scari time value is newly stored at cachi END Namely the 10 ms units minimum value of scan time is stored into SD520 in BIN code n tim n time i red in BIN h END an D9018 SD1018 SD524 Sean time Scan ti G Scan time is stored i code at eac and 10 ms units always rewritten App 46 App 46 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification
414. n station to station test or self loopback test mode test M9225 SM1225 Forward loop error OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line ON Abnormal M9226 SM1226 Reverse loop error OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line ON Abnormal OFF Not Being executed Depends on whether or not the master station is executing M9227 SM1227 Loop test state ON Forward or reverse loop P a forward or a reverse loop test test execution underway Local station DEE RUNO STEP RUN Depends on whether or not a local station is in STOP or M9252 Meee operation state sae PAUSE mode p ON STOP or PAUSE state i App 16 Depends on presence or absence of the link card hardware error Judged by the CPU App 16 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Relay Special Special Relay after Relay for Local station remote I O OFF No errors station parameter JON Error detection error detect state Local station remote I O OFF No communications SM1236 station initial ON Communications communications underway OFF Normal ON Abnormal Local station SM1237 remote I O SM1238 station error Local station remote I O OFF Normal station forward or ON Abnormal reverse loop error OFF Online ON Offline station to stationtest or self loopback test Name Meaning Details Conversion Modification SM1233 SM1235 Local station O
415. n which the error was detected when a stop error occurs There are cases where the timing of error detection will search for the machine on which the stop error that caused the MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error occurred not the first machine on which a stop error was triggered and the entire system will assume the MULTIPLE PLC DOWN status For example if a stop error is triggered in the PLC No 2 and the PLC No 3 is halted as a direct consequence of this there are cases where the PLC No 1 will be halted because of the stop error on PLC No 3 depending on the timing of error detection Halted with an OPERATION ERROR Power module PLC No 1 PLC No 2 PLC No 3 Halted with stop error detection on PLC No 2 becomes MULTIPLE PLC DOWN There are cases where the system will be halted with stop error detected on the PLC No 3 depending on the timing of error detection becomes MULTIPLE PLC DOWN Owing to this there are cases where a different machine number to the machine that initially caused the stop error will be stored in the error data s common information category In this event remove the reason for the error on the machine that caused the stop error in addition to the MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error when restoring the system In the illustration shown below the cause of the PLC No 2 error that did not cause the MULTIPLE PLC DOWN error is removed PLC diagnostics stat PLC operation status Not PLC operation STOP switch STOP No2 PLC op
416. name file name SD809 Eighth character seventh character execution First character of SD811 eben extension 2EH Third character of 2nd character of ea extension extension Stores step number from point in time when status latch was SD812 conducted D813 SD812 D814 SD813 Block No D815 SD814 Step No transition No D81 Status latch Status latch on Sequence step No L S During D9055 format SD816 Sequence step No H step step execution change 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number SD816 x Contents of pattern data ojo to o o Not in use SFC block designation present 1 absent 0 SFC block designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 App 42 App 42 APPENDICES 8 Latch area Name Meaning Drive where SD900 power was A during power interrupted loss Special Register List Explanation Stores drive number if file was being accessed during power loss Stores file name with extension in ASCII code if file was being SD901 accessed during power loss to B8 B7 to BO SD901 2nd character 1st character File ham Aocs stie SD902 4th character 3rd character setve dunng name during SD903 6th character 5th character s0904 power lose powerless SD904 ne Sees 7th character sp905 S cnaracter o 2EH o f 2
417. nate I O numbers 2 Designating the I O No designation device I O No designation devices are designated with the intelligent function module instructions as shown below _ GP READ Un S1 S2 S3 oH gt I O No designation device n I O No gt Instruction name gt I O No designation instruction For details regarding intelligent function module instructions refer to the corresponding manual for the intelligent function module to be used 10 59 10 59 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 11 5 Macro instruction argument device VD 1 Definition Macro instruction argument devices are used with ladders registered as macros When a VD setting is designated for a ladder registered as a macro conversion to the designated device occurs when the macro instruction is executed 2 Designating macro instruction argument devices Macro instruction argument devices are designated for those devices set as VD in ladders registered as macro instructions in macro registration at a peripheral device When using macro instructions in a sequence program designate devices to correspond to the instruction argument devices used with the ladders registered as macros in ascending order Sequence program Ladder registered as a macro registration name MAX M MAX DO D1 RO H gt vDo vb1 Mov vpo voz Transfer to VD2 X F z Transfer to VD1 Transfer to VDO H lt vDo vpi Mov vp1 vp2
418. nd ch f rd character o nd character o SD906 extension extension Stored in sequence that PU key code was entered SD911 to B8 B7 to BO SD910 2nd character 1st character SD911 4th character 3rd character SD912 6th character 5th character SD913 8th character 7th character SD915 SD914 10th character 9th character SD915 12th character 11th character SD916 14th character 13th character RKEY input RKEY input SD917 16th character 15th character SD918 18th character 17th character SD919 SD919 20th character 19th character SD920 22nd character 21st character D921 24th character 23rd character D922 26th character 25th character SD923 SD923 28th character 27th character MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU pL TL Corresponding CPU S Status change S Status Ne change K QnA S During execution SD924 30th character 29th character SD925 32nd character 31st character App 43 App 43 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 9 A to Q QnA conversion correspondences ACPU special registers D9000 to D9255 correspond to the special registers SD1000 to SD1255 after A series to the Q QnA series conversion These special registers are all set by the system and users cannot use them to set program data Users who need to set data with these registers should edit the special registers for the Q QnA However before conversion users could set data at special registers D9200 to D9255 only and after conv
419. nd ending at the END FEND instruction Processing of ladder mode ladder blocks begins from the left bus and proceeds from left to right When one ladder block is completed processing proceeds downward to the next ladder block Ladder mode List mode Left to right LD aS E 2 7 8 9 AND x5 X6 X7 21D 1 I AND ORB OR AND Executed in order beginning from step 0 to the ending at 11 the END 10 END instruction wrerereerrrTr ere SS OMONDORWN O o x Numbers 1 to 11 indicate the processing order of the sequence program Step No Fig 4 2 Sequence Program Processing 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 1 1 Main routine program 1 Definition of main routine program a A main routine program is a program which begins from step 0 and ends at the END FEND instruction 1 b The main routine program execution begins from step 0 and ends at the END FEND instruction 1 If only one program is being executed processing will begin from step 0 again after the END FEND instruction is processed Step 0 Program execution Main routine program Returns to step 0 when only one eieiei E program is being executed END FEND END FEND END processing 2 If multiple programs are being executed processing which occurs after the END FEND instruction varies according to the designated execution conditions 2 Execution conditio
420. ndard ROM is complete normally BOOT LED also flickers The detection status for the CHK instruction or annunciator F status is indicated On When an error is detected with the CHK instruction or when the annunciator is turned on Off Normal Flicker _ When the latch clear is executed Indicates the CPU module and memory battery status On When a battery error is detected due to low battery voltage Off Normal Indicates the execution status of the boot operation On When the execution is complete Off When not executed Fricker _ When automatic writing to the standard ROM is complete normally ERROR LED also flickers 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Method to turn off the LED The LED that is on can be turned off by the following operation Except for the reset operation ERR Executing the LEDR instruction after resolving the cause of ae eee er oe error After the cause of error is resolved cancel the error by operating the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 Only for the operation continue errors ea ED special register SD202 Valid x Invalid x1 Special relay and special register contents SM50 uu When switch from OFF to ON the error is canceled for the error code stored in the SD50 SD50 The error code for the error to be canceled is stored For further information on error codes see the High Performance model QCPU Q Mode Users Manual Hardware Design and
421. nds Second H3548 B12B11 to B8B7 to Example Friday H0005 0 must be set o e Saturday E ion fil he block No of th ion fil i D9035 SD1035 SD648 xtension ile Use block No Stores t e bloc o of the extension file register register being used in BCD code Extension file registerfor designation of device number D9036 SD1036 xX D9037 SD1037 pA D9038 SD1038 SD207 D9039 SD1039 SD208 App 47 LED display priority ranking Device number when individual devices from extension file register are directly accessed Priorities 1 to 4 Priorities 5 to 7 e Designate the device number for the extension file register for direct read and write in 2 words at SD1036 and SD1037 in BIN data Use consecutive numbers beginning with RO of block No 1 to designate device numbers Exetension file register Block No 1 area Block No 2 area D1036 SD1037 Device No BIN data illuminate or flicker to indicate errors with error code numbers e Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown below B15 to B12B11 to Priority 4 Priority 3 B8 B7__ to Priority 2 B4B3 to Priority 1 BO SD207 SD208 e For details refer to the applicable CPUs User s Manual and the ACPU Fundamentals Programming manual I Priority7 Priority6 Priority 5 App 47 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special Spec
422. nforced I O Registration Cancellation It is possible to perform enforced ON and enforced OFF for a specified device by selecting Enforced ON Registration or Enforced OFF Registration after the device has been specified on the Enforced I O Registration Cancellation setup screen Registration forced ON OFF x Device Set forced ON Cancel it 4 n 3 5 wo Device ON OFF No Device ON OFF il ibys 2 16 3 19 4 20 5 2l 6 22 ka 23 2 lt 8 24 9 25 10 26 IE 27 12 28 13 29 l4 30 15 31 16 32 C 3 gt _Undate status Clear all 6 b Descriptions of the fields to set up are provided below Name of setup field Function description Enter the I O number for which enforced 1 Device ON OFF is to be set or for which enforced ON OFF is to be cancelled f Displays the registration status of 2 Registration status displayed area registered enforced input and output Displays the registration status loaded from the CPU module Performed enforced ON OFF registration Enforced ON OFF registration for specified devices Cancels the enforced ON OFF for registered devices Load registration status Registration cancellation Cancels all registered enforced I O Bulk registration cancellation registrations 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 10 Writing in Program during High Performanc
423. ng a RUN operation specify the desired pointer for the write during RUN beforehand and then select Relative step No by pointer so that its radio button is checked 2 Operation Procedure The multiple user RUN write operation is performed in the following manner a Select Tool from Option menu and set After conversion writing behavior and Step No specification used in writing Program common Each program Whole data Edit object shift forward setting Continuous ladder block Shift the program forward 1 ladder block Don t shift the program forward Device comment input I Continues during command write Double coil check setup I Checks for double coils during write Statement insertion method CPU statement GPP statement C None After conversion writing behavior ech ning Cancel Write if PLC STOP lt 1 C Don t write to PLC Step No specification used in writing Absolute step No default 2 C Relative step No by pointer Buffer Link memory monitor I Monitor Scan time extension Show don t show character string Macro I Common to all programs Comment statement note Device Label Macro Ladder monitor of PLS PLF instruction ja 1 Set Write during RUN while PLC is runnning in After conversion writing behavior 2 Select Normal or Relatively Using Pointer in Step No specification used in writing 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q b
424. ng on the memory type How to A Standard SRAM Flash OW ORC CRSS RAM Card Card Read by a user s program ERARE Write by a user s program PLC read by the device setting PLC write by the device setting cineca ten ro PLC write fromthe Gx Developer OT OX PLC write fromthe GX Developer fashROM X X TOT Batch write from the serial communications modue o f x Device wite roma GOT900 Seres OT OX Random write command fromaGOoT900Seres O o x 10 44 10 44 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 7 3 Registering the file registers To use file registers register the file registers with the High Performance model QCPU in the following steps Setting of file register to be used anh Paramete PLC file setting screen of PLC parameter PLC name PLC system PLC file PLCRAS Device P File register Device inital value C Not used Use the same file name as the program Conesponding Memory card RAM _ gt Not used Use the same file name as the program memory Comesponding Use the following file memory a C Use the following file onesponding memory Corresponding memory y File name File name Capacity K 1K 1018K points Comment fle used in a command File for local device Notused Not used Use the same file name as the program Use the following file Corresponding Corresponding memory Z memory C Use the following file Corresp
425. ng when an interrupt program a fixed scan execution type program is executed while a low speed execution type program is in progress c The low speed execution type program execution time setting should be such that the scan time low speed execution type program execution time sum is less than the WDT setting value d The COM instruction can not be used in low speed execution type programs e Low speed execution type programs can also be executed with scans that execute the initial execution type programs Establish an interlock with SM402 and SM403 for the circuit that validates the low speed execution type program s operation after execution of the scan execution type program has been completed 5 Low speed END processing The low speed END processing is performed when all the low speed execution type programs are executed The following processing is performed for the low speed END processing e Low speed program special relay special register setting e Low speed execution program write during RUN e Low speed scan time measurement e Low speed execution type program watchdog timer reset When the low speed END processing is completed the low speed execution type program is executed from the beginning again POINT 1 During execution of low speed execution type programs the constant scan time may deviate by the amount of the maximum instruction processing time low speed END processing time 6 Low speed scan tim
426. nge of 000 to 900 e Stores cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 Cleared to 0 following 1 low speed scan e Stores cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 Cleared to 0 following 1 low speed scan Stores low speed program execution time during 1 scan in 1 ms units Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores each scan Stores low speed program execution time during 1 scan in 100 ps units Range of 000 to 900 e Stores each scan e Stores execution time for scan execution type program during 1 scan in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores each scan e Stores execution time for scan execution type program during 1 scan in 100 us units vRange of 000 to 900 e Stores each scan Sets I O number for module that measures service interval When SM551 is ON stores service interval for module designated by SD550 in 1 ms units e Range from 0 to 65535 e When SM551 is ON stores service interval for module designated by SD550 in 100 us units e Range from 000 to 900 MELSEC Q eet Corresponding D9 Set by When set S First END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Request App 37 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List 5 Memory card Corresponding Number Name Meaning E
427. nge specified as the refresh range in the network refresh parameters High Performance model QCPU Network module _ BO LB 0 f Link range Refresh range send range Writing range 10 35 10 35 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Although writing is also possible in the refresh range portion of the link device range specified by the refresh parameters the link module s link device data will be rewritten when a refresh operation occurs Therefore when writing by link direct device the same data should also be written to the High Performance model QCPU related devices designated by the refresh parameters Refresh parameter settings Network No 1 High Performance model QCPU W0 to W3F Network module LWO to LW3F Sequence program Mov K100 w1 H 100 is written to link module LW1 when a refresh occurs MOV w J1 W1 100 is written to link module LW1 when the MOV instruction is executed Writing timing _QCPU g _ Network module _ MOV K100 W1 Writing at instruction execution MOV W1 J1 W1 wo gt W1 Wi Writing at instruction execution Writing at refresh operation 3 When data is written to another station s writing range using a link direct device the data which is received from that station will replace the written data b Reading Reading by link direct device is possible in the entire link device
428. nge will be used for local devices in all programs Program A Program B Program C This range becomes Local device Local device Local device the local device range for all programs Se T Program A 2 3 When local device settings are designated the drive and file name where the local device data is to be stored must be designated in the PLC file settings in the PLC parameter setting To write data from the GX Developer onto the High Performance model QCPU use the PLC File sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box to specify whether to use a local device If a local device is not specified the local devices used for previously executed programs are selected This does not require replacing local devices in a memory card with the device memory of the High Performance model QCPU If local devices are not used for Program B while executing Programs A B and C the local devices are used as shown below Used local device of program A Reset Local device Fo program A For program B For program C Program B Program C Program A Program B Saved Reset Saved Reset Local device Local device For For program A program A For For program B program B For For program C program C POINT Unless specifically designated as local devices all devices are global devices e Using local devices used by the file where a s
429. nged after the file was transferred Table 6 7 List of File Size Function Estimated File Size in bytes Default 564 increased by the parameter setting For Reference Boot setting to 70 18 x Number of files Parameter i ae With the MELSECNET H setting to maximum 4096 units increased With Ethernet setting to maximum 922 units increased With CC LINK setting to maximum 251 units increased Sequence program 136 4 X Number of steps 74 Total of comment data size of each device Comment data size of a device 10 10250 x a 40 x b a quotient of Number of device points 256 e b remainder of Number of device points 256 Device init 66 44 x n 2 x Total number of device points specified in the device initial value setting evice ini e n specified number of device initial values File register 2 X Number of file register points 362 20 2 x Number of word device points Number of bit device pints 8 xX Number Sampling trace data of traces 12 x Device range Failure history data 72 54 X Number of failures stored SFC trace data Maximum 48 k in 1 k units 70 6 Type of specified device 2 x total number of M and V points 16 D points 18 x Total points of T ST and C 16 x number of programs e Symbols M V D T ST and C stand for the following devices M internal relay Local device V edge relay D data register T timer ST relative timer C cou
430. ngs Compatibility with 4 PLC VV Use special relay special register from SM SD1000 Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End setup Cancel 3 Precaution If an output Y is forcefully turned ON with the High Performance model QCPU in the STOP status it will not remain in the ON status even if the STOP status is switched to the RUN status The output status is effected as set in the PLC System setting of the output mode at STOP to RUN 7 FUNCTION 7 5 Clock Function MELSEC Q 1 What is Clock Function a b The High Performance model QCPU has a clock function in the CPU module Because the time data from the clock function can be read by the sequence program the time data can be used for time maintenance Also the time data is used for time maintenance for the High Performance model QCPU system functions such as those for failure history The clock operations for the clock function are maintained even when the PLC power is off or when there is a momentary power failure for more than the permitted time using the battery Q6BAT Clock Data The time data is the year month day hour minute second and day of the week data used for the High Performance model QCPU clock element There are the following Contents Four digits in AD Countable from 1980 to 2079 Year Month Day 1 to 12 1 to 31 Automatic leap year calculation 0 to 23 24 hours 0 to 59 0 to 59 Minute Second S
431. nk input of MELSECNET H 10 7 10 7 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 2 Outputs Y 1 Definition a Outputs are program control results which are output to external destinations solenoid electromagnetic switch signal lamp digital display etc Signal lamp Digital display Output Y Sequence operation Contact Ot b Outputs occur at one N O contact or its equivalent c There are no restrictions regarding the number of output Yn N O contacts and N C contacts used in a program Programmable No restrictions regarding the quantity used controller A Y20 X2 cya H y22 4 y Program Out ladder external device Figure 10 4 Output Y Operation 2 Using outputs as internal relays M Y inputs corresponding to vacant slots and slots where input modules are installed can serve as internal relays M Power supply module QCPU Input module Input module Output module Output module Output module US OUT Yn Equivalent to internal relay 10 8 10 8 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 3 Output method a There are 2 types of output refresh outputs and direct access outputs 1 Refresh outputs are ON OFF data which is output to the output module using the refresh mode 1 CPU module Output module ON OFF data output Output refresh area omme T Y10 an These outputs ar
432. ns for main routine programs 2 If multiple programs are being executed the following five types of execution conditions can be designated by the program in the PLC parameters according to the application in question e Initial execution program See Section 4 2 1 e Scan execution type program See Section 4 2 2 e Low speed execution program See Section 4 2 3 e Stand by type program See Section 4 2 4 e Fixed scan execution type program See Section 4 2 5 1 For details regarding the END FEND instruction refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 2 If only one program is executed it is processed under the scan execution type program condition without designation by the program in the PLC parameters 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 1 2 Sub routine programs 1 Definition of sub routine program a Asub routine program is a program which begins from a pointer P _ and ends at a RET instruction b Asub routine program is executed only when called by a CALL instruction e g CALL P FCALL P from the main routine program c Sub routine program application 1 The overall step count can be reduced by using a sub routine program as a program which is executed several times in one scan 2 The step count of a constantly executed program can be reduced by using a sub routine program as a program which is executed only when a given condi
433. nt Default Check End setup Cancel 1 Setting range in the internal user device 10 3 For all High Performance model QCPU internal user devices other than the input X output Y step relay S special link relay and special link registers SW devices the number of points used can be changed within a 29 k word including 3 7k words for an internal user device range by PLC parameter device setting The items to consider when making such changes are discussed below a Setting range 1 The number of device points is designated in 16 point units 2 Amaximum of 32 k points can be designated for one type of device The maximum total number of points for the internal relay latch relay anunciator edge relay link relay special link relay step relay timer retentive timer and counter is 64 k points 1 point is calculated as 2 points 1 for coil 1 for contact for the timer retentive timer and counter Memory size Use the following formula to obtain the memory size of an internal user device 3 7 Bit devices size Word devices size Timer retentive timer and counter size lt 29k a For bit devices For bit devices 16 points are calculated as 1 word M L F V B total number of points 16 Bit device size Word 10 3 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q b For timer T retentive timer ST and Counter C For the timer retentive timer and counter 16 points are calculated as 18 words T ST C
434. nt function modules 1 Usable I O modules All I O modules QXO QYE are corresponding to multiple PLC systems It is possible to set PLCs No 1 to No 4 as control PLCs 2 Usable intelligent function modules a Use function version B intelligent function modules with multiple PLC systems It is possible to set PLCs No 1 to No 4 as control PLCs with function version B intelligent function modules b Q series corresponding high speed count modules QD62 QD62D QD62E that support the Q series are supported by multiple PLC systems from function version A CPUs No 1 to No 4 can be set up as control PLCs c Q series corresponding interruption modules QI60 do not have a function version but are supported by multiple PLC systems PLCs No 1 to No 4 can be set up as control PLCs d Function version A intelligent function modules apart from those mentioned in b and c above can be used with multiple PLC systems if the PLC No 1 is set up as a control PLC However only control PLCs can be accessed from serial communication modules and other external modules MELSECNET H serial communication modules and other external modules cannot access non control PLCs The SP UNIT VER ERR error code 2150 will be triggered if PLCs No 2 to No 4 have been set up as control PLCs and the multiple PLC system will not started up 3 Access range for control PLCs and non control PLCs To read the input output state enable the I O set
435. ntacts used in a program No restrictions regarding the quantity used Figure 10 2 Input X Used in Program 10 5 10 5 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Reading the inputs a There are 2 types of input refresh inputs and direct access inputs 1 Refresh inputs are ON OFF data read from the input module using the refresh mode 1 CPU module Input module Acquisition of ON OFF data Input refresh area ON OFF data These inputs are indicated as X 5 in the sequence program For example a 10 input becomes X10 2 Direct access inputs are ON OFF data read from the input module using the direct mode 2 CPU module Input module Input refresh area Acquisition of ON OFF data DX10 lt These inputs are indicated as DX lt in the sequence program For example a 10 input becomes DX10 Direct access input can be made in a LD AND OR instruction that uses an input in units of 1 point b Differences between refresh inputs amp direct access inputs With direct access inputs the input module is directly accessed by the executed instruction and the processing speed is therefore slower than that for refresh inputs Moreover direct access inputs can only be used for inputs used with the input module and intelligent special function module which are installed at base unit and extension base unit The refresh and direct input dif
436. ntelligent function modules with a multiple PLC system CPU 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 QCPU QCPU Power module Input module Input module Output module Intelligent function module Input module Intelligent function module Output module ine Setup of the controlling QCPU Control performed with the QCPU1 sequence program Control performed with the QCPU2 sequence program b The CPU module that controls the I O modules and intelligent function modules is known as the Control PLC The I O modules and intelligent function modules controlled by the control PLC are known control modules Other modules not controlled by the control PLC are known as non controlled modules Indicates the grouping configuration on the GX Developer QCPU1 indicates the PLC No and 1 on the I O module and intelligent function module indicates that their control PLC is the PLC No 1 13 3 13 3 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 13 4 MELSEC Q 2 Multiple PLC system setup It is necessary to set up the Number of mounted CPU modules and the Control PLC with PLC parameters in all CPU modules onto which main base units are mounted in order to control a multiple PLC system see Chapter 9 3 Multiple PLC system access range a b It is possible for a multiple PLC system s control PLC to perform the I O refresh procedure on control modules and write in the buffer memory of intelligent funct
437. nter Device comment 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q An example for calculating the amount of memory capacity required when writing the parameters and sequence programs in the program memory is shown below 1 Writing file Program capacity PARAM QPA parameter MAIN QPG sequence program 5000 steps 20000 bytes SUB QPG sequence program 11500 steps 46000 bytes x Represents the program capacity displayed with the GX Developer total number of file headers and created program steps See Section 6 8 2 Writing conditions a Parameter Default setting 564 bytes b Secured writing steps during RUN Default setting 500 steps 2000 bytes 3 File memory capacity calculations panaman __st__ zips sats 24 576 bytes 6 k steps MAIN QPG Total Ss 22 000 Secured En eS steps during RUN 2 000 Total OE 48 000 File memory capacity total 77 824 bytes 19 k steps A program memory capacity in units of 4096 bytes 1 k step is secured Sequence program capacity 46 000 49 152 bytes 12 k steps SUB QPG 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 FUNCTION Function of High Performance model QCPU module is as follows 7 1 Function List Functions of High Performance model QCPU are listed below Constant scan Function to execute the program in a set time interval regardless of the program scan time Section 7 2 Latch function Function to maintain the device data when performin
438. ntil 811H is used for PLC No 1 and PLC No 2 and up until 821H is used for the PLC No 4 in the illustration shown below The machines that transmits only setting 1 will become the last address of the setting 1 common CPU memory PLC No 3 is up to the setting 1 address in the illustration shown below Refresh settings Change screens Setting 1 Send range for each PLC PLC side device PLC share memory G Dev starting PLC No 1 transmission range Stat End 080 6 0800 O80 0 WOF wo a wiF re ae Set See Last CPU device wi 32 0800 b Last address of each machine s common CPU memory 5 The same number of transmission points must be set for all machines on the multiple PLC system A PARAMETER ERROR will be triggered if the number of transmission points for one machine is different CPU devices The following devices can be used for automatic refresh purposes other devices cannot be set up with the GX Developer Settable devices e The device in the left column occupies one point for every transmission point e Multiples of 0 or 16 are specified for the first number e The device in the left column occupies one point for every transmission point 1 CPU devices use the total amount of transmission point devices consecutively from the specified device number to the PLC No 1 to No 4 in the first set range Set a device number so that the amount of transmission point devices can be s
439. nual 3 Sampling trace time Sampling trace requires additional processing time When sampling trace data is specified to execute the sampling trace function add the sampling trace time to the total processing time The table below shows the length of processing time required when sampling trace data is specified to assign 50 internal relay points for bit devices and 50 data register points for word deices CPU Type Processing Time ms aozer Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 11 2 11 2 11 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 4 GX Developer Monitoring 11 3 GX Developer monitoring requires additional processing time Add the GX Developer monitoring time to the total processing time a The table below shows the processing time required when 64 data register points are assigned by the registered monitor CPU Type Processing Time ms Q02CPU 0 10 QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU b The table below shows the processing time required when monitoring conditions are specified Processing Time ms CPU Type When steps are When devices in match are in match QO2CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Local devices Local devices require additional processing time Add the processing time of local devices to the total processing time Standard RAM SRAM Card Conditions Local devices 1k points n number of program files Execution of multiple programs Execution of mult
440. o e device Word device Eg Select when monitoring gt Step No by Step No In case of SFC program It is not effective for SFC chart a When only Step no is specified 1 The monitor data sampling timing is when the status right before the execution of the specified step becomes Specify status 2 The specification method for the execution status is indicated below a When changing from non execution state to executing state lt P gt b When changing from executing state to non execution state lt F gt c Always when executing only lt ON gt d Always when not executing only lt OFF gt e Always regardless of status lt Always gt When Step no 0 is specified set the condition to Always 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q If a step between the AND OR blocks is specified as a monitor condition monitor data will be sampled after the pervious state of the specified step between the blocks changes into a state of being specified by the LD instruction The monitor timing depends on the step specified as a monitor condition The following shows examples in monitoring when the 2nd step is ON 1 When the 2nd step is connected with the AND instruction As shown below the monitor execution condition is established when both X0 and X1 is ON Circuit mode List mode vo 2nd step OLD xO X2 20 1 AND X1 if 2 AND X2 3 OUT Y20 2 When the 2nd step is connected between t
441. of changing the execute type of a program by using a PSCAN PLOW PSTOP or POFF instruction Executed instruction matron PSCAN PSTOP POFF PLOW Execute type before change i No change remains Output is turned OFF Scan execution type A i scan execution type in the next scan Becomes stand by Becomes standby type Becomes low speed yP type from the next p type Becomes scan scan after that yP execution type Stand by t Ao erango remains No processin ANTY YPE stand by type P 9 Low speed execution Low speed execution type execution is Low speed execution type execution is stopped becomes type execution is stopped and output is No change remains Low speed execution type scan executions from stopped becomes turned OFF in the low speed the next scan scan executions from next scan Becomes executions Execution from step the next scan stand by type from the 0 next scan after that Output is turned OFF in the next scan f f Becomes scan Becomes stand by Becomes low speed Fixed scan execution type Becomes stand by execution type type type type from the next scan after that PSTOP POFF Fixed scan execution type program Initial execution type 1 If the fixed scan execution type program is changed to another execution type you cannot return to the fixed scan execution type 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS 4 2 1 Initial execution type program
442. ogram to be booted will be changed While booting it takes some time until the write during RUN is completely executed If the write during RUN is performed while booting a program from the standard RAM or memory card ROM the program to be booted will not be changed Before turning off the PLC or resetting the High Performance model QCPU write the program memory into the standard ROM memory card ROM A maximum of 512 steps can be written at once during RUN When a low speed execution type program is being executed the RUN write is started once the low speed execution type program is complete Also the low speed execution is stopped temporarily during a RUN write 3 4 Scan execution type program step 0 to END Scan execution type program step 0 to END Scan execution type program step 0 to END Scan execution type program step 0 to END Low speed execution Low speed execution Low speed execution Low speed execution type program step type program step type program step type program step 0 to 200 201 to 320 321 to END 0 to 120 1 Scan 1 Scan 1 Scan 1 Scan 1 RUN write command of the scan execution type program 2 RUN write execution of the scan execution type program 3 RUN write command of the low speed execution type program 4 RUN write execution of the low speed execution type program If the write during RUN is executed while the PLOAD PUNLOAD or PSWAP instruc
443. ograms programs Standard ROM e Parameters e Sequence wating programs Let ens aa MN oo RE GA Ee Roe De mene Automatic writing in the standard ROM is used to amend the High Performance model QCPU programs that perform ROM operations with the standard ROM Overwriting in the standard ROM is performed with the GX Developer but the use of automatic writing in the standard ROM enables the memory card onto which the parameters and amended programs are written to be moved across to the High Performance model QCPU and then written from the memory card into the standard ROM Automatic writing in the standard ROM is possible with a combination of a High Performance model QCPU with the first five digits of its serial number as 02092 or higher and a GX Developer Version 6 or higher If the memory card on which the settings for automatically writing in the standard ROM is mounted in a High Performance model QCPU with the first five digits of its serial number before prior to 02092 the boot operations are performed from the standard ROM The following items are necessary for automatically writing in the standard ROM e Automatic writing in the standard ROM settings set with PLC parameters e Memory card on which the parameters and programs are stored e Memory card mounted onto the High Performance model QCPU and the High Performance model QCPU switch settings Perform automatic writing in the standard ROM after the High P
444. ol by maintaining the production quantity defect count and address even when there is a momentary power failure for more than the permissible amount of time c The following devices can use the latch function The default latch range is only the latch relay 1 Latch relay L 2 Link relay B 3 Annunciator F 4 Edge relay V 5 Timer T 6 Retentive timer ST 7 Counter C 8 Data register D 9 Link register W 2 Latch Range Setting The latch range setting is performed with the PLC parameter mode device setting There are two types of range in which the latch clear key RESET L CLR switch and remote latch clear operation become valid or invalid in the latch range setting 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Clearing the Latch Range Device Data The state of devices to which latch clear is made is shown in the table below Latch setting Clear retention after latch clear Devices not designated in latch range Latch 1 setting Devices with latch clear option Clear Latch 2 setting Devices without latch clear option Refer to Section 4 6 for the clearing method File registers R cannot be cleared with latch clear See Section 10 7 for clearing file registers 4 Precautions a Even if the device has specified the latch function device will not retain the latch if the local device is specified or the device initialization is specified b The device details of the latch range are mainta
445. ololo elololololololololololololololo elolololelololololelololololalo a Setting the file registers Type Rn in the list box to view a listing of file registers b Setting the parameters Enter the desired data in columns to specify file registers This step is not needed when you specify only the capacity of file registers 10 47 10 47 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 3 Registering the File Register File with the High Performance model QCPU If you click on the following check boxes in the PLC file sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box you must register a file register file with the High Performance model QCPU e Not used e Use the same file name as the program For registration of a file register file use the Write to PLC dialog box ix face COMT lt gt EPU unit I Station no Host PLC type 25H Memory cardfiAM gt _ Title File selection Device data Program Common Local d File register b gt MM 1 Remote operation File register c Range specification ZR 0 82767 ETE PLC side file name MAIN pe a Selecting a memory in which to store file registers Choose the standard RAM memory card RAM or memory card ROM from this list box to specify a memory in which to store file registers If you want to use the same filename as that of a program store a file register file
446. ompatibility with A PLC section in the PLC System sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box 10 34 10 34 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 4 Link Direct Devices Jt t 1 Definition a At END processing a data refresh data transfer operation occurs between the High Performance model QCPU and the MELSECNET H network system modules Link direct devices are used at that time to directly access the link devices in the MELSECNET H network modules b Designation method e Link direct devices are designated by network No and device No Designation method JUi i Device No INPUb wecccceveceesccerecteveres X0 Q tp t faeces YO Link relay BO Link register Wo Link special relay SBO Link special register SW0 Network No 1 to 255 e For link register 10 W10 of network No 2 the designation would be J2 W10 H _ move K100 J2w1 a Network modules at network No 2 wo e For a bit device X Y B SB digit designation is necessary Designation example J1 K1X0 J10 K4B0 2 Designation range Link direct device designations are possible for all the link devices in network modules Device outside the range specified by the network refresh parameters can also be designated a Writing 1 Writing is executed within that part of the link device range set as the send range in the common parameters of the network parameters that is outside the ra
447. omplete turns on Trace complete after Trace start request Trigger condition met the number of triggers Number of trace after trigger HE Total number of traces SM800 Sampling trace ready a SM801 Sampling trace start SM802 Sampling trace execution Sampling trace trigger SM804 After sampling trace trigger i I I I SM803 l i i I I 4 i T i i i SM805 Sampling trace complete 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q g Trace interrupt 1 When SM801 sampling trace start is turned off during sampling trace the sampling trace is interrupted In the meantime the number of traces is cleared 2 When turning on SM801 again trace is restarted Trigger SM801 SM801 Trigger Trace execution OFF ON execution complete Number of i Numberof trace after trace after i trigger Clear the trace count i trigger i l SF SM800 Sampling trace ready SM801 Sampling trace start SM802 Sampling trace execution SM803 Sampling trace trigger SM804 After sampling trace trigger SM805 Sampling trace complete x When trace is interrupted from the GX Developer the SM800 is turned off also 7 FUNCTION 2 Operation Procedure The sampling trace operation is performed in the following manner Each operation is performed in the sampling trace screen in the online mode trace menu a Trace
448. on this is performed in on line remote operation 2 The serial communication module and Ethernet interface module are controlled by commands complying with the MC protocol For details of the MC protocol refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Precautions a To perform the remote RESET turn on the Allow check box of the Remote reset section in the PLC System sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box and then write parameters onto High Performance model QCPU If the Allow check box is not checked a remote RESET operation is not performed b Remote RESET cannot be performed when the High Performance model QCPU is at the RUN state c After the reset operation is complete the High Performance model QCPU will enter operation state set at the RUN STOP switch 1 With the RUN STOP switch in the STOP position the High Performance model QCPU enters into the STOP status 2 With the RUN STOP switch in the RUN position the High Performance model QCPU enters into the RUN status d Take care that Remote RESET does not reset High Performance model QCPU if there is an error in the High Performance model QCPU due to noise If Remote RESET does not reset use the RESET L CLR switch to reset or turn the PLC off then on again 1 If Remote RESET is executed when the High Performance model QCPU is stopped due to an error the High Performance mode
449. on 10 10 for details regarding interrupt factors and interrupt pointers 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 3 Executing interrupt programs a In order to execute an interrupt program with the interrupt pointer 132 through 147 IMASK and El instructions are required to obtain permission for the interruption 1 1 If an interrupt factor occurs prior to an interruption permitted status the interrupt program for the factor in question will be executed when an interruption permitted status is established 2 If an interrupt factor occurs during a STOP PAUSE the interrupt program for the factor in question will be executed when an interruption permitted condition is established following a return to the RUN status Interrupt program example Interrupt program execution Program execution a Interrupt program for 10 activated eee gt Interrupt program prog 1 for 129 activated fend of main FEND FEND K routine program Interrupt program lO interrupt program 7 Interrupt program gt 129 interrupt program END Fig 4 3 Interrupt Program Execution b When an interrupt factor occurs the interrupt program with the interrupt pointer number corresponding to that factor is executed However interrupt program execution varies according to the condition at that time 1 If two or more interrupts occur at the same time The interrupt programs are exec
450. on execution string reaches 32 characters execution OFF Keyboard input or PKEY instruction OFF Instruction not ON when PKEY instruction is being executed SM73 ede iol reception enabled Goes ON when keyboard input is being conducted poet PKEY instruction ON Keyboard input Goes when keyboard input has been stored at the CPU execution reception disabled instruction OFF Instruction not S SM738 executed Goes ON when MSG instruction is executed Instruction New lon flag Instruction execution execution SM774 PID bumples oF Forces match In manual mode designates whether or not to force the New processing ON Does not force match SV value to match the PV value O M Selection of link refresh OFF Performs link refresh Selects whether only the general data process is SM775 processing during ON No link refresh performed for the execution of the COM instruction or the COM instruction performed link refresh process is also performed execution Enable disable e Determines whether to enable disable the local device in the program CALLED at CALL OFF Local device disabled ON Local device enabled U Status change Enable disable local device in interrupt program OFF Local device disabled Determines whether to enable disable the local device at U Status ON Local device enabled the execution of interrupt programs change OFF CC Link ded
451. on section shows the number of base units used and the number of modules installed on the base e Base The Base section indicates the status of base units used and modules installed The Module column indicates the status of a module when the module is in an abnormal condition f PLC diagnostics This button is used to monitor the status of the High Performance model QCPU and an error g9 Module s Detailed Information This button is used to view detailed information about a selected module For details on intelligent function modules see the manual of an intelligent function module 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Incase of GX Developer Version 6 SW6D5C GPPW E or later It is possible to confirm the following information for High Performance model QCPUs connected to personal computers with the GX Developer system monitor see illustration below e Installed status e Operation status e Module s detailed information e Product information a gt Installed status Base Base Module 0 3 4 Control PLC QOZHCPU QI71 LPZ 3Zpt Unmo wti ng Unmo unti ng Unmo until ng Unmo unti 25 ng l l t4 b gt Parameter status I O Address QOZHCPU Diagnostics Module s Detailed Information Base Information
452. onding File name memory i File name Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End setup Cancel Use the following files is selected Not used or Use the same file name as the program is selected File register setting TES Creating new device memory screen Device Label RO z Display E bit integer sjaje Device name o i 2 3 4 5 6 ki Character string F DO 0 o i o o o 0 oj D8 0 o o o 0 o o o pie oof of of of of of o D24 0 o 0 0 0 o o o p32 o o of of of of of o D40 0 o o 0 0 o o o pas of of of of of of of o D56 0 o o 0 0 o o o Dea of of of of of of of o ID72 0 o o 0 0 0 o 0 Ipso A oA oA of f A of o IDSs 0 0 o o o 0 0 o D96 0 o 0 a o o o 0 D104 0 o o o 0 o o 0 D112 0 0 0 o 0 0 o o D120 0 o o o o o 0 oj Writing of file register CT R Online write to PLC screen Connecting interface COMT lt gt PU uni PLC Connection I Station no Host PLC ype 25H Target memoy Memory cardRAM z __Title_ File selection Device data Program Common Local ParamsPiog Select all_ Cancel all selections Cose LJ MAIN a I Maine PA C mains Related functions E Device comment O COMMENT i Parameter I PLc Network File register 2 Remote operation K Clear PLC memory File re
453. or debugging SM800 to SM899 h Latch area SM900 to SM999 i For A PLC SM1000 to SM1299 1 For details regarding special relays which can be used by the High Performance model QCPU refer to Appendix 1 2 x This takes effect only after you have turned on the Use special relay special register form SM1000 SD1000 check box in the Compatibility with A PLC section in the PLC System sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box 10 33 10 33 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 3 3 Special registers SD 1 Definition a A special register is used to store High Performance model QCPU status data diagnosis and system information 2 Special register classifications Special registers are classified according to their applications as shown below a For fault diagnosis SDO to SD199 b System information SD200 to SD399 c System clock system counter SD400 to SD499 d Scan information SD500 to SD599 e Memory card information SD600 to SD699 f Instruction related SD700 to SD799 g For debugging SD800 to SD899 h Latch area SD900 to SD999 i For A PLC D1000 to SD1299 j _Fuse blown module D1300 to SD1399 k Check of input output modules SD1400 to SD1499 1 For details regarding special relays which can be used by the High Performance model QCPU refer to Appendix 2 2 x This takes effect only after you have turned on the Use special relay special register form SM1000 SD1000 check box in the C
454. or usage for drive 3 4 are stored as bit patterns In use when ON The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Not used Parameters QPA CPU fault history QFD Device comments QCD SFC trace QTS Device initial value QDI Local device QDL File R QDR Not used Trace QTS Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Drive 3 4 use Drive 3 4 use conditions conditions S Status change e The use conditions for memory card B are stored as bit patterns In use when ON The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Simulation data QDS Memory card Memory card Parameters QPA CPU fault history QFD Buse Device comments QCD SFC trace QTS conditions Device initial value QDI Local device QDL File R QDR Not used Sampling trace QTS Not used Status latch QCL Not used Program trace QDL Not used y ri r SD640 Stores drive number being used by file register say New D641 Stores file register file name with extension selected at parameters D642 or by use of QDRSET instruction as ASCII code B15 B8 B7 BO D643 2 oa SD641 Second character First character D644 File register File register SD642 Fourth character Third character D645 fis Hames letame SD643 Sixth character Fifth character S Initial SD644 Eighth character Seventh character SD645 First character of extension 2EH SD646 SD646 Third
455. order so that the same No is not set simultaneously by two extension base units 5 When Q50B Q60B and QA1S6LB types of extension base units are mixed first connect the Q50B Q6LB type and then connect the QA1S6LB type When setting the No of the extension stages set it from Q50B Q6LB in order Although there are no particular restrictions in the order of the installation of the Q50B and Q6LB refer to Section 6 6 for usability 6 Connect the extension cable from OUT of the extension cable connector of the base unit to IN of the extension base unit on the next stage 7 If 65 or more modules are installed an error will occur 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 2 Precaution on System Configuration This section describes hardware and software packages compatible with QCPU 1 Hardware a The number of modules to be installed and functions are limited depending on the type of the modules Limit of number of modules e QJ71PL21 e QJ71BR11 Q Series MELSECNET 10H QJ71LP21 25 Up to 4 units network module e QJ71E71 Stent Ethernet interface QJ71E71 B2 Up to 4 units e QU71E71 100 Q series CC Link system QU61BT11 No limit master local module No limit ene MINI SS data Ai SEE setting of automatic refresh function not allowed e A1SD51S AnS series special function e A1SD21 S1 module shown on the right A1SJ71J92 S3 When GET PUT service is used Interrupt module i
456. ores the local or remote station number at which a 1to8 forward or reverse loop error has occurred nae Device Bit Stores condi fons number 515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 bs b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 for up to numbers RI F RI FI RIFIRIF RI FI RI F R 9to 16 p1282 Tes Tua Une urs uR2 UR Stores conditions 01233 FIR IERIE RFR FR 16 L R15 L R14 L R11 L R10 L R for up to numbers pissy FlR E RIF RJF RIF R 17 to 24 24 L R23 L R22 L R19 L R18 L R Stores conditions 501235 FIRIERIE REIRE R 32 L R31 L R30 L R27 L R26 L R25 for up to numbers TEA F R FI RIF RJF R FIRIE Local station and 25 to 32 40 L R39 L R38 L R35 L R34 L R33 remote I O station F R E RIF R F R FIR F loop error Stores conditions 501237 Ray Rae aa ERA RAG for up to numbers spite F R F RIF RJF JRI FIRIF 33 to 40 L R55 L R51 L R50 L R49 R F RIF RJF R FIR F Stores conditions 5P1239 Tres ace Rees O D1234 D1235 SD1236 SD1237 for up to numbers In the above table F indicates a forward loop line and 41 to 48 R a reverse loop line The bit corresponding to the Stores conditions station number at which the forward or reverse loop error for up to numbers has occurred becomes 1 49 to 56 Example When the forward loop line of station 5 has an Stores conditions error bit 8 of SD1232 become 1 and whe
457. ormal status is restored Comes ON it a momentary power interruption of less than 20ms occurred during use of the AC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON i Comes ON if a an ore screvata st e DB pre se power interruption of less M9005 SM1005 E one Ae TONN rasaae ren Onoda tes othe 0 o s than 10ms occurred during use of the DC power supply i module and reset by turning power OFF then ON Comes ON if a momentary power interruption of less than 1ms occurred during use of the DC power supply module and reset by turning power OFF then ON App 11 App 11 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details Relay Conversion Modification OFF Normal e Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than M9006 SM1006 Battery low specified Turned off when battery voltage becomes ON Battery low normal M9007 SM1007 Battery low latch ori Normal Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than O ON Battery low specified Remains on if battery voltage becomes normal M9008 SM1008 SM1 Self diagnostic OFF No error Turned on when error is found as a result of self error ON Error diagnosis Annunciator OFF No F number detected e Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is M9009 SM10039 SM62 ON F number detected executed Switched off when SD1124 data is zeroed Turned on when operatio
458. ory can be switched ON and OFF by the following e Test operation by the GX Developer e A network refresh by the MELSECNET H network system e Writhing from a serial communication module e CC Link automatic refresh x3 The remote input refresh area indicates the area used when automatic refresh setting is made to the input X with MELSECNET H and CC Link Automatic refresh of the remote input refresh area is executed during END processing 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 2 Response lag Output response lags of up to 1 scans can result from input module changes See Fig 4 10 Ladder examples Ladder for switching the DY5E output ON in response to an DX5 input ON Fastest possible DY5E ON LD DX5 OUT DY5E 0 55 56 ON OFF pxs OF ON OF gt DY5E The fastest possible DY5E output ON occurs if the DX5 input is switched ON immediately prior to the step 55 operation If DX5 is ON when step 55 s LD DX5 is executed DY5E will switch ON within that scan This condition represents the minimum time lag between the DX5 input ON and the DY5E output ON Slowest possible DY5E ON LD DX5 OUT DY5E 556 END 0 t t ON Lag time Maximum of 1 scan The slowest possible DY5E output ON occurs if the DX5 input is switched ON immediately after the step 55 operation In this case the DY5E output will switch ON during the next scan
459. oryisdeleted stored in memory is deleted ee ee Memory files which ate no aces contiguous are Arrange PLC memory re organized to make them contiguous Write during RUN in Write changes made in the ladder mode into the the ladder mode program memory Execution enabled A Execution enabled with some restrictions X Execution disabled 1 The codes A B C D used at the operation enabled disabled item in the above table are explained below Table 6 6 Operation enabled disabled aA When write prohibit password is registered in a file B When read write prohibit password is registered in a file c When the High Performance model QCPU s system protect switch is ON Dp When High Performance model QCPU RUN status is in effect 2 Execution is possible only when the passwords match 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 9 2 File handling precautions 1 Power OFF or reset during program operation a If power is switched OFF during a file operation which will not cause a file shift the memory data will not be lost b Ifthe High Performance model QCPU battery Q6BAT backup is in effect the program memory data will not be lost if the power is switched OFF during the following file operations which cause a file shift File size change e Arrange PLC memory e New file creation e Writing a program file during the RUN status e Writing a program in excess of allocate memory for
460. ot in effect pause contact has turned on and if SM204 is on PAUSE M9041 SM1041 SM204 ON PAUSE in effect mode is set and SM206 is turned on M9042 SM1042 sm203 STOP status OFF STOP not in effect Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STOP contact ON STOP in effect position OFF Sampling trace in e Turned on upon completion of sampling trace performed i the number of times preset by parameter after STRA M9043 SM1043 SM805 SamplingTrace progress p yp SM1044 SM803 Watchdog timer OFF Does not reset WDT the ZCOM instruction and data communication request WDT reset ON Resets WDT batch processing are executed used when the scan time Automatically switched OFF when transfer is complete e When SM1052 is ON the SEG instruction is executed as completed ON Sampling trace instruction is executed SM1045 exceeds 200 ms SEG instruction OFF 7SEG segment display an I O partial refresh instruction 1 scan STOP position Sampling trace completed Reset when STRAR instruction is executed Turning on off SM803 can execute STRA STRAR instruction STRA SM803 is forcibly turned on off by a peripheral device Same as execution When switched from OFF to ON STRA instruction O 7 OFF Trace not in progress ag x SM1046 SM802 Sampling trace ON Trace in progress Switched on during sampling trace Sampling trace OFF Sampling trace e Sampling t
461. ot perform operation of programs stored in the standard ROM or memory cards To process programs stored in the standard ROM and memory card designate file names to be booted read to program memory by the GX Developer by a boot file setting in a PLC parameter Programs with file names designated by the boot file setting are booted from the standard ROM memory card to program memory and processed when the power is turned ON or the High Performance model QCPU is reset 2 Preparation for Boot Run Perform the following steps in preparation for boot run a b Create a program using GX Developer Create a program used for the boot run Select a boot file using GX Developer Select a boot file from the Boot file sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box PLC name PLC system PLC fle JPLC RAS Device P ifie SFC 10 assignment Boot option T Clear program memory System area assured steps Ksteps 0 15K step IT Memory card lt to gt Standard ROM all data auto write r Boot file setting E Program Transfer from Transferto LINE1 Memory card RAM Program memory LINE2 Memory card RAM Program memory MAINT Memory card RAM _ Program memory E Device com Memory card RAM _v Program memory Parameter PAI Device initia N Acknowledge XY assignment r Default Check End Cancel Make the High Performance model
462. ote contact source The following four options are available for remote operations e Remote RUN STOP e Remote PAUSE e Remote RESET e Remote LATCH CLEAR The serial communication module is used as the example to describe the intelligent function module 7 6 1 Remote RUN STOP 1 What is Remote RUN STOP a The remote RUN STOP performs RUN STOP of the High Performance model QCPU from an external source with the High Performance model QCPU RUN STOP switch at RUN b Using remote RUN STOP for the following remote operations are useful 1 When the High Performance model QCPU is at a position out of reach 2 When performing RUN STOP of the control board High Performance model QCPU from an external source c Calculations during Remote RUN STOP The program calculation that performs remote RUN STOP is as follows 1 Remote STOP Executes the program to the END instruction and enters the STOP state 2 Remote RUN When remote RUN is performed while in the STOP state using remote STOP the state changes to RUN and executes the program from step 0 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Remote RUN STOP Method There are two ways to perform remote RUN STOP a Remote RUN contact method The remote RUN contact is set with the PLC parameter mode PLC system setting The device range that can be set is input XO to 1FFF By turning the set remote RUN contact ON OFF the remote RUN STOP can be performed 1 When the remote RUN contac
463. output points Prolonged time input p T pee XN3 X number of other machines us Use the following values for N3 CPU type Systems with only a main base Systems that include additional base units Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 2 Total value of command execution time Refer to the following manual for details on the processing time of special multiple PLC commands and the processing time for commands that have different processing times with multiple PLC systems QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 3 END process The following values are prevalent for the END processing time CPU type END processing time ms QO02CPU 0 42 QO2HCPU QO6HHCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 18 1 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPUS MELSEC Q 18 2 Factor to Prolong the Scan Time The processing time for multiple PLC systems is prolonged in comparison with single CPU systems when the following functions are used Add the following values to the values calculated in Sections 11 1 and 18 a to acquire the amount of time used by these functions e Multiple PLC system automatic refresh e MELSECNETHH refreshing e CC Link automatic refresh 1 Automatic refresh of common CPU memory a The amount of time required to perform the refresh function set up with the multiple PLC settings This value is the total amount of time required for writing
464. pecial register after SM1000 SD1000 In this case the A series compatible special relays special registers SM1000 SD1000 to SM1299 SD1999 must be replaced with the Q series dedicated special relays special registers SM0 SDO to SM999 SD999 CPU Type Processing Time ms QO2CPU 0 07 QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 2 Arithmetic operation of floating points By default the Perform internal arithmetic operations in double precision check box in the PLC System sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box is on Turning off the check box will increase the processing speed of executing an instruction that includes a floating point For details on floating point arithmetic operation see the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 11 4 11 4 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU MELSEC Q 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU This chapter describes the procedure for writing programs created at the GX Developer to the High Performance model QCPU 12 1 Writing Procedure for 1 Program 12 This section describes the procedure for writing one program to the High Performance model QCPU and executing it 12 1 1 Items to consider when creating one program In order to create a program the program size number of device points used and the program file name etc must be set in advance 1 Program size considerations Check that CPU s program capacity i
465. peed retentive timer d The RST Ti instruction is used to clear reset the present value and switch the contact OFF Ladder example XO K200 STO X0 ON time is measured as 20 seconds when the timer measures time in 100 ms units Xi Retentive timer display e J RST STO When X1 switches ON the STO contact is reset and the present value is cleared Time chart ON X0 OFF ON TO coil OFF k 15 Sec 5 Sec TO present value 0AI to 150 151 to 200 0 Present value is saved when coil switches ON i TO contact OFF Contact remains ON when coil switches Instruction execution RST STO instruction ON X1 OFF 2 Measurement units a The measurement units settings for retentive timers are the same as those for low speed timers and high speed timers e Low speed retentive timer Same as low speed timer e High speed retentive timer Same as high speed timer In order to use retentive timers a retentive timer number of points used setting must be designated in the PLC parameters device settings 10 21 10 21 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q Timer Processing amp accurac a When an OUT T instruction is executed the following processing occurs timer coil ON OFF present value update amp contact ON OFF processing Timer present value update and contact ON OFF processing do not occur at END processing Ladder example x0 K10 1 lt To Processing at OUT TO instruction END OUT TO END Sequence _
466. peration in the Standard RAM 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 1 Specification 5 1 1 Power supply module specifications 5 1 2 Selecting the power supply module 5 1 3 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply 5 2 Names of Parts and Settings 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 6 1 Base Unit Specification Table 6 2 Extension Cable Specification Table 6 3 The Names of The Parts of The Base Unit 6 4 Setting the Extension Base Unit 6 5 I O Allocations 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY 7 1 Memory Card Specifications 7 2 Battery Specifications For CPU Module and SRAM Card 7 3 Handling the Memory Card 7 4 The Names of The Parts of The Memory Card 7 5 Memory Card Loading Unloading Procedures 7 6 Installation of Battery for CPU Module and Memory Card 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 8 1 Requirements for conformance to EMC Directive 8 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive 8 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive 8 1 3 Cables 8 1 4 Power supply module 8 1 5 When using Q1AS6 B type base unit 8 1 6 Others 8 2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive 8 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC Q series 8 2 2 MELSEC Q series PLC selection 8 2 3 Power supply 8 2 4 Control box 8 2 5 Grounding 8 2 6 External wiring lo LOADING AND INSTALLATION 9 1 General Safety Requirements 9 2 Calculating Heat Generation by PLC 9 3 Module Installation 9 3 1 Precaution on installation 9 3 2 Instructions for mounting
467. ponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET11 Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET 11 stations become 1 Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected become 0 Device number Bit b8 b7 L9 L8 L25 L24 L41 L40 L57 L56 b15 L16 b14 L15 L31 L47 L63 b13 L14 L30 L46 L62 b12 L13 L29 L45 L61 b11 L12 L28 Lad L60 b10 L11 L27 L43 L59 b9 L10 L26 L42 L58 b6 L7 L23 L39 L55 b5 L6 L22 L38 L54 b4 L5 L21 L37 L53 b2 L3 L19 L35 L51 bi L2 L18 L34 L50 D1202 D1203 D1241 SD1242 If a local station goes down during the operation the contents before going down are retained Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to D1231 are ORed If the corresponding bit is 0 the corresponding bit of the special register above becomes valid If the own master station goes down the contents before going down are also retained Stores the present path status of the data link Data link in forward loop Master station Forward loop e Data link in reverse loop Reverse loop Forward loop Reverse loop App 51 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification l PE Station implementing loopback SD1205 SD1206 Station implementing loopback Numbe
468. pplied to all types of CPU Corresponding CPU QCPU Can be applied to Q series CPU QnA Can be applied to QnA series and Q2ASCPU series Remote Can be applied to the MELSECNET H remote I O modules Each CPU type name Can be applied only to the specific CPU e g Q4ARCPU Q3ACPU Set by When set For details on the following items see these manuals e Networks Far Q MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e Far Q MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual for QnA Q4AR e SFC QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 1 SM1200 to SM1255 are used for QnACPU These relays are vacant with QCPU 2 Special relays SM1500 and later are dedicated for Q4ARCPU APPENDICES 1 Diagnostic Information Special Relay List when Sey Diagnostic errors Self diagnostic error Error common information Error individual information Battery low AC DC DOWN detection MINI link errors Operation Errors Blown fuse detection 1 0 module verification error Annunciator detection CHK detection watchdog timer for step transition Enabled only when SFC program exists App 2 OFF No error ON Error OFF No self diagnosis errors ON Self diagnosis OFF No error common information ON Error common information OFF No error common information ON Error common information OFF Nor
469. r SD62 to SD79 data operation at LEDR instruction a Anunciator No stored at SD64 is deleted and anunciator Nos stored at subsequent registers SD65 to SD79 are moved up to fill the vacant space b The anunciator No stored at SD64 is stored at SD62 c 1 is subtracted from the SD63 value d Ifthe SD63 value is 0 SM62 is switched OFF SETF50 SETF25 SETF2047 LEDR ee Ce Cn re a SD62 0 gt 50 50 50 gt 25 SD63 0 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 2 SD64 0 gt 50 50 50 ye 25 SD65 0 2 25 7 2047 sD66 0 0 0 gt 2047 A 0 SD67 0 0 0 SD79 0 0 0 0 0 10 14 10 14 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Special register SD62 to SD79 data operation when an anunciator is switched OFF by the RST F 2 instruction a The anunciator No which was switched OFF is deleted and all subsequent anunciator Nos are moved up to fill the vacant space b If the anunciator No stored at SD64 was switched OFF the new anunciator No which is stored at SD64 is stored at SD62 c 1 is subtracted from the SD63 value d Ifthe SD63 value is 0 SM62 is switched OFF SET F50 SET F25 SET F2047 RST F25 AO ORS Gn Oe Ge oO sD62 0 50 50 50 gt 50 SD63 0 gt 1 2 gt 3 2 SD64 0 50 50 50 50 SD65 0 0 25 25 2047 SD66 0 0 0 2047 os 0 SD67 0 0 0 0 a 0 SD79 0 0 0 0 0 3 Processing at
470. r The default value is not set When monitoring the execution time of the low speed execution type program designate the low speed execution monitor time in a 10 ms to 2000 ms range at the PLC RAS settings in the PLC parameter Setting unit 10 ms If the execution time of the low speed execution type program exceeds this timer setting a PRG TIME OVER error occurs The low speed execution time measurement occurs at low speed END processing Therefore a PRG TIME OVER error will occur if the low speed execution monitor time t is designated as 100 ms and the measured low speed scan time at low speed END processing exceeds 100 ms 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 4 Stand by type program 1 Definition of stand by type program a Stand by type programs are programs which are executed only when requested b Stand by type programs are used for the following applications 1 Placing programs in the library Sub routine and interrupt programs are converted to stand by type programs which are managed separately from the main program 2 Changing the program setup Main routine programs are registered as stand by type programs with required programs then being converted to scan execution type programs for execution Programs which are not required are converted to stand by type programs 2 Stand by type program applications a Placing programs in the library 1 This application is
471. r memory a It is possible to read data from the buffer memory of intelligent function modules being controlled by other machines with the use of the commands listed below e FROM command e Commands that use intelligent function module devices UL GL 0 3 4 5 6 7 lt Slot No Input module Otro 3 j o W 216 al o a Oo oa Output module Intelligent function module Intelligent function module Input module Intelligent function module Output module Control PLC settings PLC No 2 PLC No 2 PLC No 2 fe fe Zz 4 O oO I a a a PLC No 1 L PLC No 1 Possible to read from the buffer memory with the FROM command and UD GO Possible to read from the buffer memory with the FROM command and UD GO It is not possible to write in the buffer memory of intelligent function modules being controlled by other machines e TO command e Intelligent function module devices UL GD e Intelligent function modules dedicated commands An SP UNIT ERROR error code 2116 will be triggered if an attempt to write in the intelligent function module controlled by other machines is carried out 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot No 2g j us eo 2 oj ojojo 2 8 2 2 3 8 23l l EJ O O E ETEELEE E E JEE S o eo S S esl oo S s ae Control PLC settings PLC No 1 PLC No 1 PLC No 2 PLC No 2 PLC No 2 PLC No 1
472. r of retries Number of times loop selected D9215 D1215 Local station operation state Local statio operation s Local statio operation s D9205 D9206 D9210 D1210 D9211 D9212 D9213 D9214 Local statio operation s App 52 Meaning 0 Forward loop during data link 1 Reverse loop during data link 2 Loopback implemented in forward reverse directions 3 Loopback implemented only in forward direction 4 Loopback implemented only inreverse direction 5 Data link disabled Station that implemented forward loopback Station that implemented reverse loopback Stored as cumulative value Stored as cumulative value Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Corresponding Details CPU e Loopback in forward reverse loops tt 4L hs oe ow eet Forward loopback e Loopback in forward loop only Reverse loopback Station 3 i H t EE E sa Eeee E e Forward loopback e Loopback in reverse loop only Station 1 Station 2 FR Me tte a E it 2 SHERHE E 5 kas Reverse loopback Stores the local or remote I O station number at which loopback is being executed i HL Sib 4 een eee Forward loopback Reverse loopback In the above example 1 is stored into D9205 and 3 into D9206 If data lin
473. r performing the refresh process between High Performance model QCPU and MELSECNET H network modules Refer to the following manual for details on the refresh time for MELSECNET H e Q corresponding MESLECNET H Network System Refresh Manual b The amount of time required for the automatic refresh process will be prolonged only by the following amount of time when requests for refreshing are issued by other MELSECNET H modules at the same time on a multiple PLC system Prolonged time transmitted received word point lt N5 Xx number of other machines ds The number of words transmitted received is the total value of the following transferal data LB LX LY SB e Link refresh data oe LW 16 Data transferred to the memory card s file register eC a 16 LB e Transferal between data links tet LW x 2 Refer to the following table for N5 CPU type Systems with only a Systems that include main base unit Q02CPU additional base units QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 3 CC Link automatic refresh a The amount of time required for performing the refresh process between High Performance model QCPU and CC Link master local modules Refer to the following manual for details on the automatic refresh time for CC Link e QJ61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual c The amount of time required for the automatic refresh process will be prolonged only by the following
474. race is not executed unless SM801 is turned SM1047 SM801 pie suspended ON ON Sampling trace started Sampling trace is suspended when SM801 goes OFF When SM701 is OFF characters up to NUL 00H code SM1049 SM701 SM1051 M9052 SM1052 STRAR When switched from ON to OFF STRAR instruction preparations are output Same as execution The value stored in SD1044 is used as the condition for the sampling trace At scanning at time Time 10 msec unit The SM1015 relay is turned on to reset the WDT when Selection of OFF Output until NULL code e When SM701 is ON ASCII codes of 16 characters are output e Switched ON to disable the CHG instruction Switched ON when program transfer is requested number of encountered characters output ON 16 characters output CHG instruction OFF Enabled execution disable ON Disable switch ON I O partial refresh e When SM1052 is OFF the SEG instruction is executed as a 7 SEG display instruction M9054 SM1054 SM205 STEP RUN flag ae oes an a a a Bale on when the RUN key switch is in STEP RUN a K E 5 5 N a a is completion flag ON Completed reset instruction OFF Other than when P set being requested Provides P set request after transfer of the other ON P set being requested program for example subprogram when main program is OFF Other than when P set being run is complete during run A
475. ram C 1 See Section 4 2 for details regarding the execution sequence 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q b Example of programs split according to process 1 QCPU Program memory Standard ROM Memory card l f Split according Manufacturing gt Program B Programs A to D to process gt are executed in content Assembly gt Program C sequence x 2 L Ship out gt Program D iJ c Example of programs split according to function QCPU Program memory Standard ROM Memory card re P Pa Initial processing gt Program A The execution i ion sequence and oom Main processin gt Program B ti according J p g ogra l e to function n conditions can content Communication processing gt _Program C be set to conform to programs Error processing gt Program D J Ato D x2 1 Programs split according to process can be further split according to function 2 See Section 4 2 for details regarding the execution sequence and execution conditions 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 3 Convenient Programming Devices and Instructions The QCPU features devices and instructions which facilitate program creation A few of these are described below 1 Flexible device designation a Word device bits can be designated to
476. ration a b Allocate memory for Write during RUN ja steps 34 steps File header eat E i xacuton program The area is allocated in 1k steps As shown below the size of a program stored in the High Performance model QCPU includes all the above components 1 File header The file name file size and file creation data etc are stored in this area The file header size is fixed to 34 to 35 steps 136 to 140 bytes Default 34 steps Execution program The created program is stored in this area 1 step is 4 bytes Allocate memory for Write during RUN This area is used when write during RUN that write during RUN increases the number of steps is executed at the GX Developer Default value is set to 500 steps 2000 bytes The number of allocate memory for Write during RUN can be changed using the online write to PLC program The number of allocate memory for Write during RUN can be redefined if the number of allocate memory is not sufficient for write during RUN See Section 7 10 1 2 The size of the program displayed by GX Developer During programming at the GX Developer the program size the total of the file header size and the number of created program steps is displayed as the number of steps as shown below During programming the size of the program created is displayed Number of steps used display we MELSEC series GPP Unset project LD Edit mode MAIN 44 Step
477. rced ON enforced OFF and canceling enforced ON OFF are shown in the table below Input X operation Output Y operation During canceling Performs sequence program Outputs the results of sequence no operations operations with external input program operations externally Performs sequence program Outputs ON externally regardless During enforced ON Joperations in the enforced ON of the results of sequence program status operations Performs sequence program Outputs OFF externally During enforced OFF operations in the enforced OFF regardless of the results of status sequence program operations The operations when enforced ON OFF is performed are shown in the diagram below Output enforced ON OFF operations Y10 device enforced OFF Y10 output xterna Output refreshed weiss sensor hehe output OFF yi OFF Input refreshed ___X0 input ON gt External 7 P ba input Input enforced ON OFF operations X0 device enforced OFF X0 ON Po Sequence execution Mo Ss E A o p xO External input Yu gt forcibly set at OFF Y10 M1 gt Set at ON on the rudder even during enforced OFF external output set at OFF END 1 Explanation of specifications a Enforced ON OFF can be performed regardless of the High Performance model QCPU s RUN STOP status However enforced ON OFF is only possible for input during stop error
478. re interrupt Section 5 6 No setting e 16 single byte characters No setting e 0 point 16 points 32 points 48 points 64 points 128 points 256 points 512 points 1024 points No setting e OH to FFOH No setting e 16 single byte characters No setting e 16 single byte characters Section 5 3 No setting e 16 single byte characters No setting e 2 3 5 8 10 12 f e See the manual of the intelligent function module to Input input output mixture 10 ms oe input output mixture 1 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 70 Section 7 7 PLC No 1 e PLC No 1 PLC No 2 PLC No 3 No 4 Section 14 2 1 ore A oa module 1 to 4 modules Section 14 2 1 Peo Stop all machines upon error of PLC Stop or do not stop all machines upon an error of PLC No n Section 14 2 1 No n De HOR Petal inputs from outside e Permit or do not permit inputs from outside the group Section 14 2 1 Do not permit outputs to outside group e Permit or do not permit outputs to outside the group Section 14 2 1 Setting range of each CPU 0 to 2048 points in 2 point intervals module Max 4k points 4096 points system e Device on CPU side B M Y D R ZR Devices equivalent to the number of points set for the transmission range from the designated device number are occupied e 16 points are occupied with B M and Y for each point of transmission range e 1 point is occupied with D W R and ZR for each point of transmission range No setting Section 14
479. red in the target memory Cc Data name uuu eects Displays a filename of a file stored in the target memory d Registration ee Displays an asterisks that indicates a password protected file e Password eee eeeeeeeeeteeee Defines or changes a password f Registration Condition 1 Write Protect Write operation is restricted by the password Reading is possible 2 Read Write protect Read Write operation is restricted by the password 1 Password protected files are limited to program files device comment files and device initial value files Other files cannot be password protected 2 The password registered to a file can not read out from the file If the password can not be remembered file operation other than following can not be performed e Program memory Memory card PLC format Standard ROM batch write Take notes of the password registered and keep it on hand 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 17 2 Remote passwords The remote password function prevents illegal access to the High Performance model QCPU by users in remote locations The remote password function is enabled for use by setting it up in the High Performance model QCPU When the remote password function has been set a check will be run on remote passwords when users in remote locations attempt to access the High Performance model QCPU with serial communication modules or Ethernet modules with modem functions 1 Setting up
480. registers and GX Developer monitor values will become longer than when the interrupt program fixed scan execution type program is not executed 1 Special registers e SD520 SD521 Current scan time e SD522 SD523 Initial scan time e S D524 SD525 Minimum scan time e SD526 SD527 Maximum scan time e SD528 SD529 Current scan time for low speed e SD532 SD533 Minimum scan time for low speed e SD534 SD535 Maximum scan time for low speed e SD540 SD541 END processing time e S D542 SD543 Constant scan wait time e S D544 SD545 Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs e SD546 SD547 Execution time for low speed execution type programs e SD548 SD549 Scan program execution time e S D551 SD552 Service interval time 2 GX Developer monitor values e Execution time measurement e Scan time measurement e Constant scan 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 Program Execute Type Programs executed by the High Performance model QCPU can be stored in the High Performance model QCPU s program memory standard ROM or memory card Programs can be stored in the standard ROM or memory card as a single program but also as multiple programs by splitting them into separate programs for each control function This permits the programming procedure to be split up among several program designers who can design separate programs for each operation and can store them in the s
481. restored ON when operation error is generated Stays ON subsequently even if normal operations restored Comes ON even if there is only one output module with a blown fuse and remains ON even after return to normal S Error ON Module with blown fuse Blown fuse state is checked even for remote I O station OFF Normal ON Error OFF Not detected ON Detected OFF Not detected ON Detected OFF Not started watchdog timer reset ON Started watchdog timer started output modules e Comes ON if there is a discrepancy between the actual 1 O modules and the registered information when the power is turned on e I O module verification is also conducted for remote I O station modules S Instruction execution Goes ON if error is detected by CHK instruction S Stays ON subsequently even after normal operation is Instruction restored execution Goes ON when measurement of step transition watchdog timer is Slee ee Resets watchdog timer when it Corresponds to SD96 goes OFF Goes ON if even one annunciator F goes ON MELSEC Q App 2 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List 2 System information LED off At change from OFF to ON the LEDs corresponding to S Status contact ae PAUSE state is entered if this relay is ON when the meoo coil ON PAUSE enabled remote PAUSE contact goes ON Device test request OFE Device test not yol Comes ON when the de
482. rformance model QCPU to the High Performance model QCPU motion CPU to the High Performance model QCPU or motion CPU to motion CPU CPU module _ Command name Description pa eae CPU ea S DDWR i SP DDWR Writes host CPU device data into other CPU devices Eves S DDRD SP DDRD Reads other CPU device data into the host CPU Ears S GINT SP GINT Requests start up of other CPU interruption programs olx For example High Performance model QCPU device data can be written into the motion CPU s device data with the use of the S DDWR command of the communication dedicated command between multiple PLCs High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU S DDWR command canoe x Writes in the device memory Reads the device memory Device memory Device memory DE One High Performance model QCPU module can operate up to 32 special motion commands and communication dedicated commands between multiple PLCs omitting the S P GINT command at one time However if the special motion commands and communication dedicated commands between multiple PLCs omitting S P GINT command are made at the same time the commands will be executed in order from the first command accepted If there are 33 or more unexecuted commands an OPERATION ERROR error code 4107 will be triggered Refer to the motion CPU Programming Manual for details on and the necessity of use of the special communication commands between multiple PLCs 16 12 16 12 16 COMMUN
483. rnal power supply when the PLC main module power is turned on If the external power supply is turned on first it could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation e When there are communication problems with the data link refer to the corresponding data link manual for the operating status of each station Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation e When connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer or the like to the intelligent function module to exercise control data change on the running PLC configure up an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the whole system will always operate safely Also before exercising other control program change operating status change status control on the running PLC read the manual carefully and fully confirm safety Especially for the above control on the remote PLC from an external device an immediate action may not be taken for PLC trouble due to a data communication fault In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit in the sequence program corrective and other actions to be taken as a system for the occurrence of a data communication fault should be predetermined between the external device and PLC CPU A CAUTION e Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more f
484. rom each other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation e When controlling items like lamp load heater or solenoid valve using an output module large current approximately ten times greater than that present in normal circumstances may flow when the output is turned OFF to ON Take measures such as replacing the module with one having sufficient rated current Installation Precautions A CAUTION e Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this manual Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product e Hold down the module loading lever at the module bottom and securely insert the module fixing hook into the fixing hole in the base module Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction failure or drop When using the PLC in the environment of much vibration tighten the module with a screw Tighten the screw in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module e When installing more cables be sure that the base module and the module connectors are installed correctly After installation check them for looseness Poor connections could cause an input or output failure
485. roperty ights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series of General Purpose Programmable Controllers Please read this manual carefully so that equipment is used to its optimum CONTENTS SAFETY INSTRUGTIONS 225 65 4 640 088 hgaunanchaauhana hada di nadan salad dadad dane dain A 1 REVISIONS a a hs ip a a a IA a PIR Hite Ae A 6 CONTENTS sess fect a ate a RS Ede ee hi tas aad cee ed eta aee A 7 About Manualne nosa a Natasa iadahada a a RER A 17 Howto Use This Manual c c cccenadenie deeded i A 18 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations cscccccsscssssseseseseseeseseceseescseseeessescaeseeeacaeaeeeeseaeaeeeeesseeesasaeetenssaeaeens A 19 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 11 V FEMMES ste A A en eee he eee ee a he ia 1 2 T2 PYOGFAMS viet hel ei el lalla Slats Slain ain aia aie aii 1 5 1 3 Convenient Programming Devices and Instructions ccccecesecseeceeeeeeseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseaeateteeeaeaeeteteeeaeateteees 1 8 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 1to2 6 2 1 System COnfQUIaLON esne pinia a A E E detain etic E teed 2 1 2 2 Precaution on System COMPUTATION ccecceeceseeesesesesseseseeeeseseseeesesesesesseseseeseaeatetseeseaceteeeaseeeasaeeteesesaeateteeeeees 2 4 2 3 Confirming the Serial No and Function Versions seesesesseseceseeeseseseeeeseseseseescaeseeeeseae
486. rresponding register change However there are times when changes in the corresponding register are relayed by a maximum of 200ms when the High Performance model QCPU s scan time is 200ms or less There are times when changes in the corresponding register are delayed by 200ms or more if the High Performance model QCPU s scan time exceeds 200ms c The High Performance model QCPU of another machine can use FROM command or intelligent function module device to read data from the action data area of the host machine However because there is a delay in data updating use the read data for monitoring purposes 1 For the motion CPU 5H to 1CH of the host machine s operation information area is not used If 5H to 1CH of the host machine s operation information area is read from the motion CPU it will be read as 0 x2 Refer to the corresponding special registers for further details 16 14 16 14 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM 16 15 2 3 MELSEC Q System area 200H to 7FFH The area used by the High Performance model QCPU motion CPU and PC CPU module systems OS This is used by the OS when special communication commands between multiple PLCs are executed Automatic refresh area The area used when the multiple PLC system is automatically refreshed Writing is not possible with the S TO command and reading is not possible with the FROM command or intelligent function module device
487. ructions CJ SCJ JMP to designate jump destinations and labels jump destination beginning b Pointers are used in sub routine CALL instructions CALL CALLP to designate the CALL destination and label sub routine beginning 3 Pointer types There are 2 pointer types local pointers Section 10 9 1 which are used independently in CPU programs and common pointers Section 10 9 1 which are used to call sub routine programs from all programs executed in the CPU 10 9 1 Local pointers 1 Definition a Local pointers are pointers which can be used independently in CPU program jump instructions and sub routine call instructions Local pointers cannot be used from other program jump instructions and sub routine CALL instructions Use an ECALL instruction to call a subroutine subprogram in a program file that contains local pointers b The same pointer No can be used in each of the programs Program A Program B ca ra Same pointer is eu Al reno H FEND HH gt gt ret H Ret H leno eno H For further information on jump instructions and sub routine call instructions see the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 10 53 10 53 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 2 Number of local pointer points Local pointers can be divided among all the programs stored in the program memory The local pointer No ranges from PO to the hig
488. ructions when programming operating conditions 2 Designation method with master control The master control instructions are used to open and close the ladders common bus so that switching of ladders may be executed efficiently by the sequence program Nesting devices must be numbered in descending order from NO to N7 of nested relation For details on how to use master control refer to the QOPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Designated in ascending No order gt Executed when condition A is satisfied gt Executed when conditions A and B are satisfied NO nesting control range N1 nesting control range N2 nesting control range Designated in descending No order gt Executed when condition A B and C are satisfied MC2 to 7 are reset gt Executed when conditions A and B are satisfied MC1 to 7 are reset gt Executed when condition A is satisfied MCO to 7 are reset gt Executed regardless of A B C condition statuses 10 52 10 52 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 9 Pointers 1 Definition Pointer devices are used in jump instructions CJ SCJ JUMP or sub routine call instructions CALL ECALL A total of 4096 pointers can be used total for all programs being executed 2 Pointer applications a Pointers are used in jump inst
489. ruption modules 14 11 Restrictions on the number of modules that can be mounted with multiple PLC systems are shown in the table below Ensure that the number of modules mounted is within these ranges Restriction on the number of Restriction on the number of modules that can be mounted on modules that can be mounted on each system each CPU e QJ71LP21 QJ71BR11 Maximum of four PLC to PLC Maximum of four PLC to PLC e QJ71LP21 25 networks and remote I O networks and remote I O e QU71LP21G networks networks e QJ71LP21GE e QU71E71 e QJ71E71 B2 Maximum of four Maximum of four e QJ71E71 100 e QJ61BT11 No limit No limit No restrictions No restrictions e A1SJ71PT32 S3 however the automatic refresh however the automatic refresh e A1SJ71T32 S3 function cannot be set up function cannot be set up A1SD51S A1SD21 S1 e A1SJ71J92 S3 Maximum of six Maximum of six When the GET and PUT services are used Maximum of four Only one maximum of three when the A1SI61 is in use x A maximum of 4 modules if the network parameters for CC Link are set and controlled by the GX Developer There is no restriction in the number of modules when the parameters are set by the special purpose instructions for the CC Link For details on the CC Link System Master Local Unit that can set parameters with the special purpose instructions refer to the munual for the CC Link Master Local module 14 11 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC
490. ry of the intelligent function module can be read or data can be written to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module The FROM instruction stores the data read from the buffer memory of the intelligent function module to the designated device The TO instruction writes the data of the designated device to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module 1 For the details of the FROM TO instruction refer to the following manuals QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 2 For the details of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module refer to the manual of the intelligent function module being used 8 1 4 Communication using the intelligent function module device 1 Intelligent function module device The intelligent function module device is the buffer memory of the intelligent function module represented as a device of High Performance model QCPU in High Performance model QCPU programs It enables reading data stored in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module or enables writing data to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module 2 Difference from the FROM TO instruction The intelligent function module device can be handled as a device of High Performance model QCPU enabling the processing of data read from the intelligent function module with one instruction This saves the number of steps in the entire program The processing speed is the total of the instruction
491. ry time the instruction is executed resulting in longer scan time for the For the intelligent function module device refer to Section 10 5 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 3 4 Effects of quicker access to the special function module and countermeasures against them 1 Effects of quicker access to the special function module As the scan time of High Performance model QCPU increases there are some limitations for the execution of the FROM TO instruction to the AnS compatible special function module The following effects may be produced in the program which reads writes data from to a special function module with the FROM TO instruction at every scan a Special function modules which assign priority to the FROM TO instruction 1 When the FROM TO instruction is executed the special function module stops its processing and processes the FRO TO instruction first As a result the processing time of the special function module becomes longer resulting in watchdog timer error of the special function module 2 The followings are the special function modules which assign priority to the FROM TO instruction e A1S64AD A1S68AD e A1S62RD3 A1S62RD4 e A1S68DAV A1S68DAI e A1S68TD e A1SD75P1 S3 A1SD75P2 S3 A1SD75P3 S3 e A1SD75M1 A1SD75M2 A1SD75M3 b Special function modules which suspend processing of the FROM TO instruction 1 Even when the FROM TO instruction is
492. s ec eeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeseeeseeeteeeeeeeteeeeaees 12 5 12 2 2 Procedure for writing programs to the High Performance model QCPU cceseeeeeeeeeees 12 6 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 13 1to0 13 6 Dede FSAI OS a ell la la a a a la al lal aa la cla la la ll cleo 13 1 13 2 Outline of Multiple PLC Systems 0 ccessesecesesseseseseeseseseseeseseseeesseseseseeeseseaeessescaeeteeeeaeaeensacasaeeeeeeeeaeateneeeasaeens 13 3 13 3 Differences with Single CPU Systems csccsscsesscseseseseeseseseeeeseseseeeeeeseseeeeeseaeenseeseaeaeeneasaeaeenesecaeateesesesatens 13 5 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 14 1 to 14 20 14 1 System Configuration cccescesecsesecssessesesesessesesesesseseseseeessesesesesscseseeeeasaeseaeesseseseseeaeaeseaeensaeseseeeesaeseetenseseatens 14 1 14 2 Precautions During Multiple PLC System Configuration s cscsescsseecesesteseceseseeseseeeeesacaeeteeseeseeeeeeenaeatens 14 1 14 2 1 Function versions of High Performance model QCPU motion CPUs and PC CPU module that can be sued and their MOUNTING POSITIONS eee eee eeeeneeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeateeaeesas 14 4 14 2 2 Precautions when using Q series corresponding I O modules and intelligent function modules14 4 14 2 3 Limitations when mounting AnS series corresponding I O modules and special function MOUE S I Aa aa A AR A EA AA AAEE A AA AEREE REA A SARA A IREA EE AAIE ARA RE NARA
493. s c I O settings outside of the group optional This is set when the input and output X Y for I O modules and intelligent function modules being controlled by other machines is to be downloaded to the host machine Refer to Section 17 2 for further details d Refresh setting optional This is set up to automatically refresh the device data with the multiple PLC system Refer to Section 16 1 for further details e Control PLC settings setup necessary Sets up the I O modules and intelligent function modules mounted on the base units as control PLCs on the multiple PLC system indicated by the C arrow All default settings are set for the PLC No 1 Intelligent functional module detailed setting x Error time Slot Type Model name output mode Q PLC PLC No 1 1 PLC PLC No 2 2 PLC PLC No 3 3 PLC PLC Empty Isettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Cancel 14 15 14 15 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 3 Multiple PLC setting and I O allocation checks Checks as shown in table 14 4 will be run to ascertain that all CPU modules have the same settings sameness check when the description column in table 14 3 has been set with the O symbol and the power to the sequence is switched on the High Performance model QCPU is reset or the status is changed from STOP to RUN a The
494. s The output is only performed to device Y b Devices for which registration is possible are input XO to X1FFF output YO to Y1FFF 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q c The input and output eligible for enforced ON OFF are shown below 1 Input X and output Y for modules mounted on the base 2 Input and output X Y for High Performance model QCPUs for which the MELSECNET H module LX LY is to be refreshed 3 Input and output X Y for High Performance model QCPUs for which the CC Link RX RY is to be refreshed When enforced ON OFF registration is performed for devices not covered by the above refresh ranges empty slots for example only the High Performance model QCPU device memory is set at ON OFF and this is not output externally d Canceling ON OFF registration information 1 ON OFF registration information can be canceled with operations from the GX Developer Devices for which enforced ON OFF has been performed will assume the following statuses when ON OFF registered information has been cancelled Enforced ON OEF device ON OFF performed with ON OFF not performed sequence programs with sequence programs Input from modules mounted Assumes the ON OFF status received from the onto the base module Input from High Performance model QCPUs for which the Assumes the refreshed ON OFF status from MELSECNET H module LX is to JMELSECNET H Input be refreshed Input from High Performance model QCPUs for which the CC Assum
495. s and communications between I O modules and intelligent function modules About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations The following abbreviations and general names for QO2CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU are used in the manual Generic Term Abbreviation Description High Performance model QCPU General name for Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU modules QnCPU General name for QO2CPU QnHCPU General name for QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series General Purpose Programmable Logic Q Series Controller y Abbreviation for small types of Mitsubishi MELSEC A Series General Purpose AnS Series Programmable Logic Controller GX Developer General product name for SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW A E SWnD5C GPPW V E SWnD5C GPPW VA E For QCPU version 4 or later can be used Main base unit General name for Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B type main base unit with Q Series power module I O module intelligent function module attachable aee General name for Q63B Q65B Q68B and Q612B type extension base unit with Q Series power module I O module intelligent function module attachable QA1S6_1B General name for QA1S65B and QA1S68B type extension base unit with AnS Series Extension base unit ower module I O module special function module attachable General name for Q6__B and QA1S6__B Base unit General name for
496. s 10 10 Internal system device s e 10 31 Internal user device s es 10 3 Interrupt module s ssssseeeeeseeeeeesrsrsrsenensns 5 11 Interrupt pointer I seseessesresrererensnenens 10 56 Interrupt program sassessssresrerresrerrsnernsineneenes 4 6 J J Network designation device 0 10 58 J E3 B co Link relay aeee 10 35 J 1 SB Link special relay 10 35 J 1 SW ii Link special register 10 35 Jt W i Link register ee eee 10 35 Li X E2 LINK input eseese 10 35 J ti cf Link output sessen 10 35 K K Decimal constants cee 10 61 L L Latch relay iraia 10 11 Latch FUNCTION earar 7 5 Latch relay L aai nadine ania 10 11 LED display inti aiid dinate 7 74 Link direct COVICE eee eeeeeeeeseeeteeeteeeneeeeees 10 35 Link register W ceeeeeeeseeseeeeeeteeeteeeeees 10 29 Link relay B cecceeceecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeetes 10 17 List of Interrupt factors s e 10 57 App 55 Local devie svi cent et 10 63 Low speed END processing ceeee 4 23 Low speed execution monitor time 4 24 Low speed execution type program 4 19 Low speed retentive timer ST 0 06 10 21 Low speed Scan timMel ccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 23 Low speed timer T sses 10 19 Index 2 M M Internal relay cccceeeseeeeseeeteeeeteeeeees 10 10 Macro instruction argument device VD 10 60
497. s adequate for storing the program and parameter data The program capacities of the CPUs are shown below Q02CPU 28 k steps QO2HCPU 28 k steps e QO6HCPU 60 k steps Q12HCPU 124 k steps Q25HCPU 252 k steps If the CPU capacity is only adequate for the program the parameter data should be stored in the standard ROM memory card 2 Designating a program file name The file name of the program to be stored in the High Performance model QCPU must be designated This file name is used when writing the program and parameters from the GX Developer to the High Performance model QCPU and when designating the program to be executed in the High Performance model QCPU See Chapter 6 for details regarding file names 3 Designating devices The number of devices required for the program must be determined See Chapter 10 for details regarding devices which can be used in the High Performance model QCPU 4 Device initial value setting Designate whether or not the device initial value settings are to be used in the High Performance model QCPU devices and intelligent function modules See Section 10 13 2 for details regarding device initial values 12 1 12 1 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU MELSEC Q 12 1 2 Procedure for writing programs to the High Performance model QCPU 12 2 The procedure for writing programs and parameters created at the GX Developer to the High Performance model QCPU
498. s canceled QCPU Comes ON when the PLC No 4 is resetting including S Status function the case where the PLC is removed from the base change Ver B The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 1 normal Goes OFF when the PLC No 1 is normal including a 1 during stop continuation error e Comes ON when the PLC No 1 is during a stop error 2 normal Goes OFF when the PLC No 2 is normal including a 2 during stop continuation error e Comes ON when the PLC No 2 is during a a stop error 3 normal Goes OFF when the PLC No 3 is norma uding a 3 during stop continuation error e Comes ON when the PLC No 3 is during a a stop error 4 normal Goes OFF when the PLC No 4 is norma uding a 4 during stop continuation error Comes ON when the PLC No 4 is during a stop error No 2 CPU reset OFF PLC No 2 reset cancel flag ON PLC No 2 resetting No 3 CPU reset OFF PLC No 3 reset cancel flag ON PLC No 3 resetting No 4 CPU reset OFF PLC No 4 reset cancel flag ON PLC No 4 resetting No 1 CPU error flag No 2 CPU error flag No 3 CPU error flag No 4 CPU error flag App 3 App 3 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ieee salle Max loaded I O OFF Ignored e When this relay goes from OFF to ON maximum loaded SM250 ON Read VO number is read to SD250 K Now Seu After the head I O number of the I O module be
499. s completed x4 Execution of error interruptions is prohibited for the interrupt pointer Nos 132 to 139 when the power is turned on and during a QCPU reset When using interrupt pointer Nos 132 to 139 set the interruption permitted status by using the IMASK instruction App 58 App 58 INDEX A DOWIE Y siete ecaicetacai eta csebaeiet heater etet 10 25 Accuracy of initial scan time 4 16 DX Direct access input s es 10 6 Accuracy Of scan time s essere 4 18 DY Direct access OUTPUT eee 10 9 Annunciator F aese 10 12 ASGIMCOdG nra ani 4 51 E ae oe PASS ean eRe ae sg aa a E Real nUmbers ceccececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 10 62 no ete Ae Rue aos A ikea ca a 2 Ede relay V sleccccc scsccshentereseetnecsenth nterestene 10 16 Alomat waing ne Slane RONE Gal END processing cecceseeeeeeeeeeeereeeeettees 4 34 B Enforced ON OFF sccceeeseteeeeereeteeees 7 31 B Link relay 10 17 Enforced ON OFF for external I O 1 4 Base modor a onli AA es 5 3 Execute type assssssssesrssrersrsrnsrnernsinsrneenerneenes 4 10 BCD Binary coded decimal 4 47 Execution time measurement 7 39 BIN Binary code 4 45 Execution time of the low speed execution type BL SFC block device sscccccssssssssseeeeeee 10 58 progra M sik scescctin cd cpus devshnesededlusbevehahes cvesduneeves 4 19 Boot RUM arrapinar ea RAR Ei rr RRA i 6 17 EX ENS ON ssssssssetsersesrseser
500. s detected the program Instruction area where the error occurred is skipped and the rest of the program is executed b The following errors can set the calculation continue stop in the parameter mode PLC RAS All parameter defaults are set at Stop 1 Computation error Expanded command error Fuse blown I O unit comparison Intelligent module program execution error Memory card access error Memory card operation error External power supply OFF for future use For example when the I O module verification error is set to continues the calculations are continued in the I O address before the error occurred 005 SL ty 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 4 Error check selection The error checking can be set to yes no in the following error checking in the parameter mode PLC RAS setting All parameter defaults are set at Yes a Battery check b Fuse blown check c I O unit comparison Self Diagnosis List Diagnosis description Diagnostic timing Hardware failure Handling error Parameter error gi e When the END instruction is executed Fuse short default stop FUSE BRAKE OFF Default Yes 2 I O interrupt error 1 0 INT ERROR e When an interrupt occurs i F e When the power is turned on when reset UNIT DOWN ate Melgent tuneuon moag eerror oe Q e When the FROM TO instruction is executed e When the power is turned on when reset CONTROL BUS ERROR e When the END instruction is executed e Wh
501. s er er eter errr er reer eer A cree eter reer eerreerrer reer rere 7 21 7 7 1 Selecting the response time of the input module eeeecececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeesaesaeseeseaesaeeaeeeeeees 7 21 7 7 2 Selecting the response time of the high speed input MOCUIE e ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteteeeeeeeteeaees 7 22 7 7 3 Selecting the response time of the interrupt MOCUIE ccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeeeeeeaeeaeeaeteeeeaes 7 23 7 8 Setting the Switches of the Intelligent Function MOUIC 2 csecceceseseeseseceseeseseseeeeseseeeeteeeeaeeteeeaeateteeeteaeaeeteees 7 24 29 Monitoring FUNCION sotene EEE EREEREER 7 25 Fa Montor condition Sermo eors Eneee an ET tec wet ative dae evel as TEAREN ERA KEENE NAN CEET AAEE 7 25 7 9 2 Monitoring test for local device o oo eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeneeeaeteaeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaseaeeseaeeeaeeeas 7 29 7 9 3 Enforced ON OFF for external O ccecceccecceseeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaesaesaeseeeeaeeaeceeseeesaesaeseeseaeeaneeseaeeates 7 31 7 10 Writing in Program during High Performance model QCPU RUN ccecseseceseseeteeeeseeeseeteeeeseeteeeeeseatentees 7 35 7 10 1 Writing data in the circuit mode during the RUN Status 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 7 35 7 10 2 Writing a batch of files during RUN 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeseeeseeeseeesaeeseeeseeesaeseaeeeeseneeaaes 7 38 7 11 Execution Time Measurement
502. s measured to the END instruction Internal processing time Sequence program Internal processing time aa Low speed execution type Low speed execution type program C program C Scan execution Scan execution Scan execution type 0 type program A type program B END 0 program A Next scan time WDT reset Scan time WDT reset QCPU internal processing QCPU internal processing Watchdog timer measured time Fig 7 9 Watchdog Timer Reset Scan time is the time elapsed from the time the High Performance model QCPU starts processing a Sequence program at Step 0 until the High Performance model QCPU restarts processing another sequence program with the same filename at Step 0 The scan time is not the same at every scan and differs depending on e Whether the commands used are executed or not executed e Whether to execute or not an interrupt program and a fixed scan execution type program e To execute at the same scan time at every scan use the constant scan function For details of the constant scan function refer to section 7 2 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 15 Self Diagnosis Function 1 What is Self Diagnosis Function a The self diagnosis is a function performed by the High Performance model QCPU itself to diagnose whether there is an error in the High Performance model QCPU b The self diagnosis function s objective is to prevent the High Performance model QCPU erroneous operation and as preventive mainten
503. s of the 1st stage s extension XOF X1F X3F Y4E ygF base unit continue from the last slot number Extensi n Q65B 5 slots occupied of the main base unit cable Pa 6 8 9 2 2 2 gj 2 gt 3 3 3 3 5 O ot Ss ffelf ec Zell __ Empty slot points designated on the PLC system oO a 8gs gso gs a So 2 ES ES Es Setting screen under the parameter mode are te N g a 5 5 S 0 allocated Default 16 points oo z 32 32 32 16 16 T Q points pointsjpointsjpointsjpoints gt a s DO YFO 100 The sl f the 2n s extension AF CF EF YFF 10F es ot numbers of the 2nd stage s exte base unit continue from the last slot number of Q68B 8 slots occupied the 1st stage s extension base unit 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 e oe j ar ae e O fo e oO e D O oO O e fo fo 00 E E E o E oE E E exo a 2 2 Ssieslas 2 2i 2 20 Qe E E58 s8 5 5 5 00 D S O O TD bed oo g 16 32 32 32 16 16 16 points points points points points points points gt X110 X120 130 150 170 Y190 ac S 2 X11F X12F 14F 16F 18F Y19F Y1AF Y1BF The above example shows the case where the intelligent function module has 32 O points The number of I O points may vary depending on the intelligent function module Refer to the manual of the intelligent function module being used and check the number of the I O points before assigning the I O numbers 5 ASSIGNMENT O
504. s requests to remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32 S3 can be executed or not Instruction execution During DI EI flag During El ON when EIl instruction is being executed Instruction execution Comment read not completed Comment read completed Comment read completion flag Switches ON for only one scan when COMRD or PRC instruction is completed S Status change Switches ON while a file is being accessed by the S FWRITE S FREAD COMRD PRC or LEDC instruction File not accessed File being accessed File being accessed S Status change SM704 SM707 SM710 SM711 SM712 SM714 SM715 SM720 SM721 Error detection performed Error detection not performed Request for communication with intelligent device station enabled ON Request for communication with intelligent device station disabled BIN DBIN instruction error disabling flag Turned ON when OPERATION ERROR is suppressed for BIN or DBIN instruction BUSY signal for CC Link communication request registration area Used for determination whether to enable or disable the S communication request for the intelligent device station Instruction connected with A 1S J61QBT11 execution App 8 App 8 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued cu pai tiles 6 Jexecution in executed Goes OFF when CR is input or when input character Instruction ON Instructi
505. s required in terms of safety and control system please consult with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners High Performance Model QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals MODEL QCPU Q U KI E MEL 13JL98 SH NA 080038 C 0106 MEE sfa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE 1 8 12 OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO KU 104 6212 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
506. s which performed a remote STOP remote RUN contact remote communication module etc must be set to RUN The RUN STOP state is described below e RUN State State which repeatedly executes the calculations from step 0 to the END instruction in the sequence program e STOP State State where the sequence program calculations are stopped and the output Y is all OFF 7 FUNCTION 7 6 2 Remote PAUSE MELSEC Q 1 What is Remote PAUSE a b Remote PAUSE performs the High Performance model QCPU PAUSE function from an external source with the CPU RUN STOP key switch at RUN position The PAUSE function stops the High Performance model QCPU calculations while maintaining the ON OFF state of all output Y This can be used to maintain the output Y on even if the High Performance model QCPU is changed to the STOP state in such areas as process control POINT The output Y is turned off upon a stopping error To retain the output even upon a stopping error use I O allocation of PC parameters to set output retention 2 Remote PAUSE Method There are two ways to use remote PAUSE a Remote PAUSE contact SM206 RUN PAUSE state Remote PAUSE Contact Method The remote PUASE contact is set in the GX Developer function parameter mode PLC system setting The device range that can be set is input XO to 1FFF 1 The PAUSE state contact SM204 is turned on when the
507. s will continue even when an error is triggered in the PLC No 2 e The operation mode for the PLC No 1 cannot be amended Out of the group input output settings optional e Sets whether or not the input output states of non control machines are acquired Default Default Do not acquire No check Multiple PLC system optional e Sets the device and number of common CPU memory G points to perform data communications with the automatic refresh process between CPU modules e This is linked from the device number set with the first device to the number of common CPU memory G points and used 3 Send range for each PLC PLC side device r i i TAn onta aon enonot Eca PLC shere meno G Dev statin Dal The 1st common CPU memory G point occupies the points shown IV All station stop by stop error of PLC3 Point Start End Start End h bl b 7 All station stop by stop error of PLC4 No7 1028 0800 OBFF Do D103 in the table below No 2 1024 0800 OBFF D1024 D2047 i No 3 512 0800 OSFF D2048 D2559 Points occupied No 4 512 800 OSFF 02560 03071 The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W R ZR Jsettings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Check Cancel 19 5 16 points 1 point 19 5 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q a Selects CPU Vacant for the slots on which CPU LC nam
508. same operation processing as that after the following operation occurs e Power ON e Resetting using RESET L CLR switch e Remote setting using GX Developer 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 4 6 Data Clear Processing 1 Data clear The High Performance model QCPU clears all data except for the following when a reset operation is performed with RESET L CLR switch or power ON to OFF to ON a Program memory data except for when clear program memory is set at boot specification b Data in the memory card c Device data with latch specification latch clear valid d Device data with latch specification latch clear invalid e File register data Failure history data when special register SD storage Data in c is cleared using the RESET L CLR switch latch clear operation or remote latch clear from the GX Developer function Refer to Section 7 6 4 for details regarding of the remote latch clear 2 Device latch specification a Specify the device latch latch range setting for each device in the device setting of the PLC parameter There are two types of latch range settings 1 Valid latch clear key Sets the latch range that can be cleared with latch clear operation using the RESET L CLR switch and remote latch clear 2 Invalid latch clear key Sets the latch range that can not be cleared even with latch clear operation using the RESET L CLR switch and remote lat
509. scan time so that the surplus time is 0 5 ms or longer 4 If a low speed execution type program execution time has been designated scan execution type program operation is started ignoring the surplus time after completion of low speed END processing This means that the scan time differs in each scan If a low speed execution type program cannot be processed within constant scan surplus time or within the low speed execution type program execution time program execution is temporarily stopped and the remainder of the program is executed in the next scan 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q faa is 1 Asynchronous method 77777 TTT TTT Trt rrr sess esses sss s esses sss 1 Constant scan time setting The low speed execution type program operation which occurs under the following conditions is illustrated below Constant scan time 8ms e Total scan execution type program time 4ms to 5ms e Execution time of low speed type execution program A ims e Execution time of low speed execution type program B 3ms e END processing low speed END processing Oms 0 ms is used to simplify the illustration END END END END processing processing processing processing 0 8 16 l 24 i ms pag e e Wb g a p e ap ek d e e e p a al CTT CTT rT ea E Epal l ae rT BE Cd 4ms 4 5ms 4ms 4ms Scan execution type program rs ms ims ims Low speed execution type program Ai H
510. se of QCPU For the case of AnS X0 P juaG12 DO lt Readout of Q64AD buffer memory s address 12 data U4 G12 WN gt Buffer memory address designation Intelligent function module designation Power supply module QCPU Input 16 points Input 16 points Input 16 points Q64AD 16 points Q64AD 16 points Q62AD 16 points Output 16 points Output 16 points Input output Nos X Y40 to X Y4f e Direct access to link devices LX LY LB LW LSB LSW of MELSECNET 10H network modules e g QU71LP21 is possible without refresh settings x XO P jJ5 wW12 DO Direct readout of the No 5 network module s LW12 link register SS W12 l Link register designation Network No designation Power supply module QCPU QJ71LP21 Input 16 points Input 16 points Q68AD 16 points Q68AD 16 points Q62AD 16 points Output 16 points Output 16 points zZ 2 Q Zz a 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 2 Edge relays simplify pulse conversion processing a The use of a relay V that comes ON at the leading edge of the input condition simplifies pulse processing when a contact index qualification has been made Circuit example M1000 RST Z1H Reset index register Z1 FOR K1000 H Repetition 1000 times designation X0Z1 VOZ1 A MOZ1 gt Pulsing MO to M999 M1000 t
511. serrtstrserrererstrnt 6 2 6 4 C F C COUI ION i aaen 10 24 F Annunciator sssssseeetteeteeeessssrsssssssnnnnnee 10 12 Catalog PLC MeMory ccssesssesseesesseeseesee 6 18 Failure WIStOry iivcictineeiciiwanenvaten ees 7 64 Character String cccscsssesesecseessesteseeeeseesee 4 51 FD Function register 10 31 CIOCK FUNCTION coccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccecececeeeeece 7 9 File reQISlOl iis vie Win a 10 43 Precision ay 2enieane ase tseastestuier ae ctuaeecate tice 7 11 ACCESS MEMNOA seseerserseerseeseeneensien 10 44 Year 2000 problems uu 7 11 Designation Method ccceeeeeeeeees 10 49 COMMON POINTE ein cicennccrcrnaengeiesetas 10 54 Registering sseseeseestsstsstssessesesstsetsseees 10 45 Concept of I O assignment ccscseseeeee 5 8 File SIZ isisccsessosesedactectsteveiuedastivncdtevacacsecvecnsten 6 18 Concept of I O assignment using Fixed scan execution type program 4 31 GX Develo pelea ssa atta co nadaciaacridads 5 12 FlashCards cisias TEATE 6 12 Constant StaritnancrniceRiamanaeataceh 7 2 Floating decimal point data 4 48 CONSTANTS iocos taros aetates ed etanionetatas bet 10 61 Function device FX FY FD 10 31 Counter CG iratacatitcstaspectitecd tenet aaa hi 10 24 FUNCTION VEFSION sessseeesseeeseecesees 13 5 14 4 COUNT PrOCOSSING csssccsecssesseessecseessee 10 24 FX Function INput 1 0 10 31 Maximum counting Speed uu 10 25 FY Function output
512. single file at a maximum of 32 k points It is maximum 128 k points with Q12HCPU or Q25HCPU having 2092 or larger first five digits in the serial number x6 Data can be written or read with the following instructions e S FREAD allows the batch read from a specified file on a memory card e S FWRITE allows the batch write to a specified file on a memory card The table below shows file names and extensions of data files stored in the High Performance model QCPU or on a memory card PARAM QPA Intelli functi ntelligent function module IPARAM QPA parameter Device initial value 7K 2K OK QDI The portions can be named by the user 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 3 Drive Number a The High Performance model QCPU uses drive numbers to control standard RAMs standard ROMs and memory cards The GX Developer specifies a selected memory standard RAM standard ROM or memory card to execute the read write of parameters and program files from and to the High Performance model QCPU There is no need to specify the drive number when using the GX Developer b The table below shows the drive numbers used to specify a selected memory program memory standard RAM standard ROM or memory card when using a sequence program The drive number must be used to specify a selected memory when the read write is made through access from a serial communication module Fremanmenoy 0 High Performance model QCPU built in
513. stalled from the followings e Empty Empty slot e Input Input module e Hi Input Q series corresponding high speed module 1 e Output Output module e I O Mix I O mixed module e Intelligent Intelligent function module or AnS compatible special function module e Interrupt Q series corresponding interruption module 2 If the type is not designated the type of the actually installed module is used Increase4 Increase5 1 Hi input can be set using GX Developer Version 5 products after SW5D5C GPPW E 2 Interrupt can be set using GX Developer Version 6 products after SW6D5C GPPW E 5 12 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q Model name Designate the model name of the installed module with 16 or less characters High Performance model QCPU does not use the designated model name It is used as a user s memo Points Used with High Performance model QCPU To change the number of I O points of each slot select it from the followings 0 0 point e 16 16 points e 32 32 points e 48 48 points e 64 64 points e 128 128 points e 256 256 points e 512 512 points e 1024 1024 points If the number of I O points is not designated for a slot the one of the actually installed module is used Start XY Used with High Performance model QCPU 1 When the I O number of each slot is changed you should designate the head I O number according to the ch
514. standard ROM is shown below In order to write programs and parameters to the High Performance model QCPU standard ROM the valid parameters settings must be designated by the High Performance model QCPU DIP switches SW2 SW3 and the boot settings must be designated in the PLC parameter mode For details regarding High Performance model QCPU DIP switches refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Hardware Design and Maintenance amp Inspection When writing programs and parameters to the High Performance model QCPU program memory the steps indicated by asterisks below are not required Procedural steps shown in C3 boxes are performed at the GX Developer and those shown in 1 boxes are performed in the High Performance model QCPU Start Start the GX Developer S Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual Mode selection screen is displayed Change the number of device points Hie ie a Refer to Section 10 1 2 Change the number of device points at the device setting item in the PLC parameter CoS SASS SaaS SaaS SS See Sa Create the program whichis to be executed in the CPU 12 2 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU MELSEC Q Use the device initial value g Refer to Section 10 13 2 Right click on the device memory and make a data entry for device initial values Right click on a devic
515. stant scan waitin Scan execution type program Synchronous method hi S yp P g time is generated operation is started The low speed execution p The low speed execution type program is re executed 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 1 If a constant scan time has been designated the low speed execution type program will be executed repeatedly during the constant scan s surplus time Therefore the low speed execution type program s execution time varies from scan to scan As the low speed execution type program will not be executed at all if the constant scan s surplus time is 0 5 ms or less a constant scan time setting should be designated which provides a surplus time of more than 0 5 ms 2 If a low speed execution type program execution time has been designated the low speed execution type program will be executed repeatedly in accordance with that time setting Therefore the scan time will vary from scan to scan x3 If a constant scan time has been designated the surplus time after completion of low speed END processing is waiting time and execution of ascan execution type program starts when the constant scan time has elapsed This means that the scan time is constant in each scan However if the surplus time after the constant scan is less than 0 5 ms low speed execution type programs cannot be executed If using a low speed execution type program set the constant
516. start X and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way r Standard setting r Base mode Auo Detail 8 fixation 12 fixation me settings should be set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC setting Default Check End Cancel Base model name ee model name Extention cable i settings should be set as same when using multiple PLC Ea cme 3 Precautions a The system will be adversely affected by noise etc when the input response time is set to high speed Set the input response time in consideration of the environment in which the system is being used b The GX Developer Version 5 SW5D5C GPPW E or later is required when changing the response time of the high speed input module The input response time of the high speed input module cannot be amended with the GX Developer Version 4 SW4D5C GPPW E Fixed at 0 2 ms default setting c The input response speed setting is valid in the following cases e After the PLC is turned on e When the High Performance model QCPU is reset 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 7 3 Selecting the response time of the interrupt module 1 Selecting the response time of the interrupt modu
517. state PAUSE state Fig 7 7 PAUSE Time Chart with GX Developer function 3 Precaution To set the output Y ON OFF status when change to the PAUSE state perform an interlock with the PAUSE state contact SM204 M20 Y70 ON OFF is determined with the k Y070 on OFF of the M20 in the PAUSE state x000 SM204 i lt Y071 Turns off at PAUSE state lt Y072 Turns on at PAUSE state SM204 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 6 3 Remote RESET 1 What is Remote RESET a The remote RESET resets the High Performance model QCPU from an external source when the High Performance model QCPU is at STOP state Even if the High Performance model QCPU RUN STOP key switch is at RUN the reset can be performed when the High Performance model QCPU is stopped and an error that can be detected by the self diagnosis function occurs b Remote RESET can reset the High Performance model QCPU remotely when an error occurs for which the High Performance model QCPU cannot be operated directly Remote RESET can be executed only at the STOP state When the High Performance model QCPU is at RUN state use Remote STOP to arrange the STOP state 2 Remote RESET Method The remote RESET can only be performed from the GX Developer function or serial communication module operation To perform the remote RESET follow the following steps a Inthe PLC System sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box turn on the Allow check box in the
518. ster and LED affected by the error are set to the state before the error occurred When the same error occurs after canceling the error it is logged again in the failure history c Cancellation of annunciator For the cancellation of the annunciator detected multiple times only the first detected F is canceled When error cancellation is performed by storing the code of the error to cancel is stored in SD50 the lower 2 digits of the code number is ignored Example When 2100 and 2111 occur in the error code and error code 2100 is canceled error code 2111 is canceled as well 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 16 Failure History The High Performance model QCPU can store the failure history results detected from the self diagnosis function and the time in the memory The detection time uses the High Performance model QCPU internal clock so make sure to set the correct time when first using the High Performance model QCPU 1 Storage Area a The latest 16 failures are stored in the latched High Performance model QCPU failure history storage memory b When storing more than 16 the history can be stored in the memory card file using the PLC parameter PLC RAS c When the history count of the parameter and memory card are different when the following operation is performed clear the contents of the memory card history file then transfer the 16 failure data in the High Performance model QCPU failure history storage m
519. ster size of the currently selected file register file is stored in SD647 10 50 10 50 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q c Checking the file register size 1 Check The file register size used for each sequence program 2 Determine if the file register size exceeds the number of points used on the basis of the total file register size set in SD647 in the sequence program Program example 1 The file register range of use is checked at the beginning of each program Designates 4k points SM400 lt SD647 K4 MO Final file register range check MO e YO Alarm processing MO Transfer command 4 MOVP K4x20 RO H Writing to file register Program example 2 The file register range of use is checked after executing the QDRSET instruction File register is changed to drive 1 ABCD Final file register range check lt SD647 K4 lt Mo lt Yo MO Transfer command Alarm processing MOVP K4X20 Ro Writing to file register Program example 3 For block switching SM400 lt SD647 k33 1 MO gt Final file register range MO check YO Alarm processing MO Block switching command RSET K1 H Switching to block 1 3 Deleting a File Register To erase unwanted file register files perform the PLC data deletion on line 10 51 10 51 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 8 Nesting N 1 Definition Nesting devices are used to nest MC or MCR master control inst
520. such as emergency stop protective circuits positioning upper and lower limits switches and interlocking forward reverse operations 2 When the PLC detects the following problems it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of a In the case of b it will stop calculation and hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting a The power supply module has over current protection equipment and over voltage protection equipment b The PLC CPUs self diagnostic functions such as the watchdog timer error detect problems In addition all output will be turned on when there are problems that the PLC CPU cannot detect such as in the I O controller Build a fail safe circuit exterior to the PLC that will make sure the equipment operates safely at such times Refer to LOADING AND INSTALLATION in QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for example fail safe circuits 3 Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the outputs module relay or transistor So build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any single outputs that could cause serious trouble Design Precautions lt gt DANGER e When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short circuited load flows in the output module for a long time it may cause smoke or fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as fuse e Build a circuit that turns on the exte
521. t is OFF the QCPU enters the RUN state 2 When the remote RUN contact is ON the QCPU enters the STOP state Step 0 gt END FF Remote RUN contact o QCPU RUN STOP state b FF GX Developer Q Serial STOP state Fig 7 4 Time Chart for RUN STOP with Remote RUN Contact Method using the GX Developer function serial communication module etc QCPU RUN STOP can be performed by the remote RUN STOP operation from the GX Developer function serial communication module etc The GX Developer operation is performed with on line remote operations The serial communication module and Ethernet interface module are controlled by commands complying with the MC protocol For details of the MC protocol refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual Step 0 Step 0 ON Remote STOP command Remote RUN command OFF QCPU RUN STOP state STOP state Fig 7 5 Remote RUN STOP Time Chart using GX Developer serial communication module 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Precautions a Take note of the following because STOP has priority in High Performance model QCPU 1 The High Performance model QCPU enters the STOP state when remote STOP is performed from remote RUN contact GX Developer function or serial communication module 2 When High Performance model QCPU is set to the STOP state with remote STOP all external factor
522. t programs Section 4 1 3 File A Main routine Program FEND H PO Sub routine program RET H Interrupt program IRET H END H For details regarding the sequence instructions basic instructions and application instructions refer to the QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 2 Sequence program writing format Programming for sequence programs is possible using either ladder mode or list mode a Ladder mode The ladder mode is based on the relay control sequence ladder Programming expressions are similar to the relay control sequence ladder e Relay symbolic language programming occurs in ladder block units A ladder block is the smallest unit of sequence program processing with the ladder beginning from the left bus and ending at the right bus Left bus a Contact b Contact Coil output Right bus Ladder blocks XO to X5 _ Indicate inputs Y20 to Y24 Indicate outputs Fig 4 1 Ladder Block b List mode The list mode uses dedicated instructions instead of the contact symbols coil symbols etc used in the ladder mode Contact a contact b and coil instructions are as follows acontact LD AND OR e b contact LDI ANI ORI SCO erea OUT 2 Program processing Sequence programs are processed in order beginning from step 0 a
523. ta anhacQed anhitieahlaviatie a ee an 4 24 SD534 SD535 Low speed scan time Maximum ValUC eevee alan E Gl 4 24 Self diagnosis function ceceeeeereteee 7 59 SEQUENCE PFOQrAM eceeceeeeceeteeteeeeeteeeees 4 1 Serial NOs err ran cetehtasreedd 1 1 Setting range in the internal user device 10 3 Setting the number of stages cceseee 5 2 SFC block device BL seceeeeeeees 10 58 SFC transition device TR 10 58 Single precision floating decimal point data 4 48 Size File Capacity c cecceeeceseeeeeteeees 6 2 SM Special relay c cecceeseeeeeeeeeeees 10 33 SM415 2n ms clock sassen 8 9 Special link register SW cceeeeeeee 10 30 Special link relay SB eeeeeeeeeeee 10 18 Special register SD ccceeeeeeeeeees 10 34 Special relay SM essecseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 10 33 SRAM Gard istvsescrtirsset cast a aeaa aaa 6 11 Index 3 ST Retentive timer OUT ST 2 10 21 Stand by type program ecceceseeeeeeeeeees 4 25 Standard RAM renra A 6 9 Standard RAM memory capacity 0 0 6 9 Standard ROM ccccscccsesseeseeeseesneeseeees 6 8 Step relay S rainn eninin i ink 10 18 Sub routine program s esseseseeseseeersreersreeese 4 4 SW Special link register ceceeeeeee 10 30 Switch setting of intelligent function module 7 21 System PrOtect eraa 7 65 T DEAK ini p I E beeteset deen beets
524. ta to output modules or intelligent function modules or write in the buffer memory of intelligent function modules 17 1 17 1 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES MELSEC Q 1 Loading input X from input modules and intelligent function modules The Out of group input output settings setting in the PLC parameter s multiple PLC settings determines whether input can be loaded from input modules and intelligent function modules being controlled by other machines Multiple PLC settings x r No of PLC m Out of group input output settings Input condition of group outside is T No of PLC x Operating mode Error operation mode at the stop of PLC Change screens Setting I All station stop by stop error of PLCI Input outside of group setting O Input condition of group outside is taken Do not load input condition outside of group setting Input condition of group outside is taken Load input condition outside of group setting T Output condition of group outside is taken r Refresh settings I7 Al station stop by stop error of PLC2 pyc Send tonne fo each ae eae IV All station stop by stop error of PLC3 Point Start End Stat End 7 All station stop by stop error of PLC4 No 1 a No 2 0 No 3 0 Nod a The applicable device of head device is B M Y D W RZR
525. tall GX Developer and Motion CPU software package in a single PC e See the manual of the PC CPU module for the connection between the PC CPU module and peripheral modules 14 2 14 2 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q Main base unit Q312B 0123 4 56 7 8 9 10 11 Slot No Extension cable Power supply module l xtenison base unit Q612B The figure shows the configuration 1 extension 12131415 16171819 2223 when 32 input output modules are Stages loaded to each slot m 120 140 60 1 80 1 AO Cofi E0 200 260 280 SESTSTSTSIS ISS IS TS S S 1 5F 17F SF BF DFH FFI21F 23F l za g Power supply module Extension base unit Q68B Extension base unit QA1S68B 2 extension 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 5 extension 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 stages stages 2C0RE0B00 8340 B60 380 SCOSE0 600 620 B5EB7FB9F ee SFFI61 F 63F Power supply module Extension base unit Q68B xtension base unit QA1S68B 3 extension J 32 36 6 extension 53 54 57 stages stages ISAO 1440460480 2 9 640 660 6C06E0 700 7201 i SIS 6FF 71F 73F Power supply module Extension base uni Extension base unit QA1S65B 4 extension Z 4041 42 43 44 7 extension Jf 616263 stages stages JA COKE0 500 520
526. tandard ROM or memory card When multiple programs are executed by the High Performance model QCPU program name file name and execute type settings of the programs must be designated Control by one program Control by separating into multiple programs Program A Be ke ee Ae ae ge lees i Control contents A Control contents A escent eee 4 Y a Rant ese 5 Program B Store by separating the code according to control contents Control contents B l 1 1 l l 1 l Y Y Program n Control contents n 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION MELSEC Q CONDITIONS 1 Execute Type Setting a To execute several programs specify a Program name and Execute type of each program in the Program Setting sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box High Performance model QCPU will execute selected programs in the order of specified Execute Type setting PLC name PLI uster F file PLCR De 9g i 7 6 1 Program name This column is used to specify a program name file name of the program to be executed by High Performance model QCPU 2 Execute type This column is used to specify the execute type of the program defined in the Program name column See Section b 3 Fixed scan This column is used to specify time intervals at which to an execution type program The Fixed
527. tatus right before changing to STOP status Clear the output Y status Execute the sequence program calculations Fig 7 3 Processing when Change from STOP Status to RUN Status 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Setting the Output Y Status when Changing from STOP Status to RUN Status The output Y status before the STOP status when switching from STOP status to Run status can be set in the PLC System sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box Qn H Parameter x PLC name J PLC file PLC RAS Device Program Boot file 170 assignment Timer limit setup Low fi00 j Common pointer P After 0 4095 aped ms 1ms 1000ms High 10 0 O 1ms 100 speed Tabs ud Number of empty slots 76 Points RUN PALISE contacts System interrupt settings Output mode setting GML ts Petal dae Interrupt counter start No 0 768 PAUSE Xx 0 1 FFF 128 fixed at stop to RUN scan interval 100 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms Remote reset 3 129 fixed I Allow scan interval 40 0 ms 0 5ms 1000ms 130 fixed Aari mode at STOP to RUN Seta 20 0 ms D 5ms 1000ms Previous state 131 fixed TE C Recalculate output is 1 scan later scan interval ms 0 5ms 1000ms Floating point arithmetic processing Interrupt program 7 Fixed scan program setting Perform internal arithmetic operations Vv raceal ieee T High speed execution Intelligent functional module setting Unit synchronization MV Synchronize intelligent module s pulse up Interrupt pointer setti
528. te Lower byte The software version is stored D9060 SD1060 SD392 Software version t in the higher byte position internal software ae oe valine For version A for example 41H is stored Note The software version of the initial system may differ from the version indicated by the version information printed on the rear of the case check data automatically to make communication checks request request registration AX registrtion area jarea APPENDICES ACPU Special Special Register after Conversion Conversion D9091 SD1091 D9100 SD1100 App 49 Special Register for Modification Register for D9085 SD1085 setting time check value D9094 SD1094 SD251 number for replacement MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Meaning Details CPU Sets the time check time of the data link instructions ZNRD ZNWR for the MELSECNET 10 Setting range 1 s to 65535 s 1 to 65535 Setting unit 1s Default value 10 s If O has been set default 10 sis applied Default value 10s Number of Number of special lt r functions functions modules KOs over over ae rror If diagnosis erileyeto ee g Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error L lt n code detailed error code Stores upper 2 digits of the head I O address of I O modules to be loaded or unloaded during online mode in BIN code For details refer to the manual of each microcompu ter progra
529. te Presence absenc SM1103 SM323 e of continuous transition App 14 M9103 Meaning Other than when P set being requested P set being requested Divided processing not underway During divided processing Batch processing Divided processing Read time not shortened Read time shortened Empty spaces in communication request registration area No empty spaces in communication request registration area Error check executed No error check No error Error Replacement No replacement SFC programs not used SFC programs used SFC programs stop SFC programs start Initial Start Continue Continuous transition not effective Continuous transition effective Details Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete e Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing and turned off at completion of divided processing Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing e Turned ON to shorten the search time in the A8UPU A8PUJ In this case the scan time is extended by 10 The ASUPU A8PUJ cannot be used in the QCPU QnACPU special relays e Indication of communication enable disable to remote terminal modules
530. te PAUSE operation is being performed by one GX Developer the PAUSE status will remain active even if a remote STOP remote RUN operation is attempted by another GX Developer When a remote RUN operation is performed by the GX Developer that is performing a remote PAUSE operation and then that remote operation is cancelled a new remote operation can be performed by another GX Developer 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 7 Selecting the Response Time of the Q series Compatible Input Module and Interrupt Module I O Response Time 7 7 1 Selecting the response time of the input module 1 Selecting the Input Response Time The input response time of a Q series compatible input module can be set to a desired response time 1 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms or 70 ms The input module reads external inputs at the specified response time The default value of an input response time is 10 ms ON External input al Input module ON te TT T Input response time 2 Setting the Input Response Time Select Input In the I O Assignment sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box specify the desired input response time Select Input in the type column of a slot for which to specify the desired input response time Select Detail Setting Select Input response time
531. ted c Choose Online Monitor Scan time measurement to open the Scan time Measurement dialog box Scantime measurement MAIN1 Measurement limit ea ar Start step 52 End step fios so Scantime Close Tst time ms Present ms Most ms Least ms d Click on the Start button Scantime measurement MAIN1 Measurement limit SET art Start step End step i Scantime Close 1st time 0 100 ms Present 0 100 ms Most 0 100 ms Least 0 100 ms 3 Precautions a Set the values to be the starting step lt complete step b The time to skip to another program file cannot be measured c If the measurement time is less than 0 100 ms 0 000 ms is displayed d If ameasurement range is specified between the FOR instruction and the NEXT instruction scan time will show the execution time of making a measurement in the measurement range between specified steps 7 FUNCTION 7 12 Sampling Trace Function MELSEC Q 1 Because the trace data and trace results are stored in the SRAM card Q2MEM 1MBS during sampling trace the SRAM card is necessary After installing the SRAM card to the High Performance model QCPU execute sampling trace 2 Because the trace data and trace results are not stored in the flash card and ATA card sampling trace is not executed if the flash card Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF or ATA card Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA is installed
532. the 65th or subsequent slots Be sure to install modules within the range of 64 slots An error does not occur as long as all modules are installed within the range of 64 slots even if the total number of slots of the main and extension base units results in 65 slots or more e g When 6 12 slot base units are installed 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 lt Slot No a Setting of extension 2 T n Pie 312B stage ate Refer to Section 5 2 me 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 coi Xe O oo 3 n 38 5 Q612B oo 00 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 00 oxy 2 amp n To 5 Q612B WF e 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 oo eRe Q 3 S 5 Q612B 38 He 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 0o 56 Q alk 2 Q612B z see a 60 61 62 63 0o oo Pe oo S ajaaa 32 2 32 xy 5 5 S s sis s s s s Oetek 2o AIJA Jaala jojo Z ig cr Y Module can be installed Module cannot be installed When module is installed an error occurs 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 5 2 Installing Extension Base Units and Setting the Number of Stages There are two types of extension base units Q5__ B Q6__B for the installation of Q series modules and QA1S6 _B for the installation of AnS ser
533. the next scan even when there is the excess time M9102 format change Instruction execution S Initial U S Initial U App 5 APPENDICES 3 System clocks counters Set by ON S SM400 Always ON OFF e Normally is ON Every END M90 processing SM401 Always OFF ON e Normally is OFF y OFF y ON OFF4 gt ON for 1 scan hee only after RUN After RUN OFF Shs for 1 scan only Low speed execution type SM404 SM405 program SM409 ON for 1 scan only after RUN Low speed execution type program After RUN OFF SM410 0 1 second clock ic SM411 0 2 second clock SM412 1 second clock M413 2 second clock a SM414 2n second clock SM415 2n ms clock can eer E for 1 scan only SM420 User timing clock No 0 SM421 User timing clock No 1 SM422 User timing clock No 0 3 SM423 i timing clock User timing clock 1 scan ON gt OFF 1 scan ON OFF gt e 0 01 second clock 0 005 sec 0 005 sec 0 1sec 0 5 sec 2 App 6 Special Relay List After RUN ON for 1 scan only e This connection can be used for scan execution type programs only After RUN OFF for 1 scan only e This connection can be used for scan execution type programs only After RUN ON for 1 scan only This connection can be used for low speed execution type programs only After RUN OFF for 1 scan onl
534. the slots on which they are mounted and cannot be amended The table below shows the I O number allocated to each CPU module when the multiple CPU system is composed CPU modul CPU slot Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 mounting position First I O number 3E00H 3E10H 3E20H 3E30H The CPU modules I O numbers are used in the following cases e When writing data in the host station s common CPU memory with the S TO command 1 e When reading data from other machines common CPU memory with the FROM command 1 e When reading data from other machines common CPU memory with the intelligent function module device U_ G_ 1 e When specifying the High Performance model QCPU to be accessed with the Ethernet module 1 e When specifying the High Performance model QCPU to be accessed with the serial communication module 3 1 Refer to Chapter 16 for details on among High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU and PC CPU x2 Refer to the Ethernet module s manual for details on accessing the High Performance model QCPU with the Ethernet module x3 Refer to the serial communication module s manual for details on accessing the High Performance model QCPU with the serial communication module 15 2 15 ALLOCATING MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM I O NUMBERS MELSEC Q 15 2 Purpose of PC Parameter I O Allocations with the GX Developer I O allocations are performed with the GX Developer in the following cases 1 Setting up control PLCs Sets up the High
535. through a sequence program but no change is made to the data The use of file registers allows a sequence program to read a maximum of 1018 k points of data written by the High Performance model QCPU 3 The ATA card is used for PLC user data general purpose data Access to PLC user data stored on the ATA card can be made in CSV format binary format by using a file access instruction e g FWRITE in a sequence program 6 3 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 2 Types of Data Stored in the High Performance model QCPU Memory or on the Memory Card The table below shows the type of data stored in a standard RAM standard ROM or on a memory card High Performance model Memory QCPU Built In Card RAM ea Card ROM oe P St ap rd Standard Remarks at Sal i SRAM Card Flash Fash Cara ATA Card aed a Parameter Rowe eis 1 data drive module al Program pee pe pepe per poems Of fo fs fo eet ae E mees j L L O A 1 a Local device a a E E a oe E E E E ne a ee ee ae ee ee ee Ee e Needed Stored X Not stored REMARK x1 To execute a program requires to boot the program memory 2 Data can be written by operating from the GX Developer Device comments cannot be used in an instruction of a sequence program 3 The read from a sequence program requires several scans x4 A sequence program allows the read only No data can be written through access from a sequence program x5 A standard RAM hold a
536. ting outside of the group at the multiple PLC settings in PLC Parameter The access ranges for control PLC by the multiple PLC system and non control PLCs are shown below I O setting outside of the group Access target Control PLC gt Disabled Enabled E E E tees a o a E T E e The function version of intelligent function modules can be confirmed with the rated name plate on the intelligent function module and with the GX Developer s system monitor product information list see Section 2 3 e Refer to Section 14 2 4 for details on restrictions on the number that can be used with intelligent function modules 14 8 14 8 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS 14 2 3 Limitations when function modules 1 2 MELSEC Q mounting AnS series corresponding I O modules and special Usable I O modules and special function modules AnS series corresponding I O modules and special function modules compact types can be used with the High Performance model QCPU Control PLCs Only one of the AnS series corresponding I O modules or special function module between the PLCs No 1 and No 4 can be controlled control PLC when configuring a multiple PLC system For example if the control PLC is set up as the PLC No 2 as shown in the illustration below then every slot s control PLC on which I O modules and special function modules that support the AnS series are mounted are set as the PLC No 2 A PARAMETER ERROR error
537. ting using GX Configurator 1 Initial and automatic refresh settings of intelligent function modules Installing the GX Configurator compatible with the intelligent function module enables the initial setting and automatic refresh setting with GX Developer When the initial setting and automatic refresh setting of the intelligent function module is designated with GX Developer you can write read data without creating the program for the communication with the intelligent function module Moreover you can conduct the initial setting or automatic refresh setting without designating the buffer memory address of the intelligent function module 2 Setting using the GX Configurator This section describes the example to set the initial setting and automatic refresh setting of A D conversion module Q64AD a Initial setting The initial setting of Q64AD offers the following four settings e Designation of enable disable A D conversion e Designation of sampling averaging processing e Designation of time averaging execution averaging e Designation of average time average execution The initial setting of Q64AD is designated on the following initial setting screen of GX Configurator Initial setting screen Initial setting BE Module information Module model name Q644D Start 170 No 0000 Module type A D Conversion Module Setting item Setting value CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting Enable CH1 Sampling process averaging process
538. tion Timing chart ON x0 OFF f t ON When Z1 0 VO OFF l ON MO OFF f i 1 Scan ON X1 OFF ON 1 scan ON at X1 leading edge When Z1 1 V1 OFF ON M1 OFF ii 1 Scan 1 1 The ON OFF information for XOZ1 is stored at the VOZ1 edge relay 10 16 For example the XO ON OFF information is stored at VO and the X1 ON OFF information is stored at V1 10 16 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 7 Link relays B 1 Definition a A link relay is the High Performance model QCPU relay used to refresh the High Performance model QCPU from the MELSECNET H network module s link relay LB and to refresh the MELSECNET H network module s link relay LB from the High Performance model QCPU data High Performance model QCPU MELSECNET H network module Link relay Link relay BO LBO Link refresh Link refresh setting range KR E E a Internal relays or latch relays can be used for data ranges not used by the MELSECNET H network system e Range where no link relay latch occurs Internal relay e Range where link relay latch occurs Latch relay b There are no restrictions regarding the number of contacts N O contacts N C contacts used in the program No restrictions regarding the quantity used BO switches ON at X0 OFF to ON The link relay BO ON can only be used for internal QOPU processing and cannot be output externally Y20 BO ON OFF information is output from the output module i to a
539. tion Trace status arn Settings Current Read file Start trace Pla ea C Stop trace Execute Total Times mes Write file Execute trigger After trigger Times Times C Regist trace 5 Delete file Trace Start monitor For start trace from Program Read from PLC Trace data Conditions Results storing dest Write to PLC Target memory J zj File name y AN Displays only when Trace result OE Display Status is selected Execute by overwriting the conditions on the PLC side Execute by following conditions written on the PLC side Operation Trace data Condition Results storing dest and Trace condition can be set when Execute and Status is displayed 1 From the Operation select one of the following e Start trace The trace is started Starts the count for trace count e Stop trace The trace is interrupted The trace count and number of times after trigger are cleared When restarting trace select Start trace again e Execute trigger Starts to count the number of times after trigger The trace is complete when the traces are performed to the number of times after trigger e Regist trace Registers trace data when a program is executed 2 Inthe Trace data Conditions Results storing dest section specify a filename of a file in which to store trace data and trace conditions Trace conditions are also stored in a selected file with a specified filename 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q
540. tion is executed the processing will enter into a stand by status for the write during RUN If the write during RUN is executed while the PLOAD PUNLOAD or PSWAP instruction is executed the execution of the instruction is delayed until the write during RUN is executed 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q e The capacity of a High Performance model QCPU s program file is a sum of the capacity of the program created and steps used for the write during RUN The write during RUN is executed when the capacity of a program file is increased If the capacity of a program file becomes larger than what it was before steps can be assigned for the write during RUN This means that the write during RUN can be executed only when enough space is available in a user memory area If steps are assigned again while the write during RUN is executed scan time could be extended for a value shown below in the table Controls are interrupted for a value shown below in the table Step for Write During RUN CPU Type A l If Not Changed If Assigned Again QnCPU QnHCPU f High Performance model QCPU does not work correctly if the following instructions are written during RUN write 1 Trailing edge instruction If the execution conditions of the following trailing edge instructions are not arranged upon completion of writing the trailing edge instruction is executed e LDF e ANDF ORF e MEF e PLF 2 Leading edge instruction If the execution conditions for leading ed
541. tion is satisfied 2 Sub routine program management Sub routine programs are created after the main routine program after FEND instruction and the combination of main and sub routine programs can be managed as one program a When created after the main routine program e A sub routine program is created between the main routine program s FEND and END instructions e Because there are no restrictions regarding the order in which sub routine programs are created there is no need to set the pointers in ascending order when creating multiple sub routine programs e Either a local pointer or a common pointer may be used High Performance model QCPU Program A Program memory Standard ROM Memory card Main routine program Write gt Program A k m Pot lt yi0 gt H RET H vi RET yi2 gt H RET Sub routine lt program END See Section 10 9 for details regarding local and common pointers See Section 10 8 for details regarding sub routine program nesting 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q b Using the sub routine program as a separate program Sub routine programs can also be managed as separate discrete programs stand by type programs See Section 4 2 4 for details regarding stand by type programs 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS
542. tion to read data from other machine as necessary Instructions dedicated to Motion can be used to issue control commands from the High Performance model QCPU to the Motion CPU 1 The High Performance model QCPU can issue instructions dedicated to communication between multiple PLCs to read or write device data from to the Motion CPU or PC CPU module The High Performance model QCPU can issue events to the PC CPU module 2 1 See the manual of the Motion CPU for instructions dedicated to Motion 2 See the manuals of Motion CPU and PC CPU module for instructions dedicated to the communication between multiple PLCs 13 2 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEMS MELSEC Q 13 2 Outline of Multiple PLC Systems 1 What is a multiple PLC system a A multiple PLC system is a system in which main base units are mounted on several maximum four High Performance model QCPUs and motion CPU in order to control the I O modules and intelligent function modules PLC CPU Motion CPU PC CPU i TOES al The allowable CPU modules are shown in the table below PLC CPU Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Motion CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU PC CPU module PPC CPU686 MS 64 PPC CPU686 MS 128 Choose the best CPU modules according to the system size and application to configure the system It is necessary to set control PLC setup which High Performance model QCPU and motion CPUs are to control which I O modules and i
543. tis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced
544. to 15 stations can be set as the station monitor file but the program space will be reduced e The detailed condition setting for the monitoring can only be set for one user f The monitoring detailed condition setting can only be set in circuit monitor g When the same device is specified as the monitor condition and monitor stop condition specify ON or OFF h The monitoring conditions will not be established unless the following specified steps commands are executed when Step No has been specified for the monitoring conditions 1 When skipping steps specified with the CJ command the SCJ command and the JMP command 2 When the specified step is the END command the FEND command exists while the program is running and the END command is not executed i Do not reset the High Performance model QCPU while monitoring conditions are being registered 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 9 2 Monitoring test for local device 1 Monitoring and Testing Local Devices a Local devices specified in the Device sheet of the PLC Parameter dialog box can be monitored or tested by operating from the GX Developer This function is useful when debugging a program and monitoring local devices in a program monitored by the GX Developer See Section 10 13 1 for local devices b Monitoring the Local Devices The table below shows the status of three programs A B and C being executed on the High Performance model QCPU with local devices DO
545. to enable interactive transmission between the CPU modules and the I O modules and intelligent function modules and O numbers to enable interactive transmission between the CPU modules 15 1 1 I O modules and intelligent function module I O numbers The difference with single CPU systems is the 00H position slot of the I O number with multiple PLC systems However the concept behind the sequence for allocating I O numbers the I O numba for each slot and the I O numbers for vacant slots is the same for both types of system Refer to Chapter 5 prang 1 O Numbers for details on the concept behind the sequence for allocating I O numbers the I O numbers for each slot and the I O numbers for vacant slots 1 OOH position for I O numbers a The number of slots set with the PLC parameters multiple PLC settings are occupied by the CPU modules on the multiple PLC system b The I O modules and intelligent function modules are mounted from the right of the slots occupied by the CPU modules c Input pat number of a system without PC CPU module The I O number for the I O modules and intelligent function modules mounted from the right of the slots occupied by the CPU modules is set as 00H and consecutive numbers are then allocated sequentially to the right EEES 1 Example Two modules are mounted 01234567 QCPU Q eN gt wn z e a gt I O number 00x 2 Example Three modules are mounted and
546. to start of next scan in 100 us units Range of 000 to 900 S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU Corresponding D9017 format change D9018 format change D9019 format change App 36 APPENDICES elie Constant scan wait time Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs Execution time for low speed execution type programs Scan program execution time Service interval measurement module Service interval time App 37 Constant scan wait time in 1 ms units Constant scan wait time in 100 us units Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs in 1 ms units Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs in 100 us units Execution time for low speed execution type programs in 1 ms units Execution time for low speed execution type programs in 100 us units Scan program execution time in 1 ms units Scan program execution time in 100 us units Unit module No Module service interval in 1 ms units Module service interval in 100 us units Special Register List Continued e Stores wait time when constant scan time has been set in 1 ms units Range from 0 to 65535 e Stores wait time when constant scan time has been set in 100 us units Ra
547. tor Add the explanation of the following functions of which serial number s top five digits were added in 02092 0209275 2k 25 3K 25 3x 25 3K x gt K K A e Automatic writing to the standard ROM e Forced ON OFF correspondence for external I O e Remote password setting e Increment of Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU standard RAM capacity e MELSECNET H remote I O network correspondence e Interrupt module QI60 correspondence Correction Section 1 1 Section 2 1 2 2 Chapter 3 Section 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 6 Section 5 2 5 3 Section 6 1 6 9 3 Section 7 3 3 4 7 6 5 7 8 7 14 7 18 7 19 1 7 20 1 Chapter 9 Section 10 2 10 10 Section 11 3 Appendix 1 2 Addition Section 2 3 Section 4 1 3 4 2 5 Section 5 4 5 5 2 5 6 2 Section 6 6 6 6 2 6 7 Section 7 6 3 7 7 2 7 7 3 7 9 1 7 9 3 7 16 7 17 7 17 2 7 20 1 Section 10 10 Jun 2001 SH NA 080038 C The explanation of the multi PLC system added to the function version B of the QCPU was added to Chapters 13 to 19 General name for QCPU was changed to the High Performance model QCPU The Q52B and Q55B extension base units and PC CPU module were added Overall correction Japanese Manual Version SH 080020 E This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial p
548. tored in SDO The default value of the watchdog timer is 200 ms The setting range is 10 to 2000 ms 10ms modules 2 Watchdog Timer Setting and Reset a b The PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter resets the watchdog timer High Performance model QCPU resets the watchdog timer when the END instruction is executed 1 When the END FEND instruction is executed within the set value of the watchdog timer in the sequence program and the High Performance model QCPU is operating correctly the watchdog timer does not time out 2 When there is a High Performance model QCPU hardware failure or the sequence program scan time is too long and the END FEND instruction could not be executed within the set watchdog timer value the watchdog timer times out 3 Precautions a b An error of 0 to 10 ms occurs in the measurement time of the watchdog timer Set the watchdog timer for a desired value by taking such an error into account The watchdog timer is reset with the WDT instruction in the sequence program If the watchdog timer expires while the FOR and NEXT instructions are repetitiously executed reset the watchdog time with the WDT instruction FOR K1000 ial Program for repetition processing Repetition MO 1000 times H C WDT WDT reset NEXT 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q c The scan time value is not reset even if the watchdog timer is reset in the sequence program The scan time value i
549. total number of points 16 Timer retentive counter size x 18 Word c For word devices For data registers D and link registers W 16 points are calculated as 16 words D W total number of points 16 Word device size x 16 Word POINT 1 When an internal user device s number of usable points setting is changed the following files which were created under the previous setting cannot be used as they are e The sequence program e The SFC program After changing the setting the sequence program and SFC program must be read from the High Performance model QCPU to GX Developer and then they must be written back to the High Performance model QCPU again 10 4 10 4 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 2 1 Inputs X 1 Definition a Inputs are commands or data transmitted to the High Performance model QCPU from a peripheral device by push button switches selector switches limit switches digital switches etc Push button switch Selector switch Input X Sequence operation Digital switch b The input point is the Xn virtual relay inside the High Performance model QCPU with the program using the Xn s N O contact or N C contact Virtual relay Programmable controller Input ladder external device Program Figure 10 1 Inputs X c There are no restrictions regarding the number of Xn N O contacts and N C co
550. transmission device data for the PLC No 1 is transferred across to the host machine s common memory automatic refresh area 4 The data in the PLC No 2 common memory automatic refresh area is transferred across to B20 to B3F in the host machine The processes performed during the PLC No 2 END process 2 The B20 to B3F transmission device data for the PLC No 2 is transferred across to the host machine s common memory automatic refresh area 3 The data in the PLC No 1 common memory automatic refresh area is transferred across to BO to B1F in the host machine b Executing automatic refresh Automatic refresh is executed when the CPU module is in the RUN status the STOP status or the PAUSE status Automatic refresh cannot be performed when a stop error has been triggered in the CPU module If a stop error occurs on one module the other modules for which an error has not occurred will save the data prior to the stop error being triggered For example if a stop error occurs in the No 2 machine when B20 is ON the B20 in the No 1 machine will remain at ON as shown in the operation outline in fig a c When automatic refresh is carried out it is necessary to set the points to be transmitted by each CPU and the device in which the data is to be stored the device that will perform automatic refresh with the PLC parameter multiple PLC settings 16 2 16 2 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CPU MODULES IN MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q
551. tration below are explained here GX Developer gt lo a oa e e leo 2 2 Q amp I dcl of s 3 S3 5 53 2 ol log oloo e o o 42 2222 191 19 19 9 EJE ESEJE 2 jaja jalal S5 5 lies 5 5 2 Z8 2j S5 Tol S 5 js au 2 sz EE 0 9 zi zi oOo Zz Zz a 2 N pas D fo A No 2 intelligent function module No 3 input module No 3 output module No 4 input module No 4 output module 19 3 19 3 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE PLC SYSTEM MELSEC Q 19 2 2 Creating new systems GX Developer started up Refer to the GX Developer operating manual PC parameter window on the Refer to the GX Developer operating manual GX Developer opened C Select Multiple PLC Settings to display the multiple PLC a Pron Eafte JSF J10 asieran setup window Label Comment Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple PLC setting Default Check End Cancel Multiple PLC settings x Setting the number of CPUs required item Sets the number of High Performance model QCPUs r No of PLC Dut of group input output settings ARppaAaa No of Pic E gt T Input condition of group outside is taken to be mounted onto the main base unit with the multiple T Output condition of group outside is taken P LC syst em m Operating mode gt Refresh
552. truction and then store it in D10 to D16 Read request x1 T The time data is read PATERD D10 i D10 to D16 Refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common instructions for the details of the DATERD instruction 1 Writing to and Reading from Time Data can be executed by special relays SM210 to SM213 and special registers SD210 to SD213 See Appendix 1 for details on special relay See Appendix 2 for details on special registers 2 The figure below shows the clock data stored in D10 to D16 1999 4 digits in AD 8 Month 10 Date 11 Hour Refer to Section 7 5 1 1 35 Minute 24 Second 2 Day of the week 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 3 Precautions a The clock data is not set before shipment The clock data is used by the QCPU system and intelligent function module for failure history and other functions Be sure to set the accurate time when operating the QCPU for the first time b Even if a part of the time data is being corrected all data must be written to the clock again c The data written in the clock element is checked in the range described in 1 b of Section 7 5 For this reason if improbable clock data in the range described in 1 b of Section 7 5 is written in the clock element correct clock function is unavailable Example See Writing to clock element CPU module operation state Upon execution of DATEW command OPERATION ERROR Error code 4100 Febr
553. tted Table 6 3 shows the memory capacity of a formatted standard RAM Table 6 3 Memory Capacity Serial f Number of Files Stored CPU Type Number of Files Stored Number File Register qozcpu __ 32k words 64 kbyte EE qozHcpu 32 k words 64 kbyte aosHopu 32kwords 64 Eoo a anr o Before 32 k words 64 EPT 02091 Q12HCPU Eg 128 k words Eg 256 a Rad 32 k words 64 sewers erie Rad 7 Q25HCPU After 128 k words 02092 256 kbyte 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 4 Precautions When setting file registers and local devices in the standard RAM memory capacity is secured in units of 1024 bytes for the Q12HCPU Q25HCPU that have the first five digits of their serial number as after 02092 Memory capacity is secured in units of 512 bytes for the Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02CPU QO2HCPU and QO6HCPU that have the first five digits of their serial number as before 02091 When specifying file registers using the serial access method ZRO with commands that access the standard RAM on 02092 and subsequent High Performance model QCPUs the amount of time required for processing each command from 02091 and previous High Performance model QCPUs will be prolonged QnCPU Average 0 65us QnHCPU Average 1 1us The processing time when the MOV command is used is shown below Q12HCPU Q02CPU Command after 02092 after 02091 before 02092 before 02091 MOV KO RO MOV Ko ZRO
554. tted memory card Table 6 4 Memory Capacity Memory Card Type Memory Capacity Number of Files Stored Q2MEM 1MBS 1011 5 kbyte Q2MEM 2MBF 2035 kbyte 288 Q2MEM 4MBF 4079 kbyte Q2MEM 8MBA 7940 kbyte Q2MEM 16MBA 15932 kbyte 512 Q2MEM 32MBA 31854 kbyte c Precautions For a formatted memory card a memory card information area is automatically created on the memory card This means that available space could be decreased by the size of the newly created memory card information area 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU FILES MELSEC Q 6 6 Writing Data in the Standard ROM or on the Flash Card 6 6 1 Writing Data in the standard ROM or on the flash card using the GX developer The write to PLC function in the GX Developer Online menu does not allow the user to write files in a standard ROM or on a Flash card For writing files in a standard ROM or on a Flash card by operating from the GX Developer the GX Developer Online menu provides two functions Write the program memory to ROM and Write to PLC Flash ROM 1 Write the program memory to ROM a The Write the program memory to ROM function allows a batch of files stored in a program memory to be written in a standard ROM or on a Flash card This function is useful when debugging programs stored in the program memory When the Write a memory to ROM function is executed all files stored in the standard ROM or Flash card are erased before a batch of files stor
555. tus CPU LED status S ows 0 when turned off 1 when turned on and 2 when S Eac New flashing END e Refer to SD201 for the storage status SD1651 SD201 e Stores the common information for the error code e Refer to SD5 to SD15 for the storage status Error common Error common SD5 SD1605 SD6 SD1606 SD7 gt SD1607 information information SD8 SD1608 SD9 SD1609 SD10 gt SD1610 D11 SD1611 SD12 gt SD1612 SD13 SD1613 SD14 SD1614 SD15 SD1615 Q4AR NIM New n SD1653 CPU operation CPU operation Stores the CPU operation status Refer to SD203 for the S Each New status status storage status SD1653 SD203 END x 1 Stores other system CPU self diagnostic information and system information 2 Shows the special register SD _ _ for the host system CPU 15 For redundant systems Trucking for Q4AR only SD1700 to SD1799 is valid only for redundant systems These are all 0 for standalone systems Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation TEA ACPU pe sop 2 Trucking error Trucking error Error D1700 oe phe Ka b JST Make it the trucking error detection 1 j New Q4AR detection count detection count occurrence 2 Shows the special register SD __ for the host system CPU App 57 App 57 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 3 List of Interrupt Pointer Nos amp Interrupt Factors IN Interrupt Factors Priority i No Interrupt factors Priority a Ranking P Rankin
556. type program being executed e For the scan execution type program being executed the next program to be executed is converted from a stand by type program to a scan execution type program and is executed e Set ABC and GHI programs to scan execution type programs and DEF to a stand by type program The following illustration shows the operation which occurs when the ABC and DEF program execute types are converted when the conditions are satisfied Before execution of PSCAN and PSTOP instructions Scan execution type program ABC PSCAN is an instruction that switches the specified DEF program to a scan type program e PSTOP is an instruction that switches the specified ABC program to a stand by type program Stand by program DEF Scan execution type program GHI GHI PSCAN ABC DEF PSTOP GHI I When M0 is on After execution of PSCAN and PSTOP instructions Stand by program ABC MO PSCAN DEF PSTOP ABC Scan execution type program DEF Scan execution type program GHI PSCAN GHI PSCAN ABC PSTOP DEF PSTOP GHI 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q d The switching of program execute type is performed at END processing The program execute type does not change while the program is being executed If different execute types are specified for a same program in a same scan
557. ualification designations An index register point is used for index modification XO _____ move K5 ZO SM400 BCD DOZO K4Y30 Index registers consist of 16 bits per point b There are 16 index registers Z0 Z15 c Index registers consist of 16 bits per point with reading and writing occurring in 16 bit modules d If the index registers are used for 32 bit instructions the data is stored in registers Zn and Zn 1 The lower 16 bits of data are stored in the index register No Zn designated in the sequence program and the upper 16 bits of data are stored in the designated index register No 1 For example if register Z2 is designated in the DMOV instruction the lower 16 bits are stored in Z2 and the upper 16 bits are stored at Z3 iconos DO zH Processing object Z2 Z3 Z3 Z2 Upper 16 bits _Lower 16 bits it For index modification using the index register refer to the following manual QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common instructions 10 39 10 39 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 10 6 1 Switching between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs When switching from a scan execution type programs or low speed execution type program to another program type the index register ZO to Z15 data is saved protected and reset 1 Index register processing at switching between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs
558. uary 30 Executed ae Upon activation of SM210 Activation of SM211 32 of month 13 Not executed Failure to detect error 4 Precision The precision of the clock function differs with the ambient temperature as shown below Ambient Temperature C Accuracy Day difference S 3 18 to 5 25 TYP 2 12 PF o oa O O 3 93 to 5 25 TYP 1 9 Oooo o oo O 14 69 to 3 53 TYP 3 67 5 About Year 2000 Problems a Adjustment of Leap Years The High Performance model QCPU clock function allows the High Performance model QCPU built in clock element to automatically correct a leap year of Year 2000 The user is not required to make adjustments to the data and time setting of the clock element The day following February 28 2000 is displayed February 29 2000 b Comparison of Clock Data To compare High Performance model QCPU s clock data with a sequence program use the DATERD instruction to read the clock data The year data is read out in 4 digits It can be compared as it is by using a compare instruction 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 6 Remote Operation The High Performance model QCPU provides the RUN STOP switches for switching between the STOP status and the RUN status The RESET L CLR switch also provides the Reset and Latch Clear functions The High Performance model QCPU can allow control of the High Performance model QCPU operation status from an external GX Developer function intelligent function module and rem
559. ub routine program is stored It is possible to use local devices that are used by the file where a sub routine program is stored when executing a sub routine program Whether or not such local devices are used is set by special relay SM776 ON OFF setting 10 65 10 DEVICES MELSEC Q 1 Switching over local devices by setting ON OFF for a special relay SM776 Di SM776 Executes calculation by the local devices that are used by the file OFF f where the sub routine program was called Executes calculation by the local devices that are used by the file ON f l where the sub routine program is stored Operation at SM776 OFF File name DEF File name ABC Standby program XO CALU P TOD Execution of the P1004 X2 subroutine program L P E EE 7 INCP DO Subroutine program RET END ec ee Read write of the Local devices used by local devices Local devices used by the file name ABC the file name DEF Operation at SM776 ON File name DEF File name ABC Standby program 0 Execution of th P100 CALLIP100 RECUCT OTe HE Xo subroutine program eee Sie a INCP DO Subroutine Read write of the i gt program 2 local devices RA Raa See Ae ree 4 RET jee END
560. ue 1 1 gt CH2 Minimum value 1 1 gt CH3 Maximum value 1 1 gt Make text file End setup Cancel The designated automatic refresh setting data is stored in the intelligent function parameters of High Performance model QCPU For the details of the GX Configurator refer to the manual of the intelligent function module being used 8 1 2 Communication using device initial value 1 Device initial value The device initial value is used to designate the initial setting of the intelligent function module without using a program The designated device initial value is written from High Performance model QCPU to the intelligent function module when High Performance model QCPU is turned ON is reset or is switched from STOP to RUN 2 Designation of the device initial value Using the device memory of GX Developer designate the data of the intelligent function module to be used as the device initial value In the device initial value setting of GX Developer designate the range to be used with the intelligent function module device as the device of the device initial value 1 For the device initial value refer to Section 10 13 2 2 For the intelligent function module device refer to Section 10 5 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE MELSEC Q 8 1 3 Communication using FROM TO instruction 1 FROM TO instruction At the execution of the FROM TO instruction the data stored in the buffer memo
561. ue and watchdog timer over errors B15 B8 B7 F number for timer set value Enabled only and time over when SFC error setting 1 to 255 sec 1 second units 3 300bps 6 600bps 24 2400bps 48 4800bps 96 9600bps 192 19 2kbps 384 38 4kbps 576 57 6kbps 1152 115 2kbps transmission _ transmission speed setting speed when RS232 GX Developer is used Remote App 28 App 28 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List 2 System information Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation Mans ACPU A pL IT e The switch status of the remote I O module is stored in the following format B15 B4 B3 f S Always New Remote 4 e The CPU switch status is stored in the following format B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 i i ii i gt lt gt 4 gt 4 Vacant S Every END processing B8 through BC correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1 0 OFF 1 ON SD200 State of switch k through BF are vacant e The CPU switch state is stored in the following format B15 B12B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 gt 4 gt 4 Vacant 4 CPU key State of switch Memory cards switch B4 corresponds to card A and B5 S Every corresponds to card B END OFF at 0 ON at 1 processing B8 through B12 correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1 B14 and B15 correspond to SW1 and SW2 of system setting switch
562. ule or serial communication module is made externally whether access to the High Performance model QCPU can be made or not can be selected with a remote password 12 Remote I O network of MELSECNET H can be configured You can load the remote master station of the MELSECNET H to configure an MELSECNET H remote I O system 13 Compatibility with PC CPU module in multi PLC system configuration A multiple PLC system can be configured by the High Performance model QCPU motion CPU and PC CPU modules 14 Ease of handling CC Link system When using one master module of a CC Link system you can control I O signals to from up to 64 remote I O remote I O stations without parameters Also you can control the remote I O stations as if you were controlling the I O modules on the base units 15 File password for protection against illegal access operation Setting of the program access level read disable write disable with a file password prevents program file device initial value file device comment file from being changed by illegal access e Features 9 to 12 are functions added to the High Performance model QCPU whose serial number is 02092 or later in its upper 5 digits The remote password facility can be executed when the Ethernet module or serial communication module of function version B and GX Developer Version 6 or later are used e In addition to the remote password there are the following protection facilities for the
563. um 256 points default 0 point set via parameter lDataregister D sd register D Default 12288 points DO to 12287 CS 12288 points DO to 12287 Link register W Default 8192 points WO to 1FFF Annunciator F Default 2048 points FO to 2047 Edge relay V Default 2048 points VO to 2047 Edge reay v Defaut2048 points VOto 2047 When standard RAM is used 32768 points RO to 32768 e When standard SRAM card is used may use up to maximum of 517120 points by block conversion by 32768 points RO to 32767 unit e When flash card 2 Mbyte is used may use up to maximum of 1040384 points by block conversion by 32768 points RO to 32767 unit e When flash card 4 Mbyte is used When flash card is File register may use up to maximum of 1042432 points by block conversion by used only read 32768 points RO to 32767 unit process is enabled ZR Retentive timer ST Counter C K2 2 E Q a o 2 gt me e o Q zZ When standard RAM is used 32768 points ZRO to 32767 e When standard SRAM card is used 517120 points ZRO to 517119 no block conversion necessary e When flash card 2 Mbyte is used 1040384 points ZRO to 1040383 no block conversion necessary e When flash card 4 Mbyte is used 1042432 points ZRO to 1042431 no block conversion necessary 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION MELSEC Q Table 3 1 Performance specification continued Model name Pp Monae S S O
564. unday Lee 2 om Day of the week Thursday Friday Saturday 2 Writing to and Reading from the Time Data Clock Element a The following two methods can be used to write to the time data clock element 1 Method to write from GX Developer The time data is written in the clock element by displaying Online gt Set time window Set time Connection target information COM1 lt gt CPU unit Station no Host PLC type Q25H Specify execution target Connection interface Target PLC Clock setup YY MM DD Hr Min Sec Day 19939 fos fo ft 42 foo Tuesday 7 Currently specified station l 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 2 Method to Write from the Program The time data is written in the clock element by using the clock instruction DATEWR A program example to write the time data using the time data write instruction DATEWR Write request X0 o H H move K1999 Do Year 1999 ks D Month 8 Day 10 Hour 11 Minute 35 MOVP Second 24 MOVP K2 Day Tuesday 2 DATEWR Refer to QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions for details of the DATEWR instruction b Reading Time Data When reading the time data to the data register use the time data read instruction DATERD from the program The figure below shows an example of a program used to read the clock data with the DATERD ins
565. unit Settin Base unit g Stored data Stored data switch slot No Number of Fuse blown module with blown fuse 3 O D9001 SD1001 App 44 App 44 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special Register after Conversion Conversion D9002 SD1002 D9004 SD1004 Special Register for Modification Meaning V O module verification error module number VO module verification error Stores setting status made at parameters modules 1 to 8 MINI link errors AC DOWN D9005 SD1005 If di i If di i e Wh is fi It of self di i D9008 SD1008 spo Self diagnostic Self diagnostic en error is ound as a result of self diagnosis error error error number number is stored in BIN code A D9009 SD1009 SD62 nnunciator detection P Step number at D9010 SD1010 Error step which operation AN error has occurred occurred App 45 Number of times for F number at which external failure has Corresponding Details CPU If O modules of which data are different from data entered are detected when the power is turned on the first I O number of the lowest number unit among the detected units is stored in hexadecimal Storing method is the same as that of SD1000 To monitor the number by peripheral devices perform monitor operation given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1116 to SD1123 are reset to 0 I O module verify check is executed also to the
566. unit numbers when parameter setting has been performed 15 1211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Bit pattern in units sp1116 0 cokes ololokols of 16 points VO module Oe verification error indicatirig Me modules with 801123 0 0 0 xy 0 ofo ojojo verification errors SD1117 0 0 0 0 0 0jojojojo Om V O module verify error I O module verify check is executed also to remote I O station modules If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program App 49 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification When one of FO to 255 FO to 2047 for AuA and AnU is turned on by 1 is added to the contents of SD63 When or instruction is executed 1 is subtracted from the contents of SD63 Annunciator k ea z SD1124 detection Annunciator If the INDICATOR RESET switch is provided to the quantity detection quantity CPU pressing the switch can execute the same processing Quantity which has been turned on by SET F is Corresponding CPU stored into SD63 in BIN code The value of SD63 is maximum 8 When one of FO to 255 FO to 2047 for AuA and AnU SD1125 is turned on by SET F F number which has turned on is entered into SD64 to SD71 in due order in BIN code F
567. uted starting with the one corresponding to an interrupt pointer number I of the highest priority 2 The remaining interrupt programs remain on stand by until processing of the higher priority interrupt program is completed If the same interrupt factor as that being executed occurs before the interrupt program is processed the interrupt factor is stored in the memory and after the interrupt program has been processed the same interrupt program is executed again 2 When an instruction is being executed Interruptions are prohibited during execution of instructions If an interrupt factor occurs during execution of an instruction the interrupt program will be executed after processing of the instruction is completed 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS MELSEC Q 3 Interruption during a network refresh If an interrupt factor occurs during a network refresh operation the network refresh operation is suspended and the interrupt program is executed This means that assurance of blocks in cyclic data at each station cannot be secured by using a device designated as a destination of link refresh operation on the MELSECNET H Network System 3 10ms i 10ms Interrupt factor Interrupt program execution Network refresh execution Network refresh operation is suspended and the interrupt program is executed Fig 4 4 Interruption during Network Refresh Operation
568. utomatically switched being requested off when P setting is complete request ON P set being requested set completion completion Turned ON once when the P I set has been completed O Sub program P I and then turned OFF again set completion completion OFF Other than when P I set e Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P I setting is complete M9055 SM1055 M9056 SM1056 SM1057 SM1058 SM1059 SM1060 App 13 App 13 Main side P set request Sub side P set Sub program 2 P set request being requested ON P I set being requested DED RI PE D a a a le oo N APPENDICES MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Rela Special Special Relay after Relay for Communication request registration area BUSY signal Instruction error flag I O change flag y M9061 M9065 M9066 M9070 M9081 M9084 M9091 M9094 Conversion Modification SM1061 2 Sub program 3 P 2 set request Divided SM1065 SM711 shied execution detection Divided SM1066 SM712 processing request flag Ne 7 A8UPU A8PUJre SM1070 quired search or time SM1081 E Xp SM1091 SM1094 SM251 Presence absenc SM320 e of SFC program swito1 smge1 _ Star stop SFC program SFC program SM11092 start sta
569. vice test mode is executed on executed S Request Remote acceptance GX Developer status ON Device test executed When this relay goes from OFF to ON clock data being CIO data set Sone eee stored from SD210 through SD213 after execution of END request ON Set request gt nh instruction for changed scan is written to the clock device OFF No error ON when error is generated in clock data SD210 through SD213 value and OFF if no error is detected e Displays clock data as month day hour minute and Q3A Clots dala Ba Bea second at the LED display at front of CPU Gira Enabled only for Q3ACPU and Q4ACPU Q4AR Clock data read OFF Ignored e When this relay is ON clock data is read to SD210 Goes OFF when reset of the PLO No 1 is canceled No 1 CPU reset OFF PLC No 1 reset cancel Comes ON when the PLC No 1 is resetting including flag ON PLC No 1 resetting the case where the PLC is removed from the base The other PLCs are also put in reset status Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 2 is canceled Comes ON when the PLC No 2 is resetting including the case where the PLC is removed from the base The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 3 is canceled Comes ON when the PLC No 3 is resetting including the case where the PLC is removed from the base The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 e Goes OFF when reset of the PLC No 4 i
570. w by program y Select Monitor to monitor f i ihe leeal devies e e e Setting of the local device monitor The local device of the displayed program is monitored 3 Precautions a Itis only a single program that local devices can be monitored or tested by operating from a single GX Developer Local devices in multiple programs cannot be monitored or tested by operating from a single GX Developer b It is amaximum of 16 programs that local devices can be monitored or tested by operating from multiple GX Developers connected to a RS 232 serial communication module of the High Performance model QCPU c If local devices in a stand by type program are monitored scan time is extended for some time because local device data is read and saved See Section 10 13 1 for details d Local devices in a fix scan execution type program cannot be monitored or tested 7 FUNCTION MELSEC Q 7 9 3 Enforced ON OFF for external I O Enforced ON OFF operations from the GX Developer will forcibly switch the external O on and off The information registered for ON OFF will be cancelled with GX Developer operations A GX Developer Version 6 or higher is required to use this function It is possible to perform enforced ON enforced ON registration enforced OFF enforced OFF registration and cancel enforced ON OFF cancel registration with the enforced ON OFF function The operations for performing enfo
571. witches ON when the CPU cannot communicate with the installed CC Link Information Information Information QCPU lt of gt lt of gt lt of gt Remote B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 BO 1st module r 2nd module SD280 CC Link error aoe 3rd module 4th module When Xn0 of the installed CC Link goes ON the bit corresponding to the station switches ON When either Xn1 or XnF of the installed CC Link switch OFF the bit corresponding to the station switches ON Switches ON when the CPU cannot communicate with the Qna installed CC Link B15 to B9 B8 to BO 8th 1st 8th 1st module module module module lt 4 gt 4 gt Information of Information of 1 Stores the number of points currently set for X devices Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices O Rem Stores the number of points currently set for M devices Stores the number of points currently set for L devices Ea Stores the number of points currently set for B devices Stores the number of points currently set for F devices poo Device allocation Same as S Initial parameter Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices O Rem contents i Stores the number of points currently set for V devices i e Stores the number of points currently set for S devices Stores the number of points currently set for T device Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices i Stores the number of points currently set for C dev
572. xplanation aei ACPU E ae bo TT Indicates memory card A model installed B8 B7 B4 B3 Bo a Drive 3 0 Does not exist S Initial and card RAM model 1 SRAM removal 0 Does not exist Drive 4 1 SRAM ROM model 2 EPROM 3 FLASH ROM SD600 Indicates memory card A model installed B15 B8 B7 B4 B3 Bo Drive 1 0 Does not exist RAM model 1 SRAM S Initial and card removal 0 Does not exist Drive 2 ROM model 2 EEPROM 3 Flash ROM Initial l S Initial and card New acPU SD602 Drive 1 ity is stored in 1 k b it removal e Drive 1 capacity is stored in e units awe vieu S Initial and card New QnA removal S Initial and card l Initial and car New QCPU SD603 Drive 2 ity is stored in 1 k b it remova Drive 2 capacity is stored in e units vie yeu S Initial and card New QnA removal The use conditions for memory card A are stored as bit patterns In use when ON e The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT B8 Parameters QPA B9 CPU fault history QFD Device comments QCD BA SFC trace QTS S Status change New QCPU Device initial value QDI BB Local device QDL File register R QDR Trace QTS Memory card A use The use conditions for memory card A are stored as bit patterns conditions In use when ON e The si
573. y This connection can be used for low speed execution type programs only Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at 5 ms interval When power supply is turned OFF or a reset is performed goes from OFF to start Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at each designated time interval When power supply is turned OFF or reset is performed goes from OFF to start Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program Goes between ON and OFF in accordance with the number of seconds designated by SD414 When power supply is turned OFF or reset is performed goes from OFF to start Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program Switches between ON and OFF in accordance with the number of milliseconds designated by SD415 When power supply is turned OFF or reset is performed goes from OFF to start e Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program e Relay repeats ON OFF switching at fixed scan intervals When power supply is turned ON or reset is performed goes from OFF to start The ON OFF intervals are set with the DUTY instruction DUTY n1 n2 SM420H For use with SM420 through SM424 low sp
574. y i TA 1 5ms 1 5ms 1ms 2ms 0 5ms Low speed execution type program B KH H HH H 0 5ms i z i 5 5ms 0 5ms 0 Constant scan wait time 1 Low speed a speed UN speed le scan time pa Scan time 1 Scan time i 13ms 8 5ms i 8 5ms END processing END processing END processing execution execution execution 2 Low speed execution program execution time setting The low speed execution type program operation which occurs under the following conditions is illustrated below e Low speed program execution time 3ms e Total scan execution type program time 4ms to 5ms e Execution time of low speed type execution program A ims e Execution time of low speed execution type program B 3ms e END processing low speed END processing Oms 0 ms is used to simplify the illustration END END END END END processing processing processing i processing 0 4 11 5 18 5 25 5 33 5 ms ptt ty pp pp tp ptt op fp pep pty pp pe fp pty tt tt E E pe pea a a a en a aC e a 4ms 4 5ms 4ms 4ms 5ms Scan execution type program H mH 1 l is ims ims ws Low speed execution type program A g H Coe 1ms 1ms 2ms 3ms Low speed execution type program B H l Low speed scan time Low speed scan time Low speed scan time i 5 12 oms Ems i 8ms Low speed END Low speed END Low speed END i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
575. y regi stration setting and specify the device to be used Right click on a device initial value and select Add to specify a device initial value range In the PLC file setting in the PLC parameter designate the name of file to be used for the designated device initial values Designate local devices In the device setting item in the PLC parameter designate the name of the local device range In the PLC file setting item in the PLC parameter designate the name of the local device file Use the common pointers In the PLC system setting item in the PLC parameter desig nate the first pointer No 2 Refer to Section 10 13 2 Refer to Section 10 13 1 Refer to Section 10 9 2 MELSEC Q 12 7 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU 12 8 In the boot file setting item in the PLC parameter designate the file name of parameter and program to be read from the memory card In the program settings in the PLC parameter designate the name of the program to be exe cuted and its execution condition Connect the GX Developer to the CPU Set the CPU s RUN STOP switch to the STOP position then switch the power ON In the GX Developer online mode select the program memory and use the PLC memory batch operation to format the program memory In the GX Developer online mode select the me
576. y user Sequence programs or test operations from peripheral devices S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt gt Indicated only for registers set by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error occurs Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc e Indicates corresponding special register in ACPU D9 _ _ _ Change and notation when there has been a change in contents e Items indicated as New have been newly added for QNACPU e Indicates the corresponding CPU type name Rem Can be applied to all CPU types and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Can be applied to all types of CPU QCPU Can be applied to Q series CPU QnA Can be applied to QnA series and Q2ASCPU series Remote Can be applied to the MELSECNET H remote I O modules Each CPU type name Can be applied only to the specific CPU e g Q4ARCPU Q3ACPU Set by When set Corresponding ACPU m ULI For details on the following items see these manuals e Networks For Q MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e For Q MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual for QnA e SFC QCPU Q mode QnACP

High Performance Model QCPU(Q Mode)User`s Manual(Function

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents